Avid NewsCutter NewsCutter 7.0, NewsCutter 6.7 User guide

Avid NewsCutter NewsCutter 7.0, NewsCutter 6.7 User guide
Avid NewsCutter Products
®
®
Advanced Guide
m a k e m a n a g e m ove | m e d i a ™
Avid
®
Copyright and Disclaimer
Product specifications are subject to change without notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of
Avid Technology, Inc.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. You can obtain a copy of that license by
visiting Avid's Web site at www.avid.com. The terms of that license are also available in the product in the same directory as
the software. The software may not be reverse assembled and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the
license agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license
agreement.
Avid products or portions thereof are protected by one or more of the following United States Patents: 4,746,994; 4,970,663;
5,045,940; 5,267,351; 5,309,528; 5,355,450; 5,396,594; 5,440,348; 5,452,378; 5,467,288; 5,513,375; 5,528,310; 5,557,423;
5,577,190; 5,583,496; 5,584,006; 5,627,765; 5,640,601; 5,644,364; 5,654,737; 5,715,018; 5,719,570; 5,724,605; 5,726,717;
5,729,673; 5,745,637; 5,752,029; 5,754,851; 5,799,150; 5,812,216; 5,828,678; 5,842,014; 5,852,435; 5,999,406; 6,038,573;
6,061,758; 6,141,007; 6,211,869; 6,532,043; 6,546,190; 6,596,031; 6,636,869; 6,747,705; 6,763,523; 6,766,357; 6,813,622;
6,847,373; 7,081,900; D352,278; D372,478; D373,778; D392,267; D392,268; D392,269; D395,291; D396,853; D398,912.
Other patents are pending.
This document is protected under copyright law. An authorized licensee of NewsCutter may reproduce this publication for the
licensee’s own use in learning how to use the software. This document may not be reproduced or distributed, in whole or in
part, for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this document or providing support or educational services to others.
This document is supplied as a guide for NewsCutter and NewsCutter XP. Reasonable care has been taken in preparing the
information it contains. However, this document may contain omissions, technical inaccuracies, or typographical errors. Avid
Technology, Inc. does not accept responsibility of any kind for customers’ losses due to the use of this document. Product
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Copyright © 2006 Avid Technology, Inc. and its licensors. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
The following disclaimer is required by Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics, Inc. for the use of their TIFF library:
Copyright © 1988–1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991–1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software [i.e., the TIFF library] and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of
the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any
advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon
Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The following disclaimer is required by the Independent JPEG Group:
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This Software may contain components licensed under the following conditions:
Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph
are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such
distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
2
Copyright 1995, Trinity College Computing Center. Written by David Chappell.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Copyright 1996 Daniel Dardailler.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of Daniel Dardailler not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Daniel Dardailler makes no representations about the
suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Modifications Copyright 1999 Matt Koss, under the same license as above.
Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this
entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all
copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR,
NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE
MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.The following
disclaimer is required by Paradigm Matrix:
Portions of this software licensed from Paradigm Matrix.
The following disclaimer is required by Nexidia Inc.:
© 2006 Nexidia. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from the Georgia Tech Research Corporation, U.S.A. Patent Pending.
The following disclaimer is required by Ray Sauers Associates, Inc.:
“Install-It” is licensed from Ray Sauers Associates, Inc. End-User is prohibited from taking any action to derive a source code
equivalent of “Install-It,” including by reverse assembly or reverse compilation, Ray Sauers Associates, Inc. shall in no event be
liable for any damages resulting from reseller’s failure to perform reseller’s obligation; or any damages arising from use or
operation of reseller’s products or the software; or any other damages, including but not limited to, incidental, direct, indirect,
special or consequential Damages including lost profits, or damages resulting from loss of use or inability to use reseller’s
products or the software for any reason including copyright or patent infringement, or lost data, even if Ray Sauers Associates
has been advised, knew or should have known of the possibility of such damages.
The following disclaimer is required by Videomedia, Inc.:
“Videomedia, Inc. makes no warranties whatsoever, either express or implied, regarding this product, including warranties with
respect to its merchantability or its fitness for any particular purpose.”
“This software contains V-LAN ver. 3.0 Command Protocols which communicate with V-LAN ver. 3.0 products developed by
Videomedia, Inc. and V-LAN ver. 3.0 compatible products developed by third parties under license from Videomedia, Inc. Use
of this software will allow “frame accurate” editing control of applicable videotape recorder decks, videodisc recorders/players
and the like.”
The following disclaimer is required by Altura Software, Inc. for the use of its Mac2Win software and Sample
Source Code:
©1993–1998 Altura Software, Inc.
The following disclaimer is required by Ultimatte Corporation:
Certain real-time compositing capabilities are provided under a license of such technology from Ultimatte Corporation and are
subject to copyright protection.
The following disclaimer is required by 3Prong.com Inc.:
Certain waveform and vector monitoring capabilities are provided under a license from 3Prong.com Inc.
The following disclaimer is required by Interplay Entertainment Corp.:
3
The “Interplay” name is used with the permission of Interplay Entertainment Corp., which bears no responsibility for Avid
products.
This product includes portions of the Alloy Look & Feel software from Incors GmbH.
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
© DevelopMentor
This product may include the JCifs library, for which the following notice applies:
JCifs © Copyright 2004, The JCIFS Project, is licensed under LGPL (http://jcifs.samba.org/). See the LGPL.txt file in the Third
Party Software directory on the installation CD.
Avid Interplay contains components licensed from LavanTech. These components may only be used as part of and in
connection with Avid Interplay.
Attn. Government User(s). Restricted Rights Legend
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. This Software and its documentation are “commercial computer software” or
“commercial computer software documentation.” In the event that such Software or documentation is acquired by or on behalf
of a unit or agency of the U.S. Government, all rights with respect to this Software and documentation are subject to the terms
of the License Agreement, pursuant to FAR §12.212(a) and/or DFARS §227.7202-1(a), as applicable.
Trademarks
888 I/O, Adrenaline, AirPlay, AirSPACE, AirSPACE HD, AirSpeed, AniMatte, AudioSuite, AudioVision, AutoSync, Avid,
Avid DNA, Avid DNxcel, Avid DNxHD, AVIDdrive, AVIDdrive Towers, Avid DS Assist Station, Avid ISIS,
Avid Learning Excellerator, Avid Liquid, Avid Mojo, AvidNet, AvidNetwork, Avid Remote Response, AVIDstripe, Avid Unity,
Avid Unity ISIS, Avid Xpress, AVoption, AVX, CamCutter, ChromaCurve, ChromaWheel, DAE, Dazzle, Deko, DekoCast, D-Fi,
D-fx, DigiDelivery, Digidesign, Digidesign Audio Engine, Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction, DigiDrive,
Digital Nonlinear Accelerator, DigiTranslator, DINR, DNxchange, do more, D-Verb, Equinox, ExpertRender, Face Robot,
FACE ROBOT, FieldPak, Film Composer, FilmScribe, FluidMotion, FXDeko, HIIP, HyperSPACE, HyperSPACE HDCAM,
IllusionFX, Image Independence, iNEWS, iNEWS ControlAir, Instinct, Interplay, Intraframe, iS9, iS18, iS23, iS36, IsoSync,
LaunchPad, Lightning, Lo-Fi, Magic Mask, make manage move | media, Marquee, Matador, Maxim, MCXpress,
Media Browse, Media Composer, MediaDock, MediaDock Shuttle, Media Fusion, Media Illusion, MediaLog, Media Reader,
Media Recorder, MEDIArray, MediaShare, MediaStream, Meridien, MetaSync, MissionControl, NaturalMatch, Nearchive,
NetReview, NewsCutter, Nitris, OMF, OMF Interchange, OMM, Open Media Framework, Open Media Management, PCTV,
Pinnacle MediaSuite, Pinnacle Studio, Pinnacle Systems, ProEncode, Pro Tools, QuietDrive, Recti-Fi, RetroLoop, rS9, rS18,
Sci-Fi, ScriptSync, SecureProductionEnvironment, Show Center, Softimage, Sound Designer II, SPACE, SPACEShift,
SpectraGraph, SpectraMatte, SteadyGlide, Symphony, TARGA, Thunder, Thunder station, Trilligent, UnityRAID, Vari-Fi,
Video RAID, Video Slave Driver, VideoSPACE, and Xdeck are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Avid Technology,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
and/or other countries. Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. All other trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective owners.
Footage
Arizona Images — KNTV Production — Courtesy of Granite Broadcasting, Inc.,
Editor/Producer Bryan Foote.
Canyonlands — Courtesy of the National Park Service/Department of the Interior.
Eco Challenge Morocco — Courtesy of Discovery Communications, Inc.
News material provided by WFTV Television Inc.
“Tigers: Tracking a Legend” — Courtesy of www.wildlifeworlds.com, Carol Amore, Executive Producer.
Tornados + Belle Isle footage — Courtesy of KWTV News 9.
WCAU Fire Story — Courtesy of NBC-10, Philadelphia, PA.
Women in Sports – Paragliding — Courtesy of Legendary Entertainment, Inc.
GOT FOOTAGE?
Editors — Filmmakers — Special Effects Artists — Game Developers — Animators — Educators — Broadcasters — Content
creators of every genre — Just finished an incredible project and want to share it with the world?
Send us your reels and we may use your footage in our show reel or demo!*
For a copy of our release and Avid’s mailing address, go to www.avid.com/footage.
*Note: Avid cannot guarantee the use of materials submitted.
Avid NewsCutter Products Advanced Guide • 0130-07610-01 • March 2007
4
Contents
Using This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Symbols and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
If You Need Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Accessing the Online Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
How to Order Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Avid Educational Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 1
Working with the Project Window: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Working with User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Understanding User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Managing User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Managing Folders and Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Guidelines for Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Creating a Folder in a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing Bins and Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Saving Bins Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the Info Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Viewing Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Accessing the Hardware Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing Interface Component Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing Button and Toolbar Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing Font and Point Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Customizing Your Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Creating a New Workspace Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Linking User Settings and Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Switching Between Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting a Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Assigning a Workspace Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Understanding Avid Unity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Sharing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Opening a Shared Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Working with Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Default Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Overriding the Default Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Restrictions and Limitations for Locked Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Suggestions for Improving Performance When Working with Shared Bins. . . . 58
Shared Bin and Project Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Shared Bin Lock Icon Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Drive Filtering in Networked Workflows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Chapter 2
Using Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the Deck Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the Command Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Understanding Button Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Mapping User-Selectable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the Blank Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Mapping Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Mapping Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Activating Commands from the Command Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using the Avid Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Console Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Reviewing a Log of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Getting Information with the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the Console Window to Access Network Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the Hardware Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using External Controllers as Editing Control Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6
Chapter 3
Logging: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Preparing Log Files for Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Converting Log Files with Avid Log Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using Drag-and-Drop Conversion for Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Compatible Log Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Understanding Avid Log Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Avid Log Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Global Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Data Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sample Avid Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Creating Avid Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Double-Checking Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Logging Directly into a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tips for Logging Preroll, Logging Timecode, and Naming Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Logging with Avid-Controlled Decks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pausing the Deck While Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using a Memory Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Logging with Non-Avid-Controlled Decks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting the Pulldown Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Modifying Clip Information Before Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Exporting Shot Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 4
Capturing Media: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Advanced Capture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Capturing Across Timecode Breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Selecting the Preroll Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Capturing to Multiple Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
General Settings for Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Settings for Film and 24p Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Disabling Video Resolutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Understanding Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Creating Tone Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using the Passthrough Mix Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Resizing the Passthrough Mix Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Monitoring Audio with the Passthrough Mix Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing an Audio Level in the Passthrough Mix Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Adjusting Pan Values in the Passthrough Mix Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Changing the Audio Hardware Calibration Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Calibrating Audio Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Calibrating Audio Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Using the Console Window to Check Audio Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Preparing for Video Input: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Limitation When Using Consumer Decks or Decks
Without Time-Base Correctors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Saving Video Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Saving a Custom Default Setting for the Video Input Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Adjusting Video Levels for Tapes Without Color Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using Function Keys When Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Special Capture Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Logging Errors to the Console Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating Subclips While Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Creating Timed Subclips While Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding Locators On-the-Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Naming a New Tape from the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Controlling Decks from the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Working in Quick Record Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Adding Extra Text Fields in the Capture Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Mapping the Record Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ejecting Tapes with a Button or Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Returning to the Previous Place in the Select Tape Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Understanding DV Capture Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Capturing DV Material with Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Delaying Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8
Capturing in Satellite Mode or No Device Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setting a Timed Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Capturing to the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Patching When Capturing to the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Selecting Remote Play and Capture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Enabling Remote Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Enabling Remote Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting up Your System for Remote Punch-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Avid Serial Driver and Remote Play and Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Modifying the Pulldown Phase After Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DV and HDV Scene Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting Up DV and HDV Scene Extraction Before Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting Up DV Scene Extraction After Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Support for Panasonic VariCam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Chapter 5
Importing Files: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Importing Photoshop Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Importing Single-Layer Photoshop Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Importing Multilayered Photoshop Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Example of Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Support for Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Preserving Layer Effects in Multilayered Photoshop Graphics . . . . . . . . . 162
Importing Multilayered Photoshop Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Connecting the XDCAM Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Working with XDCAM HD Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Playing XDCAM Media on an Avid Symphony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Setting the XDCAM Import Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Importing XDCAM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatically Importing Proxy Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Importing All Proxy Media from an XDCAM Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Copying XDCAM Proxy Media to a Local Drive or a Server . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Manually Importing XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9
Importing Essence Marks as Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Editing the Proxy Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Batch Importing High-Resolution Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Editing and Finishing High-Resolution Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Importing Editcam Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Importing Sequences from Pro Tools through Interplay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Chapter 6
Working with Bins: Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Advanced Bin Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Displaying Custom Bin Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Customizing Bin Views in Text View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Saving a Custom Bin View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Assigning Colors to Bin Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Sifting Clips and Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sifting Timecodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Locking and Unlocking Items in a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Selecting Offline Items in a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting Media Relatives for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting Unreferenced Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Using Text View: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Manipulating Bin Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Duplicating Bin Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Adding Customized Columns to a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Changing a Custom Bin Column Heading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Managing Clip Information in Text View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Moving Within Column Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Modifying Clip Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Modifying Data Directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Using the Modify Command to Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Copying Information Between Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Copying Information from Another Cell in a Custom Column . . . . . . . . . . 201
Selecting a Film Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Tracking 3-Perf Counts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Selecting an Edgecode Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10
Sorting Clips in Text View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Displaying Timecodes in a 24p or 25p Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Frame Counting for Timecodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Adding Timecode Columns to a Bin or the Media Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Adding Timecode Values to the Timecode Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Bin Column Headings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Working with Restricted Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Displaying or Outputting Restricted Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Disassociating Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Viewing Restriction Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing Restriction Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Searching the Database for Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Printing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Preparing Digital Bars and Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Importing Color Bars and Other Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Creating Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Creating Video Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Creating Audio Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Chapter 7
Managing Media Files: Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Panasonic P2 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
P2 Files and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Workflow for Editing with P2 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Installing the Panasonic P2 Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Preparing to Mount P2 Cards as Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mounting P2 Cards as Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Copying P2 Files to a FireWire or Network Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Copying P2 Files to a Local Media Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Changing P2 Cards in the Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Importing P2 Clips and Media Directly from a P2 Card or a Copy
of a P2 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dragging P2 Master Clips from the Media Tool to a Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Working with Spanned Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11
Sharing P2 Clips and Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Exporting Your Clip or Sequence to a P2 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Deleting P2 Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Finding a Related Media File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Relinking Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Relink Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Relinking Clips to a New Project Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Relinking by Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Relinking to Selected Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Relinking Consolidated Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Relinking Moved Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Unlinking Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Archiving Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Archive to Videotape Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Restoring an Archive from Videotape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Chapter 8
Script-Based Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Lined Script Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Explanation of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Lining in the Digital Realm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Script Integration Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Using Script Integration in Video Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Script Window Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Script Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Importing a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Selecting Text Encoding for Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Opening, Closing, and Saving the Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Displaying Clip and Sequence Information in a Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Exploring the Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Adjusting the Script Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Manipulating Script Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Changing the Font of the Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Selecting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Removing Script Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Searching Through Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Using Page and Scene Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Adding a Page or Scene Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Changing a Page or Scene Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Deleting a Page or Scene Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Searching for a Page or Scene Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Conducting a Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Linking Clips to the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Interpolating Position for Script Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Manipulating Slates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Selecting Slates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Resizing Slates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Holding Slates On Screen in the Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Hiding Slate Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Showing One Take Per Slate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Moving a Slate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting a Slate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Manipulating Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Selecting Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Displaying Take Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Changing the Representative Frame for a Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Loading Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Playing Takes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Adjusting Take Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Indicating Off-Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using Color Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using Script Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Placing Script Marks Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Using Real-Time Screening and Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
13
Marking with ScriptSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Loading and Playing Marked Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Moving a Script Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Deleting a Script Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Finding Clips and Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Finding Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Finding Clips and Bins from the Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Editing with the Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Assembling a Rough Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Splicing a Script Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Revising the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Interactive Screenings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chapter 9
Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Displaying the Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Displaying Timecode in the Timecode Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adjusting the Play Delay Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using the Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Playing Selected Clips in a Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Using Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Ways to Use Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Adding Locators While Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Finding Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Editing Locator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Marking an Area Using Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Moving to the Previous or Next Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Deleting Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Using the Locators Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Viewing Locators in the Locators Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Working in the Locators Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Exporting and Importing Locators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Creating a Locator Text (.txt) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Copying and Pasting Locators Using the Locators Window . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Printing the Contents of the Locators Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
14
Chapter 10
Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Playback Performance Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Playing a Limited Duration of a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Autosyncing Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Understanding Autosyncing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Creating an Autosynced Subclip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Managing Sync with Multiple Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Using Sync Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Syncing with Tail Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Syncing with Locators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Using Add Edit When Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Ganging Footage in Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Synchronizing Metadata Using MetaSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Chapter 11
Using the Timeline: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Timeline Views: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Displaying the Timeline Top Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Displaying Timecode Tracks in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Assigning Local Colors to Clips in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Displaying Local and Source Colors in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Changing the Timeline Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Changing the Timeline Track Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Showing Locators in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Navigating in the Timeline: Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Using the Full-Screen Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Displaying Source Material in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
IN to OUT Highlighting in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Using Advanced Timeline Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Bin Editing into the Timeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Bin Editing Directly into a Sequence Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Editing with the Film Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Editing in Heads or Heads Tails View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Performing a Quick Edit Using the Top and Tail Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
15
Adding an Edit (Match Framing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Adding Edits to Filler Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Removing Match-Frame Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Detecting Duplicate Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Adjusting Handle Length in Dupe Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Finding Black Holes and Flash Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Printing the Timeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 12
Working in Trim Mode: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Creating Overlap Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Extending an Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Maintaining Sync While Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding Black When Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Trimming with Sync-Locked Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Slipping or Sliding Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Selecting Segments for Slip or Slide Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Slipping or Sliding Segments in a Four-Frame Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Performing the Slip or Slide Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Chapter 13
Working with Audio: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Audio Gain Staging and an Audio Editing Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rendering and Unrendering Order for Audio Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Viewing Clip Gain and Automation Gain Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Bypassing Existing Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
About Adjusting Volume While Playing a Clip Gain Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Adjusting Volume While Playing a Clip Gain Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Improving Response Time When Adjusting Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Using External Fader Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Adjusting the Volume of Individual Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Adjusting the Pan of Individual Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Using an External Fader Controller or Mixer to Record Automation Gain. . . . 352
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Using the Digi 002 with Avid DNA Hardware (Windows Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Using the Command|8 with Your Avid Editing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
16
Configuring the Digi 002 or Command|8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Mapping Buttons and Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Button Layouts on the Digi 002 and Command|8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using Buttons to Change Focus in the Avid Editing
Application Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Using a Foot Pedal as a Foot Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Switching Between the Digi 002 and Command|8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Using a Digi 002 or Command|8 to Record Automation Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Using the Latch Mode Feature on the Digi 002 and Command|8 . . . . . . . . . . 363
Configuring USB-to-MIDI Software for External Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Installing USB-to-MIDI Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Testing the Fader Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Switching Between MIDI Connections on the USB-to-MIDI Converter . . . . . . 366
Troubleshooting the MIDI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
MCS-3000X Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Using the Snap Mode Feature on the MCS-3000X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Ganging Faders on the FaderMaster Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Setting Up the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Initializing the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Configuring the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V to Recognize
Control Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Starting the Avid System with the Yamaha 01V/96 or the
Yamaha 01V Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Operating the Yamaha 01V/96 and Yamaha 01V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Soloing Avid System Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Using the Audio EQ Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Audio EQ Tool Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Applying Audio EQ Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Saving Audio EQ Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Removing Audio EQ Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
17
Audio EQ Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Low Shelf Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Small Octave Range Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Using Audio EQ Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Applying an EQ Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Creating Your Own Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Adding an EQ Template to the Audio EQ Tool Fast Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Adjusting EQ While Playing an Audio Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Recording Voice-Over Narration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Connecting Voice-Over Recording Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using the Capture Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Understanding the Audio Punch-In Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Monitoring Previously Recorded Tracks While
Recording Voice-Over Narration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Using Peak Hold While Recording Voice-Over Narration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Understanding GPI Trigger Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
GPI Signal Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Example of Linking GPI Actions to Trigger Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Connecting a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Configuring a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Working with GPI Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Creating a GPI Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
GPI Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Editing a GPI Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Deleting a GPI Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Displaying Audio Formats in Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Using Automatic Voice-Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
18
Chapter 14
Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Installing AudioSuite Plug-Ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Using Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Applying an AudioSuite Plug-in to a Clip in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Using an AudioSuite Plug-In Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
AudioSuite Fast Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Rendering AudioSuite Plug-in Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Creating New Master Clips with AudioSuite Plug-Ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
AudioSuite Controls for Creating New Master Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Mono, Stereo, and Multichannel Processing in AudioSuite Plug-Ins. . . . . 414
Using AudioSuite Plug-ins to Create New Master Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Using AudioSuite Effect Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins in Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
AudioSuite Plug-in Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Troubleshooting AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Chorus AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
D-Verb AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Compressor AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Limiter AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Expander-Gate AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Gate AudioSuite Plug-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
DeEsser AudioSuite Plug-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
EQ AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Flanger AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Invert AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Duplicate AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Delay AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Multi-Tap Delay AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Normalize AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Gain AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Ping-Pong Delay AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
19
Reverse AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
DC Offset Removal AudioSuite Plug-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Signal Generator AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Time Compression Expansion AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Pitch Shift AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Time Shift AudioSuite Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Non-Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Chapter 15
Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Exporting Using Send To Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Send To DigiDelivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Send To Digidesign Pro Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Send to DVD Authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Send to DVD One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Send to Sorenson Squeeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Send To Avid DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Send To Third-Party Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Exporting OMFI and AAF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Exporting Through OMF Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Exporting Through AAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Selecting an OMFI or an AAF Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Exporting As an OMFI or an AAF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Guidelines for Exporting AAF Files to Pro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Exporting Projects and Bins Using AFE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Exporting Video in DV Stream Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Exporting QuickTime Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Exporting As a QuickTime Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Exporting As a QuickTime Reference Movie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Using Avid Codecs for QuickTime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Exporting As an AVI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for QuickTime on Other Systems . . . . . . . 487
Exporting from a Third-Party QuickTime or AVI Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
20
Exporting as Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Exporting Using an Avid Supplied Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Exporting Using an Existing Windows Media Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Exporting Using a Custom Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Creating a Custom Video Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Creating a Custom Audio Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Exporting Tracks As Audio Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Exporting As a Graphic File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Exporting to XDCAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Chapter 16
Generating Output: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Advanced Video Output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Using Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Calibrating the System with Passthrough Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Output Mode Resolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Output Mode Resolutions with Progressive Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Outputting DV 50 and DVCPRO HD Media Directly to a DV Device . . . . . . . . 511
Selecting Output and Timecode Formats for 23.976p and 25p Projects . . . . . 512
Selecting Output Formats for 23.976p and 25p Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Selecting the Timecode Format for Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Outputting Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame Timecode
Simultaneously for Downstream Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Indicating the Destination Timecode Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Digital Cuts and Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Understanding DV Digital Cut Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Delaying the Sequence for a Digital Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Using EDL Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Line Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Displaying and Preserving Vertical Blanking Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Editing a Sequence with VBI Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
21
Effects of Preserving Vertical Blanking Information on
Compressed Video Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Comparison with VBI on Meridien Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Preserving HD Closed Captioning and Ancillary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Chapter 17
MultiCamera Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Understanding Grouping and Multigrouping Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Creating Group Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Creating Multigroup Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
MultiCamera Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Full-Monitor Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Quad Split Source View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Nine Split Source View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
MultiCamera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Real-time Playback in MultiCamera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Limitations on Playback of MultiCamera Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
MultiCamera Editing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Switching Clips with the Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Using the Add Edit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Using the Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Using the Multi-angle View Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Using Match Frame in MultiCamera Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Selective Camera Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Chapter 18
Using Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Using the Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Understanding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Defining Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Displaying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Working with Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Selecting Another User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Modifying Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Working with Multiple Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Duplicating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Naming Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
22
Selecting Among Multiple Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Deleting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Copying Settings Between Settings Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Using Site Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Manipulating Settings by Importing User Profiles or
Copying Files Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
24p Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Audio Project Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Audio Projects Settings: Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Audio Project Settings: Input Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Audio Project Settings: Output Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Audio Project Settings: Hardware Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Audio Project Settings: Effects Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Bin Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Capture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Capture Settings: General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Capture Settings: Batch Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Capture Settings: Edit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Capture Settings: OMF Media Files Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Capture Settings: MXF Media Files Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Capture Settings: DV Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Capture Settings: Keys Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Communication (Serial) Ports Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Controller Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Correction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Correction Settings: Features Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Correction Settings: AutoCorrect Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Deck Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Deck Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Deck Preferences Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Effect Editor Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
23
Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Export Settings Dialog Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Export Settings: QuickTime Compression Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Export Settings: HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Export Settings: DV Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Export Settings: OMFI, AAF, and AFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Export Settings: AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Export Settings: AVI Video Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Export Settings: Windows Media Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Windows Media Legacy Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Existing Windows Media Custom Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Windows Media Options Video Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Custom Profile Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Export Settings: Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Export Settings: Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Export Settings: Graphic Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
P2 Export Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Export Settings: XDCAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Full Screen Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Grid Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Grid Settings: Coordinates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Grid Settings: Display Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Import Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Import Settings: Image Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Import Settings: OMFI Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Import Settings: Shot Log Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Import Settings: Audio Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Import Settings: XDCAM Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
24
Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Interface Settings: General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Interface Settings: Appearance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Interplay Folder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Interplay Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Interplay User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Keyboard Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Marquee Title Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Media Creation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Media Creation Settings: Drive Filtering & Indexing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Media Creation Settings: Capture, Titles, Import, and
Mixdown & Transcode Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Media Creation Settings: Motion Effects Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Media Creation Settings: Render Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Media Creation Settings: Media Type Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Media Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Mouse Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
NRCS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
NRCS Settings: NRCS Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
NRCS Settings: iNEWS Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
NRCS Settings: ENPS Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
NRCS Settings: Post to Web Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
PortServer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Remote Play and Capture Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Render Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Safe Colors Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Script Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Sound Card Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Timeline Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Timeline Settings: Display Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Timeline Settings: Edit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
25
Trim Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Trim Settings: Play Loop Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Trim Settings: Features Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Video Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Video Input Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Video Output Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Video Output Tool Settings: SD Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Video Output Tool Settings: HD Tab (Adrenaline Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Workspace Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Chapter 19
File Format Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Graphics (Image) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Supported Graphics (Image) File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Import Specifications for Supported Graphics File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Preparing Graphics Files for Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Frame Size for Imported Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Animation Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Audio File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
MXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
OMFI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
BWF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
BWF Information Displayed in Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Preparing Custom BWF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Importing and Syncing BWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Reimporting BWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Field Ordering in Graphic Imports and Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Chapter 20
Resolutions and Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Compression and Avid Editing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Monitor Display Resolutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Compression and Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Resolution Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Resolution Specifications: HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Resolution Specifications: JFIF Interlaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Resolution Specifications: JFIF Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
26
Resolution Specifications: Multicam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Resolution Specifications: Digital Video (DV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Resolution Specifications: MPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Support for Uncompressed HD Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Mixing Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Resolution Groups and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Estimating Drive Space Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Estimated Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Estimated Storage Requirements: HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Estimated Storage Requirements: JFIF Interlaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Estimated Storage Requirements: JFIF Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Estimated Storage Requirements: DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Estimated Storage Requirements: MPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Maximizing Drive Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Managing Storage to Improve Playback Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Chapter 21
Film-to-Tape Transfer Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Understanding the Film-to-Tape Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Transferring 24-fps Film to NTSC Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Stage 1: Transferring Film to Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Frames Versus Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Part 1: Using a 2:3 Pulldown to Translate 24-fps Film to 30-fps Video . . . 706
Part 2: Slowing the Film Speed to 23.976 fps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Maintaining Synchronized Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Stage 2: Capturing at 24 fps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Transferring 24-fps Film to PAL Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
PAL Method 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
PAL Method 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
How Avid Editing Applications Store and Display 24p and 25p Media . . . . . . . . . . 712
Displaying Media While Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Displaying Media During a Digital Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Film-to-Tape Transfer Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
27
Film-to-Tape Transfer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Transfer Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Additional Film Transfer Aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Chapter 22
Working with HD Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
High-Definition Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
HDTV Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Film-Based Television Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Video-Based Television Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Broadcast Graphics Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Editing in HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Changing the Project Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Modifying the Format of a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Converting a 23.976p NTSC Sequence to 720p/23.976 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Mixing SD and HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Displaying Formats in a Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Editing at 60 fps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Working with True 24 FPS Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Transcoding HD Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Video Color Space for HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Working with HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Understanding HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
HDV Basic Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Capturing and Importing HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Capturing HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Importing HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Mixing Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Playing Back HDV Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Rendering and Transcoding HDV Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Outputting HDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Long-GOP Splicing for HDV Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Exporting to an HDV Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Outputting HDV through Avid DNA Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Exporting an HDV Transport Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
28
Exporting HDV as Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Finishing HDV on DS Nitris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
HDV Compatibility Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Chapter 23
International Character Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Using a Local Language Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Choosing a Locale on an English Language Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Non-English Character Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Using Foreign Keyboard Mapping (Windows Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Recommendations and Restrictions for International Character Support . . . . . . . . 751
Avid Supports English Plus One Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Entering ASCII Characters in Double-Byte Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Characters to Avoid When Naming Avid Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
EDL Manager Does Not Save Diacritical Marks or Chinese Characters . . . . . 752
Traditional Chinese Big 5 Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Rebuilding the asifont.map File (Windows Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Additional Tips and Limitations for International Character Support . . . . . . . . 753
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
29
30
Using This Guide
Congratulations on your purchase of an Avid editing application. You can use your
application to create broadcast-quality output incorporating every possible production
element from full-speed, high-resolution footage, to multimedia artwork and animation, to
computer-generated effects and titling.
This guide contains all the advanced task-oriented instructions and conceptual information
you need to use the capture, editing, and output features of your Avid application, as well as
information about file format specifications, and other supplementary information. The
Basics Guide for your Avid application is a companion to this Advanced Guide. It contains
all the basic task-oriented instructions and conceptual information you need to get started
using the product. The contents of this guide and of the Basics guide are also available in the
Help. This guide is intended for all users, from beginning to advanced. Unless noted
otherwise, the material in this document applies to the Windows® XP operating system.
n
The documentation describes the features and hardware of all models. Therefore, your
system might not contain certain features and hardware that are covered in the
documentation.
Using This Guide
Symbols and Conventions
Avid documentation uses the following symbols and conventions:
Symbol or Convention
Meaning or Action
n
A note provides important related information, reminders,
recommendations, and strong suggestions.
c
A caution means that a specific action you take could cause harm to
your computer or cause you to lose data.
w
32
A warning describes an action that could cause you physical harm.
Follow the guidelines in this document or on the unit itself when
handling electrical equipment.
>
This symbol indicates menu commands (and subcommands) in the
order you select them. For example, File > Import means to open the
File menu and then select the Import command.
t
This symbol indicates a single-step procedure. Multiple arrows in a
list indicate that you perform one of the actions listed.
Italic font
Italic font is used to emphasize certain words and to indicate variables.
Courier Bold font
Courier Bold font identifies text that you type.
Ctrl+key or mouse action
Press and hold the first key while you press the last key or perform the
mouse action. For example, Ctrl+drag.
If You Need Help
If You Need Help
If you are having trouble using your Avid editing application:
1. Retry the action, carefully following the instructions given for that task in this guide. It
is especially important to check each step of your workflow.
2. Check for the latest information that might have become available after the
documentation was published:
-
If the latest information for your Avid product is provided as printed release notes,
they ship with your application and are also available online.
-
If the latest information for your Avid product is provided as a ReadMe file, it is
supplied in your Avid application folder as a PDF document (ReadMe.pdf) and is
also available online.
You should always check online for the most up-to-date ReadMe because the
online version is updated whenever new information becomes available. To
view the online ReadMe, select ReadMe from the Help menu, or visit the
Knowledge Base at www.avid.com/readme.
3. Check the documentation that came with your Avid application or your hardware for
maintenance or hardware-related issues.
4. Visit the online Knowledge Base at www.avid.com/onlinesupport. Online services are
available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Search this online Knowledge Base to find
answers, to view error messages, to access troubleshooting tips, to download updates,
and to read or join online message-board discussions.
Accessing the Online Library
The Online Library for your Avid editing application contains all the product documentation
in PDF format, including a Master Glossary of all specialized terminology used in the
documentation for Avid products.
Most Avid online libraries also include multimedia content such as tutorials and feature
presentations. This multimedia content is an excellent first resource for learning how to use
your application or for helping you understand a particular feature or workflow.
The Online Library for your Avid editing application is installed along with the application
itself.
n
You will need Adobe® Reader® to view the PDF documentation online. You can download
the latest version from the Adobe web site.
33
Using This Guide
To access the Online Library, do one of the following:
t
From your Avid editing application, select Help > Online Library.
t
From the Windows desktop, select Start > All Programs > Avid > [Avid editing
application] Online Library.
t
Browse to the Online Library folder, and then double-click the MainMenu file.
The Online Library folder is in the same location as the application itself, for example:
C:\Program Files\Avid\[Avid editing application]\Online Library
How to Order Documentation
To order additional copies of this documentation from within the United States, call Avid
Sales at 800-949-AVID (800-949-2843). If you are placing an order from outside the United
States, contact your local Avid representative.
Avid Educational Services
Avid makes lifelong learning, career advancement, and personal development easy and
convenient. Avid understands that the knowledge you need to differentiate yourself is always
changing, and Avid continually updates course content and offers new training delivery
methods that accommodate your pressured and competitive work environment.
To learn about Avid's new online learning environment, Avid Learning Excellerator
(ALEX), visit http://learn.avid.com.
For information on courses/schedules, training centers, certifications, courseware, and
books, please visit www.avid.com/training or call Avid Sales at 800-949-AVID
(800-949-2843).
34
Chapter 1
Working with the Project Window:
Advanced
The Project window provides controls for structuring and viewing important information
about your current project. You can also modify User, Project, and Site settings from the
Project window and display a list of effects.
The following topics describe advanced features of the Project window:
•
Working with User Profiles
•
Managing Folders and Bins
•
Using the Info Display
•
Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User Interface
•
Customizing Your Workspace
•
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
For basic information about the project window, see “Working with the Project Window:
Basics” in the Help or the Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Working with User Profiles
You can establish different profiles for a single user. User profiles allow you to switch
between settings without having to log out of your system and log back in under a different
user name.
Understanding User Profiles
User profiles allow you to establish separate settings for different editing functions. User
“Jane,” for example, can have separate profiles for “Audio editor,” “Film editor,” or for
“Assistant 1,” “Assistant 2,” and so on.
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
Each user profile is stored in settings files within a folder, as described in “Understanding
the Avid Projects and Avid Users Folders” in the Help. User profile folders are kept in the
following folder: drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\Avid Users\UserName.
You can work with user profiles in the following ways (for step-by-step procedures, see
“Managing User Profiles” on page 37):
•
Create new user profiles
•
Switch between user profiles
•
Return to the original user profile
•
Import settings from another user or user profile
•
Create a user profile on one system, export it to a server, and then import the same user
profile from another system to the new system.
When you export a user profile, you can select either a Personal or Group profile.
-
When you select Personal, the user profile performs an auto-load and an auto-save
every time you open a project. Every time the user profile is updated, it saves the
new profile information. For example, you can create the user profile Jennie on one
system, export it to another location (a server), and then import it to a different
system. Any time you change the Jennie user profile, it updates to the server and
when you open the Jennie user profile on either system, it uses the most updated
Jennie user profile.
-
When you select Group, the user profile auto-loads but it does not auto-save.
Changes made to the user profile only affect the system on which the changes were
made. The changes do not update to the server.
n
When exporting User Profiles in an Avid Unity™ environment, make sure the workspace
containing the user profile has the same drive letter on all systems.
n
Cross-platform (Macintosh to Windows or Windows to Macintosh) user profiles can not be
shared.
•
Update a user profile with the Update User Profile option, which lets you add user
settings, such as the Send To settings options, to an existing Settings list.
For example, if you are upgrading to a version of your application that contains the Send
To option from a version that did not have that option, you can choose the Update User
Profile option to make sure the Send To settings templates appear in your Settings list.
36
Working with User Profiles
Managing User Profiles
The following table describes procedures for managing user profiles.
For more information on user profiles, see “Understanding User Profiles” on page 35.
Task
Procedure
To create a user
profile:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select Create User Profile.
Project window title bar
User Profile Selection menu
The Create User Profile dialog box opens.
3. Type a name in the Profile Name text box, and then click OK.
The new user profile appears selected in the menu, and the user profile name
appears in the Project window title bar.
To change user
profiles:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select another user profile.
The new user profile name appears in the Project window title bar.
To return to the
original user profile:
n
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select the default user profile.
If you are using a user profile other than the default and you change to another project, the default user
settings are loaded, even though the Project window still displays your non-default user profile name. You
must reselect the user profile you want to have active.
To import user
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
settings from another
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select Import User or User Profile.
user or user profile:
3. Navigate to the user or user profile you want to import.
37
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
Task
Procedure
To export user
settings to another
user or user profile:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select Export User or User Profile.
3. Select Personal or Group.
4. Navigate to the location where you want to place the user or user profile.
5. Click OK.
To update user
profiles:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Click the User Profile Selection menu, and select Update User Profiles.
Any settings that have been added to the upgraded version of the application now
appear in the Settings list.
To delete a user
profile from your
desktop:
1. Navigate to the Avid Users folder, and then select the user folder you want to
delete.
For information about the location of the Avid folders, see “Using the Avid
Projects and the Avid Users Folders” in the Help.
2. Press the Delete key, then click OK in the dialog box that appears.
3. Empty the Recycle Bin to remove the files from the system.
4. Close the windows, and restart the Avid application.
The deleted user no longer appears in the Select Project dialog box.
Managing Folders and Bins
You can use the Project window to create hierarchies of folders and bins that reflect the
specific workflow of the current project. This structure provides both simplicity and backup
security. You can also manage system memory usage, and specify how often your Avid
editing application saves bins automatically.
38
Managing Folders and Bins
Guidelines for Project Organization
Although the specifics can vary depending on your production needs and habits, the basic
principles of project management are as follows:
•
Limit the number of sequences you create in each project. For instance, consider
creating one new project for each show, episode, spot, or scene.
•
Limit the number and complexity of clips in each bin by creating and organizing bins in
three groups, as follows:
-
Create a set of bins for the capture stage.
For example, you can create one bin for each source tape or each day’s worth of
dailies transfers to be captured to avoid slowing the system with large bins and
causing confusion between tapes.
-
Create a second set of bins for organizing your project.
For example, you can create a separate bin for each segment of a video project or
each scene of a 24p project, depending on the preferences of the editor.
-
Create a third set of bins for the editing stage, including:
A current cut bin for storing each work in progress (sequence)
An archive bin for keeping the original version of each cut (sequence)
A selects or storyboard bin for screening selected clips or cuts gathered from the
source bins
A format cuts bin for storing the final cuts with added format elements such as
segment breaks, color bars and tone, slate, or countdown
•
(Option) Create additional folders at the desktop level for better organization. For
example, you can create one folder for each capture bin and show cut bin, or a folder to
contain all shot logs to be imported.
•
Save these files as templates for future productions of a similar nature.
39
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
A sample template of bins for a project is shown below.
Project folder
Folders
containing
bin files
Bin files
Settings file
Project file
This hierarchy allows you to have one set of bins available in the Project window during
capture and organizing, and another set of bins available during editing to reduce clutter.
Creating a Folder in a Project
To create a folder in a project:
1. Click the Bins tab in the Project window.
2. Click the Fast menu button, and select New Folder.
A new untitled folder appears.
3. Click the untitled folder name in the Bins list and rename it.
Managing Bins and Memory
System memory usage increases depending on how many bins you have open, the number of
sequences in a bin, the number of tools that are open, and the size of a sequence. Using more
memory can slow system performance.
In the Bin tab of the Project window, a memory usage indicator increases and updates as you
open and close bins. Avid recommends that you keep memory usage below 80-85%. If you
exceed the recommended usage, a dialog box opens informing you that your memory usage
is high and recommending that you should close some bins and save your project.
40
Managing Folders and Bins
If your system is running low on memory and you need to free up memory, you can either
close your bins or use the Clear Memory button. If you close your bins, some of your
memory remains unavailable until you exit the application because the online master clips
remain in memory. The Clear Memory button, however, closes and saves all of your open
bins and clears out any cached data of the online master clips.
To free up memory:
1. Click the Info tab of the Project window.
2. Click the Clear Memory button.
A dialog box opens asking if you want to close and save all opened bins.
3. Click OK.
n
n
This operation deletes cached data for the online master clips only. Memory might also be
used by other parts of the application and will not be reduced by using the Clear Memory
button.
Bins containing sequences use more memory than bins containing master clips. For bins that
contain a large number of sequences, you can free up memory and still keep your old
sequences. Create an archive bin and move older sequences that you do not use anymore to
the archive bin. Keep the archive bin closed.
Saving Bins Automatically
Your Avid editing application automatically saves changes to your work on a regular basis
during each session. You can modify the frequency of the automatic backups by using the
Bin settings in the Project window Settings list.
When you are working with bins, an asterisk appears before the bin name in the bin’s title
bar. The asterisk indicates that the changes to the bin are not saved. After you save the bin,
the asterisk is removed.
When autosave occurs:
•
Any open bins are updated with changes made since the last autosave.
•
Copies of these bins are placed in the project’s backup bin folder:
drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\Avid Attic folder\bin_name
The system automatically saves copies of all bins into the Avid Attic folder at regular
intervals for backup. When your work is lost, or when you want to recover an earlier version
of a bin or sequence, you can retrieve files from the Avid Attic folder. The procedure for
recovering bin files from the Avid Attic folder is described in “Retrieving Files from the
Attic Folder” in the Help.
41
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
For added security, you can save bins manually — for example, immediately after an
important edit. For more information, see “Saving Bins Manually” in the Help.
To adjust the frequency of automatic saves:
1. In the Project window, click the Settings tab, and then double-click Bin.
The Bin Settings dialog box opens.
2. Type a number in the Auto-Save interval text box.
3. Click OK.
n
Setting to zero the maximum number of files stored in the Avid Attic folder as well as the
maximum number of versions of a bin deletes existing files in the project folder in the Avid
Attic folder and prevents any backup bins from being saved. For more information about
backup options, click the Bin Settings dialog box and press F1, or see “Bin Settings” on
page 568.
Using the Info Display
The Info display in the Project window allows you to view system memory information and
access the Hardware tool.
To open the Info display:
t
Click the Info tab in the Project window.
Info tab
n
The items listed in this view are for information only and cannot be changed.
Viewing Memory
You can display system memory information in the Info tab of the Project window.
You can view additional memory information through the Windows Task Manager and
Performance Monitor tools. You can view information about system activities, such as driver
messages, through the Windows Event Viewer. For information on these tools, see the
Windows Help.
42
Using the Info Display
n
You can improve the performance of large projects by reducing the number of objects. To do
this, close unused bins, unmount unneeded media drives, consolidate finished elements,
eliminate old material from the project, or divide the project into separate projects. Then
quit and restart your Avid editing application. If performance is still slow, restart your
system.
To display system memory information:
t
Click the Info tab in the Project window, and then click the Memory button.
The Memory window opens.
The following table describes the information your Avid editing application displays in the
Memory window:
Item
Description
Objects
The total number of memory handles currently used by your Avid editing
application. Objects include memory requirements of the application,
such as windows, as well as clips, sequences, and other items associated
with a project.
Total physical memory The total number of bytes of RAM (random-access memory).
Available physical
memory
The amount of RAM available for allocation by the Windows system.
Total page file
The total number of bytes stored in the paging file. The paging file is
used as virtual memory by the Windows system.
Available page file
The total number of bytes available in the paging files.
Working set (minimum The set of memory pages currently available to the application in RAM.
and maximum)
Accessing the Hardware Tool
The Hardware tool gives a visual representation of usage for each drive and provides
operating system information.
To open the Hardware tool, do one of the following:
t
Click the Info tab in the Project window, and then click the Hardware button.
t
Select Tools > Hardware.
The Hardware tool opens.
n
For more information about the Hardware tool, see “Using the Hardware Tool” on page 73.
43
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User
Interface
The Appearance tab in the Interface Settings dialog box provides you with controls for
customizing the colors and button style of the Avid user interface. You can also change the
font and point size of the type in the various windows.
For complete reference information on the Interface Settings dialog box, see “Interface
Settings” on page 627.
Changing Interface Component Colors
You can use a color selection grid to change the color of interface components.
To set the color of an interface component:
1. In the Project window, click the Settings tab, and then double-click Interface.
The Interface dialog box opens.
2. Click the Appearance tab.
The Interface components whose colors you can change are listed in the top half of the
Appearance tab, as shown in the following illustration.
Check box
Interface
component list
Color boxes
3. Click in the color box next to the interface component that you want to customize.
A color selection grid opens.
4. Click the color to which you want to set your interface component.
44
Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User Interface
The color selection grid disappears. The color you selected appears in the color box. A
check mark appears in the check box to show that you want your new color attribute for
this component to take effect.
n
If you deselect an interface component by clicking the check box, the color you specify in the
color selection grid does not take effect. The color of the interface component reverts to its
default value.
5. Do one of the following:
t
n
Click Apply to apply the changes you selected.
If you click Cancel after you click Apply, interface components retain the colors you applied.
t
Click OK to close the dialog box and put the new setting into effect.
t
Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
The changes you selected but did not apply do not take effect.
Changing Button and Toolbar Styles
You can control the shading style and depth of buttons and toolbars. You can also change the
shape of buttons and the way buttons are spaced in Monitors and in the Timeline.
To set the style of buttons and toolbars:
1. In the Project window, click the Settings tab, and then double-click Interface.
The Interface dialog box opens.
2. Click the Appearance tab.
The interface component style controls appear in the bottom half of the Appearance tab,
as shown in the following illustration.
3. Select from one or more of the menus, as described in the table following this
procedure.
45
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
4. Do one of the following:
t
n
Click Apply to apply the changes you selected.
If you click Cancel after you click Apply, your editing application retains the selections you
applied.
t
Click OK to close the dialog box and put the new setting into effect.
t
Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
The changes you selected but did not apply do not take effect.
Interface Component Style Controls
Control
Description
Options
Shading Style
Controls the graphic style
used to shade buttons and
toolbars.
Convex
Examples
Convex
Dim Radial
Dim Radial
Convex Radial
Bright Radial
Convex Radial
Bright Radial
Shading Depth
Controls the threePercentage
dimensional “rounding” of values
the buttons and toolbars
Shading depth 5%
Monitor Button
Separation
Timeline Button
Separation
Controls the spacing
between the Monitor
buttons and between the
Timeline buttons
Shading depth 50%
Maximum
Moderate
Maximum button separation
None
Moderate button separation
No button separation
46
Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User Interface
Interface Component Style Controls (Continued)
Control
Description
Options
Button Style
Controls the shape of
buttons.
Oval
Octagonal
Examples
Oval
Rounded
Swoosh
Octagonal
Square
Antique
Rounded
Square
Swoosh
Antique
Changing Font and Point Size
You can change the default font and point sizes of the Project, Bin, Source/Record monitor,
and Timeline windows. You can vary the fonts and point sizes across these windows. For
example, you can set the Project window to Helvetica, 13 pt.; set one Bin window to Times
Roman, 11 pt.; and set another Bin window to Arial, 12 pt.
The following table describes the windows you can change, and where these changes are
saved.
Window
Location of Changes
Project
Changes the font and point size of the text in the Project window; saved as a
Project setting.
Bin
Changes the font and point size of the text in the Bin window; saved as a Bin
setting (not a Bin View setting).
Source/Record
monitor
Changes the font and point size of the sequence or source clip name text.
Timeline
Changes the font and point size of clip text; saved as a Timeline View setting.
To change the font displayed in the Project, Timeline, Source/Record monitor, or Bin
window:
1. Click the Project, Timeline, Source/Record monitor, or Bin window to make it active.
2. Select Edit > Set Font.
The Set Font dialog box opens.
3. Click the Font menu, and select a font.
47
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
n
Any font installed on the Avid system appears in the list. For information on adding fonts to
your system, see the documentation for your operating system.
4. Type another point size for the font in the Size text box.
5. Click OK.
The new font and point size appear in the active window.
When you close the window, the last font and point size applied are saved with the window.
Customizing Your Workspace
A workspace is the arrangement and size of tool windows displayed in your Avid editing
application. If you are accustomed to working with a particular group of windows arranged
and sized in a particular setup, you can assign them to a workspace setting that you can then
recall with a workspace button.
For example, during capture you might want to display the Capture tool and Video Input tool
in specific locations. During effects editing, you might want to display the Effect Palette and
Effect Editor in particular locations and sizes. For information on switching between
workspaces, see “Switching Between Workspaces” on page 51.
While in a workspace, you can move tool windows or open and close tool windows. The
next time you select that workspace, the tool windows appear with either:
•
The arrangement from the last time you left the workspace
•
The arrangement you set for the workspace, regardless of any changes you made
You can select your preference in the Workspace Settings dialog box. For more information,
see “Creating a New Workspace Setting” on page 49.
You can assign up to eight buttons that allow you to switch between user-customized
workspaces. This is useful if there is more than one user accessing the same Avid system.
Each user can assign up to eight workspaces by using the workspace buttons. The buttons
are assigned to the workspaces in the Settings list in the Project window in the order that
they appear. For example, the W1 button is assigned to the first workspace that appears in
the Settings list; W2 is assigned to the second workspace that appears in the Settings list;
and so forth. For more information, see “Assigning a Workspace Button” on page 52.
n
48
You cannot assign certain tool windows to a workspace, such as the Hardware tool, the
Communication (Serial) Ports tool, and the Media tool.
Customizing Your Workspace
Creating a New Workspace Setting
To create a new workspace setting:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the Settings list, and select Workspace.
3. Select Edit > Duplicate.
A new workspace setting appears in the Settings list.
n
If you are duplicating a previously named workspace setting, a .1 appears at the end of the
new name.
4. Click to the left of the new workspace you want to set.
A check mark appears next to the workspace.
5. Assign a custom name to the new workspace:
a.
In the column between Workspace and User, click until you see a text cursor and
box. Make sure you click the Custom name column and not the Setting name.
New workspace
Custom name
column
b.
Type a name for the new custom workspace; (for example, Logging).
c.
Press Enter.
d. Open the windows and tools with which you want to associate the workspace.
Resize and move the windows to the location you want them to appear on
the monitors.
6. Double-click the custom workspace setting.
The Workspace Settings dialog box opens.
49
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
7. Select or deselect the following options, depending on your preference for the behavior
of the workspace:
-
Activate Settings Linked By Name: This setting allows you to link other settings
to the workspace. For more information, see “Linking User Settings and
Workspaces” on page 50.
-
Continually Update This Workspace: This setting automatically preserves the
workspace in its most recent arrangement. Future changes to the arrangement of the
tool windows are saved.
-
Manually Update This Workspace: This setting saves the workspace in its current
arrangement when you click Save Workspace Now. Future changes to the
arrangement of the tool windows are disregarded.
8. Click OK.
Linking User Settings and Workspaces
User settings can be linked to a workspace. You can create a customized workspace, set up
specific options in any Settings dialog box, and link them together by name.
For example, you can create an Audio workspace that opens the Audio Mixer tool and Audio
tool. This workspace can also open a customized Timeline (with enlarged audio tracks and
rubberbanding displays). You can also link this workspace to a Settings dialog box with
customized options selected. You do this by creating a setting and giving it the same name in
the Settings list in the Project window as the name of the workspace.
To link user settings and a workspace:
1. Create a new workspace setting.
For more information, see “Creating a New Workspace Setting” on page 49.
2. Give the workspace a custom name.
3. Click a setting in the Settings list that you want to link to the new workspace. For
example, click Timeline View. Adjust the Timeline to how you want it displayed
(enlarged tracks, audio waveform, and so forth).
4. Give this Timeline View setting the same name you gave the workspace in step 2.
For information on naming a Timeline view, see “Saving a Customized Timeline View”
in the Help.
5. Double-click another setting, (for example, Audio). Select the new options, (for
example, Default Pan), and close the dialog box.
50
Customizing Your Workspace
6. Give this setting the same name you gave the workspace in step 2.
Linked
setting
Linked
setting
Linked
workspace
7. Double-click the workspace you just created.
The Workspace Settings dialog box opens.
8. Click Activate Settings Linked By Name.
9. Click OK.
All the settings and the new workspace you created are activated.
Switching Between Workspaces
To switch from one workspace to another:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click to the left of the workspace setting you want to use.
A check mark appears next to the workspace.
You can also switch between workspaces by using the workspace buttons. To assign
workspace buttons, see “Assigning a Workspace Button” on page 52.
51
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
Deleting a Workspace
To delete a workspace:
1. Select the workspace you want to delete from the Settings list in the Project window.
The workspace is highlighted.
n
Make sure a check mark does not appear next to the workspace you want to delete. You
cannot delete an active workspace.
2. Press the Delete key.
The selected workspace is removed from the Settings list.
Assigning a Workspace Button
To assign a workspace button:
1. If you want to assign a workspace button to a palette (for example, the Tool palette from
the Fast menu) or the Keyboard, open the palette or Keyboard setting.
2. Select Tools > Command Palette.
W1 button
More tab
3. Click the More tab.
4. Select Button to Button Reassignment.
5. Click a workspace button (W1 – W8), and drag the button to a location on another
palette (for example, the Tool palette) or the Keyboard setting.
The workspace button appears in the new location.
52
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
The buttons are assigned to the workspaces in the Settings list in the Project window in
the order that they appear. For example, the W1 button is assigned to the first workspace
that appears in the Settings list; W2 is assigned to the second workspace that appears in
the Settings list; and so forth.
Your Avid editing application sorts the workspaces alphabetically. The workspace
button assignments might change if you add workspaces. To keep a designated order,
name the workspaces with a number preceding the first letter (for example, 2editing).
6. Click the W1 button to display the first workspace that appears in the Settings list.
When you open the windows associated with the first workspace, they open in the
assigned locations.
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity
Environment
The following topics describe how to work in an Avid Unity environment that does not use
an asset manager or Avid Interplay Transfer. If you are using an asset manager or Avid
Interplay Transfer, see the Avid Interplay Administration Guide and the Avid Interplay
Transfer Setup and User’s Guide.
Understanding Avid Unity
Avid Unity MediaNetwork and Avid Unity ISIS allow you to share bins and projects across
the network. When you place your bins and projects on Avid Unity workspaces (drive
volumes), several users can work on the same project at the same time.
For example, an editor can create sequences in one bin while an assistant recaptures media in
another bin. At the same time, other users can add audio effects or titles to other bins in the
project.
Each user can perform tasks from his or her own computer. Your Avid editing application
provides a locking mechanism to help you keep track of who is currently working in a bin.
The method allows one user to write to a bin; multiple users can read the files in that bin.
c
The lock does not prevent you from deleting the media in a locked bin if you have write
access to the workspace. It ensures only that you don’t overwrite changes to the bin.
In an Avid Unity environment, your Avid editing application creates and stores projects and
bins on the client’s internal drive. If a user moves or saves these projects and bins to the
workspace, only one client can work on the project at a time. If two or more users are
working simultaneously on the same project, only one user can update the files. Other users
can open and play sequences but cannot make any changes to them.
53
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
For information on managing workspaces, see the clients’ Quick Start cards. For details on
Avid Unity, see the Avid Unity MediaNetwork Management Guide or the Avid Unity ISIS
Administration Guide.
Sharing Methods
Before you begin copying or creating bins and projects on an Avid Unity workspace,
determine the sharing method you are using for the project. You can either share bins alone
or you can share bins and projects.
Shared Bins
When you use shared bins, you store the project on your local computer and store bins and
media files on the shared workspace. This method allows users in a shared environment to
share only selected bins with other users. The system identifies the shared bins as follows:
•
Stores the bin in a Unity Bins folder in the Project window. This folder is similar to the
Other Bins folder.
•
Displays a second column of information for the bin that identifies the computer that
currently has the bin locked.
•
Uses bold text to identify bins that are locked by another user.
Shared Bins and Projects
If you share bins and projects, you create and store the project folder and bins on the shared
workspace (or copy an existing project, bins, and the related media files). Your Avid editing
application identifies information from each computer using the shared workspace as
follows:
•
Creates a project folder for each computer that accesses the project. Your Avid editing
application adds the computer’s name to the folder name to create a unique name and
stores any project-specific information in the folder. This mechanism prevents users
from overwriting the project-specific data for other users.
The folder is similar to the folder created when you select New Folder from the Project
Window Fast menu. For more information, see “Managing Folders and Bins” on
page 38.
54
•
Displays an extra column in the Project window that identifies the computer that has the
bin locked.
•
Uses bold text to identify bins that are locked by other users.
•
Creates a folder at the top level of the shared workspace called Unity Attic. This folder
contains backup files for each project on the shared volume.
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
n
Depending on the number of users sharing a workspace, you might want to increase the
number of files that your Avid editing application stores in the Unity Attic folder (using the
Bin Settings dialog box).
The following illustration shows the Project window for a shared project.
Bold bins are locked
for editing but can
be viewed.
Project folders for
each user
Computer that
currently has
the bin locked
The following illustration shows the contents of a shared workspace at the desktop level.
Shared projects
Shared media files
Unity Attic
Opening a Shared Project
To open an existing project on the shared volume:
1. Start your Avid editing application.
2. In the Select Project dialog box, navigate to the project on Avid Unity.
The Project window opens. For a description of the elements specific to Avid Unity in
the Project window, see “Sharing Methods” on page 54.
55
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
3. Open one of the bins by double-clicking the Bin icon.
The bin appears with a Bin Lock Status button. You can click the red (locked) or green
(unlocked) Bin Lock Status button to view a history file that shows which computers
and users have modified the bin and the date and time of the modifications.
The following illustration shows locked and unlocked bins.
Unlocked bin
Locked bin
When a bin is unlocked, you have permission to make changes. You should not make
changes to a locked bin. See “Restrictions and Limitations for Locked Bins” on page 57.
n
The Bin Lock Status button does not appear if the bin is not on Avid Unity.
Working with Locks
Your Avid editing application uses a locking mechanism to help you keep track of who is
currently working in a shared bin. This allows one user to write to a bin; multiple users can
read the files in that bin.
Default Locking Mechanism
The user who opens the bin first gets the lock and obtains write access to the bin. Your Avid
editing application uses bold text in the Project window to identify bins that are locked by
another user. When the person who owns the lock closes the bin, it becomes available for
another user to open and take the lock.
If one user has the lock and another user has the same bin open, when the first user closes the
bin, the second user must close and reopen the bin to get the lock.
You can click the red or green Bin Lock Status button in the bin to view a history file that
shows which computers and users have modified the bin.
56
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
To open a bin without taking the lock:
t
Alt+double-click the bin in the Project window.
Overriding the Default Locking Mechanism
You can instruct your Avid editing application to keep a bin locked even after you close it.
To permanently lock a bin:
1. Select one or more bins in the Project window.
2. Right-click the Bin icon, and select Lock Project Bin.
An asterisk appears next to the user name in the Project window. In this case, the bin
remains locked even after you close it.
To unlock the bin:
t
n
Right-click the bin in the Project window, and select Unlock Project Bin.
The Lock Project Bin and Unlock Project Bin commands are also available from the Clip
menu.
Restrictions and Limitations for Locked Bins
The following restrictions apply to bins that are locked by another user:
•
You cannot select a locked bin for operations such as capture, title creation, and
importing. This helps to minimize the problems of modifying a locked bin.
•
You cannot drag an item to a locked bin.
•
If you drag an item from a locked bin to a writable bin, the Avid system creates a
duplicate (not a copy) of the selection in the writable bin. The original item is not
removed from the locked bin. This operation is the equivalent of duplicating a selection
and then dragging the duplicate to another bin.
•
You cannot move a bin that is locked by another user.
•
If you modify a locked bin, your Avid editing application does not let you save the bin to
the same name, but it allows you to save the bin to another name. However, this causes
duplicate bin IDs and might cause system-level conflicts with the contents of the two
bins. The application sees the duplicate contents of these bins and resolves the conflicts
by newest modifications (this might not be desirable behavior).
Try to avoid creating duplicate bins by modifying a locked bin. If you do create a
duplicate bin in this way, you should manually merge the changes into the original bin
and delete the duplicate bin.
57
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
c
The lock does not prevent you from deleting the media in a locked bin if you have write
access to the workspace. It ensures only that you don’t overwrite changes to the bin.
Suggestions for Improving Performance When Working with Shared
Bins
The following information is provided to improve performance when working with shared
bins in an Avid Unity environment.
•
Do not use the same name for your editing system machine name and your user name.
In fact, do not use the same name for security objects such as machine names, user
names, group names, and domain names. If any two security objects have the same
name, Windows might become confused and sharing might not work properly.
•
Do not use the same prefix for machine names in a shared environment. No full name
can be a prefix of another name. If one of the systems has a machine name that is the
full name, and others in the environment have the prefix as part of their machine name,
problems can occur. For example, if an editing system has a machine name ABC and
additional editing systems in the shared environment have machine names ABCnn,
ABCxx, the following problems could occur:
-
When the system with the machine name ABC is writing to a directory, the systems
whose machine names have the same prefix (ABCnn and ABCxx) might not be able
to access the directory.
-
When the system with the machine name ABC is rendering, systems whose
machine names have the same prefix (ABCnn and ABCxx) might be unable to
launch.
Avid recommends that you do not use a common prefix for machine names. If you
must use a common prefix, make sure all the names are the same length (ABC01,
ABC02, ABC03, etc.).
•
Avoid using Windows Explorer to examine, copy, or manipulate shared bin files or
shared project folders or their contents when editors are using those files or folders. If
you do, editors attempting to access those shared bins or projects may experience delays
accompanied by a progress dialog that says, “Filesystem busy, retrying (MESSAGE),”
where MESSAGE is replaced by a specific message identifying the action that is being
retried.
If the busy condition persists, and the retries are exhausted, a failure message appears.
When that happens, ensure that Windows Explorer is not being used on the shared bins
you are trying to access, and then try the operation again.
•
58
When you have an environment where more than five users are sharing bins on Avid
Unity, Avid recommends using an Avid Interplay server in the workgroup environment.
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
•
When an Avid Interplay server is available in an Avid Unity system in the workgroup
environment, Avid does not recommend sharing bins or projects. Use the Avid Interplay
server and the Remote Assets feature to share media. All editing systems in a workgroup
environment that includes an Avid Interplay server must have the Avid Unity client
software installed. The Media Tool might become unreliable if an editor in the Avid
Unity workgroup environment does not have the Avid Unity client software installed.
Shared Bin and Project Limitations
If an editor other than the creator deletes a media file, other editors cannot see that media file
go offline immediately. If an editor tries to play that file, “media file not found” messages
might appear in a monitor window, and access violation errors might occur.
Each editing application maintains a PMR file in its machine name folder inside the OMFI
MediaFiles folder or the Avid MediaFiles folder. The PMR file lists all the online media
files. Every editing application consults all the PMR files in all the machine name folders to
find out which media files are online. Whenever a media file is created, its name is
immediately added to the creating editor application's PMR file, and whenever a media file
is deleted by its creator, its name is immediately removed from the PMR file.
However, if an editing application other than the creator deletes a media file, the PMR file
that contains the deleted file is NOT updated immediately. Once the creating editor
encounters an event that causes its PMR to be updated, then all editing systems know that
the deleted media file has gone offline.
There are several ways to force an editing application to update its PMR. The simplest is to
switch to the desktop and back.
Avid recommends that you institute policies where media files are deleted by the editor who
created them, or if necessary, the deleting editors notify the editor who created the media
files that a deletion has occurred. This editor can then switch to the desktop and back, and all
other editors can see the deleted file go offline.
Shared Bin Lock Icon Limitation
Occasionally, when two editors attempt to open a shared bin at the same time, both editors
get the green lock icon. However, only one editor really has the lock, and that editor's
machine name appears beside the bin name in both Project windows.
Both editors can modify their copies of the bin, but only the editor that holds the lock, as
indicated in the Project window, can save that bin. The other editor is warned that the bin is
locked but is allowed to save a copy of the changed bin.
Avid recommends that you use the “Save Bin Copy As...” button and continue working.
59
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
Drive Filtering in Networked Workflows
The Drive Filtering and Indexing tab of the Media Creation Settings dialog box includes
three options:
•
Filter by Resolution
•
Filter by System Drive
•
Filter by Launch Drive
For Symphony Nitris and for current versions of Avid Media Composer and Avid
NewsCutter® products, these three options are selected by default. Some older versions of
Avid Media Composer and Avid NewsCutter® products shipped with Filter by Resolution
enabled, Filter by System Drive disabled, Filter by Launch Drive disabled. This caused
breakages with the networked workflows as media in new projects were being created on the
C: drive instead of the shared storage when using the default Media Creation Settings. To fix
this, all three drive filtering options are enabled by default.
Avid Xpress products and Avid Free DV default to Filtering off because these products
might not have additional drives available, especially if you are working on a laptop.
n
Any project brought into a networked workflow that was created with any of the filtering
selections off might have problems with networked media creation, such as “Audio and/or
Video Mixdown” and “SendToPlayback,” because their Media Creation Settings are still
configured for standalone usage.
There are several ways for you to work around this issue. First, adjust the drive filtering
settings when switching environments, either by opening the Media Creation Setting and
switching the drive filtering settings or by creating multiple Media Creation Settings and
switching the active setting whenever you shift environments. If you always work in an
environment that differs from the defaults (for example, an Avid Xpress product always
connected to shared storage), you can create a Media Creation setting that fits your
workflow and add it to your Site Settings so new projects are created with the desired
defaults. For more information, see “Using Site Settings” on page 556.
60
Sharing Bins and Projects in an Avid Unity Environment
The default values for Filter by Resolution, Filter by System Drive, and Filter by Launch
Drive are as follows:
Drive Filtering Default Values
Product
Filter By Resolution
Filter by System Drive
Filter by Launch Drive
Symphony Nitris
Yes
Yes
Yes
Media Composer
products
Yes
Yes
Yes
NewsCutter products
Yes
Yes
Yes
Media Station PT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Avid Xpress Pro
No
No
No
Avid Xpress DV
No
No
No
Free DV
No
No
No
61
Chapter 1 Working with the Project Window: Advanced
62
Chapter 2
Using Tools
The Tools menu in your Avid editing application provides quick access to essential tools that
you can use in your projects. In addition to the tools available from the Tools menu, you can
also add a controller to your system that you can use as an alternative to your keyboard and
mouse for editing footage. These tools are described in the following sections:
•
Using the Tools Menu
•
Using the Deck Controller
•
Using the Command Palette
•
Using the Avid Calculator
•
Using the Console Window
•
Using the Hardware Tool
•
Using External Controllers as Editing Control Surfaces
Using the Tools Menu
You can open any of the most frequently used system tools from the Tools menu.
To open a tool:
t
Select Tools > tool name.
Using the Deck Controller
The deck controller provides direct serial or VLXi® V-LAN® control of an Avid-compatible
tape deck at any time during editing. This allows you to cue and screen footage from source
tapes in various edit modes or when recording a digital cut, without opening the
Capture tool.
Chapter 2 Using Tools
To open a deck controller:
t
Select Tools > New Deck Controller.
The Avid Deck Manager program is initialized, and a new Deck Controller window opens.
Timecode indicator
Logging controls
Close button
Timecode display
Timecode display
Delete Mark IN
Delete Mark OUT
Deck controls
Deck Selection
menu
Tape Name button
Eject
Mark IN
Mark OUT
Clear Memory button
Go To Memory button
Each deck controller includes the following elements:
•
n
64
The Timecode display provides information about the control status of the tape deck, as
follows:
-
If the deck is properly connected and power is on, the deck controller displays
timecode when a tape is mounted.
-
If a deck is not properly connected to the system or power is off when you open the
controller, the indicator displays the message “NO DECK.”
-
If you turn the deck power off with the deck controller already open, the indicator
displays the message “Power Off.”
-
If you switch the deck control to Local on the VTR, the indicator displays the
message “Local.”
Information on connecting decks and cabling varies depending on the Avid DNA device you
use. See the appropriate ”Connecting Peripheral Equipment” topic for your Avid DNA
device in the Help, within the “Using the Avid Adrenaline,” “Using the Avid Mojo,” or
“Using the Avid Mojo SDI” sections.
•
The Timecode indicator flashes green during playback or capture to indicate that the
system is receiving valid timecode from the source tape. If the indicator remains unlit,
the system is not receiving timecode.
•
The deck controls provide a standard range of playback capabilities, including fast
forward and rewind, stop and play, step backward and step forward, pause, and eject.
Using the Command Palette
•
The Deck Selection menu allows you to specify a deck with deck control parameters
that you can customize in the Deck Settings dialog box. For more information, see
“Deck Configuration Settings” on page 579.
•
The deck controller allows you to associate a tape name with the controller by clicking
the Tape Name button and selecting a tape in the Select Tape dialog box. For more
information, see “Selecting a Source Tape” in the Help.
•
Logging controls allow you to log IN and OUT marks while cueing your tape.
For more information on logging, see “Logging Directly into a Bin” on page 90.
Marks you set with the deck controller are temporary and allow you to return to
timecode locations entered in the window while screening and cueing a tape. If the
Capture tool is open, however, timecodes logged in the deck controller also appear in
the Capture tool and can be entered into an open bin.
Using the Command Palette
The Command palette provides a central location for all user-selectable buttons that you can
map to various locations for ease of use. User-selectable buttons allow you to perform a
wide range of commands with a single click of the mouse.
The Command palette organizes buttons by editing function. Tabs are displayed for each
editing function and the buttons that perform those functions are displayed in each tab. The
functions are Move, Play, Edit, Trim, FX (Effects), 3D, CC (Color Correction), MCam
(MultiCamera), Other, and More.
65
Chapter 2 Using Tools
You can use the Command palette to:
•
Map buttons to any Tool palette or the keyboard. See “Mapping User-Selectable
Buttons” on page 67.
•
Map menu commands to various buttons and keys. See “Mapping Menu Commands” on
page 68.
•
Directly activate a command. See “Activating Commands from the Command Palette”
on page 69.
n
For information about each button in the Command palette, right-click a button and select
What’s This?
n
For more information on logging with the Capture tool, see “Logging Directly into a Bin”
on page 90.
Understanding Button Mapping
Mapping user-selectable buttons allows you to reconfigure Tool palettes, toolbars, or the
keyboard in various combinations to suit different editing needs.
n
When you map buttons to the keyboard, the mapping might be specific to the current editing
mode. For example, buttons mapped to the Page Up key or the Page Down key revert to the
default key functions when you enter Effect mode. After you exit Effect mode, the keys return
to the mapped function.
The following are a few examples of mapping buttons:
•
Subcataloging clips: You can map the Make Subclip button and other clip management
buttons.
Make Subclip
•
Add Locator
Complex layering and effects editing: You can map buttons such as Motion Effect,
Remove Effect, Fade Effect, Render Effect, Cycle Picture/Sound, Quick Transition, and
Grid (which displays Safe Title overlays).
Motion Effect
Remove Effect
Grid
Fade Effect
Render Effect
Cycle
Picture/Sound
Quick Transition
66
Find Bin
Using the Command Palette
•
MultiCamera editing: You can map the Quad Split, Swap Cam Bank, and Gang
buttons.
Quad Split
Swap Cam Bank
Gang
When you remap buttons or commands, the system immediately saves your new
configuration in one of the default settings that you can open from the Project window. You
can also save, rename, and recall multiple versions of any of these settings to serve various
purposes.
For more information on multiple settings, see “Working with Multiple Settings” on
page 552.
Your Avid editing application saves button configurations as follows:
•
Changes to the Keyboard palette are saved in the Keyboard settings.
•
Changes to the Tool palette are saved in the Interface settings.
You can change the appearance of the buttons in the Tool palette by using the Interface
settings from the Settings list in the Project window. For more information, see
“Customizing the Appearance of the Avid User Interface” on page 44. You can choose to
identify a button’s function with only an icon or with an icon and letters. For more
information, see “Interface Settings” on page 627.
Mapping User-Selectable Buttons
To map buttons or keys on the keyboard by using the Command palette:
1. Open a window that has a user-selectable button palette by doing one of the following:
t
Activate the Playback, Source, or Record monitor in the Composer window.
t
Click a Fast Menu button, and drag the Tool palette to open it.
t
Activate the Source/Record monitor or the pop-up monitor, click the Fast Menu
button, and drag to tear off the Tool palette.
t
Open a clip in a pop-up monitor.
t
Enter Trim mode in the Composer window.
t
Open the Keyboard palette from the Settings list in the Project window.
2. Select Tools > Command Palette.
The Command palette opens.
3. Select Button to Button Reassignment at the bottom of the Command palette.
67
Chapter 2 Using Tools
4. Click the tab from which you want to select a user-selectable button.
5. Drag the button from the Command palette to a button location on the other palette.
Using the Blank Button
The Blank button in the Other tab of the Command palette allows you to replace a defined
button with an undefined button. If you do not need a specific button on the Tool palette, you
can replace this button with a Blank button.
For more information on mapping the Blank button to a new location, see “Mapping UserSelectable Buttons” on page 67.
Mapping Modifier Keys
You can add modifier keys to functions already associated with keys and buttons. The Other
tab in the Command palette contains the Add Alt Key key button.
For example, if you map the Add Alt Key button to the Mark IN key (I key), the function of
the I key changes to Go to IN Point (which is equivalent to pressing Alt+I). For a list of other
functions that use modifier keys, select Help > Shortcuts.
n
After you modify a key or button with a modifier key button, you can use the default function
of the key or button by pressing and holding the appropriate modifier key while pressing the
key, or by pressing and holding the modifier key while clicking the button.
Mapping Menu Commands
[i’ve copied in, but commented out, the NCP paragraph here - check the functionality, but I
suspect the NCP wording is too narrow, since it implies that you
You can map menu commands displayed in the menus in your Avid editing application menu
bar directly onto any mappable button location or onto the keyboard. In some cases, you can
avoid using the menus altogether.
n
68
Before you can map some commands, you must first establish the condition that enables the
command. For example, before you can map the Render In/Out command from the Clip
menu, you must first mark IN and OUT points in the Timeline so that the menu command
appears.
Using the Command Palette
To map menu commands:
1. Open a window that has user-selectable buttons by doing one of the following:
t
Activate the Source/Record monitor or the pop-up monitor, click the Fast Menu
button, and drag to tear off the Tool palette.
t
Open the Keyboard palette from the Settings list in the Project window.
2. Select Tools > Command Palette.
The Command palette opens.
3. Select Menu to Button Reassignment.
4. Click a target button on the Keyboard palette or the Tool palette.
The pointer changes to a small white menu.
5. Select the menu command you want to map to the target button.
The initials for the menu command appear on the target button.
Menu command
mapped to a button
Activating Commands from the Command Palette
You can perform a command function directly from the Command palette. For example, you
can click the Play button in the Command palette to play the material in the Source monitor.
To activate a command from the Command palette:
1. Select Tools > Command Palette.
The Command palette opens.
2. Select Active Palette at the bottom of the Command palette.
3. Click the tab from which you want to select a command function.
4. Click the button in the Command palette for the function you want to perform.
69
Chapter 2 Using Tools
Using the Avid Calculator
The Avid Calculator helps you calculate video and film durations, and convert timecode and
film key numbers to different formats.
For example, you can:
•
Convert drop-frame to non-drop-frame timecode values.
•
Convert timecode durations between 30-fps and 25-fps projects.
•
Convert a duration in video to the corresponding length in footage and frames for
measuring 35mm film.
To use the Avid Calculator:
1. Select Tools > Calculator.
The Avid Calculator opens.
2. Click the Format menu, and select a format.
3. Make calculations in one of the following ways:
t
Click numbers and functions in the Avid Calculator.
t
Enter numbers and functions using the numeric keypad.
t
Enter numbers and functions using the top row of numbers on the keyboard.
You do not need to enter leading zeros, colons, or semicolons for timecode.
To convert your totals at any time to another format:
t
n
Click the Format menu, and select a different frame code or key number format.
If drop-frame timecode is entered into the calculator while non-drop-frame timecode is
selected in the format menu, the calculator converts the entered timecode to a
non-drop-frame equivalent (and vice-versa).
Using the Console Window
The Console window provides a number of features, including:
70
•
Current system information, including your system ID number
•
A log of error messages
•
Detailed information about sequence segments in the Timeline or about objects in a bin
•
A command to display networked drives for use as media drives
•
Information after you capture or import
Using the Console Window
c
Do not use the programming features of the Console without guidance from Avid
professionals. Contact your Avid Reseller with specific questions. (In North America,
you can contact Avid Customer Support.)
Displaying System Information
To display current system information:
1. Select Tools > Console.
The Console window opens.
2. Scroll in the Console window to view your system information and ID.
y
s
t
e
m
I
D
:
Your system ID is on a line beginning S
This feature is especially useful for finding the system ID when you need to contact your
Avid Reseller or Avid Customer Support.
Reviewing a Log of Errors
To review errors logged to the Console window:
1. When an error occurs, close the message box and select Tools > Console.
2. Scroll through the Console window to find a log of the error to use when you contact
your Avid Reseller or Avid Customer Support.
Getting Information with the Console
The Console window provides quick access to bin information such as total duration of
selected clips or total items in a bin including hidden items. You can also use the Console
window to display information about a clip, segment, or sequence in the Timeline.
To get information with the Console window:
1. Select Tools > Console.
The Console window opens.
2. Select the item about which you want information, for example:
t
In the Timeline, move the position indicator to the selected clip or segment.
t
In the bin, select an object or Ctrl+click multiple objects.
3. Select File > Get Bin Info or File > Get Position Info.
Information about the clip appears in the Console window.
71
Chapter 2 Using Tools
Using the Console Window to Access Network Drives
Your Avid editing application can access network drives that you have mapped to your Avid
editing system. Once your network drives are mapped, typing the appropriate console
command displays the mapped drive letter in the appropriate tools in the Avid editing
application.
n
n
For information about mapping drives to your computer, see your Windows documentation.
You do not need to use this feature to access Avid Unity shared network drives.
When the feature is turned on, the mapped drive letter appears in the Target Drive menu.
When you turn the feature off, the mapped drive letter is dimmed. If you quit and restart your
application, the mapped drive letter does not appear in the Target Drive menu.
To make your mapped network drives available:
1. Open the Console window by selecting Tools > Console.
2. In the Console command line, type:
alldrives 1
3. Press Enter.
Network drives are now visible in your Avid editing application.
n
Typing alldrives in the console window turns this feature on and off. Typing alldrives 2
restores the default behavior where only media drives are available.
By default, network drives are filtered by resolution when the option Filter Network Drives
Based on Resolution option is selected in the Media Creation settings. For more information,
see “Media Creation Settings” on page 633.
72
Using the Hardware Tool
Using the Hardware Tool
The Hardware tool provides the following information about the system’s hardware
configuration:
•
n
The Drives tab lists each online drive. The shaded portion of the bar graph to the right of
each drive shows the amount of storage space currently filled. The number in the bar
graph indicates the amount of available drive storage space for each drive.
If your system is connected to an Avid Unity network, you see two drives tabs, Local Drives
and Avid Unity Drives.
•
The System tab lists the operating system, its version, service pack, and build, and the
physical memory.
To check the hardware configuration of your Avid system, do one of the following:
t
Select Tools > Hardware.
t
Click the Info tab in the Project window, and then click Hardware.
The Hardware tool opens.
Using External Controllers as Editing Control
Surfaces
Adding a controller to your Avid system provides an alternative to using the keyboard and
mouse for editing footage. Avid supports the following controllers for this purpose:
•
Digidesign Command|8™
•
Digidesign Digi 002®
For information about connecting these controllers, see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port
Devices” in the Help. For information about configuring these controllers and using them as
editing control surfaces, see “Using the Digi 002 and Command|8” on page 353.
73
Chapter 2 Using Tools
74
Chapter 3
Logging: Advanced
When you import shot log files or log directly into a bin, you provide your Avid editing
application with frame-accurate clip information used to capture the source footage. The
logs you create form the foundation for organizing, tracking, storing, retrieving, and
generating lists of edit information throughout your project. The following topics provide
advanced information for preparing log information:
•
Preparing Log Files for Import
•
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
•
Creating Avid Logs
•
Double-Checking Log Files
•
Logging Directly into a Bin
•
Setting the Pulldown Phase
•
Modifying Clip Information Before Capturing
•
Exporting Shot Log Files
For more information, see “Importing Shot Log Files” in the Help or the Basics Guide for
your Avid editing application.
Preparing Log Files for Import
Log files need to conform to the Avid Log Exchange (ALE) format to be imported into your
Avid editing application. You can use the ALE utility included with your system to quickly
convert shot log files.
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
The ALE utility allows you to:
•
Modify the text in a log file.
•
Convert log files of different formats to ALE files. See “Compatible Log Formats” on
page 80.
•
Convert an ALE file to either an ATN or FLX file.
Any options you set in the ALE utility are saved each time you close the ALE utility.
When you are converting an ATN file that contains multiple sections to an ALE file, multiple
ALE files are created. The Avid Log Exchange window displays only the first ALE file
created. The succeeding ALE files are given the same file name with incremental
numbering. For example, the file Nations1.atn is converted to Nations001.ale,
Nations002.ale, Nations003.ale, and so on. The converted output files are stored in the folder
containing the original input file.
Converting Log Files with Avid Log Exchange
To convert a log file to an ALE file:
1. Click the Start button, and select All Programs > Avid > Avid Log Exchange.
The Avid Log Exchange window opens.
2. Do one of the following:
t
If the log file is a Final Cut Pro®, Cinema Tools™, or a Tabbed shot log file, select
File > Import > file type.
t
If the log file is another file type, such as .flx or .atn, select File > Open.
The Open dialog box opens.
3. Double-click the file you want to convert.
The Import Header Options dialog box opens.
4. Select the information you want to appear in the global settings of the .ale file. The
global settings appear at the top of the .ale file.
5. Click OK.
6. Depending on the type of file you are opening, one of the following occurs:
-
76
If the file type is recognized by the ALE utility, the file appears in the Avid Log
Exchange window.
Preparing Log Files for Import
-
If the file does not contain the Windows line-ending format, then the Line Endings
dialog box opens. Select an option from the following table.
Option
Description
Display & Save
Opens the file in the Avid Log Exchange window and changes the file to the
Windows format.
Display Only
Opens the file in the Avid Log Exchange window, but does not change the file.
Ignore
Displays the file as is without changes.
The file appears in the Avid Log Exchange window.
-
If the file type is not recognized, the Select File Type dialog box opens. Select the
type of file you are converting and click OK.
The file appears in the Avid Log Exchange window.
n
For specific information on the various file types, see “Compatible Log Formats” on
page 80.
7. Use the Options menu to select the tracks to include in the Tracks column of the log.
The default track selections are Log V, Log A1, and Log A2.
After you import the log into an Avid bin, the system captures all tracks shown in this
column when batch capturing.
n
The Track selection only works on non-ALE files being converted to ALE format. When ALE
is the incoming format, Track selection does not work.
77
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
8. Select Options > Clean if you want ALE to clean the ALE output file to eliminate
overlapping timecodes for clips. By default, Clean is selected.
When you select Clean, the utility changes the end timecode of a previous event to be
less than that of the following event.
9. If you selected Clean, you can also select Options > Relaxed to prevent the deleting of
events that come earlier in the transfer. Relaxed is not set by default.
For example, if you transfer film footage with a timecode of 2:00:00:00 and then add
some clips at the end with a timecode of 1:00:00:00, Relaxed prevents the deleting of
events that come earlier in the transfer. This occurs when you shoot footage across the
midnight hour, the first half of the film has 24 hours, and the second half has 0 hours.
10. Select Convert > ALE.
The default output selection is the ALE format. This is the required format for import
into an Avid bin.
The Avid Log Exchange window displays the converted ALE file. The converted file has
the same file name as the original file, except the file name extension matches the
converted file format.
11. (Option) Select the original file from the Window menu if you want to convert the file
again using different options.
78
Preparing Log Files for Import
12. Select File > Close.
If you made changes in the editor, a message box opens.
13. Click Yes.
The converted file is stored in the same folder as the original log file.
Using Drag-and-Drop Conversion for Log Files
Use this shortcut to convert files into an ALE file.
n
If the log file is a Final Cut Pro, Cinema Tools, or a Tabbed shot log file, you cannot use
drag-and-drop conversion. Use the procedure in “Converting Log Files with Avid Log
Exchange” on page 76 to convert files of this type.
To convert a log file by using drag-and-drop conversion:
1. Check the options that are set in the ALE utility. See “Converting Log Files with Avid
Log Exchange” on page 76. The current options are used when you perform
drag-and-drop conversion.
2. Create a shortcut for the ALE utility.
3. Open the folder that contains the files you want to convert, positioning the folder so the
Shortcut icon for the ALE utility is visible.
4. Select the files you want to convert.
5. Drag the selected files to the Shortcut icon for the ALE utility, and release the mouse
button.
6. Depending on the type of files you are converting, one of the following occurs:
-
If the file type is recognized by the ALE utility, a message box opens, indicating the
conversion was successful.
-
If the file type is not recognized, the Select File Type dialog box opens. Select the
type of file you are converting and click OK.
A message box opens, indicating the conversion was successful.
79
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
-
If the file type is an ALE file, the ALE Convert Type dialog box opens. Select a file
type for the converted output file and click OK.
A message box opens, indicating the conversion was successful.
7. Click OK to close the message box.
The converted files have the same file names as the original files, except the file name
extension matches the converted file format.
For example, the .ale file name extension is added to the new file names for the Avid
format. The converted files are stored in the folder containing the original log files.
Compatible Log Formats
The following table lists the log formats that can be imported directly or converted for
import using Avid Log Exchange (ALE).
Compatible Log Formats
80
Log Format
Requirements
File Name Extension
AatonBase
Conversion required
.atn or .atl
Avid Log
Import directly
.ale
Cinema Tools
Conversion required
.txt
CMX EDL
Conversion required
.cmx
Evertz®
Conversion required
.ftl
Excalibur
Conversion required
.ale or .flx
Final Cut Pro
Conversion required
.txt
FLEx™
Conversion required
.flx
Keyscope
Conversion required
.ksl
Log Producer™
Conversion required
.llp
Log right
Import directly
.ale
OLE
Conversion required
.odb
Shotlister
Import directly
.ale
Tab Delimited
Conversion required
.txt
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
You can prepare an Avid log on any Windows or Macintosh computer by using a word
processing application or a text editor. You can use the file name extension .txt, but it is not
required.
To ensure accuracy, you must follow the Avid log specifications described in this section.
An Avid log is composed of three sections, in this order:
•
Global headings
•
Standard and custom column headings
•
Data headings
When you create an Avid log, you must follow the order precisely. The tables in these topics
follow this order.
For an example of a simple log file, see “Sample Avid Log” on page 89.
Avid Log Specifications
The following topics contain tables that show how to enter headings and data to create an
Avid log.
The tables use the following conventions:
•
A heading appears in the first column, without angled brackets or square brackets. For
example, FIELD_DELIM is the first global heading.
•
A <supported value> is surrounded by angled brackets. <Alternative supported values>
appear underneath, also in angled brackets. You must enter one of these values. For
example, <29.97> is one of the supported values for the FPS heading; to specify that
value, type 29.97.
•
A <variable data value> is also surrounded by angled brackets, but it is italicized. For
example, <timecode> is the data entry for the Start heading; type the correct timecode,
in the format 08:19:10:00 (or 08;19;10;00, for drop-frame timecode).
•
[Tab] and [Enter] keys are surrounded by square brackets.
•
A column contains the word “Required” if the heading must be included in the log.
•
The final column contains notes about the heading or values.
You can decide not to display a defined heading (including a required heading), except for
Name. Name must always be displayed.
81
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
The maximum number of combined global, standard, and custom headings in a log file is 64.
Global Headings
The global headings must come first in an Avid log file, and you must enter one value for
each heading.
The following table shows the format for the global headings and the supported values for
each heading.
Avid Log Global Headings
GLOBAL HEADINGS: Global headings are case sensitive and must be spelled exactly as shown. Include all
required headings. Other headings are optional but might be necessary for your project. The maximum number
of combined global, standard, and custom headings in a log file is 64.
Heading
[Enter]
Required
This marks the start of the
global headings.
Enter TABS to show that the
file is Tab delimited.
FIELD_DELIM
[Tab]
<TABS>
[Enter]
Required
VIDEO_FORMAT
[Tab]
<NTSC>
<PAL>
[Enter]
Required
FILM_FORMAT
[Tab]
<16mm>
<35mm,3perf>
<35mm,4perf>
[Enter]
AUDIO_FORMAT
[Tab]
<22kHz>
<24kHz>
<44kHz>
<48kHz>
[Enter]
TAPE
[Tab]
<tape name>
[Enter]
82
Audio sampling rate for
digitizing. You can override
this for individual clips.
Required
Name of the videotape reel
you are logging. If you omit
this heading, the file name
becomes the global tape
name. You can override this
for individual clips.
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
Avid Log Global Headings (Continued)
FPS
[Tab]
<23.98>
<24>
<25>
<29.97>
[Enter]
Required
[Enter]
Capture rate is 23.98 fps
(23.978 fps) for NTSC, 24 fps
for NTSC or PAL, 25 fps for
PAL, or 29.97 fps for NTSC.
Press Enter a second time
after entering the FPS value.
This marks the end of the
global headings.
Column Headings
The standard column headings appear after the global headings in the Avid log file.
You do not enter the data for a column heading along with the heading. You enter the data
later, in a separate data section.
You must include the five required standard column headings; they are listed first in the
following table.
You can create your own custom column headings. Enter them after the standard headings
(see the last heading in the following table). To create a custom heading, substitute the
custom heading name for <Your_heading>. You can create several custom headings, as long
as the total of global, standard, and custom headings does not exceed 64.
Avid Log Column Headings
COLUMN HEADINGS: Column headings are case sensitive and must be spelled exactly as shown. Note
that the first five headings are required. Other headings are optional but might be necessary for your
project. This table lists only the column headings that are relevant to shot log files. Some data, such as
Creation Date, is gathered by the system. The following table does not include headings for such data. The
maximum number of combined global, standard, and custom headings in a log file is 64.
Column
[Enter] or
[Return]
Required
Indicates the start of the column headings.
Name
[Tab]
Required
Heading for clip name.
Tracks
[Tab]
Required
Heading for tracks you select for digitizing.
Start
[Tab]
Required
Heading for video timecode of sync point — the
timecode IN for clip. From address track of video.
End
[Tab]
Required
Heading for timecode OUT for clip. From address track
of video.
83
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
Avid Log Column Headings (Continued)
Audio
[Tab]
Heading for the audio resolution (sample rate). If
omitted, the global entry for AUDIO_FORMAT applies.
Auxiliary Ink
[Tab]
Heading for a second ink number used for the clip.
Auxiliary TC1
[Tab]
Heading for auxiliary timecode.
Auxiliary TC2
[Tab]
Heading for auxiliary timecode.
Auxiliary TC3
[Tab]
Heading for auxiliary timecode.
Auxiliary TC4
[Tab]
Heading for auxiliary timecode.
Auxiliary TC5
[Tab]
Heading for auxiliary timecode.
Camera
[Tab]
Heading for the camera used to film this clip. This
feature is used in multicamera shoots.
Camroll
[Tab]
Heading for the camera roll ID containing this clip.
Duration
[Tab]
Heading for timecode Start to timecode End, the length
of the video clip.
FPS
[Tab]
Heading for video frames per second rate for digitizing
the individual clip. If omitted, the global entry applies.
Film TC
[Tab]
Heading for the timecode used on the film.
Ink Number
[Tab]
Heading for the ink number used for the clip.
KN Duration
[Tab]
Heading for the length of the clip, expressed in feet and
frames.
KN End
[Tab]
Heading for the ending key number for the clip.
KN Start
[Tab]
Heading for the starting key number for the clip.
Labroll
[Tab]
Heading for the lab roll ID for the clip. Lab rolls are a
combination of several camera rolls.
Perf
[Tab]
Heading for the film-edge perforations format used for
3-perf projects.
Pullin
[Tab]
Heading for the telecine pulldown of the first frame of
the clip (pulldown phase). Pullin can have the values A,
B, C, or D.
Pullout
[Tab]
Heading for the telecine pulldown of the last frame of
the clip (pulldown phase). Pullout can have the values A,
B, C, or D.
84
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
Avid Log Column Headings (Continued)
Reel #
[Tab]
Heading for the source reel number.
Scene
[Tab]
Heading for the scene number of the clip.
Shoot date
[Tab]
Heading for the date the footage was shot.
Sound TC
[Tab]
Heading for Nagra timecode, Arri® code, and so on, at
the sync point. Syncs with the Start timecode. Required
if tracking the sync sound. Capture rate can be 25 or 30
fps.
Soundroll
[Tab]
Heading for sound roll ID for clip.
TC 24
[Tab]
Heading for 24-fps timecode.
TC 25P
[Tab]
Heading for 25-fps timecode with pulldown.
TC 25
[Tab]
Heading for 25-fps timecode.
TC 30
[Tab]
Heading for 30-fps timecode.
Take
[Tab]
Heading for take ID for clip.
Tape
[Tab]
Heading for source tape ID for the individual clip. If
omitted, the global entry applies.
DESCRIPT
[Tab]
Heading for description of clip.
COMMENTS
[Tab]
Heading for comments about clip.
<Your_heading>
[Tab]
Add any category of information you want. Add as many
headings as you want, but do not use more than a total of
64 global and column headings in the file. Press the Tab
key between each heading. Do not press the Tab key
after the last heading.
[Enter] or
[Return]
[Enter]
Press [Enter] twice (do not press Tab) after the last
heading.
85
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
Data Entries
The data entries come after the Custom column headings. The following table shows the
format for entering data. Enter a line of data in this format for every clip. Be sure to start the
data section for each clip with the word Data [Enter].
Avid Log Data Headings
DATA HEADINGS: The word Data marks the start of the data for each clip.
Data
[Enter]
Required
Enter the word Data to mark the start of the logged clip
entries.
DATA FOR EACH CLIP: Enter a line of data for each clip. Enter the data so it aligns with its column
heading. (The data that goes with the ninth column heading must be the ninth data entry.) Be sure to enter
data for all the required values. To leave a data position unfilled, press the Tab key instead of typing data.
Press Enter at the end of each line. Your Avid system supports up to four audio tracks in imported and
exported logs.
<clip name>
[Tab]
Required
Under Name heading. Enter a clip identifier (32 characters
maximum).
<V>
<VA1>
<VA2>
<VA1A2>
<A1A2>
<A1>
<A2>
[Tab]
Required
Under Tracks heading. Enter the tracks you want captured
for the clip. Enter V for MOS takes. Enter A1, A2, or
A1A2 for wild sound.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Required
Under Start heading. Enter the video timecode for the sync
point, the first frame of the clip. Use colons for
non-drop-frame (for example, 01:00:12:20). Use one or
more semicolons for drop-frame (for example,
01;18;00;02).
<timecode>
[Tab]
Required
Under End heading. Enter the video timecode for the last
frame of the clip.
<22kHz>
<24kHz>
<44kHz>
<48kHz>
[Tab]
Under Audio heading. Enter the audio sampling rate for
this clip only. If omitted, global entry applies.
<inknumber>
[Tab]
Under Auxiliary Ink Number heading. Identify a second
ink number for the start of the clip.
86
Understanding Avid Log Specifications
Avid Log Data Headings (Continued)
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under Auxiliary TC heading. Enter a Nagra timecode,
Arri code, and so on, for the sync point. Syncs with the
Start timecode.
<camera ID>
[Tab]
Under Camera heading. Identify the camera, using letters
or numbers. For multicamera shoots.
<camera roll ID>
[Tab]
Under Camroll heading. Identify the camera roll, using
letters and numbers.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under Duration heading. Enter the length of the video
clip, Start to End.
<23.98>
<24>
<25>
<29.97>
[Tab]
Under FPS heading. Enter the video capture rate for this
clip only. If omitted, the global entry applies. Use 23.98 fps
(23.978 fps) for NTSC, 24 fps for NTSC or PAL, 25 fps for
PAL, or 29.97 fps for NTSC.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under Film TC heading. Identify the timecode used for the
film, usually at 24 fps.
<inknumber>
[Tab]
Under Ink Number heading. Identify the ink number for
the start of the clip.
<keynumber>
[Tab]
Under KN Start heading. Identify the complete key
number for the start of the clip, for example, KU 31 26368903&12.
<keynumber>
[Tab]
Under KN End heading. Identify the key number for the
end of the clip. You need to identify only feet and frames,
for example, 0342&07.
<keynumber>
[Tab]
Under KN Duration heading. Identify the length of the
clip, in feet and frames.
<lab roll ID>
[Tab]
Under Labroll heading. Identify the lab roll, using letters
and numbers.
<1>
<2>
<3>
[Tab]
Under Perf heading. Edit the perf for this clip only.
<A>
[Tab]
<B>
<X> (matchback only)
<C>
<D>
Under Pullin heading. Identify the telecine pulldown of the
first frame of the clip (pulldown phase). NTSC only.
87
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
Avid Log Data Headings (Continued)
<A>
[Tab]
<B>
<X> (matchback only)
<C>
<D>
Under Pullout heading. Identify the telecine pulldown of
the last frame of the clip. NTSC only.
<reel ID>
[Tab]
Under Reel # heading. Identify the reel, using numbers.
<scene ID>
[Tab]
Under Scene heading. Identify the scene, using letters and
numbers.
<shoot date>
[Tab]
Under Shoot Date heading. Identify the date the footage
was shot, in numbers or in letters and numbers.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under Sound TC heading. Identify the sound timecode at
the sync point. Syncs with the Start timecode.
<sound roll ID>
[Tab]
Under Soundroll heading. Identify the sound roll, using
letters and numbers.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under TC 24 heading. Identify the start of the clip for 24p
timecode.
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under TC 25p heading. Identify the start of the clip for 25p
timecode (PAL pulldown).
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under TC 25 heading. Identify the start of the clip for
25-fps timecode (PAL).
<timecode>
[Tab]
Under TC 30 heading. Identify the start of the clip for
30-fps timecode.
<take ID>
[Tab]
Under Take heading. Identify the take, using letters and
numbers.
<source tape ID>
[Tab]
Under Tape heading. Enter the source videotape ID for this
clip only.
<clip description>
[Tab]
Under DESCRIPT heading. Describe the clip.
<clip comments>
[Tab]
Under COMMENTS heading. Comment on the clip.
<information>
[Tab]
Under the headings you created yourself, type the
appropriate information.
[Enter]
Press Enter after the last entry for the clip.
Do not press Tab after the last entry for the clip.
Enter an additional line of data for each remaining clip.
88
Creating Avid Logs
Sample Avid Log
This section contains a sample Avid log for an NTSC video project.
Formatting keys (such as [Tab] and [Enter]) are shown in square brackets.
Heading [Enter]
FIELD_DELIM [Tab] TABS [Enter]
VIDEO_FORMAT [Tab] NTSC [Enter]
AUDIO_FORMAT [Tab] 44kHz [Enter]
TAPE [Tab] 001 [Enter]
FPS [Tab] 29.97 [Enter]
[Enter]
Column [Enter]
Name [Tab] Tracks [Tab] Start [Tab] End [Enter]
[Enter]
Data [Enter]
CU Josh & Mary [Tab] V [Tab] 01:00:00:00 [Tab] 01:15:05:00 [Enter]
CU Josh [Tab] VA1 [Tab] 01:15:06:00 [Tab] 01:20:00:00 [Enter]
Creating Avid Logs
You can use any word processing application or text editor to create Avid logs. However,
you must save the file as a text document (ASCII format).
Windows systems ship with a text editor called WordPad.
To open WordPad:
t
Click the Start button, and select All Programs > Accessories > WordPad.
Mac OS® X systems ship with a text editor called TextEdit.
To open Text Edit:
t
Select Go > Applications, and double-click TextEdit.
To create a text document in TextEdit:
t
Select Format > Make Plain Text.
89
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
When logging manually, you should do the following:
•
Identify the source tape for each shot.
•
Document each clip’s name, start timecode, and end timecode.
This is the minimum information required to capture successfully. You can also add other
information such as comments or auxiliary timecodes. You can make a separate log file for
each videotape, or log clips from several different videotapes in one log.
To create an Avid Log by using a word processor or text editor:
1. Enter shot log information according to the specifications described in “Avid Log
Specifications” on page 81.
2. Save your file as a text file in the Save As dialog box. You can use the file name
extension .txt, but it is not required.
c
The Avid editing application only accepts text files (ASCII format).
After you double-check the log, import it into your Avid editing application. For more
information, see “Importing Shot Log Files” in the Help.
Double-Checking Log Files
When importing shot logs for video, your Avid editing application compares the video
duration to the video out minus the video in. When importing film shot logs, the system
compares the key number out minus the key number in.
If the system detects a discrepancy, it reports the error to the Console and does not bring the
clip into the bin. The best way to ensure that clips are not discarded on import is to
double-check the logs for discrepancies in duration and marks.
n
Open the Console by selecting Tools > Console. For more information, see “Using the
Console Window” on page 70.
Logging Directly into a Bin
You can log clips directly into a bin by using the Capture tool in one of two ways described
in this section:
90
•
Log directly into a bin with an Avid-controlled deck for semiautomated data entry.
•
Log manually during or after viewing of footage offline with a non-Avid-controlled
deck or other source.
Logging Directly into a Bin
Tips for Logging Preroll, Logging Timecode, and Naming Tapes
Observe the following important guidelines for preroll, timecode formats, and naming of
tapes when logging prior to capturing.
Logging Preroll
Be sure to leave adequate preroll with continuous timecode prior to IN points when logging
your tapes. The recommended minimum preroll is 2 seconds for Betacam® playback,
5 seconds for 3/4-inch U-matic® playback, and 6 seconds for DV playback.
n
You set the default preroll for tape playback by using the Preroll menu in the Deck Settings
dialog box. For more information, see “Deck Settings” on page 579.
Logging Timecode
Within an NTSC project, check the timecode format of each tape (drop-frame versus
non-drop-frame timecode) when you are logging without a tape in the deck. Log drop-frame
timecode by using semicolons (;) between the hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. Log
non-drop-frame timecode with colons (:). You can set the timecode format to use in the Deck
Preferences Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Deck Preferences Settings” on
page 581.
n
To change the logged timecode format, select Clip > Modify. For information, see
“Modifying Clip Information Before Capturing” on page 102.
Naming Tapes
When entering tape names in the Capture tool, consider the following:
n
•
Tape names must be alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9). They can include
uppercase and lowercase characters. The maximum length of a name is 32 characters.
•
It is possible to have a single tape listed as several different tapes if you alter the case of
the letters. For example, if you type a single name as TAPE, Tape, and tape on three
different occasions, all three names appear. This can cause significant problems in
keeping track of clips when batch capturing, recapturing, and generating an EDL. Select
a case convention and maintain it throughout a project.
If you want your Avid system to consider master clips as coming from the exact same tape,
you should try to select that tape name from the Select Tape dialog box. If you do not see the
tape you are looking for, but know you have online media from that tape, you should click the
Scan for Tapes button. For more information, see “Logging with Avid-Controlled Decks” on
page 92.
91
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
•
It is important that you devise a naming scheme for your tapes. For example, tapes with
similar names can be easily sorted and viewed together in a bin. However, it can be
difficult to distinguish among numerous tapes with similar names when trying to locate
a specific tape quickly. Name tapes based upon the amount and complexity of your
source material.
•
If you are planning to generate an edit decision list (EDL) for import into an edit
controller for online editing, double-check the controller’s specifications beforehand.
Some edit controllers truncate source tape names to as few as six characters, while
others eliminate characters and truncate to three numbers. Alterations like these at the
EDL stage might cause the system to identify different source tapes with similar names
in the same way, causing you to lose track of source material.
Logging with Avid-Controlled Decks
When you log with a compatible tape deck controlled from within your Avid editing
application, you can automate part of the logging process by using buttons to enter frameaccurate timecode information from the deck. This method is more accurate than manual
entry because timecodes are transferred directly from tape to the bin.
n
For information about connecting a compatible deck to your system, see “Connecting
Peripheral Equipment” in the Help.
To log clips directly into a bin from an Avid-controlled deck:
1. Make sure the deck is properly connected and turned on.
2. Open the bin where you want to store the clips.
92
Logging Directly into a Bin
3. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens. Playback from the deck is displayed in the Client monitor.
Capture/Log Mode button
Mark IN
button
Channel
Selection buttons
Deck Selection
pop-up menu
Source Tape
Display button
n
If you forget to connect and turn on the power to the deck before opening the Capture tool,
you can reinitialize deck control after turning it on by clicking the Deck Selection menu, and
selecting Check Decks.
4. If the Capture tool is not currently in Log mode, click the Capture/Log Mode button
until the LOG icon appears.
5. Click the Deck Selection menu, and select a deck.
For more information, see “Selecting a Deck in the Capture Tool” in the Help.
93
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
6. Insert your tape into the deck.
The Select Tape dialog box opens.
You can select the option “Show other project’s tapes” to display the tape names and
associated project names for all bins that have been opened in the current session.
New tape name
List of
tapes
Show Tapes
option
n
Because the media file database does not open when you start your Avid editing application,
tape names of all online media files do not appear automatically.
n
If the tape name you are searching for does not appear in the Select Tape dialog box, click
the Scan for Tapes button. Tape and project names are listed.
7. Provide the system with a tape name in one of the following ways:
t
Select the name of the tape from the list in the Select Tape dialog box and click OK.
t
Click New if the tape is not in the list. A new tape name line appears in the dialog
box. Type the new name and click OK.
The tape name is displayed in the Capture tool.
n
For guidelines when naming tapes, see “Naming Tapes” on page 91.
A message that the system is waiting for you to mark an IN point is displayed in the
message bar.
94
Logging Directly into a Bin
8. Set either an IN point or an OUT point for the clip you want to log using one of the
following methods:
t
n
If you want to keep the deck running while you log: Start the deck. At the point
where you want to start the clip, click a Mark IN button (you can use either the
Mark IN button in the upper left of the Capture tool or the Mark IN button in the
lower right) or press the F4 key. The deck continues to play.
If you want to pause the deck while you enter a clip name and comments, see “Pausing the
Deck While Logging” on page 96.
t
If you want to cue your source tape to the start or end point: Use the deck
controls in the Capture tool to cue your source tape to the start or end point. Click a
Mark IN button or the Mark OUT button in the lower right of the Capture tool.
t
If you want to log using timecode: If the footage starts at a known IN point or ends
at a known OUT point, type the timecode in the text box next to the Mark IN button
or the Mark OUT button. Then enter the mark by pressing the Go to IN button or the
Go to OUT button, which scans the tape forward to the mark, or by pressing Enter.
After you set the mark, the Mark IN button changes to the Mark OUT and Log button or
the Mark IN and Log button, depending on the first mark you set.
Mark IN and Log
c
Mark OUT and Log
For NTSC film-to-tape transfer or footage downconverted from 1080p/24, you must log
the correct pulldown phase. See “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on page 100.
9. (Option) Enter a clip name and comment in the corresponding text boxes in the Capture
tool.
10. To finish logging the clip, do one of the following:
t
If the deck is running: Click the Mark OUT and Log button or press the F4 key.
The clip is logged into the bin and the deck continues to play.
t
If you want to cue the remaining start or end point: Use the deck controls to
locate the start or end point. Set the remaining IN point or OUT point either by
clicking the Mark OUT and Log button or the Mark IN and Log button. The clip is
logged into the bin.
95
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
t
If you want to log using timecode: Type a timecode for the clip’s IN point, OUT
point, or duration in the timecode text boxes next to the corresponding icon. Then
enter the mark by pressing the Go to IN button or the Go to OUT button, which
scans the tape forward to the mark, or by pressing Enter.To log the clip into the bin,
click the Log Clip button in the upper left of the Capture tool.
The clip name, which is automatically named and numbered by the system, is
highlighted in the bin and ready to be renamed.
11. (Option) Rename the clip by typing a new name in the highlighted area.
n
Consider changing the clip name immediately, because it is easy to forget the contents of
each clip if you are logging many clips. You can, if necessary, accept the clip name and
proceed with the logging process and change the clip names in the bin at a later time.
12. Repeat these steps until you have logged all your clips.
n
While viewing the footage, you can continuously update your marks on-the-fly by clicking
the Mark IN button or the Mark OUT button repeatedly before entering the second mark.
Pausing the Deck While Logging
If the deck is playing while you log clips, you can direct your Avid editing application to
automatically pause the deck after you set an IN point and an OUT point. While the deck is
paused, you can enter the name and comment for the clip you want to log.
To pause the deck while logging:
1. In the General tab of the Capture Settings dialog box, select the “Pause deck while
logging” option.
2. Set up your deck and the Capture tool as described in “Logging with Avid-Controlled
Decks” on page 92.
3. When you reach the point where you want to start the clip, click the Mark IN button in
the upper left of the Capture tool or press the F4 key. The Mark IN button changes to the
Mark OUT button and the deck continues to play.
4. When you reach the point where you want to end the clip, click the Mark OUT button in
the upper left of the Capture tool or press the F4 key again. The Mark OUT button
changes to the Log Clip button, and the deck pauses.
96
Logging Directly into a Bin
5. Type a clip name and comment in the corresponding text boxes in the Capture tool.
6. Click the Log Clip button or press the F4 key.
Your Avid editing application logs the clip in a bin, and the deck starts playing again.
Using a Memory Mark
You can add a memory mark to a particular location on a tape. You can then use the Go to
Memory button to move through the tape to the marked location.
To use a memory mark for a particular location on a tape:
t
Click the Mark Memory button in the Capture tool to mark the location.
t
Click the Go to Memory button to move through the tape to the marked location.
t
Click the Clear Memory button to clear the memory mark.
You can add one mark per tape. The memory mark is not stored on the tape. When you
remove the tape from the deck and insert another tape into the deck, the mark is cleared.
Go to Memory button
Clear Memory button
Mark Memory button
Logging with Non-Avid-Controlled Decks
You can use the Capture tool to log clips directly into a bin from a source that is not
controlled by your Avid editing application. For example, you can log clips from a deck that
is not connected to the system, or from handwritten or printed log information for a tape that
was previously logged but is not currently available.
n
For NTSC projects, when you are logging within the Capture tool, you should leave the deck
empty. If a tape remains in the deck, the system determines drop-frame or non-drop-frame
from that tape whether or not it matches your tape’s timecode format.
97
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
To log clips directly into a bin from a non-Avid-controlled deck:
1. If there is a deck connected to the system, eject the tape from the deck.
2. Double-click Deck Preferences in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Deck Preferences dialog box opens.
3. For NTSC projects, click the “When no tape in deck log as” menu, and select
Non-Drop-Frame or Drop-Frame.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Open the bin where you want to store the clips.
6. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
Capture/Log Mode button
Mark IN
button
Channel
Selection
buttons
Message
bar
Mark IN text
box
Timecode
display
Clear OUT
button
Deck controls
Deck Selection
pop-up menu
Mark OUT
text box
Source Tape Display button
Mark OUT button
Mark IN button
7. Click the Capture/Log Mode button in the Capture tool until the LOG icon appears.
98
Logging Directly into a Bin
8. Click the Source Tape Display button.
A dialog box opens.
9. Click Yes to open the Select Tape dialog box.
10. Double-click the name of the tape in the dialog box, or click New and enter the name of
the tape.
11. Click OK.
12. Select the tracks you want to log, using the Channel Selection buttons in the Capture
tool.
13. Type the start timecode in the Mark IN text box.
14. (Option) Enter a clip name and comment in the corresponding text boxes.
15. Type the end timecode in the Mark OUT text box.
c
For NTSC film-to-tape transfer or footage downconverted from 1080p/24, you must log
the correct pulldown phase. See “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on page 100.
16. Click the Log Clip button.
The clip is logged into the bin. The clip name, which is automatically named and
numbered by the system, is highlighted in the bin and ready to be renamed.
17. (Option) Rename the clip by typing a new name in the highlighted area.
n
Consider changing the clip name immediately, because it is easy to forget the contents of
each clip if you are logging many clips. You can, if necessary, accept the clip name and
proceed with the logging process and change the clip names in the bin at a later time.
18. Repeat these steps until you have logged all your clips.
99
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
Setting the Pulldown Phase
If you are logging or capturing 24-fps sources (film-to-tape transfers, media downconverted
from 1080p/24 footage, or both), you can set the pulldown-to-timecode relationship for a
transferred tape in the 24p Setting dialog box.
For information about the pulldown process, see “Transferring 24-fps Film to NTSC Video”
on page 706.
Set
Pulldown
Phase
option
You set this relationship by selecting the pulldown phase (sometimes called the pulldown
frame or pullin frame), which is the video frame at which the master clip starts. The
pulldown phase is designated A, B, X, C, or D. Film labs and transfer houses typically use
the A frame to start the transfer.
100
Setting the Pulldown Phase
The following illustration shows the relationship between film frames and video frames.
Four film frames
A
B
C
D
Five NTSC video frames (ten fields)
A1
odd
A2
even
B1
odd
B2
even
B3
odd
C1
even
C2
odd
D1
even
D2
odd
D3
even
A
B
X
C
D
The Set Pulldown Phase setting lets you log, batch capture, and capture-on-the-fly more
easily, because the correct pulldown phase of any IN point for a particular tape is
automatically determined.Setting the correct pulldown phase prevents incorrectly captured
clips that appear to stutter when played in 23.976p NTSC projects.
For example, if you set the pulldown phase of 00:00:00:00 as A (indicating that the A frame
is located at timecodes ending in 0 or 5), any timecode you log calculates its pulldown phase
based on the same sync point, regardless of where you set the IN point. If you use the
Capture tool to log a clip that starts at 01:00:10:01, your Avid editing application
automatically enters B in the Pullin column of the bin. If you capture on-the-fly starting at
01:00:10:01 (a B frame), the system begins to capture at the next A frame, in this case,
01:00:10:05.
c
The Set Pulldown Phase feature does not work if you capture from a mark IN.
The pulldown-to-timecode relationship might vary from tape to tape, or within the same
tape, depending on how the footage was transferred. If you find that a tape requires a
different pulldown phase, you can change the setting in the 24p Setting dialog box.
n
For information about fixing an incorrectly logged sync point, see “Modifying the Pulldown
Phase After Capturing” on page 152.
101
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
To set the pulldown phase:
1. Determine the correct pulldown phase for 00:00:00:00 in one of the following ways:
t
If you are capturing film-to-tape transfers, check the transfer log.
t
If you are capturing tapes that have been downconverted from 1080p/24, check
what pulldown frame was set for 00:00:00:00 on the deck that performed the
conversion.
2. Double-click 24p in the Settings list of the Project window.
3. Select the option Set Pulldown Phase of Timecode 00:00:00:00 and then click the menu,
and select the correct pulldown phase (A, B, X, C, D).
4. Click OK.
Modifying Clip Information Before Capturing
You can change or modify the information logged in the bin. This is especially useful if you
find that some of the data is incorrect, or if you need to update the information based on
technical needs, such as varying timecode formats or film specifications.
There are two ways to modify clip information before capturing:
•
You can modify the information directly by clicking in a column and by entering the
new information one field at a time.
•
You can use the Modify command to change selected groups of clips all at once.
For more information, see “Modifying Clip Information” on page 196.
c
Modifying tape names and timecodes affect any key numbers entered for the selected
clips.
Exporting Shot Log Files
You can export a shot log file from your Avid editing application in one of two formats for
making adjustments in a text editor or for importing into another system.
To export a shot log based on clip information in a bin:
1. Open the bin containing the clips you want to export. If necessary, click the Text tab to
display all clip information.
2. Click a Clip icon to select it.
3. Ctrl+click each additional clip you want to export.
102
Exporting Shot Log Files
4. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens with a default file name in the File name text box based
on the file type.
5. Select the Export setting by doing one of the following:
t
If you have previously created an Export setting for exporting shot log files, click
the Export menu, and select the setting. Then, go to step 10.
For information on creating Export settings, see “Customizing Export Setting” in
the Help.
t
If you want to review or edit Export settings, go to step 6.
6. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
7. Click the Export As menu, and select one of the following:
n
t
Select Avid Log Exchange to export the selected bin as a shot log file that complies
with ALE specifications. For information about Avid Log Exchange, see “Preparing
Log Files for Import” on page 75.
t
Select Tab Delimited to export the selected bin as a tab-delimited ASCII text file.
ALE and tab-delimited files include information for master clips and subclips only.
Information for other objects, such as group clips, sequences, and precomputes, is not
included.
8. To modify an existing setting, select Save.
9. To save the setting with a new name, select Save As and type a name in the dialog box
that opens.
The Export Setting name is added to the list of formats available from the Export dialog
box.
10. Click Save to close the Export As dialog box.
11. (Option) Change the file name. In most cases, keep the default file name extension.
12. Select the destination folder for the file and click Save.
The file is exported and appears at the selected destination.
103
Chapter 3 Logging: Advanced
To export an entire bin:
1. Ctrl+click selected clips to deselect them, so that nothing is selected in the bin.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export Bin As dialog box opens.
3. Click the Export Bin As menu, select the appropriate option, and click OK.
A shot log of only the master clips in the bin is created.
104
Advanced Capture Settings
Chapter 4
Capturing Media: Advanced
Capturing is the process of creating digital media from videotape or audio input. When you
capture, you convert source material from videotape into master clips that contain reference
information. You also create associated media files that contain the digital audio and video.
The following topics provide advanced information about capturing:
•
Advanced Capture Settings
•
Understanding Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame Timecode
•
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced
•
Preparing for Video Input: Advanced
•
Special Capture Procedures
•
Understanding DV Capture Offset
•
Capturing DV Material with Offset
•
Delaying Audio
•
Capturing in Satellite Mode or No Device Control
•
Setting a Timed Capture
•
Capturing to the Timeline
•
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
•
Modifying the Pulldown Phase After Capturing
•
DV and HDV Scene Extraction
•
Support for Panasonic VariCam
For basic information about capturing, see “Capturing Media: Basics” in the Help or the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Advanced Capture Settings
Capture settings include options for capturing, batch capturing, auto capturing, capturing to
multiple media files, DV or HDV scene extraction, and setting key commands. For basic
capture settings, see “Selecting Settings for Capture” in the Help. This section includes
information about advanced capture settings.
105
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
For reference information about all settings in the Capture Settings dialog box, see “Capture
Settings” on page 569.
Capturing Across Timecode Breaks
If the tape you are capturing contains breaks in the timecode, there are two settings in the
General tab of the Capture Settings dialog box you can use to capture across the timecode
breaks:
•
Preroll method
By default, your Avid editing application uses the Best Available preroll method, see
“Selecting the Preroll Method” on page 106. If you know the timecode contains breaks,
you can select Best Available Control Track.
•
Capture across timecode breaks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application begins capturing a new
master clip at each timecode break. Select this option when you are performing an
unattended batch capture or autocapture. Deselect this option if you plan to capture the
entire tape as a single clip by capturing to multiple media files. See “Capturing to
Multiple Media Files” on page 108.
To select settings for capturing across timecode breaks:
1. Double-click Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Capture Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Select the preroll method. See “Selecting the Preroll Method” on page 106.
4. Select the “Capture across timecode breaks” option.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the options.
Selecting the Preroll Method
The Preroll Method menu in the General tab of the Capture Settings dialog box allows you
to capture more efficiently when a source tape contains timecode breaks.
To set the preroll method:
1. Double-click Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Capture Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Click the Preroll Method menu, and select a method from the options described in the
following table.
106
Advanced Capture Settings
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the options.
Preroll Method
Description
Best Available
Your Avid editing application first checks the tape for timecode to use for preroll.
•
If there is no timecode, or not enough timecode, the system uses the control track
for preroll.
•
If there is not enough control track for preroll, the system adjusts the specified
preroll time to accommodate the amount of valid control track available.
After the system adjusts the preroll to the individual shot, it returns to using the
user-specified preroll time until it needs to adjust the time again.
•
If the adjusted preroll time is too short to sync lock at the IN point, the system
does not capture the shot and displays an error message.
Use this method to capture material as automatically as possible. As the system
makes multiple attempts to preroll, this method is slower at times but almost always
performs the preroll without interruption.
Standard Timecode
Your Avid editing application uses timecode to determine the preroll point.
If there is a not enough consecutive timecode (for example, if there is a break in the
timecode), the system does not capture the shot and displays an error message.
Use this method if you know the timecode is consecutive or if you want to determine
if there are timecode breaks.
Best Available Control Your Avid editing application uses the control track to determine the preroll point.
Track
•
If there is not enough control track for preroll, the system adjusts the specified
preroll time to accommodate the amount of valid control track available.
After the system adjusts the preroll to the individual shot, it returns to using the
user-specified preroll time until it needs to adjust the time again.
•
If the adjusted preroll time is too short to sync lock at the IN point, the system
does not capture the shot and displays an error message.
Use this method if you know there are timecode breaks and want to capture material
as automatically as possible. Because the system does not use timecode, it might
Standard Control Track Your Avid editing application uses the control track to determine the preroll point.
If there is a break in the control track, the system stops capturing and displays an
error message.
Use this method if you know the control track is continuous or if you want to
determine if there are breaks in the control track.
107
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Capturing to Multiple Media Files
You can capture video and audio to multiple media files across multiple drives. MXF is
automatically captured to multiple files; OMF is captured to multiple files when you set an
option in the Capture Settings dialog box.
Capturing to multiple media files has the following advantages:
•
You can create longer clips whose media files would otherwise exceed the file size
limitation of 2 GB.
•
You can group all drives with the multiple file options, enabling the system to capture
long clips continuously; for example, satellite feeds.
•
The system makes more efficient use of drive space, particularly when capturing
long clips.
To capture video or audio to multiple OMF media files:
1. Verify that OMF is selected in the Media Type tab of the Media Creation dialog box.
2. Double-click Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
3. Click the OMF Media Files tab.
4. In the OMF Media Files tab, select the option “Capture to multiple files.”
n
For information about other options, see “Capture Settings: OMF Media Files Tab” on
page 573.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the options.
6. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
7. To capture to multiple files across drives, click the Target Drive menu in the Capture
tool, and select Change Group.
The Drive Group dialog box opens.
108
Advanced Capture Settings
8. Ctrl+click multiple drives to include in the capturing session, or click the All button to
select all drives.
n
If you click Clear, all selections are removed. You must select at least one drive before you
can click OK to exit the dialog box.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes.
10. Proceed with capturing.
c
For media file management purposes, any clip whose media exceeds the 2-GB limit has
more than one media file associated with it.
n
For more information on managing media files, see “Managing Media Files: Basics” in the
Help.
General Settings for Capture
The General Settings dialog box (accessed through the Settings list of the Project window)
includes the following options that are relevant to capture.
•
Project Type: The top portion of the dialog box displays the project type (NTSC or
PAL) and other useful information such as the type of film used as source media.
•
NTSC Has Setup: This option applies to standard NTSC format and is selected by
default. If the source footage is in the NTSC-EIAJ format standard (used primarily in
Japan), deselect NTSC Has Setup.
For information about other settings in the General Settings dialog box, see “General
Settings” on page 616.
109
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Settings for Film and 24p Projects
The following settings are important when you are capturing video transferred from film or
capturing 24p video. You should specify these settings for film or 24p projects immediately
after you create a new project and before capturing. For information about other film
settings, see “24p Settings” on page 559.
•
110
Video Pulldown Cadence: allows you to specify how the application handles pulldown
frames:
-
Video rate, no pulldown: Select this option when capturing 24-fps footage that was
transferred MOS (roughly translated as “without sound”) to 30 fps by speeding up
the film, and the audio was brought into the Avid system separately at 100 percent
of the actual speed.
-
Standard 2:3:2:3 pulldown: Select this option when capturing 24-fps footage that
was transferred to 30 fps by duplicating frames (pulldown) and the audio is
synchronized to the picture.
Advanced Capture Settings
•
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown: Select this option when using native DV editing with
capture over Firewire.
Set Pulldown Phase of Timecode allows you to set a default pulldown phase for a 24p
NTSC project. See “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on page 100.
Disabling Video Resolutions
To simplify the options for media creation, you can restrict the resolutions available for
capturing, rendering, or importing. To disable resolutions, you need to type the resolutions
into a text file. If you disable resolutions for media creation, you can still play, export, or
perform a digital cut in those resolutions.
To disable resolutions:
1. Select Tools > Media Creation.
The Media Creation dialog box opens.
2. Click one of the tabs that includes a Resolutions menu, and note the exact spelling of
each resolution you want to disable.
3. On the desktop, click the Start menu, and then select All Programs > Accessories >
Notepad.
n
Do not use Wordpad. It introduces characters that the application cannot recognize.
111
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
4. Type each resolution you want to disable on a separate line. Do not include OMF® or
MXF.
n
n
The text of the resolution has to exactly match the text in the Media Creation dialog box. If
you want to disable DV 25, for example, you need to type DV 25 411 with DV in capital
letters.
Do not disable all resolutions supported by the editing application. You need to keep one
resolution available.
5. Name and save the file:
a.
Select File > Save As.
b.
Type DisabledRes in the File Name text box.
c.
Navigate to Program Files > Avid > Avid editing application.
d. Click Save and close Notepad.
6. If a project is open, close the Project window and open the project again.
Your Avid editing application reads the DisabledRes.txt file when it opens a project and
removes the listed resolutions for all projects and all users.
To enable the resolutions you disabled:
t
112
Navigate to the location of the DisabledRes.txt file and delete it.
Understanding Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame Timecode
Understanding Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame
Timecode
Timecode is an electronic indexing method that denotes hours, minutes, seconds, and frames
that have elapsed on a videotape. For example, a timecode of 01:03:30:10 denotes a frame
that is marked at 1 hour, 3 minutes, 30 seconds, and 10 frames.
NTSC video (the video format used mainly in the United States) uses one of two formats:
drop-frame timecode and non-drop-frame timecode. Drop-frame (DF) timecode is designed
to match the NTSC scan rate of 29.97 frames per second (fps). Two frames of timecode are
dropped every minute except for the tenth minute. No video frames are actually dropped.
Drop-frame timecode is indicated by semicolons between the digits; for example,
01;00;00;00.
Non-drop-frame (NDF) timecode tracks NTSC video at a rate of 30 fps and is indicated by
colons between the digits; for example, 01:00:00:00. Non-drop-frame timecode can be
easier to work with, but does not provide accurate timing for NTSC broadcast.
For example, a typical 1-hour show uses 52 minutes of video. If your program ends at
01:52:00:00 (non-drop-frame), and it is broadcast at 29.97 fps, it will last 94 frames too long
(approximately 3 seconds). The final credits could be cut off.
The following illustration compares the two types of timecode at the 1-minute mark. No
frames are actually dropped.
Non-drop-frame
timecode
01:00:59:28
01:00:59:29
01:01:00:00
01:01:00:01
01:01:00:02
01;00;59;28
01;00;59;29
01;01;00;02
01;01;00;03
01;01;00;04
Drop-frame
timecode
PAL video (the video format used in many countries other than the United States) uses a
scan rate of 25 fps. Timecode is indicated by colons. There is no need for drop-frame
timecode in PAL video.
113
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
You set the default timecode format for logging clips in the Deck Preferences dialog box.
See “Deck Preferences Settings” on page 581. You set the default starting timecode in the
General Settings dialog box. See “General Settings” on page 616. In both cases, you can
select drop or non-drop.
You can change the starting timecode of a sequence or, for NTSC projects, the type of
timecode. See “Changing the Sequence Name and Timecode” in the Help.
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced
Before capturing, you need to prepare the audio for input. The advanced audio input features
include creating your own tone media, setting analog and microphone input options, and
adjusting the mix, volume, and pan values with the Passthrough Mix tool. These features are
described in this section.
Creating Tone Media
You can create your own tone media as a master clip for editing directly into sequences.
To create tone media:
1. Open a bin.
2. Select Tools > Audio tool.
3. Click the PH (Peak Hold) menu in the Audio tool, and select Create Tone Media.
The Create Tone Media dialog box opens.
4. Set the appropriate calibration tone parameters for the project. You can also use the
default output tone of –20 dB (digital scale) with a 1000-Hz signal.
n
If you set the tone media frequency to 0, the system generates random noise. Also, a value of
–777 generates a tone sweep.
5. Select the number of tracks of tone you want to create (up to 8 tracks).
6. Click the menus, and select a target bin for the tone master clip and a target drive for the
tone media file.
7. Click OK.
After a few seconds, the media file is created and a master clip appears in the target bin.
The default name reflects the options you selected. You can rename the clip by typing a
new name.
114
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced
Using the Passthrough Mix Tool
The Passthrough Mix tool allows you to select the mix and adjust the volume and pan values
of the source audio that you monitor. You can adjust the mix, volume, and pan values of
multiple monitored channels, controlling either individual channels manually or several
channels simultaneously by ganging them together.
n
The Passthrough Mix tool adjusts monitored audio only and has no effect on the recorded
audio signal. You can adjust volume levels within a clip in the Timeline after you record
audio by using Audio Gain Automation. For information, see “Using the Audio Mixer Tool”
in the Help.
To open the Passthrough Mix tool:
1. Double-click Audio Project in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Audio Project Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Input tab.
3. Click the Passthrough Mix Tool button.
The Passthrough Mix tool opens.
n
You can also open the Passthrough Mix tool by clicking the Passthrough Mix Tool button in
the Capture tool or the Audio Punch-In tool. For more information, see “Recording VoiceOver Narration Using Audio Punch-in” on page 393.
Resizing the Passthrough Mix Tool
You can use the Number of Mix Panes button to change the display from 4 tracks to 8 tracks.
When you select 4 tracks, a button appears that allows you to display the first 4 or last 4
enabled tracks. With the tool minimized, you can continue to adjust levels by selecting a
track and typing values by using the numeric keypad on the keyboard or by typing a value in
the Volume Level display.
Monitoring Audio with the Passthrough Mix Tool
When you record, you can monitor the mix, volume, and pan values of audio channels with
the Passthrough Mix tool.
The Passthrough Mix tool adjusts monitored audio only and has no effect on the recorded
audio signal.
115
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
To adjust audio in the Passthrough Mix tool:
1. Double-click Audio Project in the Settings list.
The Audio Project Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Input tab.
3. Click the Passthrough Mix Tool button.
The Passthrough Mix tool opens.
4. Switch the Input Mix Mode button to select a type of input:
n
-
Select Stereo Mix to mix audio channels to a stereo pair. Use the Stereo Mix Tracks
menu to specify which stereo pair to use.
-
Select Direct Mix to send the input signal to its corresponding output channel.
In Direct Mix mode, the Pan Value display and pop-up sliders at the bottom of the
Passthrough Mix tool are replaced by Channel Menu buttons.
5. Select the audio channel to be adjusted by doing one of the following:
n
t
Click the Channel Selection button for the appropriate audio channel.
t
In Direct Out mode, click the Channel Menu button, and select a channel from the
menu.
You can select only channels that exist in the source audio.
6. Adjust the volume as needed. You can adjust the volume of multiple channels by
clicking the appropriate Gang button. See “Changing an Audio Level in the Passthrough
Mix Tool” on page 116.
7. Adjust the pan values as needed. See “Adjusting Pan Values in the Passthrough Mix
Tool” on page 117.
Changing an Audio Level in the Passthrough Mix Tool
To change an audio level value in the audio panel in the Passthrough Mix tool, do one
of the following:
t
Click a number along the vertical edge of the Volume Level slider.
t
Click the Volume Level slider, and type a value.
Values are cumulative until you press Enter. For example, if you want to enter the
value 12, type it. However, if you type 1 and then want to change the value to 2,
press Enter before typing the 2.
t
116
Click the Volume Level slider, and drag the slider to a new position.
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced
t
Click the Volume Level display, and type a value.
t
Alt+click the Volume Level slider to reset the value to 0 dB.
Adjusting Pan Values in the Passthrough Mix Tool
To adjust the pan values in the audio panel of the Passthrough Mix tool:
t
Click the Pan Value display to reveal the pop-up slider, and then drag the slider to a new
position.
Pan Value
display
Slider
Changing the Audio Hardware Calibration Setting
By default, the Avid editing application is calibrated for analog 0 Volume Unit (VU) to be
digital –20 dBFS, which matches the default calibration of the Avid Adrenaline hardware.
You can use the Audio Project Settings dialog box to change your default audio hardware
calibration if necessary. However, if you change the application’s default, you must
recalibrate your audio hardware to match. If the settings do not match, the analog VU
(volume unit) scale in the Audio tool displays incorrect values, and the 0 VU display appears
in red.
To change the audio hardware calibration setting:
1. Double-click Audio Project in the Settings list of the Project window.
2. Click the Hardware tab.
3. Click the HW Calibration menu, and select a new default hardware calibration setting:
–14 dBFS, –18 dBFS, or –20 dBFS.
A message box opens.
117
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
4. Click OK.
5. Change the calibration of the audio hardware, as described in the following sections.
Calibrating Audio Input Channels
To calibrate input channels for the Avid Adrenaline:
1. Select the desired audio hardware calibration setting, as described in “Changing the
Audio Hardware Calibration Setting” on page 117.
2. Connect a sine wave generator that can produce a 1-kHz tone, +4 dB @ 0 VU to XLR
channel 1 of the Avid Adrenaline.
3. Send a 1-kHz tone into channel 1.
4. In the Input tab of the Audio Project Settings dialog box, select XLR as the Input
source.
5. In the Audio tool, click the In/Out toggle buttons for channel 1 to display I for input.
You should see a level in the meter display.
6. Select Calibrate from the PH (Peak Hold) Menu button in the Audio tool.
The Audio tool changes to Calibrate mode: the scales display a range of approximately
2 dB, and the meters indicate levels within this range.
Peak Hold
Menu button
Indicates the hardware
calibration value set in
the Hardware tab in
the Audio Project
Settings dialog box
The Volume Unit scale
varies, displaying a custom
reference level setting,
+1 dB above and –1 dB
below.
7. Adjust the channel 1 input level by inserting a screwdriver into the Channel 1 trim pot
(labeled Gain) on the Avid Adrenaline and turning it until the Audio tool’s on-screen
meter reaches 0 VU.
The input channel is now calibrated.
8. Repeat this procedure for each input channel.
118
Preparing for Audio Input: Advanced
To return to the default Audio tool display:
t
Click the Peak Hold Menu button, and select Calibrate.
Calibrating Audio Output Channels
If the input channels for the Avid Adrenaline are calibrated correctly, you can use the input
channels to calibrate the output channels.
To calibrate output channels for the Avid Adrenaline:
1. Make sure the audio I/O device is calibrated properly for input. See “Calibrating Audio
Input Channels” on page 118.
2. Connect two output channels to two different input channels. For example, connect
output channels 1 and 2 to input channels 3 and 4.
3. Click the PH (Peak Hold) menu in the Audio tool, and select Set Calibration Tone.
4. Click the In/Out toggle buttons to display I for the channels you are using for input, for
example, 3 and 4. Click the In/Out toggle buttons to display O for the channels you are
calibrating, for example, 1 and 2.
5. Click the PH menu, and select Calibrate.
6. Click the PH menu, and select Play Calibration Tone.
7. Adjust the Avid Adrenaline trim pots (labeled Gain) on the output channels (1 and 2) to
0 VU, using the meters of the input channels (3 and 4) as your guide.
8. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
Using the Console Window to Check Audio Levels
Once you have played back audio through the Audio tool, you can use the Console window
to view a list of precise information about the peak levels.
To check peak levels in the Console:
1. Select Tools > Audio Tool.
The Audio tool opens.
2. Click the RP (Reset Peak) button to clear the system’s record of the most recent
maximum peaks.
3. Play a sequence or portion of the sequence.
4. After playing back the audio, open the Console window by selecting Tools > Console.
119
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
5. In the Console command line, type:
DumpMaxPeaks
6. Press Enter.
A list of peak values appears in the Console window.
Preparing for Video Input: Advanced
Before capturing, you need to prepare the video for input. The advanced video input features
include limitations when using a consumer deck, video input settings, and saving video
settings.
Limitation When Using Consumer Decks or Decks
Without Time-Base Correctors
This topic describes some difficulties you might encounter when working with consumer
video decks and tapes (such as VHS) or decks that do not provide time-base correction or
stabilized timing on their outputs. Workarounds are described when available.
Capturing from Unstable Time-Base Sources
The subsystem used in your Avid system is optimized for use with modern, broadcastquality VTRs that contain time-base correctors (TBCs). When presented with a stable input,
the subsystem captures that video by using a high-quality, very-low-jitter clock reference.
However, some sources do not include an internal TBC (including various S-Video decks or
composite VHS, 3/4-inch, or Hi8™ decks). In some cases, due either to the deck
performance or the deck performance in conjunction with a particular videotape, the
subsystem will not lock to non-TBC sources. As a result, the image might be unstable or
might have reduced or missing color, or syncing might not be possible at all.
If you select the Signal Lock TV button in the Video Input tool, a wider bandwidth (more
closely tracking time-base) improves the range of syncing capability. In this mode, the video
input levels are set by automatic gain control. Not all of the Video Input tool’s adjustment
sliders will operate, and the video might be slightly softened, but the syncing in most cases is
more reliable and more stable. The overall image quality is not as high as with normal
operation.
120
Preparing for Video Input: Advanced
n
The Video Input tool is not available on all models. If your model does not have the Video
Input tool, the Avid editing application sets the default input options automatically.
If you continue to experience difficulty with a source that does not include an internal TBC,
Avid recommends the video signal be processed through an external TBC for maximum
image quality. For more information on time-base correctors, contact your Avid Reseller.
Green Line in VHS Video
Some VHS tape decks do not output the full 240 lines of video normally included in the
VHS format. As a result, after you capture from a device such as a VCR, a green line might
appear at the bottom of the monitors in your Avid editing application.
This line is at the bottom of the visible area of the picture, and is not seen in a standard
consumer monitor in most cases. If you use the video in a circumstance in which the line is
visible, you can remove it by cropping the bottom edge of the picture.
Saving Video Input Settings
You can save the settings for an individual tape each time you calibrate bars. Saved settings
are restored each time you select the same tape for recapturing clips.
The following are the Video Input settings that are saved and restored:
n
n
•
Level adjustments made with the sliders
•
Selection status of the SignalLock or 100% Bars options
Video Input settings do not restore the source format (Composite, Component, S-Video, DV,
or SDI). Instead, the source format you select in the Video Input tool remains the default for
that project until you select another format from within the project. This allows you to
establish a new format on a project basis when moving between systems, or from the offline
to the online phase.
The Video Input tool is not available on all models. If your model does not have the Video
Input tool, your Avid editing application sets the default input options automatically.
To save the Calibration settings for a tape:
1. After calibrating as described in “Calibrating Video Input” in the Help, click the
Settings menu in the Video Input tool, and select Save As.
The View Name dialog box opens.
2. Accept the default name (matching the tape name), or type a new name for the settings.
c
If you do not use a name that matches the tape name, the system does not recall the
setting automatically the next time you load the tape.
121
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
3. Click OK.
Whenever you batch capture or select a tape name during capturing, the system recalls the
saved settings as follows:
n
•
The system looks for a Tape setting with the same name as the tape. If the setting exists,
the system recalls it.
•
If no matching Tape setting exists, the system looks for a setting labeled “Default” and
loads that setting. For information on customizing this default setting, see “Saving a
Custom Default Setting for the Video Input Tool” on page 122.
•
If no matching Tape setting or “Default” setting exists, the Video Input tool is left in its
prior state (with the most recent settings applied during the session).
Tape settings and the Default setting are Project settings, and are available to the current
project only.
Saving a Custom Default Setting for the Video Input Tool
You can create a default setting that is recalled by the system whenever you load a new tape
or when there is no Tape setting that matches a loaded tape.
Whenever you mount a new tape that does not have its own setting, the system recalls these
default settings.
n
The Video Input tool is not available on all models. If your model does not have the Video
Input tool, your Avid editing application sets the default input options automatically.
To create a customized default Video Input Tool setting:
1. Select Tools > Video Input Tool.
The Video Input tool opens.
2. Adjust the Calibration settings, as described in “Calibrating Video Input” in the Help.
3. Click the Settings menu in the Video Input tool, and select Save As.
The View Name dialog box opens.
4. Type Default, and click OK. (You must use this spelling and initial capitalization.)
Adjusting Video Levels for Tapes Without Color Bars
Color bars are the best way to set the video levels consistently. However, if you have a tape
or series of tapes with no color bars, you might need to adjust levels by using the internal
Waveform and Vectorscope monitors.
n
122
Calibrate your Client monitor before making these adjustments.
Using Function Keys When Capturing
The following table describes the criteria for adjusting video levels by eye, without color
bars.
Video Level Adjustment Criteria
Color
Criteria
Blacks
Should not seem flat and lacking detail. Find a series of frames in the footage that include
black areas. Shadows work better than black objects. Blacks should fall around 7.5 IRE for
NTSC, 0 IRE for NTSC-EIAJ, or 0.3 V for PAL in the Waveform monitor.
Whites
Should not be washed out or lacking detail. Find a series of frames in the footage that include
white areas. Bright, well-lit regions work better than white objects. Whites should peak at
around 100 IRE for NTSC-EIAJ or 1.0 V for PAL in the Waveform monitor.
Skin colors
Should be realistic. Find a series of frames in the footage that include skin colors. Skin colors
should fall generally between the target boxes for the red and yellow vectors in the
Vectorscope monitor.
Pure yellows
Should be a rich gold and not reddish or greenish in tone. Find a pure yellow, and adjust both
hue and saturation as necessary.
Chroma
Should not exceed 110 or fall below –120 in the Vectorscope monitor.
Using Function Keys When Capturing
The following table lists the default Function key mappings that are available when the
Capture tool is active. Capture mode overrides any other functions mapped to these keys.
The table lists the default functions. You can change the functions in the Keys tab of the
Capture Settings dialog box.
c
Capturing on-the-fly can cause incorrect pulldown and stuttering playback. Do not use
the F1 or F2 keys for capturing 24-fps film that has been transferred to NTSC video
unless you have set the correct pulldown phase. See “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on
page 100.
Function Keys Available When Capturing
Press
To
F1
Mark the beginning of the subclip while capturing.
F2
Mark the end of the subclip while capturing.
123
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Function Keys Available When Capturing (Continued)
Press
To
F3, F5 through F12
Add a locator to the current frame while capturing. Each
Function key adds a different color locator. See “Adding
Locators On-the-Fly” on page 127.
F4
In Capture mode, start the capture process. During
capture, end a comment for a locator.
In Log mode, press once to mark an IN point. Press again
to mark an OUT point to log the clip in the bin.
The Keys tab in the Capture Settings window allows you to customize the commands
mapped to the function keys on your keyboard that are used while capturing.
n
The functions described here apply only in Capture mode. When you are not in Capture
mode, function keys operate with their default mappings. For more information on using
function keys as keyboard shortcut keys, see ¨Shortcuts¨ in the Help.
To change function key commands for capturing media:
1. Double-click Capture in the Settings tab in the Project window, and click the Keys tab.
2. Click the key you want to map, and then select the new function from the menu.
124
Special Capture Procedures
n
The Start Capture function is not included in the menu. F4 always starts capture. You can
map an additional function to F4 to use after capture starts; End Locator Entry is the
default.
3. Click OK.
Special Capture Procedures
This section describes several optional procedures you can use during the capture process.
Logging Errors to the Console Window
The Console window is useful for logging errors that occur during the capture process.
To open the Console window:
t
n
Select Tools > Console.
For more information about the Console, see “Using the Console Window” on page 70.
Consider the following when selecting whether to log errors to the Console during capture:
•
If the option “Log errors to the console and continue capturing” is selected on the Batch
tab of the Capture Settings dialog box, when you batch capture and the system
encounters an error, it aborts the clip, enters error comments into the Console, and
continues capturing the next clip.
•
If the option “Log errors to the console and continue capturing” is not selected, a
message appears and the system pauses if an error occurs while capturing. If this
happens, do the following:
a.
Click Try Again to retry the operation. The clip might capture successfully.
b.
If the clip does not capture the second time you try, the error message appears again.
Click Next Clip to bypass the clip that caused the error, and continue batch
capturing any remaining clips, or click Abort to cancel the entire batch capturing
process.
Note all errors, messages, and steps you have taken. Try to troubleshoot the problem on your
own, or contact Avid Customer Support.
125
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Creating Subclips While Capturing
Subclips are marked sections of a longer master clip you can view and edit like any other
object in a bin. This section describes two methods for creating subclips while capturing: by
creating subclips on-the-fly and by creating timed subclips. The maximum number of
subclips you can generate while capturing a clip is 100.
n
For information about creating subclips after capturing, see “Creating Subclips” in the
Help.
When subclips are created in 24p or 25p projects, they are always created as “hard” subclips.
This means you cannot trim past the edges of the subclip when adjusting transitions and
edits. Hard subclips prevent film-tracking information errors for editing and cut lists.
To create a subclip on-the-fly:
1. Start capturing.
2. At the point where you want the subclip to begin, press the F1 key.
This highlights the subclip IN point.
3. While you capture, you can type a name for the subclip. Press the Tab key to type
comments about the clip.
4. When you want the subclip to end, press the F2 key.
This highlights the subclip OUT point.
n
You can press the F2 key repeatedly as you search for the end point of the subclip. The
system accepts the last occurrence as the end point. You can also press the F1 key at any
time before pressing F2 again to remove the previous subclip marks and to start a new
subclip IN point.
The subclip appears in the target bin when you stop capturing.
When capture is complete, a number appears between the subclip indicators to show the
number of subclips created.
c
n
126
For NTSC film-to-tape transfers, you must log the correct pulldown phase before you
create subclips. For more information, see “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on page 100.
If your Avid editing system is an asset manager client in an OMF workgroup, and you are
capturing with shared volume segmentation (“chunking”) enabled, see your Avid Unity
documentation for details on the capture procedure.
Special Capture Procedures
n
If your Avid editing system is an asset manager client in an MXF/AAF workgroup, you
cannot create subclips while capturing media using the Capture tool. However, you can use
the Frame Chase editing feature when capturing media from a supported external device
using Avid Interplay Transfer. For more information about using Frame Chase editing, see
“Using Frame Chase Editing” in Avid Interplay Best Practices.
Creating Timed Subclips While Capturing
You can capture a subclip of a preset duration. The Keys tab in the Capture Settings window
allows you to specify the duration of a subclip that is automatically created when you press a
function key mapped to the Timed Subclip button. IN and OUT points are created at
predetermined intervals before and after the point you mark in the source media by pressing
the Timed Subclip button.
To set the duration of a timed subclip:
1. Double-click Capture in the Settings tab in the Project window, and click the Keys tab.
The Keys tab in the Capture Settings window appears.
2. Enter the time in minutes and seconds to be used by the timed subclip in the Before
mark (M:SS) and the After mark (M:SS) text boxes.
3. Click OK.
To create a timed subclip:
1. Start capturing.
2. At the point where you want to start a timed subclip, press the mapped function key.
This highlights the subclip IN and OUT points, and the subclip is created automatically.
3. While the system is capturing, you can type a name for the subclip. Press the Tab key to
type comments about the clip.
Adding Locators On-the-Fly
Locators mark a single frame within a clip or sequence so you can attach a note or find the
frame at a later time. This section describes a shortcut method of adding locators on-the-fly
while capturing. When the Capture tool is active, eight colored locators are mapped to eight
Function keys on the keyboard: F5–F12. Also, the End Locator Entry key is mapped to F4.
The locators override any other functions mapped to these keys.
127
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
To add a locator to a frame while capturing:
1. Start capturing.
2. Watch the playback of the footage in the monitor, and press one of the locator keys
(F5–F12) when you see the shot or frame with which you want to associate a locator.
A default name and number for the locator appear in the Name text box in the Capture
tool.
3. While you capture, you can add comments for the locator. Press the Tab key to move the
cursor to the Comments text box, and type your comment.
4. When you finish adding your comment for the locator, press the F4 key (End Locator
Entry).
The Name and Cmnt (Comment) text boxes revert to association with the master clip or
the subclip being captured.
Locator comments appear in the Locators window. To see the locator comments, open the
Locators window as described in “Viewing Locators in the Locators Window” on page 298.
n
n
If your Avid editing system is an asset manager client in an OMF workgroup, and you are
capturing with shared volume segmentation (“chunking”) enabled, see your Avid Unity
documentation for details on the capture procedure.
If your Avid editing system is an asset manager client in an MXF/AAF workgroup, you
cannot create locators while capturing media using the Capture tool. However, you can use
the Frame Chase editing feature when capturing media from a supported external device
using Avid Interplay Transfer. For more information about using Frame Chase editing, see
“Using Frame Chase Editing” in Avid Interplay Best Practices.
For more information about locators, see “Using Locators” on page 292.
Naming a New Tape from the Keyboard
You can name a new tape without taking your hands off the keyboard.
To create a new tape name by using a keystroke in Capture mode:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Put a tape in the deck
t
Click the Source Tape Display button.
The Select Tape dialog box opens.
128
Special Capture Procedures
3. Press Ctrl+N.
A new tape name text box opens.
4. Type the new tape name.
5. Press Enter to register the tape name.
6. Press Enter or click OK to close the Select Tape dialog box.
Controlling Decks from the Keyboard
You can use the J-K-L keys to control a deck from the Capture tool, Digital Cut tool, and
Deck Controller window.
The J-K-L keys work the same as they do in the Source/Record monitor. See “Playing
Footage with the J-K-L Keys (Three-Button Play)” in the Help, as shown in the following
table.
J-K-L Functions for Deck Control
Press
To
K
Stop the deck.
L
Shuttle the deck at 1x, 2x, 3x, 5x, 8x, 16x, or 24x normal speed.
J
Shuttle the deck at –1x, –2x, –3x, –5x, –8x, –16x, or –24x normal
speed.
K+L
Shuttle the deck at 0.25x normal speed.
J+K
Shuttle the deck at –0.25x normal speed.
The following restrictions apply:
•
The Capture tool, Digital Cut tool, or Deck Controller window must be selected for keys
to be active.
•
Single-field stepping is not supported.
•
If you remap the function of the J-K-L keys, you can no longer control decks with those
keys.
129
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Working in Quick Record Mode
Quick Record mode allows the deck to control the capturing of media into Avid editing
systems. When Quick Record mode is enabled, the Avid editing application starts capturing
automatically whenever the servo-lock signal is detected from the deck.
When Servo Lock mode is detected (the deck is playing), capturing begins and continues
until play is stopped, at which point it will wait for the next servo-lock signal.
Toggle Source button set to Deck Capture mode
Toggle Source button set to Quick Record icon
Servo Lock check box
n
To use Quick Record mode, you must connect a deck that supports servo-lock signals to the
system by using a deck control serial cable and a serial adapter. For information about the
cable connection, see the setup information that came with your system.
To use Quick Record mode:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Click the Toggle Source button until the Deck Capture icon appears.
3. Click the Deck Selection pop-up menu, and select your deck.
See “Setting Up the Capture Tool” in the Help.
4. Click the Servo Lock Mode button.
A check mark appears in the button and the Toggle Source button changes to the Quick
Record Mode icon.
5. When the “Waiting for Servo Lock” message appears in the message area of the Capture
tool, press the deck’s Play button.
The system starts capturing when the deck is in servo lock and stops capturing when the
deck is not in servo lock (for example; stopped, rewinding, or shuttling).
During Quick Record mode, the timecode display for the deck shows the timecode followed
by “* LOCAL”; for example: 00;01;05;14 * LOCAL.
130
Special Capture Procedures
The following table lists messages that might appear in the message area if the appropriate
conditions for the Quick Record mode are not present. The second column recommends
what you can do to be ready for the Quick Record mode.
Quick Record Condition Messages
Message
Cause or Action Required
No deck
A deck is not selected in the Capture tool or the system
does not detect a deck. Make sure the deck is
connected, turned on, and selected in the Capture tool.
No tape in deck
The system does not detect a tape in the deck. Make
sure a tape is in the deck.
No source tape selected
Give the source tape a name in the Capture tool. Click
the Source Tape Display button and name the tape.
Selected deck will not Servo Some deck models do not generate a servo-lock signal.
Lock
This is defined in the deck’s template.
n
Deck not in Local mode
If this message appears, make sure you have the
correct deck selected in the Deck Selection menu.
If the message continues, you cannot use the
deck with Quick Record mode.
Quick Record mode requires the deck to be in Local
mode.
Adding Extra Text Fields in the Capture Tool
In addition to the Name and the Cmnt (Comment) fields in the Capture tool, you can enter
multiple text fields in the Capture tool before and during capturing. The typed information is
stored with the captured clip in the bin. The extra text fields appear as columns in the bins.
When you click the Extra Fields Selection button in the Capture tool, the Field Selection
dialog box opens. The Field Selection list includes any extra fields already created, in
addition to any user-defined text fields from the target bin. The fields you select in the Field
Selection list will appear in the Capture tool below the Cmnt field. You can delete the extra
fields by deleting the column in the bin window.
n
You can have up to 10 extra text fields.
131
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
To add text fields:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Click the Extra Field Selection button.
The Field Selection dialog box opens.
3. Click the New Field button
The New Field Name dialog box opens.
4. In the Field Name text box, type the name you want to appear as a text field in the
Capture tool.
This is also the name that appears in the bin column heading.
5. Click OK in the New Field Name dialog box.
The Field Selection list opens with your new text field selected.
n
If you do not capture and use the new extra text field after creating it, the new text field is not
saved in the Field Selection list or bin.
6. Click OK in the Field Selection dialog box.
The new text field appears in the Capture tool. Press the Tab key to move between fields
while capturing.
To display or hide text fields:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Click the Extra Field Selection button.
132
Special Capture Procedures
The Field Selection dialog box opens.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Select the text fields that you want to display in the Capture tool.
t
Click Select None to hide the extra text fields in the Capture tool.
4. Click OK.
Only the selected fields appear in the Capture tool.
To delete extra text fields:
1. Click the column heading in the bin.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Delete.
t
Press the Delete key.
The column is deleted from the view and the entry in the Field Selection list is deleted.
Mapping the Record Button
You can map the Record button from the Play tab in the Command palette to a key on the
keyboard. This allows you to start capturing by pressing a key.
n
The Record button works for either the Capture tool or the Audio Punch-In tool, depending
on which tool is active.
For more information on mapping buttons, see “Understanding Button Mapping” on
page 66.
133
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Ejecting Tapes with a Button or Key
By clicking the Eject button and ejecting a tape, the fact that the tape must be changed can
be brought to the attention of any tape operator in a remote machine room.
To eject tapes by using a button:
1. Select Tools > Command Palette.
2. Click the Play tab.
3. Select Active palette.
4. Click the Eject button.
n
You can map the Eject button to any button on the Tool palette or any key on the Keyboard
palette. See “Mapping User-Selectable Buttons” on page 67.
Returning to the Previous Place in the Select Tape Dialog Box
When working with many tapes, you need to be able to return quickly to your location when
you last selected a tape. If you leave the Select Tape dialog box and reenter it, you return to
where you were in the list of tape names the last time; this should help you find the next tape
you need.
Understanding DV Capture Offset
DV capture offset allows you to offset the incoming DV stream against the timecode
assigned to each frame during capturing. This offset is only used in a transcoder
configuration or in configurations where the DV stream does not encode timecode into the
incoming DV frames. DV capture offset was primarily designed for configurations where an
RS-422 controller is used to control a DV device and the DV stream is captured over a
FireWire cable.
DV Data
Transcoder
Avid application
Analog data
RS-422 controller
Analog deck
134
Understanding DV Capture Offset
RS-422 Controls a DV Device Configuration
The DV capture offset can also be used in a configuration where the DV stream is captured
over a FireWire cable, but the timecode of the master clip is not received through an RS-422
controller. When you adjust the DV capture offset in this configuration, results could vary,
depending on the number of devices involved. See the following figure.
Avid application
DV data
DV device
FireWire Configuration Without Timecode
n
A configuration in which FireWire control is used to control a DV device and the DV stream
is captured does not use this offset. The following figure shows this configuration, where the
DV frames contain the encoded timecode.
FireWire controller
Avid application
DV device
DV data
FireWire Configuration with Encoded Timecode
The range of DV capture offset in the Avid application is from –6 to 24 frames with the
default value set to 0. To use DV capture offset, perform several captures with the DV
capture offset set to 0. Note the first frame of the master clip for each clip. If the first frame
of the master clip is not as expected, the DV capture offset should be adjusted to account for
this variation.
For example, The following figure represents a RS-422-controlled capture where the
timecode for capture comes in through an RS-422 controller. The first frame of the master
clip is the sixth frame from the IN point on the tape.
Tape IN point
Tape frames
Master clip frames
135
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
Capture with No Offset
To adjust for this device behavior, set the DV capture offset to –6 frames. The result should
be a frame-accurate capture. However, the results are dependent on device behavior. If the
device behavior for sending streams across a FireWire cable is inconsistent, frame-accurate
results on capture will also be inconsistent. See the following figure.
Tape IN point
Tape frames
Master clip frames
Capturing DV Material with Offset
To offset the sequence for capture:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Double-click Deck Preferences.
3. Determine the approximate offset, and then enter the offset in the Capture Offset
(frames) text box.
4. Click OK.
The delay is reflected in the DV Capture Offset box in the Capture tool.
5. Capture your material.
See “Capturing from a Mark IN to a Mark OUT” and “Capturing On-the-Fly” in the
Help.
6. Repeat this process until you achieve the appropriate offset.
136
Delaying Audio
Delaying Audio
Sometimes the source from which you are capturing provides an audio signal that is one or
more frames ahead of the video. For example, the Panasonic AG-DVX100 DV camcorder
always records audio one frame ahead of the video. Also, the use of a timebase corrector
(TBC) or other video processing devices on your input signal might introduce fixed frame
delays of video.
n
If the input signal is not DV when you choose your IN point, the audio that lines up with the
IN point should remain in sync with the captured media. The video is what shifts in the
captured media. If the input signal is a DV signal however, then the audio shifts.
If the audio you are capturing is always at a fixed offset ahead of the video, use the Delay
Audio feature to correct this problem and produce a master clip with correct A/V sync.
To offset your audio:
1. Prepare for capturing audio. See “Capturing Media: Basics” and “Preparing for Audio
Input” in the Help.
2. Select Tools > Capture.
3. Select the number of offset frames from the Delay audio menu.
4. Capture your material.
5. Play the captured media to verify that the audio and video are in sync.
Capturing in Satellite Mode or No Device Control
Longitudinal timecode (LTC) from an external source allows production facilities to capture
from multiple sources at the same time they are capturing to tape. This is called satellite
Mode.
A facility that has a central timecode generator can use that clock to send identical timecode
to all systems. This timecode output can be run directly to the Avid editing system through
the LTC IN connection on the Avid Adrenaline DNA.
n
Discontinuous timecodes are not checked during this type of capture.
Satellite mode using external timecode is especially useful for live events, dramatic
multicamera shows, and video material coming in on routers that do not support timecode.
You can start editing immediately after the shooting without waiting to capture from the
backup reference tapes.
137
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
A 23.976p video only capture is supported only with the Advanced Pulldown cadence of
2:3:3:2 as created by the Panasonic cameras AG-DVX100 and the AG-SDX900 NTSC
versions. When creating a 23.976 project in these products, capture always assumes the
pulldown cadence to be “advanced.”
If you are taking a feed from a source based on a time-of-day timecode generator, setting IN
and OUT points is especially useful. When the time of the external timecode source matches
the IN point, your Avid editing application begins to capture. Capture stops when the
external timecode matches the OUT point.
To prepare for capturing with external timecode:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
Toggle Source button
Timecode Source
menu
Source Tape
Display button
2. Select the audio and video tracks.
3. Select the audio and video input.
138
Capturing in Satellite Mode or No Device Control
4. Click the Timecode Source menu, and select one of the following:
n
n
The devices that appear in the Timecode Source menu originate from the current Deck
Configuration settings.
-
Internal: Uses internal system timecode.
-
LTC Input: Detects LTC input.
LTC Input is only available with Avid Adrenaline. If you don't have an Avid Adrenaline
attached to your system, the LTC Input option is dimmed.
-
Auto Detect: Detects LTC input by default. If the LTC Input is deactivated, the
Capture tool automatically switches to internal timecode. If the LTC Input is
reactivated, the Capture tool switches back to LTC Input.
-
Firewire Timecode: Detects timecode over a FireWire connection. FireWire
Timecode will only be listed in the pop-up menu if you have a FireWire deck
configured in the Deck Configuration dialog box. See “Configuring Decks” in the
Help.
-
RS422 Timecode: Detects timecode over a serial connection. RS422 Timecode will
only be listed in the pop-up menu if you have an RS422 deck configured in the
Deck Configuration dialog box. See “Configuring Decks” in the Help.
5. Click the Source Tape Display button.
The Select Tape dialog box opens.
n
Because the media file database does not open when you start your Avid editing application,
tape names of all online media files do not appear automatically.
139
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
n
If the tape name for which you are searching does not appear in the Select Tape dialog box,
click the Scan for Tapes button. Tape and project names are listed.
New Tape
Name button
List of tapes
Show other projects
option
6. Provide a tape name in one of the following ways:
t
Select a tape name from the list. Tape names and associated projects are listed in
two columns.
t
Click New if the tape is not in the list, and type a new tape name in the text box that
appears at the bottom of the Tape Name list.
t
Click the Source Tape Display to display the tape names and associated project
names for all bins that have been opened in the current session.
Stop the process at any time by clicking Cancel.
For guidelines on naming tapes, see “Naming Tapes” in the Help.
7. Click OK. The tape name is displayed in the Capture tool.
8. Play the tape manually from the deck or media source, and click the Record button to
start and stop capturing of each clip. For more information, see “Capturing On-the-Fly”
in the Help.
n
n
140
If you notice that your captured material is consistently one or more frames off, select
“Latency for satellite mode” in the General tab in the Capture Settings dialog box to fix the
problem. For more information, see “Capture Settings: General Tab” in the Help.
You can log an event ahead of time and it will automatically start recording that signal when
the internal clock or external LTC arrives at that timecode. For example, log a clip at
14:00:00:00 to14:30:00:00 sometime in the morning, and at 2:00, the capture will start and
then end at 2:30.
Setting a Timed Capture
Setting a Timed Capture
When Satellite mode is enabled, the Timed Capture option allows you to schedule a
capturing session for upcoming live satellite feeds. The Scheduled Capture button opens the
Scheduled Capture dialog box for creating a capture schedule.
The following table lists the settings for the scheduled capture.
Scheduled Capture Settings
Setting
Description
Scheduled Capture mode
Enables and disables the scheduled capturing session.
Once / Loop
If Once is selected, any clips with a start time earlier
than the current time-of-day timecode will be yellow.
If Loop is selected, the schedule will repeat each day.
Schedule list
Contains a list of scheduled satellite feed capture
sessions. Each item in the list contains:
•
Name to give the created clip
•
When to start capturing
•
How long to continue capturing
Any clip whose start time overlaps the end of the
previous scheduled clip will be red.
Clear
Erases the schedule list.
Load / Save
A schedule list can be saved as a tab-delimited text file
with the Save button and later recalled with the Load
button.
When Scheduled Capture mode is enabled, the Satellite Mode icon includes a clock, the
Scheduled Capture button changes to green, and the timecode entry fields appear dimmed
and display the times for the upcoming scheduled capturing session.
When the time-of-day timecode is within 10 seconds of the next scheduled capture time (and
if the Capture Tool window is still active) the Capture tool goes into Coincidence Wait mode
(blinking yellow record light) and subsequently begins capturing.
When the capturing is done, the Capture tool updates the timecode entry fields for the next
scheduled capturing session.
141
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
n
You can still use the Capture tool with Scheduled Capture mode enabled as long as you stop
using the Capture tool before the next scheduled capturing session. You cannot do a
scheduled live feed capture if the Capture tool is in use. The Capture tool must be the active
window for a scheduled capturing to occur.
To set a timed capture session:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Click the Toggle Source button until the Satellite Mode icon appears.
3. Click the Setup Capture Schedule button.
The Scheduled Capture dialog box opens.
4. Do one of the following:
n
t
Type the clip name, start time, and clip duration in the appropriate columns.
t
Click Load and navigate to a tab-delimited text file of a schedule.
You can save a schedule as a tab-delimited text file and load it at a later date.
5. Select the Scheduled Capture Mode option.
6. Select how to capture the satellite feed:
142
t
Select the Once option to capture the satellite feed one time.
t
Select the Loop option to repeat the schedule every day.
Capturing to the Timeline
7. Click OK.
The Setup Capture Schedule button changes to green and the Toggle Source button
displays the Satellite Mode icon with a clock. The timecode fields contain the
information for the upcoming capture session.
To clear the scheduled capture:
1. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
2. Click the Toggle Source button until the Satellite Mode icon appears.
3. Click the Setup Capture Schedule button.
The Scheduled Capture dialog box opens.
4. Click Clear.
5. Click OK.
Capturing to the Timeline
You can capture footage directly from tape to a sequence loaded in the Timeline in one step,
bypassing several steps such as organizing and reviewing clips, marking edit points, and
performing edits.
To capture to the Timeline:
1. Prepare for capturing.
See “Capturing Media:Basics” in the Help.
2. Set options in the Capture Settings dialog box:
a.
Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
b.
In the Settings list, double-click Capture.
The Capture Settings dialog box opens.
c.
Click the Edit tab.
d. Select the “Enable edit to timeline (splice, overwrite)” option.
e.
Set the handle length (the amount of footage you want to capture before and after
the IN and OUT points of the clips).
f.
Click OK.
3. Load a sequence into the Source/Record monitor.
143
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
4. (Option) Patch tracks you are capturing (source tracks) to the tracks in your sequence
(record tracks). See “Patching When Capturing to the Timeline” on page 144.
5. Mark an IN point in the sequence or move the position indicator to where you want the
edit to take place.
6. Mark the source material you want to capture by using the Capture tool logging
controls. For a description of the controls, see “Logging with Avid-Controlled Decks”
on page 92.
7. (Option) Mark an OUT point based on the following:
t
If you are recording to the middle of a sequence in the Timeline, mark both IN and
OUT points for frame accuracy.
t
If you are recording to the end of a sequence, you can mark just an IN point and
then mark the OUT point later on-the-fly.
8. Click the yellow Splice-in button or the red Overwrite button in the Capture tool to
select the type of edit.
Splice-in button
Record
button
Overwrite button
9. Click the Record button to begin recording.
10. If you did not mark the OUT point in advance, click the Record button again when the
footage reaches the appropriate frame.
If you already marked an OUT point, recording stops automatically.
When capturing ends, the clip appears in place in the sequence, and a master clip appears in
the bin.
Patching When Capturing to the Timeline
By default, the tracks you selected for capturing (V1, A1, A2, and so on) are edited to the
corresponding tracks in the Timeline. You can patch the captured footage to any track in the
Timeline.
To patch tracks when capturing to the Timeline:
1. In the Capture tool, click and hold the Track Selector button for the track (video or
audio) you want to patch.
2. From the menu, select the track to which you want to patch the captured footage.
144
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
For example, if you want to capture video footage to track V2, click and hold the red V
button in the Capture tool and select V2 from the menu. The Track Selector panel in the
Timeline displays the resulting patch.
Select the track
to patch.
The result is
displayed in
the Timeline.
n
You can also patch tracks in the Timeline in the same way you patch tracks when editing
from the Source monitor. See “Patching Tracks” in the Help.
n
Only tracks that are enabled in the Timeline are available for patching. Other tracks appear
dimmed in the menu.
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
The Remote Play and Capture feature allows you to use an external edit controller with an
Avid editing system. Remote Play and Capture covers three basic functions:
•
Remote Capture controls the capturing of media into an Avid editing application while
using an edit controller. Remote Capture allows you to record and stop.
•
Remote Play controls sequences loaded in the Source/Record monitor and played back
through an edit controller to the edit room, along with other sources. Remote Play
allows you to cue, play, and stop.
•
Remote Punch-In controls the recording of audio into the Avid editing system while
using an external edit controller. You can use Remote Punch-In to cue, play, record, and
stop.
External capture control is included in the Remote Play and Capture feature. When you
select Remote Capture or Remote Punch-In in the Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog
box, the Avid editing system performs like a VTR and waits for an external controller to
operate the capture functions.
145
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
n
You must be in Satellite mode to use Remote Capture. For information on Satellite mode, see
“Capturing in Satellite Mode or No Device Control” on page 137.
To use Remote Play and Capture, you must connect a supported controller (any controller
that uses Sony® serial control protocol) to the system by using a special Avid 9-pin VTR
emulation cable and a serial adapter.
n
If a message appears stating that the Avid Serial Driver is not installed for Remote Play and
Capture, make sure the correct serial driver is installed on your system. If you are running
Avid Media Browse™ and using the Remote Play and Capture option, you need to run the
Avid editor with the Microsoft driver. If you are running the Avid editor (without Avid Media
Browse), the Avid serial driver should be installed. See “Avid Serial Driver and Remote Play
and Capture” on page 151 for information on how to install the serial drivers.
Selecting Remote Play and Capture Settings
To open the Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog box:
1. Double-click Remote Play and Capture in the Settings list.
The Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Mode menu, and select Remote Play, Remote Capture, or Remote Punch-In.
For information about each option, see “Remote Play and Capture Settings” in the Help.
146
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
Enabling Remote Capture
Before you enable Remote Play and Capture, be sure the controller is properly connected.
To enable Remote Capture:
1. Double-click Communication (Serial) Ports in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Communication (Serial) Ports tool opens.
2. Select Remote Play and Capture > port.
3. Close the Communication (Serial) Ports tool.
The system saves the setting as a Site setting, effective for all projects.
4. Double-click Remote Play and Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog box opens.
5. Select Mode > Remote Capture.
6. Select Device Code > device.
7. Specify the time (measured in frames) it takes the deck to start playing from a cued
position in the Runup area.
8. Select Clip > Remote Play and Capture when you are ready to use the system for
capturing.
A check mark appears next to the command to indicate that the system is ready. A
yellow outline appears around the Play button in the Source/Record monitor to indicate
that Remote Play and Capture is active.
n
The Remote Play and Capture command behaves like a Local/Remote switch on a playback
device, with the VTR in Local mode by default when you start the system.
9. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
10. Select the tracks onto which you want to capture by clicking the Channel Selection
buttons.
11. Choose Bin > bin.
147
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
12. Click the Toggle Source button until the Satellite Mode icon appears.
13. Control capturing from the controller.
Enabling Remote Play
Remote Play allows you to control sequences through an edit controller. You can play, cue,
and stop your sequence from the edit controller.
To enable Remote Play:
1. Double-click Remote Play and Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select Mode > Remote Play.
3. Select Device Code > device.
n
Avid recommends that you do not inhibit preloading under normal circumstances. For more
information about the inhibit preloading option, see “Remote Play and Capture Settings” in
the Help.
4. Select Clip > Remote Play and Capture when you are ready to use the system for
playing.
A check mark appears next to the command to indicate that the system is ready. A
yellow outline appears around the Play button in the Source/Record monitor to indicate
that Remote Play and Capture is active.
n
The Remote Play and Capture command behaves like a Local/Remote switch on a playback
device, with VTR in Local mode by default when you start the system.
5. With a sequence loaded in the Source/Record monitor, use the Play, Cue, and Stop
buttons on the edit controller to control the sequence.
n
148
At this time, fast-forward, rewind, and shuttle and jog are not enabled from the edit
controller.
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
Setting up Your System for Remote Punch-In
Before you enable Remote Punch-In, you need to make sure the controller is properly
connected. The only qualified controller for Remote Punch-In is the Colin Broad SR-4
Serial Remote, and you must set the following options on the SR-4 controller:
•
049 — Send Record In and Out to Machine set to 1=Yes
•
065 — Locate Type set to 0=Locate
•
077 — Extended Status Request set to 1=Off
In addition, all devices controlled by the SR-4 must be genlocked, and your Avid editing
system must be configured as the Master device on the SR-4. For more information on
configuring the Colin Broad SR-4 Serial Remote, see the documentation for your controller.
To record audio using Remote Punch-In:
1. Double-click Communication (Serial) Ports in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Communication (Serial) Ports tool opens.
2. Click the Remote Play and Capture menu, and select the appropriate port.
3. Close the Communication (Serial) Ports tool.
The system saves the setting as a Site setting, effective for all projects.
4. Double-click Remote Play and Capture in the Settings list of the Project window.
The Remote Play and Capture Settings dialog box opens.
149
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
5. Select Mode > Remote Punch-In.
6. Click the Device Code menu, and select the appropriate device.
7. (Option) Specify other settings as described in “Remote Play and Capture Settings” on
page 642.
8. Click OK.
9. Select Clip > Remote Play and Capture when you are ready to use the system for
capturing.
A check mark appears next to the command to indicate that the system is ready. A
yellow outline appears around the Play button in the Source/Record monitor to indicate
that Remote Play and Capture is active.
n
The Remote Play and Capture command behaves like a Local/Remote switch on a playback
device, with the VTR in Local mode by default when you start the system.
10. Select Tools > Audio Punch-In.
The Audio Punch-In tool opens.
Input
Channels
buttons
n
Some of the features in the Audio Punch-In tool — such as the preroll and postroll options —
do not appear when you open the tool in Remote Play and Capture mode.
11. Select the tracks you want to record to by clicking the Input Channels buttons.
12. Load a sequence in the Source monitor.
13. Using the controls on the external controller, set an IN point in the Timeline.
150
Remote Play, Capture, and Punch-In
n
n
Setting an OUT point is optional.
If you set the IN point at the first frame of the sequence, you must add filler to the start of the
sequence equal to the amount of preroll. This allows the system to sync lock the Avid editing
application to the external controller.
14. Control recording from the controller.
n
Remote Punch-In does not use preroll or postroll settings, and it does not initiate a loop
playback or audition playback prior to recording. Remote Punch-In begins recording audio
to the selected channels as soon as you start the record operation.
Avid Serial Driver and Remote Play and Capture
When your Windows installation occurs, two serial drivers are installed: msports.inf and
serial.sys. When an Avid editing application is installed, two additional serial drivers are
installed: msportsAvid.inf and Avidxpserial.sys. When you run the Avid editing system, the
Avid drivers are used. However, if you are using Avid Media Browse and Remote Play and
Capture, you need to change the system’s serial driver to the Microsoft drivers. The steps
below explain how to choose a serial driver for your application.
To install or change the system’s serial driver:
1. Quit the Avid editing application.
2. Right-click the My Computer icon, and then choose Manage.
The Computer Management window opens.
3. Click Device Manager in the left pane.
4. Expand the Ports (COM & LPT) by clicking the plus sign (+) in the right pane.
5. Double-click the Communications Port you are using.
The Communications Port Properties dialog box opens.
6. Click the Driver tab.
7. Click the Update Driver button.
The Hardware Upgrade Wizard opens.
8. Select “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced),” and then click Next.
9. Select “Don’t search. I will choose the driver to install,” and then click Next.
10. Select the appropriate driver:
t
Select the Microsoft driver when using Avid Media Browse
t
Select the Avid Serial driver when using an Avid editing application.
151
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
11. Click Next, and then click Finish.
12. Restart your system.
Modifying the Pulldown Phase After Capturing
If you have captured film-originated clips (NTSC transfer only) that seem to stutter, the
problem could be an incorrectly logged pulldown phase. The pulldown phase is the video
frame at which the master clip starts: A, B, X, C, or D. You log this pulldown phase in the
“Pullin” column of a bin. To solve the problem, you need to determine the correct pulldown
cadence of the frame, modify the clip information, and recapture the clip.
To check for an incorrect pullin frame:
1. Look for a section of the clip that includes a series of frames with motion.
2. Step through the clip frame by frame (using the Step buttons or another method) and
look for two frames that have no movement.
If the pattern is two frames of movement followed by two frames of no movement, the
pullin is incorrect.
To determine the correct pullin frame, use one of the following approaches:
t
If the source footage includes burn-in code with the pulldown phase, go to the start of
the clip and look for the pulldown for the first frame.
t
If you want to maintain the start timecode for each clip, review the original tape field by
field.
t
If you do not need to maintain the start timecode:
a.
Step through the clip frame by frame (using the Step buttons or another method).
Look for two frames that are identical (no movement).
b.
Think of these frames as frames B and X of a four-frame series.
No movement
152
A
B
X
D
Incorrect sequence
A
B
C
D
Correct sequence
Modifying the Pulldown Phase After Capturing
Step backward (either one frame from the B frame or two frames from the X frame)
to locate the correct A frame. Note the last digit of its timecode. Timecode for all A
frames in the clip will start either with this digit or this digit plus 5. For example, if
the A frame has the timecode 1:00:10:20, timecode for all A frames in the clip ends
in either 0 or 5.
c.
Compare these digits with the last digit of the start timecode (first frame) of the clip
to determine the correct pullin. For example, if the A frame ends in 0 or 5, and the
start timecode ends in 4, the pullin is D.
d. If the pullin for the clip is the X frame, you need to modify the timecode to produce
a number you can associate with a pullin. For example, if the A frame ends in 0 or 5,
and the start timecode ends in 2, the pullin falls on the X frame and you need to
modify the timecode along with the pullin. Move forward one frame to create a start
timecode ending in 3. Then you can change the pullin to C.
c
When you change the timecode of a clip, you lose the key number of the clip and need
to enter it in the bin, adjusting it to match any changes to the timecode.
After you determine the pullin frame, modify the clip information as follows.
To modify the clip information:
1. In a bin, select the clip you want to modify and press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box appears.
2. Deselect the option “Delete master clip(s)” and select “Delete associated media file(s).”
3. Select the resolutions to delete.
4. Click OK.
The original media file is deleted.
5. Make sure the clip is still selected. Press Ctrl+Shift and choose Unlink from the Clip
menu.
The clip information is unlinked and you can modify the clip information.
6. Type the correct letter for the pulldown phase in the Pullin column. If necessary, type a
new timecode and key number.
With the new clip information in the bin, batch capture the clip. See “Batch Capturing Clips”
in the Help. If the pulldown phase is accurate, the clip should play smoothly, with no
repeated frames.
n
This method might not work for some clips that start with either an A frame or a D frame. If,
after you modify the clip as described previously, the clip still stutters, modify the clip again.
This time, if the pullin is A, change it to D. If the pullin is D, change it to A.
153
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
DV and HDV Scene Extraction
While you are capturing DV or HDV footage, the DV and HDV Scene Extraction feature
allows you to generate subclips and locators automatically, based on time-of-day (TOD)
information contained in the DV or HDV format.
Discontinuities in the DV or HDV TOD metadata indicate each place in a master clip or
subclip where a new take was initiated on a DV or HDV camera. Using this feature, you can
capture an entire DV or HDV tape as a single master clip and have the system automatically
locate all the takes for you, eliminating the need to manually log.
You can perform a DV Scene Extraction in two ways and an HDV Scene Extraction one
way:
•
Set up the DV or HDV Scene Extraction option before capturing. When capturing is
performed, subclips and locator marks appear in the bin.
•
Perform DV Scene Extraction after capturing. Select those clips in the bin for which you
want to generate subclips and locator marks.
Consider the following:
•
You can perform DV Scene Extraction on any existing clip or subclip in a bin that has
TOD information breaks.
•
DVCPRO format does not provide TOD metadata; you cannot use DV or HDV Scene
Extraction with DVCPRO format.
•
DV or HDV Scene Extraction does not work on non-DV or audio-only clips.
Setting Up DV and HDV Scene Extraction Before Capturing
To set up DV and HDV Scene Extraction before capturing:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Double-click Capture Settings.
The Capture Settings dialog box opens.
3. Click the DV&HDV Options tab.
4. Select DV or HDV Scene Extraction, depending on your type of project.
154
DV and HDV Scene Extraction
5. Select one of the following options:
-
Add Locators: Creates locator marks where the TOD information breaks occur
while capturing.
-
Create Subclips: Creates subclips where the TOD information breaks occur while
capturing.
-
Both: Creates subclips and locator marks where the TOD information breaks occur
while capturing.
6. Click OK.
7. Select Tools > Capture and then click the Record button.
When capturing has finished, subclips are created with the same source clip name and
the file name extension .sub.01 where TOD information breaks occurred. Locator marks
appear in the master clip where TOD information breaks occurred.
Setting Up DV Scene Extraction After Capturing
You can use DV Scene Extraction with systems that include the DV/MPEG option. DV
Scene Extraction after capturing is not available with HDV media.
To set up DV Scene Extraction after capturing:
1. Open a bin.
2. Click the clip for which you want to create subclips or locator marks. Ctrl+click to
select multiple clips.
3. Select Bin > DV Scene Extraction.
The Capture Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click the DV Options tab.
5. Select DV Scene Extraction.
6. Select one of the following options:
-
Add Locators: Creates locator marks where the TOD information breaks occur
while capturing.
-
Create Subclips: Creates subclips where the TOD information breaks occur while
capturing.
-
Both: Creates subclips and locator marks where the TOD information breaks occur
while capturing.
7. If you have chosen to create subclips, select the bin where you want these subclips
stored.
n
To cancel the process, press Ctrl+period.
155
Chapter 4 Capturing Media: Advanced
8. Click OK.
In the bin, subclips are created with the same source clip name and the file name
extension .sub.01 where TOD information breaks occurred. Locator marks appear in the
master clip where TOD information breaks occurred.
If you select a DVCPRO, a non-DV, or an audio-only clip, an error message appears,
informing you that an incompatible clip was selected. These clips are bypassed during
the DV Scene Extraction process.
Support for Panasonic VariCam
The following procedure applies when capturing from tape via the Panasonic AJ-HD1200A
camera.
The Panasonic VariCam® is a camera that allows the recording of frames rates between 1fps
and 60fps. For example, material captured at 24 frames per second and played back at 24
frames per second will have no speed change, but the same action captured at 48 frames per
second and played back at 24 frames per second will result in playback that is slowed down
50% (a 50% slow-motion).
The 720p format is always recording to a progressive 60 (59.94) frame tape format. The
different frame rates are achieved by selecting the desired frame rate and the camera flags
the “true” frames within the 60 frame sequence. When these flags are detected by the Avid
editing system, only those frames are captured and stored to disk. When played back at the
project’s frame rate, either a slow motion or fast motion will result.
n
Note, if you capture audio, it will be out of sync.
To use the VariCam camera with the Avid editing application:
1. Connect the VariCam camera through a 1394 (FireWire) port on your computer.
2. Select a 720p project format.
3. Do one of the following:
-
Click the DNA and 1394 button above the Timeline so that 1394 is displayed.
-
Select Special > Device > IEEE 1394.
4. Either select or deselect the “Preserve VariCam Frames” option in the Capture tool:
If deselected (the default), the capture will observe the flags in the video stream and
only capture those frames. This type of capture will result in a slow motion or fast
motion depending on original recording speed.
If selected, every frame is captured (all 60 frames), essentially ignoring the flagged
frames.
156
Chapter 5
Importing Files: Advanced
When you import files, the system converts them into objects in a bin. You can manipulate
and edit these objects as you would any other clip or sequence. Any corresponding media
files are stored on a target drive that you specify.
The following topics provide advanced information on how to import files:
•
Importing Photoshop Graphics
•
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
•
Importing Editcam Files
•
Importing Sequences from Pro Tools through Interplay
For basic information about importing, see “Importing Files: Basics” in the Help or the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Importing Photoshop Graphics
You can import both single-layer and multilayered graphics created in Adobe® Photoshop®.
If you import multilayered graphics, you can preserve the original layers, and then edit them
individually in your Avid editing application.
n
Your Avid editing application supports graphics created in the following modes: RGB 8bits/channel, RGB 16-bits/channel, and grayscale, including alpha channels. For more
information, see “Import Specifications for Supported Graphics File Formats” on page 664.
An alpha channel must be straight; the application does not properly import premultiplied
alphas.
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
Importing Single-Layer Photoshop Graphics
A single-layer graphic is a graphic file that was created on a single layer or a layered graphic
that was flattened in Photoshop. Avid editing applications import this kind of graphic as a
matte key or master clip, depending on the format of the Photoshop file.
•
If the graphic uses a transparent background or an alpha channel, the Avid editing
application creates a matte key.
•
If the graphic uses a background color, the Avid editing application creates a master
clip.
To import a single-layer graphic, or a multilayered graphic that was flattened in
Photoshop:
t
n
Follow the standard instructions for importing a graphic, as described in “Importing
Files” in the Help.
Single-layer files that contain transparency gradients or feathering and a transparent
background do not import correctly. Partially transparent pixels are displayed with either
white or black blended into them, based on the percentage of transparency. To avoid this
problem, create an additional layer in the original Photoshop file that contains at least one
pixel of information, such as a spot drawn with a paintbrush. Then import it as a layered file,
as described in “Importing Multilayered Photoshop Files” on page 163. In the message box,
click Select Layers and select only the layer that contains the graphic elements; do not select
the additional layer.
Importing Multilayered Photoshop Graphics
A multilayered graphic is a graphic file that was created in Photoshop with two or more
layers.
When you import a multilayered graphic, you can import each layer as a separate object (a
matte key or master clip). You can then manipulate individual layers like any other matte key
or master clip. You can also import the graphic as a flattened image, or select the layers to
import.
n
158
You can import multilayered graphics created in Photoshop v6.0 or later.
Importing Photoshop Graphics
Example of Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import
A typical multilayered Photoshop graphic might consist of a collage of still images over a
background image, with a layer of text. Each image is on its own layer in the Photoshop file
(with the background image on the lowest layer), and the text is also on its own layer. The
goal is to edit the collage into a sequence, building it up one image at a time, and then add
the text. The following illustration shows the graphics and layers in Photoshop.
Your Avid editing application imports each layer as an individual matte key with alpha
channel. In this example, the graphic uses a background image, so the system creates the
background image as a master clip. (If the graphic used a transparent background, the
background layer would be imported as a matte key.)
159
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
The following illustration shows the layers as they appear in a bin.
During the import, your Avid editing application creates a sequence with each layer on a
separate video track; this makes it easy to edit all layers into the final sequence. This
sequence preserves the names and order of the layers as created in the original Photoshop
file, as shown in the following illustration.
You can then edit the tracks to build up to the full collage.
160
Importing Photoshop Graphics
Support for Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import
You should be aware of the following requirements for multilayered graphics import and
details of how your Avid editing application handles the import:
•
Graphics must be RGB 8 or 16 bits, or grayscale.
•
Layer order and layer names are preserved during import.
•
Hidden layers are imported as matte keys.
•
Opacity is converted to Foreground level in the Matte Key effect.
•
Text and shape layers are rasterized (converted from vector-based to bitmap) during
import.
•
Not all layer options and types are supported for import.
For information on support for layer options and types, see the following tables.
For information on preserving layer effects during import, see “Preserving Layer Effects
in Multilayered Photoshop Graphics” on page 162.
Support for Photoshop Layer Options
Layer Option
Supported Notes
Blending Mode
No
To preserve the blending mode (Dissolve, Multiply, and so on), merge the
layer into another layer that does not use a special blending mode. Only
normal mode is supported.
Opacity
Yes
The imported layer’s Level is set to the opacity specified in Photoshop. You
can adjust opacity levels with the Foreground Level control in the Effect
Editor.
Layer Group
Partial
Layer grouping is ignored. All layers, including grouped layers, are imported
as individual layers. To preserve a clipping group, merge the grouped layers
into the base layer.
Layer Set
Partial
All layers within a set are imported as individual layers.
Layer/Set Mask
No
Layer and set masks are ignored. To preserve a layer mask, apply it to the
layer. To preserve a set mask, merge the set into an empty layer. To preserve a
special layer’s mask, rasterize the layer.
Layer Style
No
Layer styles are ignored. To preserve a layer style, you must convert the style
into layers.
161
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
Support for Photoshop Special Layer Types
Layer Option
Supported Notes
Type Layer
Yes
—
Solid Layer
Yes
Solid layers are imported as a graphic with a full-screen opaque alpha
channel.
Gradient Layer
Yes
Gradient transparency is preserved.
Pattern Layer
Yes
—
Adjustment Layer No
Adjustment layers include Levels, Curves, Color Balance,
Brightness/Contrast, Hue/Saturation, Channel Mixer, Gradient Map, Invert,
Threshold, and Posterize.
Preserving Layer Effects in Multilayered Photoshop Graphics
Some layer options in Photoshop are not supported for import into your Avid editing
application. See “Support for Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import” on page 161. For
example, a title with a Drop Shadow and an Outer Glow effect would not keep these effects
when imported.
To preserve the effects in these layers, merge them in Photoshop (as described in the
Photoshop documentation) and then import the file.
You can also preserve layer effects and the original structure of the file by importing the file
in two stages:
1. For the first import, click Select Layers and select all layers except the layers that
contain layer effects.
2. For the second import, open Photoshop, hide the layers you’ve already imported, and
show the layers that contain layer effects. During the import, click Flattened Image. The
resulting image contains only the layers that contain layer effects.
162
Importing Photoshop Graphics
Importing Multilayered Photoshop Files
To import a multilayered Photoshop file:
1. Prepare the Photoshop graphic for import.
For more information, see “Support for Multilayered Photoshop Graphics Import” on
page 161 and “Preserving Layer Effects in Multilayered Photoshop Graphics” on
page 162.
2. Follow the standard instructions for importing a graphic, as described in “Importing
Files” in the Help. To create the matte correctly, you need to click the Options button
and select Alpha: Invert Existing.
3. After you select one or more files and click Open, a message box opens.
t
If you select a single file, and the number of layers does not exceed the number of
tracks supported by your Avid application, the following message box opens.
t
If you select a single file, and the number of layers exceeds the number of tracks
supported, the following message box opens.
t
If you select multiple files, the following message box opens.
163
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
4. In the message box, do one of the following:
n
t
Click Sequence of Layers if you want to preserve all layers. If the number of layers
exceeds the number of tracks supported, your Avid editing application creates a
sequence that contains the number of tracks supported. Additional layers are
imported into the bin, but not as tracks in a sequence. This selection applies to all
files you selected for import.
t
Click Flattened Image if you want to import the graphic as a single matte key or
clip. Your Avid editing application flattens the file by combining the layers. This
selection applies to all files you selected for import.
Hidden layers are not combined in the flattened image. Make sure all layers you want in the
final image are visible. In addition, layers with partial transparency do not display properly
in the flattened, imported image. See “Importing Single-Layer Photoshop Graphics” on
page 158.
t
Click Select Layers if you want to select which layers to preserve.
The Select Layers dialog box opens. Select the layers you want to import and click
OK. If you select more than 24 layers, the additional layers will be imported but
will not be included in the sequence.
Your Avid editing application displays messages as it creates media for each layer. At the
end of the process, the objects are displayed in the bin you selected.
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
Sony’s XDCAM™ decks and camcorders use an optical disc with a capacity of up to 23.3
GB to store recorded media. The XDCAM devices can record media in high-resolution
MPEG IMX™, DVCAM™, and XDCAM HD formats. At the same time, XDCAM devices
create corresponding low-resolution proxy media (MPEG-4). This allows you to work with
the proxy media in an off-line editing session and then later conform the proxy media to the
corresponding high-resolution media.
164
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
The following table lists the formats and resolutions available when you work with XDCAM
media:
XDCAM Resolutions
Format/Resolution
XDCAM HD (1080i/59.94, 1080i/50,
1080p/23.976):
Number of Audio Channels
(maximum)
8
XDCAM HD 17.5 Mbits
XDCAM HD 25 Mbits
XDCAM HD 35 Mbits
HDV 1080i (25 Mbits CBR)
DVCAM:
4
DV 25 411 (NTSC and PAL)
DV 25 420 (PAL)
MPEG IMX: (NTSC and PAL)
8
MPEG 30
MPEG 40
MPEG 50
MPEG-4 (proxy media)
4 or 8
Working with XDCAM media entails the following general steps:
1. Connecting the XDCAM device to your system and configuring your settings.
2. Importing the proxy media.
3. Editing the proxy media.
4. Using the Import function or the Batch Import function to import DVCAM or MPEG
IMX media, and then conforming the proxy media with the high-resolution media.
5. Editing and finishing the sequence.
165
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
Connecting the XDCAM Device
You use an IEEE-compliant 1394 (i.LINK) port on your computer to connect the XDCAM
device to your system. The XDCAM interface is configured to use the SBP2 protocol so you
can access the XDCAM device as a disk volume on your system.
n
The 1394 port on your computer must be on a bus separate from the one used by the Avid
DNA hardware.
You can have multiple XDCAM devices connected to your system at any one time. Each
device appears as a separate optical drive, similar to a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The
drive’s volume label carries an XDCAM identifier — for example, XDCAM (E:).
To use the XDCAM device with your Avid editing application, you need to install the
appropriate device driver included with the Sony XDCAM deck or camera. For more
information on connecting and configuring your XDCAM device, see the documentation
that came with your Sony product.
Working with XDCAM HD Media
Your Avid editing application supports import of both proxy and high-resolution XDCAM
HD media.
XDCAM HD media, like other XDCAM media, is imported at the data rate at which it was
recorded in one of the following resolutions:
•
XDCAM HD HQ (17.5 mb/sec)
•
XDCAM HD HQ (25 mb/sec)
•
XDCAM HD HQ (35 mb/sec)
However, when you create new media (create a title, render effects, transcode, and so on),
you need to select a different resolution. The choice of resolutions is based on the project
format. For example, in a 1080i/59.94 project, your can create media as DNxHD 220x,
DNxHD 220, or DNxHD 145.
You can play XDCAM HD media to a Client monitor or output a digital cut as Best
Performance (yellow/yellow) or Draft Quality (yellow/green). However, to play or output as
Full Quality (green/green), you must transcode the XDCAM HD media to a DNxHD
resolution or another compatible resolution.
166
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
Playing XDCAM Media on an Avid Symphony
Due to the design of the Nitris hardware, playback of XDCAM media on an Avid Symphony
Nitris editor causes dropped frames. To allow for full performance playback, you should
transcode the XDCAM media into DNxHD media to play the video on your Avid Symphony
system. Use the following workflow to play XDCAM media on your Symphony editor.
To play XDCAM media on an Avid Symphony system:
1. Import your XDCAM media as described in “Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices” in
the Help.
2. Transcode the XDCAM media into DNxHD media by selecting DNxHD from the
Target Video Resolution menu. See “Using the Transcode Command” in the Help for
specific steps.
3. Edit your media.
4. Perform your output as you normally would. If you want to transfer the media back to
XDCAM, follow the instructions in “Exporting to XDCAM” in the Help and select the
appropriate XDCAM video format.
Setting the XDCAM Import Options
You set the default options for importing XDCAM media in the XDCAM tab of the Import
Settings dialog box.
167
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
You can use these settings to override the selections made in the Select Files to Import dialog
box or to set default behavior for importing XDCAM media. For more information on
Import Settings, see “Import Settings: XDCAM Tab” in the Help. You can also view this
information by clicking the dialog box and pressing the F1 key.
Importing XDCAM Media
XDCAM devices store media as MXF OP1a interleaved files. The Avid editing application,
does not use these files directly; instead, you must first import the media. The import process
creates new video and audio MXF media files consisting of one video track and up to eight
audio tracks.
n
Low-resolution proxy media have the same number of audio tracks as the high-resolution
formats.
There are several ways to import XDCAM media:
•
You can automatically import all proxy media when you load a disc in your XDCAM
device. See “Automatically Importing Proxy Media” on page 169.
•
You can manually import all proxy media on all discs currently loaded on your system.
See “Importing All Proxy Media from an XDCAM Disc” on page 170.
•
You can copy the proxy media files to a separate location (for example, to a folder
copied on an FTP site), transfer them to a local drive or removable disc (for example, a
CD-ROM), and import the proxy media without directly accessing the XDCAM device.
See “Copying XDCAM Proxy Media to a Local Drive or a Server” on page 171.
•
You can import proxy media, high-resolution media, or both using the Import function.
See “Manually Importing XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc” on page 172.
For some workflows, you might want to import the proxy media first so you can start
editing. Once you create your sequence, you can use the batch import function to import
only those portions of the high-resolution clips needed for your sequence.
For other workflows, you might want to import the proxy media to an editing workstation,
and then separately import the high-resolution media either to another workstation or to an
Avid Unity server using Avid Interplay Transfer. Your Avid editing application maintains the
connection between the proxy media and the high-resolution media, so you can relink the
edited clips at any time to the high-resolution master clips in a shared storage environment.
n
When you relink proxy media to high-resolution media, do not select Specific Resolution as
the Relink Method option. Instead, select either Highest Quality or Most Compressed.
The import process for XDCAM media differs from the standard import in that you can
import XDCAM media only at the native resolution of the XDCAM media (for information
on XDCAM resolutions, see “Importing Media from XDCAM Devices” on page 164).
168
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
Audio for high-resolution XDCAM media is imported at a sample rate of 48 kHz. If the
sample rate for your project is different (for example, 44.1 kHz), you need to change the
sample rate for the XDCAM audio before you can monitor it in the Timeline or export the
media as a sequence. For information on changing the sample rate, see “Changing the
Sample Rate” in the Help.
XDCAM cameras record proxy audio at a sample rate of 8 kHz. When you import proxy
media, you can choose to change (upconvert) the sample rate to your project rate. This might
slow the import process a bit, but it greatly improves playback of audio tracks.
Automatically Importing Proxy Media
You can use this method to automate the process of importing proxy media from your
XDCAM device to your Avid editing application.
To import proxy media from an XDCAM device:
1. Double-click Import in the Settings list.
The Import Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the XDCAM tab.
3. Select Automatically Import Proxies when disk is inserted.
4. Click OK.
169
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
5. Open the bin in which you want to store the imported files.
n
If you do not select a bin, or if you have more than one bin open, a dialog box opens and
directs you to select from a list of open bins or to create a new bin.
6. Insert a disc into your XDCAM device.
The Import XDCAM Proxy from drive: dialog box opens.
Single/Dual
Drives
button
7. Type a name in the Disk Label text box.
n
Your Avid editing application uses the disk label for operations such as Batch Import, where
you are prompted to insert a specific XDCAM disc that holds the files you want to import. A
disk label is required in order to import XDCAM media.
8. Click the Single/Dual Drives button, and select a destination drive for the imported file
from the menu.
9. Click Import.
When your application finishes importing the files, the clips appear in the selected bin.
n
Your Avid editing application imports XDCAM media at the native resolution of the media
on the XDCAM disc. Your application ignores other resolution settings — for example, in the
Select Files to Import dialog box.
You can repeat this procedure for each XDCAM disc that holds media you want to import.
Importing All Proxy Media from an XDCAM Disc
You can use this method when you want to import all of the proxy media stored on your disc,
but you have not opted to import the proxy media automatically. If you want to import only
some of the files on your disc, use the procedure described in “Manually Importing
XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc” on page 172.
n
170
For information on setting the XDCAM import to start automatically, see “Automatically
Importing Proxy Media” on page 169.
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
To import all proxy media from a disc:
1. Open the bin in which you want to store the imported files, and select it to make it the
active bin.
2. Insert a disc into your XDCAM device.
3. Select File > Import XDCAM Proxy.
The Import XDCAM Proxy from drive: dialog box opens.
Single/Dual
Drives
button
4. Type a name in the Disk Label text box.
n
Your Avid editing application uses the disk label for operations such as Batch Import, where
you are prompted to insert a specific XDCAM disc that holds the files you want to import. A
disk label is required in order to import XDCAM media.
5. Click the Single/Dual Drives button, and select a destination drive for the imported file
from the menu.
6. Click Import.
When your application finishes importing the files, the clips appear in the selected bin.
n
Your Avid editing application imports XDCAM media at the native resolution of the media
on the XDCAM disc. Your application ignores other resolution settings — for example, in the
Select Files to Import dialog box.
You can repeat this procedure for each XDCAM disc that holds media you want to import.
Copying XDCAM Proxy Media to a Local Drive or a Server
You might want to import proxy media when the XDCAM device is not available. For
example, if you want an editor to start editing the XDCAM footage while the actual
XDCAM disc is at another location, you can transfer the proxy media files to an FTP server.
The files then can be downloaded from the server, and an editor can import the proxy media
and begin editing. Later, you can relink the proxy media to the high-resolution media, or use
the batch import function to import the high-resolution media for final editing and finishing.
171
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
When you copy the XDCAM media files from the XDCAM device to another system or to a
removable disc, you must keep the files in the same folder structure as used on the XDCAM
disc. You also must copy the XML data files that the XDCAM camera creates in the root
directory of the XDCAM disc.
A common workflow for importing XDCAM proxy media from a non-XDCAM drive uses
the following steps:
1. Copy the necessary files and the proxy folder from an XDCAM device to an FTP server.
2. Download the files to a local drive.
3. Import the proxy media to an Avid editing application from a local drive just as you
would from an XDCAM disc, and then begin editing. See “Manually Importing
XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc” on page 172.
4. When the XDCAM disc is available, either import or batch import the high-resolution
media to finish editing. See “Importing Photoshop Graphics” on page 157 or “Batch
Importing High-Resolution Media” on page 176.
To copy proxy media to a local drive or a server:
1. Copy the XML files in the root directory of the XDCAM disc to the root directory of a
local drive or a server.
2. Copy the XDCAM proxy folder (XDCAM drive:\Sub) to the root directory of a local
drive or a server.
n
You must create the same file and folder structure on your local drive as the structure used
on the XDCAM disc.
3. If you copied the XDCAM media files to a server, download the folder and XML files to
a local drive.
4. Select File > Import. For information on importing files, see “Manually Importing
XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc” on page 172.
Manually Importing XDCAM Media from the XDCAM Disc
You can use the standard Import function to import XDCAM media into your Avid
application. You set the default XDCAM import options in the XDCAM tab of the Import
Settings dialog box. For more information on import options, see “Import Settings: XDCAM
Tab” in the Help.
172
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
You can import files by doing one of the following:
•
Using the Import function
•
Using the drag and drop method of importing files
For more information, see “Importing Files” in the Help and “Using the Drag-and-Drop
Method to Import Files” in the Help)
n
Your Avid editing application imports XDCAM media at the native resolution of the media
on the XDCAM disc. Your application ignores other resolution settings — for example, in the
Select Files to Import dialog box.
The MXF media files are located in the following directories on your XDCAM disc:
•
High-resolution media — XDCAM drive:\Clip
•
Proxy media — XDCAM drive:\Sub
Importing Essence Marks as Locators
Sony XDCAM products use Essence Marks to store metadata about media clips. Essence
Marks, which can be set manually or automatically, allow XDCAM cameras to mark events
such as clip start points or audio clipping. You can use Essence Marks for sorting and
searching clips stored on XDCAM discs. For a description of Essence Marks, see your Sony
documentation.
You can import Essence Marks as locators when you import either proxy media or highresolution media. The locators appear in the master clips created by importing XDCAM
media, and you can view them in the Source/Record monitor, in the Timeline, and in the
Locators window. For information on using locator information as you edit, see “Using
Locators” on page 292.
173
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
To import Essence Marks as locators:
1. Double-click Import in the Settings list.
The Import Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the XDCAM tab.
3. Select Import Essence Marks as locators.
4. Click OK.
Editing the Proxy Media
When you import the proxy media files to a bin, new master clips are created that you can
edit in the Timeline just like any other clip. You can mix the clips in the Timeline with any
supported NTSC or PAL resolutions, add effects or titles, or perform any other editing
function available in your Avid editing application.
XDCAM proxy media is single-field resolution media. For the best performance during
playback, select Draft Quality or Best Performance from the Video Quality Menu in the
Timeline. For more information, see “Optimizing Your Playback Performance” in the Help.
You can improve playback further by using 8-bit processing for your video display. See
“Video Display Settings” on page 652.
174
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
To set the playback options for XDCAM media:
1. Right-click the Video Quality menu button, and select Draft Quality (yellow/green) or
Best Performance (yellow/yellow).
2. Right-click the Video Quality menu button, and select Video Display Settings.
The Video Display Settings dialog box opens.
10-bit
Playback
3. Deselect 10-bit Playback.
4. Click OK.
n
Some effects, such as IllusionFX and FluidMotion effects, do not play back in real time when
you have Draft Quality selected. For these effects, you must also select the Progressive
Source button in the Effect Editor before rendering.
175
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
You can also perform emergency play-to-air operations of the proxy media as a normal
export, as a Send to Playback operation, or as a digital cut.
Batch Importing High-Resolution Media
Once you finish editing your sequence using proxy media, you can replace the
low-resolution media in the sequence with the corresponding high-resolution media by using
the Batch Import command. The Batch Import command allows you to reimport the
high-resolution DVCAM, MPEG IMX, or XDCAM HD files while automatically linking
the new imported material with the sequences and master clips created with the lowresolution MPEG-4 media. If you are batch importing media for an edited sequence, the
import operation copies only those portions of the high-resolution master clip needed by the
sequence, not the whole clip. If you are batch importing master clips, the import process
copies entire clips.
n
The Disk Label column in the bin headings displays the XDCAM disk labels created when
you imported the XDCAM media. For information on displaying bin columns, see “Bin
Column Headings” on page 206. If necessary, you can use the Modify command to change
the name in the Disk Label column.
You can also import the high-resolution media files separately. Since importing
high-resolution master clips requires more storage, time, and bandwidth than batch
importing only the necessary parts of clips, you might want to import the master clips to
another workstation or to another system in a shared storage environment — for example, to
an Avid Unity server. Once the high-resolution media is imported, you can use the Relink
command to move between the proxy media and the high-resolution media. For more
information about relinking media, see “Editing and Finishing High-Resolution Media” on
page 179 and “Relinking Media Files” on page 231.
176
Importing Media from XDCAM Devices
To batch import high-resolution XDCAM media:
1. Double-click Import in the Settings list.
The Import Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the XDCAM tab.
3. Select Batch Import High-resolution Video.
4. Click the Handle Length text box and type the number of additional frames you want to
import at the heads and tails of the new master clips.
This provides enough overlap for trimming and adding transition effects. The default is
30 frames.
5. Click OK.
6. Open the bin, and select the sequences or master clips created with proxy media that you
want to replace with high-resolution media.
7. Insert a disc into your XDCAM device.
n
If your source media is stored on multiple XDCAM discs, and you have multiple XDCAM
devices, you can insert all the discs at the same time.
8. Select Clip > Batch Import.
A message box opens.
177
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
9. Click the All Clips button.
The Batch Import dialog box opens.
Single/Dual
Drives button
Video Drive
and Audio
Drive menus
n
Your Avid editing application imports XDCAM media using the native resolution of the
XDCAM files.
10. Click the Video Drive and Audio Drive menus, and select a destination drive or drives
for all the media files.
You can separate video and audio onto different drives.
11. Click Import.
The high-resolution files are imported. If the source media is stored on more than one
disc and not all discs are currently attached to your system, the system prompts you to
insert additional discs as needed.
178
Importing Editcam Files
Editing and Finishing High-Resolution Media
Once you have imported the high-resolution media, you can play back and edit your
sequence with full resolution and in real time using the standard Avid editing functions. You
can also send the sequence to a broadcast playback server using Avid Interplay Transfer.
As you edit your sequence, you can move between the proxy media and the high-resolution
media by relinking your clips with the corresponding media files. When you relink proxy
media to the high-resolution media, select one of the following Relink Method options:
n
-
Highest Quality
-
Most Compressed
Do not select Specific Resolution as the Relink Method.
This allows the audio tracks to relink to the appropriate audio files. For more information
about the Relink command, see “Relinking Media Files” on page 231.
Importing Editcam Files
You can import clips recorded with Ikegami® disk-based Editcam™ or Editcam-station
products. The Editcam is a digital news-gathering (DNG) camera that uses Avid's
CamCutter® technology.
To import Editcam files:
1. (Option) Select File > Mount All.
Performing this step in all cases is good practice, but is not necessary if you performed it
previously or if you inserted the FieldPak® before starting your Avid editing application.
2. Open a bin.
3. Select File > Import.
A dialog box opens.
4. Click the Files of Type menu, select CamCutter Files, and then select the CamCutter bin
by doing the following:
n
a.
From the desktop, select the FieldPak by selecting the FieldPak drive letter.
b.
Open the bin folder on the FieldPak.
c.
Select the CamCutter bins or select the .spl files to be imported.
The Outakes.bin contains clips that were discarded by the Editcam operator. These clips are
generally not imported.
179
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
5. Ignore the field specifying video resolution to be imported.
6. Ignore the field regarding video and audio drive selection.
7. Proceed with the import operation.
A dialog box opens, asking you to identify the drives that contain the media files.
8. Select the FieldPak drive letters as appropriate.
n
If the drive or volume is not listed, go back to step 1 and follow the procedure again.
9. Complete the import process.
Your Avid editing application creates entries in the selected bin that reference the clips on
the FieldPak.
For more information on importing files, see “Importing Files: Basics” in the Help.
Note the following restrictions:
•
The CamCutter clips are not copied onto a media drive. Your Avid editing application’s
bin references the clips physically located on the FieldPak. If you remove the FieldPak,
the referenced clips appear as Media Offline.
•
The FieldPak has limited performance and is used only to record and play back clips. If
multiple streams of video are required to perform advanced effects, it is possible that the
data cannot be supplied fast enough for proper operation. If this situation occurs, you
can do one of the following:
t
Render the effects, see “Rendering Effects” in the Help.
t
Consolidate the sequence to a valid media drive, see “Consolidating Media” in the
Help.
t
Import the CamCutter clips as OMFI files. This effectively copies the clips to a
media drive. See “Import Settings” on page 619.
For additional information regarding Editcam, CamCutter technology, and how these
systems operate with nonlinear editors, see the Web site www.nltek.com.
180
Importing Sequences from Pro Tools through Interplay
Importing Sequences from Pro Tools through
Interplay
You can import a sequence you have worked on in Pro Tools back into your Avid editing
application. You need to have checked the sequence into Interplay from Pro Tools.
To import a sequence from Pro Tools:
1. Open the Interplay Window and navigate to the location of the checked-in sequence.
2. Click the sequence and drag it into your bin.
The editing application checks out the sequence and imports the sequence and the
related files into the bin. For more information, see “Using Pro Tools and Interplay” in
Avid Interplay Best Practices.
181
Chapter 5 Importing Files: Advanced
182
Chapter 6
Working with Bins: Advanced
Your Avid editing application provides powerful database tools for organizing and managing
your captured material. You can view bins in four different display views. You can rename,
sort, sift, duplicate, and delete clips and sequences. You can also print single-clip frames or
whole bins.
The following topics provide advanced information on working with bins:
•
Advanced Bin Procedures
•
Using Text View: Advanced
•
Working with Restricted Material
•
Printing Bins
•
Preparing Digital Bars and Tone
•
Importing Color Bars and Other Test Patterns
•
Creating Leader
For basic information about bins, see “Working with Bins: Basics” in the Help or the Basics
Guide for your Avid editing application.
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Advanced Bin Procedures
You can use several advanced procedures in any of the bin display views for manipulating
clips in the bin. They include using audio timecode, setting the bin display, displaying
custom bin views, assigning colors, and sifting clips and sequences.
Displaying Custom Bin Views
When a bin is in Text view, the Bin View menu appears to the right of the Fast Menu button.
Use the Bin View menu (Text view only) to select different bin views. Bins have two default
views that are automatically installed:
•
Custom view: Allows you to create and save customized views. The only required
column heading is the Name heading, which is displayed by default. You can customize
the view by adding, hiding, or rearranging column headings.
•
Statistics view: Uses the standard statistical column headings derived from information
established during capture, such as start and end timecodes, duration, resolution, and
so on.
Text tab
Bin View menu
Bin Fast Menu button
For more information on bin column headings, see “Bin Column Headings” on page 206.
Customizing Bin Views in Text View
You can create and save customized bin views that you can easily access from the Bin View
menu. You can customize the bin view by resizing the Bin window and adding, hiding, or
rearranging bin columns. The only required column heading is Name, and it is displayed by
default.
There are several ways to customize views of the bin:
•
184
Alter the arrangement of existing columns in the standard Statistics view to suit your
needs, without adding or hiding columns. These arrangements are recalled each time
you select Statistics view.
Advanced Bin Procedures
•
Add or hide columns of information to create customized Statistics views. They are
saved as additional view settings in numerical order: for example, Statistics.1,
Statistics.2, and so on, unless you select another name.
To customize views of the bin, you can add, hide, copy, or rearrange standard or customized
columns in any combination to create your own custom views. You can name and save them
to suit your needs. See “Saving a Custom Bin View” on page 185.
When you create a new bin view, the system saves the settings for this view so that you can
later access and alter, copy, or delete these settings. New bin view settings appear in the
Settings list in the Project window.
Saving a Custom Bin View
Any time you add, hide, or delete a column, the bin view name changes to an italic name
with the file name extension .n to indicate that it no longer matches the original view. If you
select a new bin view setting while the current setting is untitled or italic, the system discards
the current setting.
n
If you do not save the view after adding or deleting headings, it is discarded.
To save a bin view:
1. Open a bin and click the Text tab.
2. Add or hide columns according to preference.
The bin view name becomes italic.
For information on adding, hiding, and deleting bin columns, see “Using Text View:
Advanced” on page 193.
3. Click the Bin View menu, and select Save as.
The View Name dialog box opens.
4. Type a name for the custom view, and click OK.
To change a custom bin view with the Bin View dialog box:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Double-click the custom bin view you want to change.
The Bin View dialog box opens.
3. Select and deselect the columns you want to see.
4. Click OK.
185
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Assigning Colors to Bin Objects
You can assign colors to clips, subclips, sequences, and effect clips to help you manage and
organize the bin objects. Colors assigned to bin objects are referred to as source colors. You
can display source colors in bins and in the Timeline. For information on displaying source
colors in the Timeline, see “Displaying Local and Source Colors in the Timeline” on
page 317.
n
Clip colors assigned to sequences, groups, motion effects, and title clips do not appear in the
Timeline.
To add a Color column to a bin:
1. With a bin in Text view, select Bin > Headings.
The Bin Column Selection dialog box opens.
2. Click Color in the list.
3. Click OK.
The Color column appears in the bin. By default, a new column appears as the last
column in the bin. To move the Color column, select the Color column heading and drag
it to the left.
To assign a color to a clip, subclip, sequence, or effect clip in a bin:
1. With a bin in Brief or Text view, select the bin objects to which you want to assign a
color.
2. Do one of the following:
n
t
Select Edit > Set Clip Color > color.
t
Select Edit > Set Clip Color > Pick, and then select a color from the Windows Color
dialog box.
After you assign a custom color, the color appears as Other in the Set Clip Color submenu.
t
(Text view only) Click in the Color column and select a color from the menu.
t
(Text view only) Alt+click in the Color column in the bin, and then select one of the
colors.
When you Alt+click in the Color column, the menu of colors that appears is limited
to the colors you are currently using in the bin.
The color appears in the Color column (Text view only) and on the clip icon.
186
Advanced Bin Procedures
Sifting Clips and Sequences
When you sift clips and sequences, the bin displays only those clips and sequences that meet
a specific set of criteria. For example, you can do a custom sift to display only those clips
containing the word “close-up” in the heading column. The Custom Sift dialog box provides
six levels of criteria.
You can also sift on a timecode (or keycode) number within a specific range. For more
information, see “Sifting Timecodes” on page 188.
To sift clips or sequences:
1. Select Bin > Custom Sift.
The Custom Sift dialog box opens.
Criterion menu
Text to Find text box
Column or Range to
Search menu
2. Click the Criterion menu, and select one of the sifting options.
3. Click the first Text to Find text box, and type the text that you want to use as a sift
criterion. When sifting by color, type the exact name of the color (using uppercase and
lowercase letters) in the text box.
4. Click the Column or Range to Search menu, and select a column heading to which you
want to apply the criterion.
5. Type additional sift criteria, and make additional column selections as necessary.
187
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
6. Click OK.
Only the clips or sequences that meet your criteria remain in the bin, with the word
“sifted” added to the bin name.
After you have sifted the clips in a bin, you can display the bin in a sifted or an unsifted state.
To view the entire bin:
t
Select Bin > Show Unsifted.
To view the sifted bin:
t
Select Bin > Show Sifted.
The word “sifted” appears in parentheses after the bin name when you view the bin in its
sifted state.
Sifting Timecodes
You can sift on a timecode number within a specific range. For example, you can sift for all
the clips that start before and end after a particular timecode.
Before custom sift
188
Advanced Bin Procedures
For example, type 01:08:32:00 in the Text to Find text box in the Custom Sift dialog
box, click the Column or Range to Search menu, and select Start to End Range.
After custom sift
The clips that
encompass the
timecode number
01:08:32:00
Some column pairs explicitly define a range, for example, Start and End or Mark IN and
Mark OUT. Other columns define the beginning of a range, and the end of the range is
determined by the Duration column. For example, Auxiliary TC1 implies a range that begins
at the value in the Auxiliary TC1 column and ends at that value plus the value in the
Duration column.
If you display any column in the bin that is associated with ranges, either explicit or implicit,
the corresponding range menu item appears in the Column or Range to Search menu in the
Custom Sift dialog box. For example, if you choose to display the Start column and the
Auxiliary TC1 column in the bin, the Start to End Range and Auxiliary TC1 Range menu
choices will appear in the Column or Range to Search menu.
When specifying a timecode, you do not need to enter colons or semicolons, and you can
omit the leading zero. For example, you can type 3172000 as a timecode number.
The following table lists all columns associated with explicit ranges and their corresponding
menu choices.
Range Menu Items for Explicit Ranges
Bin Column (Explicit Ranges)
Column or Range to Search
Menu Item
Start, End
Start to End Range
Mark In, Mark Out
Mark In to Out Range
189
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
The following table lists all columns associated with implicit ranges and their corresponding
menu choices. The Duration column determines the end of these ranges.
To sift for a timecode number within a specific range:
1. Select Bin > Custom Sift.
The Custom Sift dialog box opens.
2. Type the timecode number for the range in which you want to sift.
3. Click the Column or Range to Search menu, and select a range; for example, Start to
End Range or Mark In to Out Range.
The criterion “contain” appears in the Criterion menu. If you try to change this criterion,
no information appears in the Column or Range to Search menu.
4. Click OK.
The bin displays those clips that encompass the timecode number that you entered.
Locking and Unlocking Items in a Bin
You can lock any items in a bin — including source clips, master clips, subclips, and
sequences — to prevent deletion. When you lock clips in a bin, you lock their associated
media files on your desktop as well.
To lock items:
1. Click a clip, subclip, or sequence to select it. Ctrl+click additional clips, if necessary.
2. Select Clip > Lock Bin Selection.
A Lock icon appears for each locked clip in the Lock column of the bin in Text view.
Lock
icons
190
Advanced Bin Procedures
n
If the Lock column is not displayed, you might have hidden that column. For information on
hiding and restoring bin columns, see “Manipulating Bin Columns” on page 193.
To unlock previously locked items:
1. Select the items in the bin.
2. Select Clip > Unlock Bin Selection.
n
You can use the clip-locking feature along with archiving software to automatically archive
all locked media files. For more information on archiving locked files, see your archiving
software’s documentation.
Selecting Offline Items in a Bin
Offline items are clips, subclips, or sequences that are missing some or all of their original
media files or that have never been captured.
To identify offline items, do one of the following:
t
Select Bin > Select Offline Items.
t
Click the Bin Fast Menu button, and then select Select Offline Items.
The bin highlights all items that are missing media files.
n
To identify offline items in the Timeline, see “Highlighting Offline Media Clips” in the Help.
Selecting Media Relatives for an Object
When you identify the media relatives of a selected clip or sequence, your Avid editing
application highlights all other clips linked to the selected clip, such as subclips or other
sequences.
To identify media relatives:
1. Open the bin that contains the selected clip or sequence.
2. Open any other bins that might contain the media relatives that you want to find.
3. Resize and position the bins so that you can see their contents.
Text view is the best display for viewing as many objects as possible.
191
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
4. Select the clip or sequence, and select Bin > Select Media Relatives.
The system highlights all related objects in all open bins.
Highlighted media relatives
n
You can also use the Media tool to look at the captured video and audio data files stored on
your media drives. For more information on the Media tool, see “Using the Media Tool” in
the Help.
Selecting Unreferenced Clips
When you select unreferenced clips, your Avid editing application highlights all clips not
currently referenced by clips or sequences that are in the open bins. Any master clips,
subclips, or effect clips you edited into sequences in the bins are not highlighted.
n
The Select Unreferenced Clips command is useful for finding unused footage or media.
To identify unreferenced clips:
1. Open the bin containing the sequence or clip that is referenced.
2. Open all other bins containing clips that were used during editing.
3. Select Bin > Select Unreferenced Clips.
A message box warns you that unreferenced clips will be highlighted in open bins only
(items in closed bins are not shown).
192
Using Text View: Advanced
4. Click OK.
All unreferenced clips are highlighted in the open bins.
n
The Select Unreferenced Clips command is effectively the reverse of the Select Media
Relatives command.
Using Text View: Advanced
Text view provides the most complete view of clip information. It uses database columns
that you can rearrange and customize to suit your needs.
Manipulating Bin Columns
Use the following procedures to move, align, and delete columns in a bin.
When you align bin columns, the system maintains the same order of columns from left to
right but spaces them according to the length of their contents. This is especially useful for
removing spaces remaining after you move or rearrange columns.
Deleting a statistical column is the same as hiding the column; you can restore the column at
any time by using the Bin Column Selection dialog box. When you delete a custom
column, however, you must re-create the column.
For information on selecting column headings to display or hide them in the bin, see “Using
Text View” in the Help.
You can also duplicate columns, add customized columns, and change the heading name of
columns in a bin, as described in the following procedures.
To move a text column in a bin:
1. Click the heading of the column that you want to move.
The entire column is selected.
2. Drag the column to the position you want, and release the mouse button.
The column appears in the new position, and columns to the right are moved to make
room.
To align bin columns:
t
Select Bin > Align to Columns.
193
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
To delete a column:
1. Click the column heading in a bin.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Delete.
t
Press the Delete key.
The column disappears from the view, and surrounding columns close to fill the space.
Duplicating Bin Columns
You can duplicate existing columns containing timecode information into other compatible
columns that you target in a dialog box.
To duplicate a timecode column:
1. Select the column you want to duplicate by clicking its heading.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate.
The Select dialog box opens.
3. Select a column name from the list.
The column must contain the same type of data for the copy to occur. For example, you
can copy start timecodes to the Auxiliary TC column, but you cannot copy timecodes to
the Pullin column.
4. Click OK.
The column of information appears in the column you designated.
When you duplicate a timecode column (Start, TC 24, TC 25, TC 25P, or TC 30), the values
for master clips and subclips are converted to the appropriate timecode. For more
information, see “Displaying Timecodes in a 24p or 25p Project” on page 205.
Adding Customized Columns to a Bin
In addition to the standard column headings, you can add your own column headings to
describe information about clips and sequences. For example, you might want to add a
column heading to describe what kind of shot (close-up, wide shot, master shot, extreme
close-up, and so on) is used in a clip.
To add a new custom column:
1. Click an empty area to the right of the current headings in the headings box.
2. Move any existing column to the right or left to create an empty area.
194
Using Text View: Advanced
3. Type the column heading you want, and press Enter. Column headings must contain a
maximum of 14 characters, including spaces.
This places the pointer in the data box, beside the first clip in the bin.
4. Select Bin > Align to Columns after you have entered the new column heading.
5. Type the information, and press Enter to move to the next line.
Changing a Custom Bin Column Heading
You can change the heading name of custom columns only. You cannot change any of the
standard column headings.
To change the name of a custom column:
1. Press and hold the Alt key, and click the heading to highlight it.
2. Type the new text for the heading, and press Enter.
Managing Clip Information in Text View
You can manage clip information in bin columns in several ways. These methods include
moving information between whole columns, copying information between cells, and
modifying clip data.
Moving Within Column Cells
You can use the keyboard shortcuts described in the following table to move from cell to cell
in bin columns:
Shortcut
Description
Tab
Moves the pointer to the parallel cell in the next column. You can
continue to press the Tab key to scroll through the cells to the right until
the cell in the last column is highlighted. The next time you press the Tab
key, the cell in the first column is highlighted.
Shift+Tab
Moves the pointer left to the cell in the previous column. You can
continue to press Shift+Tab to scroll through cells to the left until the cell
in the first column is highlighted. The next time you press Shift+Tab, the
cell in the last column is highlighted.
195
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Shortcut
Description
Enter
(on main keyboard)
Enters any new information typed in the cell and moves the pointer down
to the cell in the next row. You can continue to press Enter to scroll down
the column until the last cell in the column is highlighted. The next time
you press Enter, the first cell in the column is highlighted.
Shift+Enter (on main
keyboard)
Move the pointer up to the cell in the previous row. You can continue to
press Shift+Enter until the cell in the top row is highlighted. The next
time you press Shift+Enter, the cell in the last row is highlighted.
Modifying Clip Information
You can change or modify the information in certain columns for your master clips,
subclips, tapes, and other objects stored in the bin. This is especially useful if some of the
data is incorrect or if you need to conform information for organizational purposes.
The following conditions apply to modifying clip information:
•
When you modify a clip’s information, related objects are automatically updated to
reflect the new data. For example, if you change the name of a clip, the updated name
appears in the sequences that use the clip.
•
You cannot modify some data after capture because changes would prevent you from
playing back and editing the material successfully.
•
You cannot change sequence data even though it appears in your bin. The only way to
modify sequence data is to edit the sequence itself. You can, however, change the name
and start time for the master timecode track, as described in “Changing the Sequence
Name and Timecode” in the Help.
You can modify data in two ways:
196
•
Modify some data directly for master clips, subclips, and other objects stored in a bin.
See “Modifying Data Directly” on page 197.
•
Use the Modify command to change specific information for master clips only. See
“Using the Modify Command to Modify Data” on page 198.
Using Text View: Advanced
Modifying Data Directly
When you modify information in a bin directly, you click a cell and type the new
information. For example, you can type a new name for a clip or correct the start and end
timecodes.
You can directly modify any data in the bin while logging and prior to capture. After the
footage is captured, however, you can directly modify information only in selected headings,
with restrictions, as shown in the following table.
Modifiable Bin Headings
Heading
Restrictions
(Clip) Name
No restrictions.
Mark IN
Altering the mark IN also alters the IN to OUT duration. This replaces
any previous mark.
Mark OUT
Altering the mark OUT also alters the IN to OUT duration. This replaces
any previous mark.
Cadence
Ctrl+click and choose from the menu. All clips with the same tape name
will change according to what is selected.
Color
No restrictions.
Comments
No restrictions.
Auxiliary timecodes, 1–5
No restrictions.
Journalist
No restrictions.
Production
No restrictions.
Start
No restrictions.
TapeID
No restrictions.
TC 60
No restrictions.
c
Modifying tape names and timecodes affects any key numbers entered for the selected
clips.
197
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
To modify the clip data directly in a bin:
1. Click the Text tab in the bin to enter Text view.
2. Click the cell that you want to modify. Select only one item at a time. In the following
example, the timecode data is highlighted.
3. Click the cell again to enter text.
If the pointer does not change to an I-beam, you might be attempting to modify a
column that cannot be directly modified.
4. Type the new information, and press Enter.
Using the Modify Command to Modify Data
The Modify command gives you specialized control over groups of clip information. For
example, you can use the Modify command to change the name of source tapes, or to
increment or decrement the start and end timecodes by a specified length of time for one or
several clips at once.
198
Using Text View: Advanced
You can apply changes with the Modify command to master clips only; subclips and
sequences are not altered in this way. In addition, you can perform modifications that only
alter the end timecodes or the tracks before capture, as described in the following table.
Modify Command Options
Type of Modification
Options
Description
Set Timecode Drop/
Non-drop
Drop, Non-drop
Changes the timecode format between drop-frame and
non-drop-frame. Setting must match the timecode
format of the tape.
Set Timecode By Field
Start or End
Changes either the start or end timecode. Only start
timecodes are altered after capture.
Hour, Minutes, Seconds,
Frames
Allows you to enter custom timecode.
Start or End
Changes either the start or end timecode. Incrementing
the start timecode automatically modifies the end
timecode by the same amount. Only start timecode can
be incremented after capture.
Timecode text box
Allows you to enter custom incremental timecode.
Start or End
Changes either the start or end timecode.
Decrementing the start timecode automatically
modifies the end timecode by the same amount. Only
start timecode can be decremented after capture.
Timecode text box
Allows you to enter custom decremental timecode.
Set Key Number
Generic (Prefix)
Key Number text box
Allows you to enter a custom generic key number.
Only for 24p, 25p, and matchback projects.
Set Pullin
A, B, C, or D
Selects the pulldown phase to match to the timecode
entry (24p and matchback projects only). For more
information, see “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on
page 100.
Set Tracks
V, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5,
A6, A7, and A8 track
selector buttons
Changes the clip’s configuration of tracks (film
projects only). The clip must be unlinked. See
“Unlinking Media Files” on page 239.
Set Source
None
Opens the Select Tape dialog box. Selects another
source tape name for the clips that should match the
original source tape name.
Increment Timecode
Decrement Timecode
199
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Modify Command Options (Continued)
Type of Modification
Options
Description
Set Disk Label
Set label
Allows you to change the name assigned to an
XDCAM disk. For more information, see “Importing
Media from XDCAM Devices” on page 164.
Set Format
Compatible formats
Allows you to change the format of a sequence. The
choice of formats is limited to the compatible frame
rate of the current sequence. This option is useful if
you are working with downconverted HD material in
an offline/online workflow. For more information, see
“Modifying the Format of a Sequence” on page 728
and “Converting a 23.976p NTSC Sequence to
720p/23.976” on page 730.
To modify selected data using the Modify command:
1. Open the bin and click the Text tab.
2. Click the icon to the left of the clip, sequence, or other object you want to modify.
Ctrl+click each additional object you want to modify.
3. Select Clip > Modify.
The Modify dialog box opens.
4. Click the Modify Options menu, and select an option.
200
Using Text View: Advanced
5. Select an option or type information into the text boxes (timecode values, for example)
when they appear.
6. Click OK.
The modification takes effect.
Copying Information Between Columns
To copy column information to another column:
1. Select the column that you want to copy.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate.
The Select dialog box opens, prompting you to target a column for the data.
3. Select the target column for the data, and click OK.
Copying Information from Another Cell in a Custom Column
To copy information from another cell in a custom column:
1. Press and hold the Alt key while you click in the destination cell to reveal a menu of all
items entered in that column.
2. Select the text from the menu.
The text appears in the cell.
Selecting a Film Gauge
The film gauge consists of the film size and either the number of perfs per frame (for 35mm
and 65mm) or the number of frames per foot (for 16mm). You specify the gauge in any of
the film-gauge columns (Aux Ink Film, Ink Film, and Master Film).
n
You cannot modify the KN Film column.
201
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
To specify the gauge of the film:
t
Ctrl+click the cell, and then select one of the following film sizes and perf count or
frame count:
-
35mm, 4 perf
-
35mm, 2 perf
-
35mm, 3 perf
-
35mm, 8 perf
-
16mm, 40 perf
-
16mm, 20 perf
-
65mm, 15 perf (used in IMAX® films)
-
65mm, 10 perf
-
65mm, 8 perf
-
65mm, 5 perf
-
VistaVision®
Tracking 3-Perf Counts
You can track 3-perf counts in film projects. The perf value is an extension of the key
number, and appears in the KN Start, Ink Number, and Aux Ink Number bin columns. A
sample key number might be as follows:
KJ 12 1234-3456-10.3
The “.3” at the end of the key number represents the perf value.
To specify the perf value:
t
202
Enter 1, 2, or 3 in the appropriate bin column cell.
Using Text View: Advanced
Selecting an Edgecode Type
There is one edgecode per foot of film. You enter an edgecode type for a particular place on
the film in any of the edgecode-type bin columns (Aux Ink Edge, Ink Edge, Master Edge).
Select the appropriate edgecode type for a clip so you can track frames in the Timecode
window, above the Source/Record monitor, or in FilmScribe.
To select an edgecode type:
t
Ctrl+click the cell, and then select the edgecode type that matches the edgecodes on the
film.
The following table describes the edgecode types and the appropriate format for each.
Edgecode Types and Formats
Edgecode Type
Edgecode Format
Sample Edgecode
Key Number
XX NNNNNN NNNN+NN (Film type Film ID
Feet on film+Frame in foot)
KL 43 5146-0152+00
Edgecode (4 count)
NNN-NNNN+NN (Identifier-Feet on film+Frame in foot)
103-9025+03
Edgecode (5 count)
NNN-NNNNN+NN (Identifier-Feet on film+Frame in foot)
203-09025+03
Frames
NNNNN
45678
Sorting Clips in Text View
Sorting clips arranges them in either numerical or alphabetical order, based on the data in the
column you select as the sorting criteria. You can sort clips in several different ways,
including an ascending sort, a descending sort, or a multilevel sort.
You can also sort clips by color if you have assigned colors to the clips. For more
information, see “Assigning Colors to Bin Objects” on page 186.
n
You can automatically sort clips and sequences in Text view only. If you need to view sorted
clips in Script or Frame view, sort them in Text view first and then return to Script or Frame
view.
If you want to sort clips in a customized order in Text view, you must first rearrange the clips
in Script view, and then return to Text view. For information about Script view, see
“Rearranging Clips in Script View” in the Help.
203
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
To sort clips in ascending or descending order:
1. With a bin in Text view, click the heading of the column that you want to use as the
criterion.
The column is highlighted.
2. Do one of the following:
n
t
To sort in ascending order, select Bin > Sort.
t
To sort in descending order, press and hold the Alt key while you select Bin > Sort
Reversed.
If the Sort command appears dimmed in the menu, you have not selected a column.
To reapply the last sort:
t
Select Bin > Sort Again with no column selected.
This step is especially useful after you have added new clips to a sorted bin.
To perform a multilevel sort using the information in the bins:
1. With a bin in Text view, arrange the columns in the bin to establish the primary column.
The column that appears farthest to the left in the bin has higher sort priority.
2. Select the columns you want to contribute to the sort criterion.
3. Select Bin > Sort.
The objects in the bin are sorted.
To sort clips by color:
1. Click the Color column heading in the bin.
2. Select Bin > Sort.
The objects in the bin are sorted by color.
n
204
Colors are sorted by hue, saturation, and value.
Using Text View: Advanced
Displaying Timecodes in a 24p or 25p Project
When you are working with 24p and 25p projects (PAL with pulldown), you can add
timecode columns to bins or the Media tool to enter and display starting timecodes in several
timecode formats for master clips, subclips, and sequences.
n
For information on displaying timecodes in the Timeline and the Tracking Information
display, see “Displaying Timecode Tracks in the Timeline” on page 320 and “Displaying
Tracking Information” in the Help.
After you add a timecode column (TC60) to a bin, you can use the Duplicate command to
convert the values for master clips and subclips to the appropriate timecode for that column.
For example, when working with a 24p NTSC project, if you duplicate the Start column
values to one of the timecode columns and the Start column contains a master clip with the
timecode 01:00:00:15, the timecode is converted to the timecode of that column.
Frame Counting for Timecodes
The following table shows the frame count for each timecode. The timecodes are listed as 24
for 24 fps, 25 for 25 fps, 25P for 25 PAL with pulldown, 30 for 30 fps (the count skips six
frames to fit 30 frames into 24 fps), 30NP for 30 fps with no pulldown, and 60 for 60 fps.
Timecode Frame Counts
Timecode Frames
60
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Adding Timecode Columns to a Bin or the Media Tool
To add timecode columns to a bin or to the Media tool:
1. Select Bin > Headings.
The Bin Column Selection dialog box opens.
2. Ctrl+click the timecode columns you want to display.
3. Click OK.
The timecode columns appear in the bin or the Media tool.
205
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Adding Timecode Values to the Timecode Columns
To add timecode values to the timecode columns:
1. Open a bin or the Media tool.
2. Add the Start column and the timecode column with the format you want to use.
3. Select the Start column.
4. Select Edit > Duplicate.
The Select dialog box opens.
5. Select the timecode heading from the list.
6. Click OK.
The values for master clips, subclips, and sequences in the Start column are converted to
the appropriate timecode format and entered into the column you selected.
Bin Column Headings
You can select individual or multiple headings to be displayed or hidden in a bin. For a
procedure on how to select column headings, see “Manipulating Bin Columns” in the Help.
Your Avid editing application provides the ability to track multiple film gauges within a bin
and within a sequence. Bin column headings allow you to display detailed information about
edgecodes, film gauges, and source information such as scanned file type, color lookup
table, resource location, and so on.
If you are working in an Interplay environment, the list of bin column headings include
audio sample rates and video resolutions. Select from these headings to display multiple
sample rates and resolutions in the bin. For more information, see “MultiRez Bin Headings”
in the Help.
The following table describes the bin column headings. Some of the columns allow you to
enter or modify the information.
n
206
This table includes all bin column headings available in Avid editing applications. The
columns that appear depend on the model of your Avid editing application project in which
you are working.
Using Text View: Advanced
Bin Column Headings
Heading
Description
Name
Heading does not appear as a column selection, but it always appears in the bin. The
column contains the name of the clip or sequence (you can rename a clip or sequence
after it has been captured).
Audio Bit Depth
Audio bit depth used when you work with audio files: 16 bit or 24 bit.
Audio Format
Audio format of master clips (AIFF-C or WAVE).
Audio SR
Audio resolution (sample rate).
Aux TC 24
Original HDTV sources (1080p/24) or audio DATs created for PAL feature film
productions that use in-camera timecode.
Auxiliary TC1 through You can enter an auxiliary timecode, such as Aaton® or Arri, or another timecode for
editing film or audio timecode for film. (Not restricted to film projects.)
TC5
CFPS
Captured frames per second.
Cadence
Type of pulldown present on the source NTSC tapes when in a 23.976 or 24p project.
Color
Color of the bin objects for organizing the objects.
Color Framing
The color framing for the tape. For NTSC, the choice is Even or Odd. For PAL, the
choices are A Standard, A Non-Standard, B Standard, or B Non-Standard.
Creation Date
Date and time the clip was logged or captured.
Disk Label
For XDCAM media, this heading displays the user-supplied disk label created when the
media file was imported. For other media, the heading displays the disk label of the
drive from which the clip was imported. For more information, see “Importing Media
from XDCAM Devices” on page 164.
Drive
Last known drive on which the media for that master clip existed.
Duration
Length of the clip.
End
Timecode of the clip’s tail frame.
FPS
Play rate: the number of frames to be displayed each second. The default is 29.97 for
NTSC and 25 for PAL for video. The play rate can also be 24 or 23.98.
Format
The format of a clip or sequence as determined by the project type, such as 30i NTSC
or 1080i/59.94.This is especially useful if you have both SD and HD clips in the same
bin.
207
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
Bin Column Headings (Continued)
Heading
Description
Frame
Displays the same frame that is displayed when you select Frame view for the bin. See
”Using Frame View” in the Help.
n
It can take longer for the screen to display frames than text. Therefore, working
with frames can slow down the work that you do with bins.
IN-OUT
Length of the marked segment, if any.
Journalist
First and last name of a person associated with the clip. Metadata imported from a P2
file.
Mark IN
Timecode for the IN point, if you set one for the clip.
Mark OUT
Timecode for the OUT point, if you set one for the clip.
Modified Date
Date and time a sequence was last edited or changed.
Offline
Track names for any media files that are offline.
Production
Name of the production associated with the clip. Metadata imported from a P2 file.
Project
Project under which the media was originally captured.
Pullin
Telecine pulldown of the first frame of the clip (pulldown phase). Pullin can have the
values A, B, X (matchback only), C, or D. Used for 24p projects and matchback
projects only. (NTSC only)
Start
Timecode of the clip’s head frame.
TC 60
60-fps timecode. Used for HD projects.
Tape
Source tape name.
TapeID
Tape ID number.
Tracks
All tracks used by this media object.
VITC
Vertical interval timecode.
Video
Resolution under which the media for that clip was captured.
Video File Format
Clip video format (OMF, AAF, MXF, or none).
208
Working with Restricted Material
Working with Restricted Material
Broadcast facilities sometimes need to manage digital rights by restricting the use of
footage. You can mark restrictions on clips in Avid Interplay Assist. When you bring marked
footage into your Avid editing application, you can see the restriction marker on the clip
icons in the bin, and you are warned about the restriction before you display or output that
footage. You can also use Avid Interplay Access to search the database for material that
contains restrictions.
You are also warned about the restriction when you display the restricted material in the
monitor and when you try to perform a digital cut, send the material to playback, or export it.
You can choose to continue, and you can view the reason for the restriction in the
Restrictions tool. You can change restriction comments in Interplay Assist and then view
them in the editing application.
Displaying or Outputting Restricted Material
The clip icon of any clip that contains restricted material displays the Restricted marker.
Restricted
marker
When you first open a restricted clip or load a sequence containing restricted clips, a
warning message box opens.
The warning appears every time you perform this operation (that is, opening or displaying a
clip) on restricted material in this session, not just on the present clip.
209
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
The same warning appears when you try to do any of the following:
•
Perform a digital cut
•
Send the sequence to playback
•
Export
If you are sending more than one clip to export, the message box lists all the clip names that
contain restricted material.
If you know that you are allowed to use all restricted material in the current project and can
safely ignore the warning for this particular operation, you can continue with your editing or
output task.
To ignore the warning for the rest of the editing session and continue with editing or
output:
t
Click the “Don’t warn again” button.
You no longer see restriction warnings for the current clip or any other clip in this
editing session. When you quit your Avid editing application and then open it, you see
the warning again the first time you try to display or output restricted material.
n
Clicking “Don’t warn again” in the warning message box stops the warning from appearing
again only for the current operation in the current editing session. For example, if you click
it after displaying a clip in the Source/Record monitor, you can load additional restricted
clips without seeing the message. If you select those clips for Export, however, you see the
warning again.
Disassociating Restrictions
The restriction is tied to the source tape name and timecode. You might disassociate the
restriction from the clip if you change those values in the bin. For more information about
bins, see “Organizing with Bins: Basics” in the Help.
210
Working with Restricted Material
Viewing Restriction Comments
You can view the reason particular material is restricted.
To view Restriction comments, do one of the following:
t
Click the View Restrictions button in the warning message box when it opens.
t
Select Tools > Restrictions.
The Restriction window opens. It displays the name of each restricted clip, its head
frame, and a description. The description contains the comments associated with the
restriction that you entered in Avid Interplay Assist. For more information, see the Avid
Interplay Assist documentation.
Comments
from Logger
about
restriction
Changing Restriction Comments
You can change the comments for a particular range of material in Avid Interplay Assist
while your Avid editing application is open.
To see changes in Restriction comments while you are editing:
1. Change the comments in Avid Interplay Assist. For more information, see the Avid
Interplay Assist documentation.
2. In the editing application, select Tools > Remote Assets.
3. Navigate to the changed clip, and drag it into the bin again.
The changes appear in the Restriction window.
Searching the Database for Restrictions
You can use extended search capabilities to search for restrictions in Avid Interplay Access.
For general information about searching in Interplay Access, see the Avid Interplay Access
User’s Guide.
211
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
The following table lists the Avid Interplay restriction attribute name, its description, and the
values you can enter for it when specifying an extended search.
Attribute Name
Description
Values
DRM
Digital Rights Management, the cover title for the •
use of restrictions.
•
Has DRM
Does not have DRM
Printing Bins
You can print entire bins or individual frames.
To print entire bins:
1. Make sure your printer is correctly set up. See your printer documentation, the Windows
documentation, or your system administrator.
2. Click the Brief tab (Brief View), Text tab (Text View), Script tab (Script View), or
Frame tab (Frame View) of the bin to select the view you want to print.
3. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
4. Select the appropriate options from the Page Setup dialog box.
5. Click OK.
6. Select File > Print Bin.
The Print dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
7. Select the Print options.
8. Click OK.
The system prints the active bin.
To print a single frame of a clip or sequence:
1. Load a clip or sequence into the Source/Record monitor.
2. Select the frame you want to print.
3. Select File > Print Frame.
The Print dialog box opens.
4. Select the Print options.
5. Click OK.
The system prints the frame currently displayed in the active monitor.
212
Preparing Digital Bars and Tone
Preparing Digital Bars and Tone
If you expect to output your final sequence as a digital cut that requires calibration before
playback (a digital cut that will be broadcast, for example), in most cases you will need a
clip of color bars. You can add the clip to the front of the sequence, or you can output the
clip separately as an assemble or insert edit onto tape during recording of a digital cut.
There are several ways to acquire a clip of bars, each with different advantages:
•
Record bars and tone from a house generator. This method requires the least effort
with good results because you record high-quality bars and tone simultaneously, with a
minimum of calibration. Not all facilities, however, have a house generator.
•
Record bars and tone from a videotape. This method allows you to record bars and
tone simultaneously, but you must calibrate carefully to ensure accuracy. In addition, the
final clip reflects the quality of the source tape recording.
•
Record bars from an external color bar generator. This method provides good
results, but you must have a color bar generator available, and you must rearrange your
system inputs to attach the generator. In addition, you must acquire tone separately and
sync it with bars within your Avid editing application.
•
Import a file of bars. This method provides the highest quality results because the
source image is already digital. If the file is accurate, the quality of the clip is ensured.
You must, however, acquire tone separately and sync it with bars within your Avid
editing application. For more information, see “Importing Color Bars and Other Test
Patterns” on page 213.
Importing Color Bars and Other Test Patterns
Avid editing applications supply files for color bars and other test patterns. You can import
8-bit PICT files or 16-bit TIFF files.
To import a test pattern from a file:
1. Open an existing bin, or create a new one for the test pattern.
2. Select the destination bin.
3. Select File > Import.
The Select Files to Import dialog box opens.
4. Click the Files of Type menu and select Graphic Files.
5. Use the Look in menu to locate the folder containing the test pattern file. Test pattern
files are located in the following folder:
drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\SupportingFiles\Test_Patterns
213
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
6. Select a test pattern from the File browser.
-
8-bit PICT files are located at the top level of the Test_Patterns folder.
-
16-bit TIFF files are located in the HD_720p, HD_1080i, SD_NTSC, and SD_PAL
folders.
The file name appears in the File Name text box.
7. Click Options to adjust the Import settings.
The Import Settings dialog box opens.
8. Click the Image tab, and select the following options:
a.
Select 601/709, non-square from the Aspect Ratio, Pixel Aspect area.
b.
Select 601/709 from the Color Levels area.
c.
Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
9. Click Open. The clip for the imported file appears in the selected bin.
When you import SMPTE_Bars.pct, the file does not exactly match the SMPTE bars
generated by the Video Output tool. The I and Q blocks in the bottom portion of the
pattern cannot be exactly represented in the RGB color space used when importing files.
If you must have I and Q blocks correct in a sequence, do one of the following:
t
Record SMPTE bars from a signal generator.
t
Use the Video Output tool to generate SMPTE bars, and record them to tape using
the controls on the deck. Then, capture them back into the system from the tape.
10. Create a clip of tone media using the Audio tool. For more information, see “Using the
Audio Tool” in the Help.
n
Match the resolution of the tone to the audio resolution of the sequence.
11. Load the new color bars clip into the Source/Record monitor, and create a subclip of
appropriate length for use in sequences (1 minute is a common standard).
12. Select the new subclip, Ctrl+click the audio clip containing the tone, and select
Bin > AutoSync.
A new subclip containing bars and tone appears in the bin.
13. Rename the clip as necessary.
214
Creating Leader
Creating Leader
Film editors traditionally use standard head and tail leaders for cueing and syncing material.
You can use digital leaders in your Avid editing application to mark the beginning and
ending of tracks and to help you maintain sync, as described in “Managing Sync with
Multiple Tracks” on page 308. You can create your own leader for video or film. Whatever
you choose for specifications, make all your leader clips the same length, with common sync
points.
Creating Video Leader
To create leader for picture tracks:
1. Create a black screen in the Title tool for tail leader, or a white screen for head leader.
For information on using the Title tool, see “Creating and Editing Titles” in the Help.
2. (Option) Type a title onto the screen that says Tail Leader or Head Leader.
3. Name this clip Head Leader or Tail Leader when you save the title.
4. Create a subclip from an appropriate length of the clip, according to your chosen
specifications.
5. (Option) Mark a sync frame in the subclip as follows:
a.
Load the clip into the Source/Record monitor.
b.
Find an appropriate sync point, and add a locator.
For more information, see “Using Locators” on page 292.
c.
(Option) Double-click the locator in the Source/Record monitor to add a sync point
notation that appears on the monitor.
Once the leader is prepared, you can splice the leader during editing onto the tracks that you
want to keep in sync. You can use the sync points for visually aligning tracks.
Creating Audio Leader
To create tail leader for audio tracks:
1. Load a clip that includes a section of captured tone into the Source/Record monitor.
2. Create a subclip according to your chosen specifications.
3. Name this new subclip Head Leader or Tail Leader.
4. Load this subclip into the Source/Record monitor.
5. Prepare the sound levels for leader without a sync point (no audio pop) by opening the
Audio Mixer tool and bringing the audio level all the way down for the entire clip.
215
Chapter 6 Working with Bins: Advanced
6. Prepare the sound levels for leader that include a sync point (audio pop) by doing the
following:
a.
Find the appropriate sync point.
Step one frame backward and place an add edit before the sync frame; then step two
frames forward and place an add edit after the sync frame.
For information on placing add edits, see “Adding an Edit (Match Framing)” on
page 325.
b.
Move the position indicator before the first add edit, and open the Audio Mixer tool.
c.
Bring the audio level all the way down.
d. Move the position indicator after the second add edit, and use the Audio Mixer tool
to bring the level all the way down.
After the leader is prepared, you can splice the leader during editing onto the audio tracks
that you want to keep in sync. You can use the sync points for visually aligning tracks.
216
Chapter 7
Managing Media Files: Advanced
When you capture footage, the system creates digital media files for the video and audio
tracks on the media drives attached to your system. Bin tools allow you to organize the clips
that reference the media files. In addition, your Avid editing application provides tools and
features for directly managing media files for storage and playback efficiency, for backup,
and for transfer between systems.
The following topics provide advanced information on managing media files:
•
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
•
Finding a Related Media File
•
Relinking Media Files
•
Unlinking Media Files
•
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring Media Files
For basic information about managing media, see “Managing Media Files: Basics” in the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
Panasonic’s DVCPRO® P2 equipment records DV, DVCPRO, and DVCPRO 50 media on
compact, solid-state memory cards (P2 cards). Avid editing applications support editing of
media directly from these memory cards, without the need to capture. You can also write
your sequence back to the P2 card. The result is a streamlined workflow that is particularly
efficient in news-gathering organizations.
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
Panasonic P2 Formats
Avid editing applications support the following resolutions, captured by Panasonic P2
equipment at frame rates of 30i NTSC and 25i PAL:
Panasonic Format Avid Format
Number of Audio Channels
DV
DV 25 411 (NTSC)
DV 25 420 (PAL)
2
DVCPRO
DV 25 411 (NTSC and
PAL)
2
DVCPRO HD
720p
1080i
4
DVCPRO 50
DV 50 (NTSC and PAL) 4
Avid editing applications support one video track and up to four tracks of 48 kHz, 16-bit
audio, the maximum you can record on Panasonic P2 equipment.
P2 Files and Folders
Panasonic P2 video and audio media is recorded in MXF format, one of the two media file
formats you can use in Avid editing applications. Each P2 card stores MXF files in two
folders:
218
•
drive: Contents\Audio
•
drive: Contents\Video
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
The following illustration shows examples of the MXF audio and video files contained in the
Audio and Video folders.
Audio folder
Four audio tracks
for a single clip
Video folder
Corresponding
video track
Panasonic P2 devices write individual MXF audio and video media files for each track of
each clip. For example, a P2 clip that includes one track of video and four tracks of audio is
stored on the P2 card as five individual media files. Within the Avid editing application the
five media files are represented as a single clip with audio and video.
Workflow for Editing with P2 Media
The main steps in preparing to edit with media created on Panasonic P2 equipment are:
1. Install the appropriate Panasonic P2 drivers.
2. Mount one or more P2 cards (up to five).
3. Update the drive list.
4. Do one of the following:
t
Import the master clips directly from the P2 card, with or without the media.
t
Drag the master clips from the Media tool to a bin.
5. Use the master clips to edit and output a sequence.
6. Write the clip or sequence back to the P2 card.
219
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
A typical workflow is as follows:
1. Import the P2 clips from a P2 card or any device where the P2 contents are stored by
selecting File > Import P2 > Clips to Bin.
The P2 master clip information loads into a bin. This is useful because it is only the clip
metadata and it effectively allows you to browse the card contents directly without
having to copy the media itself.
2. (Option) Rename the clips to help with organizing your material.
3. Transfer the media to dedicated storage: select the clips you want and import the media
for them by selecting File > Import P2 > Media.
The media imports to the destination you set in the Media Creation dialog box.
4. Remove the P2 card or drive.
The following topics provide more information on these steps.
Installing the Panasonic P2 Drivers
Before you can use Panasonic P2 equipment, you need to load the appropriate drivers. These
drivers are included on a CD that is packaged with your Panasonic P2 equipment.
To install Panasonic P2 drivers:
t
Follow the instructions included with your P2 equipment.
Preparing to Mount P2 Cards as Drives
You can mount P2 cards as drives on your desktop and use the files without importing them
or capturing them through the Capture tool. To your Avid editing application, these mounted
cards function as individual media drives.
n
P2 cards can function as media drives even though the MXF files are not contained in an
Avid MediaFiles folder.
After installing the appropriate Panasonic driver, you can mount the cards as drives from any
of these devices:
220
•
PCMCIA card slot: Notebook computers typically include a PCMCIA card slot that will
accept individual P2 cards.
•
P2 drive: Panasonic offers P2 card-reading peripherals such as the AJ-PCD10 memory
card drive. You can connect this drive, or card reader through a USB port, or you can
install it as an internal drive on a desktop PC. This card reader provides access to five P2
cards at one time.
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
•
P2 camera or deck: Panasonic cameras and decks, such as the AJ-SPD850, provide
access to P2 cards through a USB port.
Before using a P2 card reader, you need to set Autoplay options.
To set up a P2 card reader for the first time:
1. Make sure your Avid editing application is not running.
2. Make sure the appropriate driver is installed. See “Installing the Panasonic P2 Drivers”
on page 220.
3. Connect the card reader to a USB port.
4. Insert a P2 card into each slot.
Each P2 card is displayed as a single lettered drive on the Windows desktop.
5. Open the Windows Explorer, right-click a drive letter, and select Autoplay from the
menu.
6. In the Autoplay dialog box, select “Take no action” and then “Always do the selected
action.”
7. Repeat the last two steps for each drive letter associated with the reader.
Mounting P2 Cards as Drives
n
If you don’t have enough cards to fill all the slots, you can reuse a card in multiple slots to
perform the following drive letter setup.
To mount one or more P2 cards as drives:
1. Make sure your Avid editing application is not running.
2. Make sure the appropriate driver is installed. See “Installing the Panasonic P2 Drivers”
on page 220.
3. Connect the card reader, camera, or deck to a USB port.
4. Set write-protection on P2 cards or set up the P2 card reader. See “Preparing to Mount
P2 Cards as Drives” on page 220.
5. Insert one or more P2 cards (up to five).
On the desktop, each P2 card is displayed as a single lettered drive on the Windows
desktop.
6. Start your Avid editing application and open a project.
7. Select File > Mount All to update the list of mounted drives.
221
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
n
Some card slots of the P2 drive might require drive letters that have already been assigned
to existing network drives. If your computer does not display all five card slots as drives,
reassign the network drives or restart your system.
Copying P2 Files to a FireWire or Network Drive
After you mount the P2 drives, you have the option of copying the P2 media to a FireWire
drive or a network drive and then ejecting the card. You might find it convenient to copy
several P2 cards to other drives so the cards can be reused quickly. Your editing application
supports P2 copies as though they were actual P2 cards.
You can connect a FireWire drive, for example, and store the contents of several P2 cards on
it so you can keep using the cards in the camera.
n
You can work with media on a P2 card or work with media on another drive, but you cannot
work with media that is stored in both places simultaneously. To avoid the problem, eject the
P2 card after you have copied the P2 files to the other drive.
To copy the P2 cards to another drive:
1. On the drive, set up a folder for each P2 card you want to copy.
2. Give each folder a unique name that identifies the P2 card; the name does not have to be
the same as the actual P2 card name.
3. Navigate to the actual P2 card and select the Contents folder.
4. Do one of the following:
t
Copy and paste the Contents folder to the folder on the other drive.
t
Click the Contents folder and drag it to the folder on the other drive.
5. Eject the P2 card.
Copying P2 Files to a Local Media Drive
After you mount the drives, you have the additional option of copying the media to a local
media drive and then ejecting the card.
n
You can work with media on a P2 card or work with media on local storage, but you cannot
work with media that is stored in both places simultaneously. To avoid the problem, eject the
P2 card after you have copied the P2 media files to a local media drive.
To copy media to a local media drive:
1. Mount the P2 cards as drives. See “Mounting P2 Cards as Drives” on page 221.
2. On the desktop, navigate to the Video folder on the P2 drive.
3. Select the media files you want to copy.
222
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
4. Copy the files to the following folder on the local media drive:
drive:\Avid MediaFiles\MXF\1
n
Avid recommends that you use the Copy function to copy files from the P2 drive. Do not use
the Move function. On some systems you might have a problem deleting the files that you
have moved.
5. Repeat the process for files in the Audio folder.
Use the same folder for both video and audio media.
6. When you are finished transferring the files, eject the P2 card.
If you want to delete files on the P2 card, see “Deleting P2 Clips” on page 229.
Changing P2 Cards in the Card Reader
You can change (“hot-swap”) cards while you are working in your Avid editing application.
To change one or more cards in the P2 card reader:
1. Select File > Unmount.
2. Click the All button, then click the Unmount button.
3. Remove the old card or cards and insert the new ones.
4. Select File > Mount All.
Importing P2 Clips and Media Directly from a P2 Card or a Copy
of a P2 Card
P2 media files include information (metadata) that lets them appear as master clips in an
Avid editing application session. You can import the P2 clips directly from a P2 card or a
copy of a P2 card on another drive into a bin in your editing application. You can also import
the media associated with the clips if you want to reuse the P2 card, for example, if you want
to capture additional material onto the card in a camera. For more information about copying
P2 cards to another drive, see “Copying P2 Files to a FireWire or Network Drive” on
page 222.
To import P2 clips directly from a P2 card or a copy of a P2 card on any accessible
drive:
1. Open the bin into which you want to import the master clips and make sure it is the
active window.
2. Select File > Import P2 > Clips to Bin.
The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
223
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
3. Navigate to the P2 volume:
c
n
t
Navigate to the actual P2 card.
t
If you copied the card to another drive, navigate to that drive and then to the folder
that contains the Contents folder.
Do not navigate into the Contents folder or into other folders in the volume. The
editing application navigates into the folders for you.
The Import P2 option imports all the clips on the card. To import only selected clips, see
“Dragging P2 Master Clips from the Media Tool to a Bin” on page 224.
4. Click OK.
A progress box appears as the clips import. When the import is complete, the clips
appear in the active bin. You can play and edit the clips; the media resides on the P2
card. If you leave the application and then restart it, you see the clips in the bin, but the
media is offline. You need to import the clips again to continue working with them.
To import media from a P2 card:
1. Open the bin into which you want to import the clips and make sure it is the active
window.
2. Select the objects for which you want to import media. You can select master clips,
sequences, or a combination.
3. Select File > Import P2 > Media.
4. Follow steps 3 and 4 in the preceding procedure.
The editing application imports the media to your system according to your Media
Creation settings.
Dragging P2 Master Clips from the Media Tool to a Bin
You can also drag P2 master clips from the Media tool to a bin. You can select particular
clips to bring into the bin.
To drag P2 master clips from the Media tool to a bin:
1. Create a project or open an existing project.
2. Create one or more bins.
224
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
3. Select Tools > Media Tool.
The Media Tool Display dialog box opens.
4. Select the following options:
a.
In the Media Drives list, select one or more P2 drives.
b.
Click the Current Project button.
c.
Select Master Clips, deselect Precompute Clips, and deselect Media Files.
225
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
5. Click OK.
The Media tool displays the clips contained on the drives you selected.
n
If you do not see any media clips, update the mounted drives and media database again by
selecting File > Mount All and File > Refresh Media Directories. You might also need to
restart the application.
6. Select the clips you want to use.
7. Drag them into an appropriate bin.
You can now use the master clips in your project.
226
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
Working with Spanned Clips
Spanned clips are clips that extend from one P2 card to another. You can work with spanned
clips in your Avid editing application.
The following illustration shows how clips can span multiple P2 cards.
P2 Card 1
P2 Card 2
Clip 1
P2 Card 3
Clip 2
P2 Card 4
Clip 3
P2 Card 5
Clip 4
When you are working with spanned clips, consider the following:
•
If you remove a card that contains a spanned clip, for example Card 2 in the above
example, and you try to play Clip 1, it plays until it reaches the portion of the clip that
resides on Card 2. The Media Offline slide appears until you reach the media on Card 3.
Avid recommends that you do not place another card in the removed card’s place unless
you remove all the cards that contain the spanned clip (P1 and P3 in this example).
•
Cards containing spanned and unspanned master clips can be mixed. However, if a card
containing a chunk of a spanned clip is ejected and another card is inserted, the master
clips in the newly inserted card are not visible in the Media Tool but the media files are
visible. You can work around this by removing all the cards containing chunks of the
spanned clip and performing a File > Unmount followed by a File > Mount All. All the
master clips will be visible.
227
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
•
P2-spanned media covers multiple drives, but the bin displays only one drive letter. The
drive letter in the bin might be any of the drives, but is usually the highest lettered drive
where the media exists.
•
If necessary, copy all spanned clips to another drive to ensure a clip’s integrity before
swapping out the P2 cards.
Sharing P2 Clips and Sequences
If you are working in an Avid Unity workgroup environment, you can share sequences that
contain P2 clips in an Avid Unity workspace. However, you can share P2 clips only if you
transcode or consolidate them to a workspace.
•
In an MXF workgroup, you can either consolidate or transcode P2 clips to a workspace.
If you transcode, you must transcode P2 MXF files to another MXF resolution.
•
In an OMF workgroup, you must transcode P2 clips to a workspace. You must transcode
P2 MXF files to OMF files.
Consolidating or transcoding clips to an Avid Unity workspace automatically checks all
related metadata into the asset manager, making the clips readily accessible to other users.
For more information on workgroup support, see the Avid Interplay Help.
n
Some card slots of the P2 drive might require drive letters that have already been assigned
to existing network drives. If your computer does not display all five card slots as drives,
reassign the network drives or restart your system.
Exporting Your Clip or Sequence to a P2 Card
If you have a P2 card writer, you can export a clip or sequence to your P2 card. The writer
can be a P2 device or a camera enabled for P2 writing. You can export to one card or to more
than one.
To export a a clip or a sequence to a P2 card:
1. Make sure your system is connected to a writable P2 device.
n
If you are connected to more than one P2 device, make sure only one is turned on. If more
than one device is turned on, you cannot control which device you export to.
2. Select the clip or the sequence in the bin.
228
Using Panasonic DVCPRO P2 Equipment
3. Select Output > Export to Device > P2.
The P2 Export Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select options as described in “P2 Export Settings” on page 613.
n
If you are not connected to a P2 device or camera, the options are not available.
5. (Option) If you are connected to a P2 device and it does not appear in the P2 Device list,
select File > Mount All to update the list of mounted drives.
6. Click Save.
A progress window opens, and the orange light on the P2 card flashes indicating that the
card is being written to. If you have more than one card in the device, the application
writes to the first one in the list. If your sequence is larger than the space available on
that card, the application fills the first card and then writes to the next card.
Deleting P2 Clips
When you are working in your Avid editing application, you can delete P2 master clips, but
you cannot delete media files that reside on P2 drives. Your Avid application treats P2 files
as read-only devices.
To delete files from a P2 drive:
1. Quit your Avid editing application.
2. Make sure the write-protect switch on the P2 card is set to allow writing.
3. On the desktop, navigate to the P2 drive.
4. Select the files you want to delete and press the Delete key.
n
You can also delete files or reformat the card by using the Panasonic P2 Viewer, which is
available as a free download from Panasonic.
229
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
In your Avid editing application, you can delete P2 master clips and media files the same
way you delete other master clips and media files. However, you might not be able to delete
P2 files that you moved rather than copied. If you cannot delete P2 master clips and media
files, first unlock the clips, as described in the following procedure, and then delete them.
To delete P2 files on a local drive when working in the Avid editing application:
1. In a bin, select the clips you want to delete.
2. (Option) Right-click and select Unlock Bin Selection.
3. Press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Select Delete master clips and Delete associated media files.
5. Click OK.
Finding a Related Media File
The Reveal File command allows you to select a clip in a bin and automatically open its
related media file. This command is useful if you want to delete, move, or label the
media file.
To find a related media file:
1. Select the clip in a bin for which you want to find the media file.
The clip is highlighted.
2. Select File > Reveal File.
230
Relinking Media Files
The system searches all available drives, opens Windows Explorer, and highlights
related media files.
Related media file
If more than one file is related to the clip, a message box asks if you want to see the next
file. If you click OK, you need to bring the Explorer window forward by pressing and
holding the Alt key while pressing the Tab key until you select the OMFI MediaFiles
folder or the Avid MediaFiles folder.
Relinking Media Files
Sometimes, after you consolidate or move material between systems, the clips or sequences
lose their links to the original media files. When a clip becomes unlinked, it displays the
message “Media Offline.” If appropriate media exists online, you can use the Relink
command to reestablish the link.
n
In an Avid Interplay environment, relinking through the Relink dialog box is limited to nonmaster clips (subclips and sequences). For more information, see “Using the Relink Dialog
Box in an Avid Interplay Environment” in the Help.
231
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
When you select subclips or sequences and select the Relink command, the system searches
for master clips that contain the same material included in the selection.
You can also relink master clips to appropriate media files or to source tapes with compatible
rates, and you can relink based on resolution. The system compares information such as
source tape name, timecode information, and channels captured. If the search is successful,
the system establishes new links to the available media files. You can instruct the system to
search specific drives or all available drives.
To relink master clips, subclips, or sequences:
1. Select the unlinked object or objects in the bin.
2. Select Clip > Relink.
The Relink dialog box opens.
232
Relinking Media Files
3. Select options as described in “Relink Options” on page 233.
You can display Help for the dialog box by pressing F1.
4. Click OK.
The system searches the selected media drives, and relinks clips and sequences if
possible.
The system disregards audio sample rate when matching media files.
n
To maintain the original capture settings for a subclip or sequence, use the Batch Capture
command; do not use the Relink command.
Relink Options
The following table describes the options for the Relink dialog box.
Relink Dialog Box Options
Option
Suboption
Relink by
Description
•
Source Timecode and Tape
•
Key Number (KN Start) - picture only
Relink offline non-master
clips to any online items
Relinks subclips and sequences to the master clips that
contain the same material.
Relink all non-master clips
to selected online items
Relinks related subclips or sequences to the highlighted
clip in the bin. When you select this option, the
suboptions are available.
Allow relinking to
offline items
Allow relinking to
source tapes with
compatible rates
Relink offline master clips to
online media files
Relinks to clips that are offline.
n
When you select “Allow relinking to offline items,”
all available drives are searched regardless of the
setting for “Relink to media on volume.”
Relinks SD clips to HD clips within an HD project or
relinks HD clips to SD clips within an SD project. See
“Relinking Clips to a New Project Format” on page 235.
Relinks master clips to media files that share similar
database information.
233
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
Relink Dialog Box Options (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Video Relink Parameters
Relink Method
Relink if quality
Relink to Media on Volume
•
Most Recent: Relinks to the most recently created
clip. This option is selected by default.
•
Highest Quality: Relinks to the highest quality clip;
for online work.
•
Most Compressed: Relinks to the most compressed
clip; for offline work.
•
Specific Resolution: Relinks to clips of a specific
resolution
If you select Specific Resolution as a relink method, this
menu allows you to select one of three options. See
“Relinking by Resolution” on page 236.
•
All Available Drives: Searches across all media
drives that are online
•
A specific drive volume: Relinks to media on a
specific media drive
Unlink
If you select Specific Resolution as a relink method, this
option changes based on your choice in the “Relink if
quality” menu. See “Relinking by Resolution” on
page 236.
Create new sequences
Leaves existing sequences alone and relinks only to
copies with .relinked appended to their names. This
option is selected by default.
Relink only to media from
the current project
Restricts relinking to the current project.
Match case when comparing
tape names
Makes tape name search case sensitive.
234
Relinking Media Files
Relinking Clips to a New Project Format
You can use the Relink command to connect clips or sequences created in one project format
to clips created in a new project format. This is helpful when you are offline editing in a
standard-definition (SD) project and conforming the project in a high-definition (HD)
project.
For example, you are editing a sequence in an NTSC 24p sequence. You then change the
project format to 1080p/24, see “Changing the Project Format” on page 726, and modify the
sequence. See “Modifying the Format of a Sequence” on page 728. A new sequence is
created with the master clips appearing offline. If the HD media is already captured (as in a
shared storage environment), you can use the command “Allow relinking to source tapes
with compatible rates,” to link to the HD media.
You can also use this command to link to clips logged without media. Then you can batch
capture the final HD media.
The following table gives project formats that have compatible rates:
n
SD project format
HD project format
NTSC 23.976p
720p/23.976
1080p/23.976
NTSC 24p
1080p/24p
PAL 24p
1080p/24
PAL 25p
1080p/25
PAL 25i
1080i/50
NTSC 30i
1080i/59.94
720p/59.94
You cannot relink clips if the project format does not match the clip format. For example, if
you have unlinked SD clips in an HD project and try to relink the SD clips, nothing happens.
You need to switch the project format to a compatible HD format in the Format tab of the
Project window. The same holds true for unlinked HD clips in an SD project.
235
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
To relink selected master clips and subclips to a new project format:
1. Select the clips and sequence targeted for relinking.
2. Select Clip > Relink.
The Relink dialog box opens.
3. Select “Relink all non-master clips to selected online items” to relink related subclips or
sequences to the highlighted clip in the bin.
4. Select “Allow relinking to source tapes with compatible rates.”
5. Click OK.
In an HD project, the SD clips in your sequence are now linked to HD media.
In an SD project, the HD clips in the your sequence are now linked to SD media.
Relinking by Resolution
You can relink to clips of a specific resolution.
n
In an Avid Interplay environment, you can use dynamic relinking to easily switch between
resolutions. For more information, see “Using MultiRez and Dynamic Relinking” in the
Help.
To relink a clip by resolution:
1. Select the unlinked object or objects in the bin.
2. Select Clip > Relink.
The Relink dialog box opens.
3. Select Relink Method > Specific Resolution.
4. Select an option from the “Relink if quality” menu, as described in the following table.
When you select an option from the “Relink if quality” menu, the text of the Unlink
button changes, as shown in the following table. The button is selected by default.
236
“Relink if quality” Menu option
Dependent option
Is greater than or equal to resolution
Unlink lower quality media
Is equal to resolution
Unlink media that is not resolution
Is less than or equal to resolution
Unlink higher quality media
Relinking Media Files
5. Select the Unlink option.
If you are working in an offline resolution and want to capture in a higher resolution,
select Unlink to ensure that you recapture all the media at the higher resolution. You can
check for offline media in the Timeline by selecting Timeline Fast menu > Clip Color >
Offline, which displays offline clips in red.
6. Select a resolution from the Resolution menu.
The default resolution is determined by the current Media Creation setting for Capture.
See “Media Creation Settings” on page 633. If you select a different resolution in the
Relink dialog box, the Media Creation setting does not change.
7. Select other Relink options as described in “Relinking Media Files” on page 231.
8. Click OK.
The system searches the selected media drives, and relinks clips and sequences if
possible.
Relinking to Selected Clips
You can also use the Relink command for connecting subclips or sequences to selected
master clips and subclips.
To relink to selected master clips and subclips:
1. Move the subclips or sequences that you want to relink into the bin containing the clips.
2. Select the clips targeted for relinking.
3. Select Clip > Relink.
The Relink dialog box opens.
4. Select “Relink all non-master clips to selected online items” to relink related subclips or
sequences to the highlighted clip in the bin.
5. Click the “Relink to media on volume” menu, and select an option:
t
Select All Available Drives to search across all media drives that are online.
t
Select a specific drive volume if you know the location of the media or if you want
to relink to media on a specific media drive.
6. (Option) Select “Relink only to media from the current project.”
7. (Option) Select “Match case when comparing tape names.”
8. Click OK.
The subclips or sequences are linked to the selected clips or subclips.
237
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
Relinking Consolidated Clips
If the appropriate media exists online, you can reconnect consolidated clips, subclips, or
sequences to the new or old media files.
For example, if you consolidated a sequence and forgot to create a duplicate, and later
decide to use the original media files instead of the consolidated media files, you can break
the new link and reestablish the old link to the original files.
n
Because subclips and sequences do not point directly to the media files, you can perform this
procedure only by using the source master clips.
To relink consolidated subclips or sequences:
1. Select the new master clips for a consolidated subclip or sequence (the clips have the file
name extension .new), and unlink them. For information on unlinking, see “Unlinking
Media Files” on page 239.
2. Select Clip > Relink.
The Relink dialog box opens.
3. Select “Relink offline master clips to online media files” to relink master clips to media
files that share similar database information.
4. Click the “Relink to media on volume” menu, and select a specific drive volume that
contains the original media files.
5. (Option) Select “Relink only to media from the current project.”
6. (Option) Select “Match case when comparing tape names.”
7. Click OK.
The clips are relinked to the original media files.
Relinking Moved Projects
If you move projects between systems with similar media existing at each site but captured
separately, your clips and sequences display the message “Media Offline.” You can use the
Unlink and Relink commands to reconnect the files at either site.
For example, if you have a project that requires sharing work between two different sites,
you can capture the source material once at each site and exchange only the project folder at
each stage, rather than move large media drives back and forth. The project folder can be
exchanged on floppy disks or instantly across a network. Because the media files maintain
slightly different parameters at each site, you must relink the material each time.
238
Unlinking Media Files
Unlinking Media Files
You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to modify the Relink command for unlinking clips from
their media files.
To unlink master clips from their current links:
1. Select the master clips to unlink.
2. Ctrl+Shift+right-click the clips.
3. Select Unlink.
The clips are unlinked and display the message Media Offline.
n
Because subclips and sequences do not point directly to the media files, you can perform this
procedure only by using the source master clips.
If you have similar material from different sources, you can duplicate a set of clips, unlink
the duplicates, and then modify the sources of the duplicates before capturing the new
source material.
For example, if you are working with multicamera material, you can capture one reel,
duplicate the clips several times, unlink the duplicated clips, and rename their source tapes
to batch capture the remaining reels.
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring
Media Files
You can archive to videotape the source media associated with sequences, master clips,
subclips, and group clips. Archiving the source media to videotape is similar to recording a
digital cut, except that you can reedit the sequence after you restore it.
n
The archive to videotape process is not available with progressive media projects.
You can use the archiving process to:
•
Archive completed projects that you can restore at a later date if you need to reedit the
project.
•
Provide more space on the media drives for a new project.
239
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
•
Create backups of your project files.
•
Move a project to another workstation.
When you archive a project, the source media files are archived to videotape, and then you
save the project files. For information about saving the project files, see “Backing Up Your
Project Information” in the Help. You can reconstruct your project with the archived files
and your source tapes.
n
The media files experience generation loss when the media is archived and restored because
the target videotape format might include some compression.
The archiving process divides the archive into multiple archive sequences based on the
lengths of the available videotapes. The archiving to videotape process adds handles to the
new clips that allow you to reedit the sequence after you restore the media files from the
videotape.
During the archiving process, the original media is archived to videotape. Media with effects
is not recorded to tape because you can easily re-create the effects after the project is
recaptured. However, the handles for transition effects are included in the archive file. The
final sequence can be linked to the recaptured media to recreate the project.
Each archived master clip is stamped with the archive tape name and archive timecodes
during the restore process. The original source information on the master clips remains
unchanged.
Archiving Media Files
Before archiving your media files to videotape, you must stripe the record tapes (record
black and timecode for approximately 15 seconds after the bars and tone on the tape). For
information about preparing record tapes, see “Preparing Record Tapes” in the Help.
To archive a video project’s media files:
1. Set up the Digital Cut tool as follows:
a.
Select Clip > Digital Cut.
The Digital Cut tool opens.
b.
Click the Deck Selection menu, and select a deck.
c.
If the Select Tape dialog box opens, click Cancel to leave Tape Name unspecified.
d. (Option) Select the Custom Preroll option, and select the number of seconds to
indicate how many seconds the tape will roll before the archiving process starts.
This option overrides the Preroll setting in the Deck Settings dialog box.
240
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring Media Files
2. Create a new bin for the archive, and name the bin. For example, you can name the bin
Archive.
3. Duplicate the sequences and clips you want to archive.
4. Drag the appropriate duplicate sequences and clips to the Archive bin.
5. Select the clips and sequences to archive from the Archive bin by doing one of the
following:
t
Select Edit > Select All to select all the clips and sequences in the bin.
t
Ctrl+click to select specific clips or sequences.
6. Select Clip > Archive to Videotape.
The Archive to Videotape dialog box opens.
7. Select the appropriate options.
“Archive to Videotape Options” on page 243 describes the options listed in the Archive
to Videotape dialog box. You can display Help for the dialog box by pressing F1.
n
If the clips or sequences that you want to archive are not highlighted in the active bin,
Archive to Videotape appears dimmed in the Clip menu.
241
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
8. Click OK.
The Tape Lengths dialog box opens.
The Archive Length area displays the calculated length of time required for archiving
the media files. The archiving process might require more time than indicated because
individual clips are not divided between tapes.
9. Under the “Enter the quantity of tapes available for the archive” area, do one of the
following:
t
Type the number of blank videotapes needed for the archive next to the length of
time of your blank tapes.
For example, if the archive length is 2 hours and 15 minutes, and you have
30-minute videotapes, you would type 5 in the 30 Minutes text box.
t
n
Type a custom tape length in the Custom text box, and type the number of available
blank videotapes.
The archiving process uses the tapes in the order listed in the Tape Lengths dialog box. For
example, if you type 10 in the 120 Minutes text box and 5 in the 60 Minutes text box, when
you start the archive your Avid editing application prompts you for each of the ten 120minute tapes before using the five 60-minute tapes.
10. Click OK.
The Digital Cut tool opens and becomes the active window.
242
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring Media Files
11. Follow the instructions displayed in the message boxes to complete the archiving
process.
A set of archive sequences is created in the Archive bin, and the source media is output
to the videotape. One archive sequence is created for each tape. When needed, the
system prompts you for another blank tape. The tapes are requested in the order that
they appear in the Tape Lengths dialog box.
When the system finishes creating the archive, a message box notifies you that the
process is complete.
12. Copy the project files (bins, project, and settings) to a storage device. For more
information, see “Backing Up Your Project Information” in the Help.
After archiving your project, you can delete the media files from your Avid system to
provide more space on your media drives.
Archive to Videotape Options
The Archive to Videotape dialog box allows you to optimize the archiving of media files for
the selected sequences and clips.
To access the Archive to Videotape dialog box:
t
Select Clip > Archive to Videotape.
The following table describes the Archive to Videotape options.
Archive to Videotape Options
Option
Description
Archive Name
Type a name for the archive in the Archive Name text box. ProjectArchive is
the default name. The archive name is numbered incrementally beginning
with 001 to indicate the order of the tapes.
Start Timecode
Type a value in the Start Timecode text box to set the starting timecode of the
archive on the videotape. By default, the start timecode is set to 01:00:00:00.
For Subclips and Sequences:
Use handles
Select this option, and in the Handle Length text box type the number of
additional frames you want to archive at the heads and tails of the new master
clips. This option provides enough overlap for trimming and adding transition
effects.
Archive entire master clips
Select this option if you want to archive entire master clips.
243
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
Archive to Videotape Options (Continued)
Option
Description
For Sequences:
Archive all clips in a group edit
Select this option if you selected a sequence that contains group clips and you
want to archive the media for all the clips in the group.
Restoring an Archive from Videotape
Restoring an archive from videotape is similar to performing a batch capture. The archiving
process creates new master clips for sequences. During the restore process, each archived
master clip is stamped with the archive tape name and archive timecodes. The original
source information on the master clips remains unchanged.
After restoring an archive, any links to the original master clips are broken, and only the
sequence and its new master clips are linked to the newly captured media files.
To restore an archive from videotape:
1. Copy the project files to the Avid Projects folder.
For information about the location of the Avid Projects folder, see “Managing the Avid
Projects and Avid Users Folders” in the Help.
2. Open the project in your Avid editing application.
3. Open the archived bin.
4. Select Tools > Capture, and set the following options in the Capture tool:
a.
Click the Deck Selection menu, and select a deck.
b.
If the Select Tape dialog box opens, click Cancel to leave Tape Name unspecified.
c.
Click the Res (Resolution) menu, and select a resolution.
d. Click the Target Drive menu, and select a drive volume.
e.
n
Make sure the audio sample rate is set correctly. See “Selecting the Audio Sample
Rate” in the Help.
For more information about setting up the Capture tool, see “Setting Up the Capture Tool”
in the Help.
5. Select the archived sequences, original sequences, and original clips.
244
Using Videotapes for Archiving and Restoring Media Files
n
If you select only the archived sequences, the media is restored during the restore process,
but the new media is not relinked to your original clips. To relink the new media to the
original clips, select the original clips and repeat the restore process. Repeating the restore
process relinks only the selected items to the new media files.
6. Select Clip > Restore from Videotape.
The Restore from Videotape dialog box opens.
7. (Option) If you are repeating the restore process, select “Restore only those items for
which media is currently unavailable.” Otherwise, deselect this option.
8. Click OK.
The Capture tool becomes the active window.
9. Follow the instructions displayed in the message boxes to complete the restore process.
Your Avid editing application recaptures the archived sequences and clips, and relinks
the selected clips and sequences to the new master clips.
10. Batch import any graphics and render all non-real-time effects. For information about
batch import, see “Reimporting Files” in the Help.
245
Chapter 7 Managing Media Files: Advanced
246
Chapter 8
Script-Based Editing
The lined script is traditionally used as a tool for managing scene and take information
during postproduction on a dramatic feature film or television production. The script-based
editing feature in your Avid editing application allows you to adapt the lined script to the
digital realm for use in any type of production, from drama to documentary to spot
advertising.
The following topics provide information about working with script-based editing:
•
Lined Script Basics
•
Script Window Basics
•
Manipulating Script Text
•
Searching Through Script
•
Linking Clips to the Script
•
Interpolating Position for Script Integration
•
Manipulating Slates
•
Manipulating Takes
•
Using Script Marks
•
Finding Clips and Script
•
Editing with the Script Window
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Lined Script Basics
The conventional lined script — which evolved during decades of trial and error in
Hollywood — provides assistant editors and chief editors with a road map that helps them
find the coverage they need to edit scenes in a film or television show.
Traditionally, the continuity person creates the lined script on the set at the time of shooting.
All notes are handwritten. The following is an example of a scene from a lined script:
33/1
33A/1 33A/2
33B/133B/2 33B/3 33C/1 33C/2
248
Lined Script Basics
Explanation of Symbols
Each vertical line drawn through the scene represents a single take from the moment the
director says “Action” to the moment the director says “Cut.” Each scene might require
several camera angles and positions, with one or more takes, all of which are lined and
identified alphanumerically.
The following is a brief summary of the lining techniques and numbering system shown in
the example in “Lined Script Basics” on page 248:
•
Master shot: The line labeled 33/1 is the master shot that usually covers all the action in
a wide shot. The first number in the label indicates the scene number as written on the
script (scene 33). The number following the slash indicates that this is the first take
captured on film for the master shot. A second take of the master shot, for example,
would be labeled 33/2.
•
Additional setups: The lines for each subsequent camera setup within the scene are
labeled with the scene number (33 in our example) followed by a letter for each setup
(A, B, C, and so forth), followed by a slash and the number of the take within that setup.
These lines can be any length, depending upon what portion of the script is covered by
the particular shot.
•
Off-screen dialog: The jagged lines in the script represent the parts of dialog where the
actor is off screen. For example, the character Mary Sue is off camera during the action
described in the second paragraph (when the waitress character enters), so a jagged line
is drawn through the shots that cover Mary Sue (33A/1 and 2).
When the scene is recorded on videotape — for example, in a sitcom shoot — the lined
script can also include timecode notes written next to specific lines of dialog that represent a
sync point between the dialog on the page and the recorded dialog on tape. These sync
points provide assistant editors or chief editors with a quick path to specific points in the
source material.
249
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Lining in the Digital Realm
Script integration in your Avid editing application provides a number of enhancements to
this traditional system. These enhancements allow you to shorten dramatically the distance
between the concepts captured on the page and the source materials used to assemble a
finished program.
Unlike the traditional lining of a script, digital script integration is usually performed after
the shoot — for example, by the assistant editor — using the notes of the continuity person.
The following is an example of the script shown in “Lined Script Basics” on page 248,
prepared and lined using script integration.
Toolbar
Slates
Takes tabs
Takes
Off-screen
indicator
Color indicator
Script mark
In addition to the standard lining conventions, script integration includes the following
enhancements:
250
•
Slates: Takes are organized into slates that display a representative frame and clip name
for the take that is currently selected.
•
Takes: The Takes tabs and lines extending from the bottom of each slate indicate the
number of takes for that scene. Click a Takes tab to select the take.
Lined Script Basics
•
Indicators: You can apply off-screen dialog indicators or colors to indicate such things
as preferred takes, takes used in the current active sequence, or line changes in dialog.
•
Script marks: The double arrows marking the takes at various points represent marked
lines of dialog in the script that are synchronized to matching dialog in the source clip.
Script marks are especially effective during editing, allowing the editor to quickly locate
dialog and piece together parts of a scene.
The Script window provides additional controls for matching back to clips in the source
bins, loading and playing back takes, and searching for takes and script text.
Script Integration Workflow
The basic workflow for script integration is as follows:
1. The continuity person or an assistant creates the lined script in hardcopy form on the set
during shooting.
2. Source footage from the shoot is prepared and captured by using methods described in
“Creating a New Project” in the Help.
3. The assistant editor uses the lined script from the shoot, a text file of the script itself, and
methods described throughout this chapter to import and line the script, link clips to the
script, place script marks, and customize the display of takes prior to editing. The
assistant can also use the ScriptSync™ feature to automatically place script marks.
4. The editor uses the fully prepared Script window to edit the program.
Using Script Integration in Video Projects
Script integration is an effective tool for editing any type of production, not just feature films
and television drama. For example:
•
You can adapt many of the procedures described in this chapter for use in audiovisual
scripts for documentaries, corporate spots, news magazine segments, and spot
advertisements.
•
You can turn script integration into a quick storyboarding tool by positioning selected
slates in the Script window and printing storyboard bins that include your script.
251
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
The following is an example of an audiovisual script for a news magazine piece imported
into the Script window, with the basic features of script integration applied.
Narration track is synced to the script.
All possible B-roll shots are ready to be loaded
and cued. Color indicates preferred shots.
Music cuts
are linked to
appropriate
sections of
the script.
Script Window Basics
This section describes basic procedures for creating and manipulating Script windows,
including importing script text; navigating through the script; displaying clip information;
opening, closing, and saving windows; and adjusting margins.
Before you begin creating Script windows, make sure you have established the proper
defaults in the Script Settings dialog box for font, margin, and display of frames and takes.
For information on Script settings, see “Script Settings Options” on page 253. These
parameters can also be changed manually.
252
Script Window Basics
Script Settings Options
Before you open a script in the Script window, you can select default preferences using the
Script Settings dialog box. After the Script window is open, any changes you make in the
Script Settings dialog box are ignored by the Script window. You must close the Script
window and then reopen it for the new settings to take effect. However, the Script menu
provides several commands that allow you to override the Script settings. The Script menu
commands are described throughout this chapter.
To open the Script Settings dialog box:
t
Double-click Script in the Settings list in the Project window.
See “Script Settings” on page 648 for a list of the Script Settings options.
Importing a Script
The first step in script integration is to import a script in the correct format.
c
The imported script must be in text format. To maintain the original formatting,
however, export the script from your word processor by using the “Text Only with Line
Breaks” option. If you export the script as “text” only, the formatting is lost.
To import a new script:
1. Place the file in a directory that is available to your Avid editing system in one of the
following ways:
t
Transport the file on removeable media, and copy it to your hard drive.
t
Place the file in a network location that you can access from your Avid editing
system.
2. Click the Bins tab in the Project window of your Avid editing application.
The Bins list appears.
3. Select File > New Script.
The Open dialog box opens.
253
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
4. Locate the file and double-click it, or select the file and click Open.
-
A script bin appears in the Bins list in the Project window.
-
The script, with its original layout, appears in the Script window.
5. Change the name of the script bin by clicking the title in the Bins list in the Project
window, and typing a new name.
Selecting Text Encoding for Scripts
You can specify the text encoding of the script. This ensures that diacritical marks and
multibyte character sets appear correctly in your script.
To select text encoding:
t
Select Script > Text Encoding, and then select the text encoding for the script as
described in the following table.
Text Encoding Options
254
Option
Description
None
No encoding is specified; the system default is used. Select this option
when the text was created on a system with the same system character
set you are currently using. Use this option for non-Latin-based
encoding where UTF-8 was not used.
Mac (MacRoman)
Select this option when the script was created on a Macintosh system
using the MacRoman character set. This is the default encoding on
Macintosh systems for plain text using the Latin character set.
Script Window Basics
Text Encoding Options (Continued)
n
Option
Description
PC (Latin-1)
Select this option when the script was created on a Window-based
system using the Latin-1 character set. This is the default encoding on
Windows-based systems for plain text using the Latin character set.
UTF-8
Select this option when the script was created using the Unicode UTF-8
character set.
Non-native characters might not display correctly even if they are encoded in UTF-8. Even
though the text is encoded correctly, the ability to display non-native characters is limited at
this time.
Opening, Closing, and Saving the Script Window
The Script window behaves in many respects like a bin:
n
•
When you make changes in the Script window, an asterisk appears in the title bar to
indicate that the changes have not yet been saved.
•
You save changes by selecting File > Save Script.
•
Auto-save functionality also applies to the Script window, based on parameters
established in the Bin settings.
•
You can save a copy of the Script window by selecting File > Save a Script Copy As.
•
Script window files are saved in the project folder along with bins, and backup copies
are stored automatically in the Avid Attic folder.
When you save a Script window, the saved file is given an .avc file name extension.
•
You can select File > Open Bin to open existing Script window (.avc) files and add them
to the Other Bins folder in the Bins list in the Project window.
•
You can select File > New Script to open a new script (.txt) file and add it to the Bins list
in the Project window.
•
You can select File > Close to close Script windows.
255
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Displaying Clip and Sequence Information in a Script Window
The Info window displays statistical information about a clip or sequence. The window
updates the information automatically.
To open the Info window from a Script window:
1. Press the Alt key, and click the Takes tab.
2. Drag the window to a new location to leave the Info window open.
Exploring the Script Window
After importing a script, you can navigate to any point in the text by using basic techniques
available in most word processors:
n
•
Use the bar on the right to scroll up or down.
•
Resize the window by dragging the size box in the lower right corner.
•
Press the Page Down or Page Up key to move one screen at a time.
•
Press the Home or End key to move to the beginning or end of the script.
•
Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move your line selection up or down by one
line.
You can also use several search features, as described in “Searching Through Script” on
page 260.
Adjusting the Script Margins
You can resize a Script window at any time to show more script or to enlarge the right
margin by dragging the size box in the lower right corner.
The default size of the left margin is established on import, based on the current Script
settings. You can also override the margin setting and adjust the left margin after importing
the script.
To adjust the left margin of an imported script:
1. Select Script > Left Margin.
The Left Margin dialog box opens.
2. Type a new margin size (in pixels) in the text box, and click OK.
The Script window reflects the new setting.
256
Manipulating Script Text
Manipulating Script Text
After importing a script, you can customize its appearance by changing the font and font
size. You can also cut, copy, paste, or remove lines of script to reflect changes that might
occur during the course of a project.
Changing the Font of the Script
The default font and font size used in the script are established on import, based on the
current Script settings. You can override the settings and change the font and size after
importing the script.
To change the font and size of imported script:
1. Select Edit > Set Font.
The Set Font dialog box opens.
2. Click the Font menu, and select a new font. The menu includes all fonts currently
installed in the system.
3. Type a new font size in the text box, and click OK.
The Script window reflects the new settings.
n
As you enlarge font size, the available sizes for the slate frames also increase. This can be
useful for presentation or screening purposes, when you need to display extra-large text and
slate frames for a large audience or across a room. For information on enlarging slate
frames, see “Resizing Slates” on page 266.
Selecting Text
Selecting text in the Script window is similar to making selections in a word processor,
except that the smallest unit you can select is an entire line of text.
To select a single line of script:
t
Click anywhere in the line to highlight it.
257
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Selected
lines are
highlighted
To select several lines of script, use one of the following methods:
t
Lasso the first line of the selection, and drag through the text. As you drag, a box
outlines your selection.
Lasso a portion of
script to select it.
Release the mouse button when you finish lassoing the selected lines. The text is
highlighted.
258
Manipulating Script Text
n
t
Click the first line of the selection, and then Shift+click the last line. The entire block of
text is highlighted.
t
Press Ctrl+A (Windows) or Command+A (Macintosh) to select all the text and takes.
You can also extend a selection by pressing the Shift key and clicking a line of text preceding
or following the current selection.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Script
You can cut, copy, and paste text in the script as you would in a normal word processor.
However, because you cannot select individual words or characters, you can move only lines
or paragraphs.
n
c
To rearrange or rewrite individual words or characters in the script, you should make the
changes in a word processor before importing them into a separate Script window. You can
then use the procedures in this section to copy and paste the new lines into the existing Script
window, overwriting the incorrect lines.
You cannot undo cut, copy, or paste operations in the Script window.
To cut or copy lines of script and then paste them:
1. Select the lines.
2. Select Edit > Cut or Edit > Copy.
3. Select the line below the location where you want to insert the text.
4. Select Edit > Paste.
If you selected only one line at the insertion point, a message box asks if you want to
replace the selected line.
n
If you selected more than one line at the insertion point, no message box opens. When you
select Edit > Paste, the selected lines are replaced with the text you cut or copied in step 2.
You cannot use the Undo command after performing this step.
5. Make a choice based on your needs:
t
Click Replace to overwrite the selected line.
t
Click Insert Before to insert the text above the selected line.
t
Click Insert After to insert the text below the selected line.
The text is pasted into the script.
259
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Removing Script Text
You cannot delete lines of text from the Script window by using the Delete key as you would
in a normal word processor. Use the Cut command to remove the text.
To remove lines of script:
1. Select the lines of script you want to delete.
2. Select Edit > Cut.
Unlike a normal deletion, the text remains in the Windows Clipboard until the next time you
copy or cut a selection.
Searching Through Script
Script integration provides a number of search tools you can use during the preparation
phase, during editing, or during screenings. You can apply and search for page or scene
numbers, or you can conduct a full-text search.
n
You can use the Find Bin and Find Script buttons to match back and forth between script and
clips. For more information, see “Finding Script” on page 282.
Using Page and Scene Numbers
When you add page and scene numbers to the Script window, you gain the ability to search
for them during preparation of the script and during editing. You can customize page and
scene numbering by adding, changing, and moving the numbers as necessary.
Adding a Page or Scene Number
To add a page or scene number:
1. Select the line of the script at the beginning of the scene or page.
2. Click the Add Scene or the Add Page button in the Script window toolbar, or select
Script > Add Scene or Script > Add Page.
A dialog box opens.
260
Searching Through Script
3. Type the number for the scene or page, and click OK.
The scene number appears in the left margin and the page number appears in the right
margin next to the first line of the selected region.
New page number
New scene
number
Scene/page
status bar
Scene and page numbers both appear in the status bar at the bottom of the Script
window and reflect your current position within the script. Each scene or page number
continues throughout the script until you mark another line as the beginning of a new
scene or page.
Changing a Page or Scene Number
You can change a scene or page number to correct any errors that occur when adding
numbers, and to reposition scene and page numbering to match script changes during
postproduction.
To change a page or scene number:
1. Select the beginning line of the scene or page.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Click the Add Scene or Add Page button in the Script window toolbar.
t
Select Script > Add Scene or Script > Add Page.
A dialog box opens.
3. Type a new number for the scene or page, and click OK.
4. If the renumbering affects page or scene numbers that precede or follow the current
change, then repeat these steps as necessary.
261
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Deleting a Page or Scene Number
To delete a page or scene number:
1. Select the first line of the scene or page.
n
You can also delete all page or scene numbering throughout a range of the script by
selecting the range of lines or the entire script.
2. Press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box opens.
3. Select the options for Delete scene(s) or Delete page break(s) as appropriate, and click
OK.
The numbering is deleted from the Script window.
Searching for a Page or Scene Number
Once you have added scene and page numbers, you can search for them quickly during
editing.
To search for a page or scene number:
1. Select Script > Go To Page or Script > Go To Scene.
n
You can also click in the page or scene display in the status bar at the bottom of the Script
window.
The Go To Scene/Page dialog box opens.
2. Type the number of the scene or page, and click OK.
The Script window scrolls to the page or scene, and the first line is highlighted. If you
type a page or scene number that is not in the script, then no action occurs.
Conducting a Text Search
To search for text in the script:
1. With the Script window active, select Edit > Find.
The Find dialog box opens.
2. Type the text you are looking for.
3. Select one of the optional search parameters, when appropriate:
262
t
If you do not want the search to be case sensitive, select Ignore Case.
t
If you do not want the search to highlight instances where your text is part of
another word, select Whole Word.
Linking Clips to the Script
4. Click OK.
The first occurrence of the text is highlighted in the Script window.
5. Select Edit > Find Again to search for the next occurrence of the text.
Linking Clips to the Script
You can link clips to the script by hand, or you can use the ScriptSync feature to
automatically link clips to the script. For more information about ScriptSync, see “Marking
with ScriptSync” on page 277.
To link clips to the script:
1. Open the script bin by double-clicking the Script Bin icon.
2. Open the source bin for the clips that you want to link to the script.
3. (Option) Sort the source clips to make the job easier:
t
You can sort the Scene/Take column for an alphanumeric list of clips that matches
their relative order in the script.
t
If you are not working with scene and take information (for example, in a video
documentary project), you can provide your own numbering for the clips in a
custom column, or you can sort the clips manually in Frame view according to their
order in the script. For more information on adding a custom column, see “Adding
Customized Columns to a Bin” on page 194.
4. Select the portion of the script that is covered by the first clip or clips.
263
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
5. Select the clip or clips in the source bin, and drag them to the highlighted text.
n
Make sure the pointer is over the highlighted text before releasing the mouse button.
Drag a clip or several clips to
the highlighted text.
A slate frame appears above the text, with one or more of the takes covering the scene as
lines.
The slate
appears.
6. Continue to apply clips to additional portions of the script until you have finished
creating all your slates.
Alternatively, you can create slates one at a time, place script marks, and fine-tune the
lining of each scene before proceeding to the next portion of the script.
264
Interpolating Position for Script Integration
Interpolating Position for Script Integration
Interpolate Position matches a clip to a take and allows you to see where a particular line in
the script would appear in the clip footage.
When you set Interpolate Position, the length of the take in the script is matched to the
length of the clip in the Source monitor. The position indicator in the Source monitor
corresponds to wherever you double-click in the take.
If you set a script mark in the take, the portions of the take on either side of the script mark
are matched to the portions of the clip on either side of the IN point in the Source monitor.
To set Interpolate Position:
t
n
Select Script > Interpolate Position.
You can change the default behavior before opening a script in the Script window by
selecting Interpolate Position in the Script Settings dialog box. See “Script Settings
Options” on page 253.
Manipulating Slates
Once you create a slate by dragging a clip into the Script window, you can manipulate the
slate’s appearance and position.
Selecting Slates
To select slates, do one of the following:
n
t
Click a slate to select it.
t
Shift+click additional slates to select all the active takes.
t
Drag a lasso through a region of the script containing slates. All slates and takes within
the lasso are selected.
Selecting multiple slates is especially useful when you are adding or deleting color or offscreen dialog indicators across takes, as described in “Manipulating Takes” on page 269.
265
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Resizing Slates
You can resize the slates the same way you resize frames in the bin in Frame view.
To enlarge the slates:
t
Select Edit > Enlarge Frame.
To reduce the slates:
t
n
Select Edit > Reduce Frame.
You can enlarge the font size of the script to increase the size of the slate frames. This can be
useful for presentation or screening purposes when you need a large display for an
audience. For information on resizing the font, see “Changing the Font of the Script” on
page 257.
Holding Slates On Screen in the Script Window
When you are working with slates in the Script window, you can choose to hold slates on
screen. As you scroll a script in the Script window, each slate will remain on screen as long
as the take lines to which it is linked remain on screen.
To hold slates on screen:
t
n
Select Script > Hold Slates Onscreen.
You can change the default behavior before opening a script in the Script window by
selecting Hold Slates Onscreen in the Script Settings dialog box. For more information, see
“Script Settings Options” on page 253.
Hiding Slate Frames
By default, the system displays a representative frame for each take in the slates. You can
hide this frame display and show only the clip name to simplify the interface or speed up
scrolling and movement in a complex Script window.
n
You can change the default behavior before opening a script in the Script window by
deselecting Show Frames in the Script Settings dialog box. See “Script Settings Options” on
page 253.
To hide the slate frames:
t
Select Script > Show Frames.
The check mark to left of the command is removed, indicating Show Frames is disabled.
266
Manipulating Slates
The Script window shows only the clip names for the takes.
To restore the frames:
t
Select Script > Show Frames again.
Showing One Take Per Slate
You can minimize clutter on the screen by showing only one take per nonactive slate.
To show one take per nonactive slate:
t
Select Script > Show All Takes.
The check mark to left of the command is removed, indicating Show All Takes is
disabled.
The Script window shows only the first take in each nonactive slate.
A single take
is shown.
267
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
To display all the takes:
t
Select Script > Show All Takes again.
Moving a Slate
You can adjust the position of slates to make room for more slates, to avoid blocking words,
or to display takes over specific lines.
To move a slate, use one of the following methods:
n
t
To move a slate horizontally, click the slate and drag it to the left or the right. (If
necessary, resize the Script window by dragging the size box.)
t
To move a slate vertically without moving the position of the take lines in the script,
click the slate and drag it up or down. The take lines remain fixed over the text to which
they have been previously linked.
t
To move the slate and all its take lines vertically to a new location in the script, press the
Ctrl key, and then drag the slate to the new location.
As you move the slate, the takes continue to cover the same number of lines in the script. To
lengthen or shorten the number of lines covered in the takes at the new location, see
“Adjusting Take Lines” on page 271.
Deleting a Slate
Occasionally, you might need to delete a slate — for example, when you find that the takes
in the slate are no longer needed.
n
When you delete slates and takes from the Script window, the captured source clips remain
in the source bins.
c
You cannot undo the deletion of slates. To restore a slate after deletion, you need to recreate the slate. See “Linking Clips to the Script” on page 263.
To delete a slate:
1. Select all the takes in the slate by pressing the Shift key and clicking the tab for each
take.
2. Press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box opens.
3. Select Delete Takes, and click OK.
The slate and all its takes are deleted from the script.
268
Manipulating Takes
Manipulating Takes
Script integration provides a number of tools and techniques for manipulating the
relationship between lined takes in the Script window and their source clips, as described in
this section.
Selecting Takes
To select takes, use one of the following methods:
n
t
Click any take tab to select it. The outline of the take changes to red, indicating that the
take is active.
t
Double-click any line in the take to select the take and load it into a monitor.
t
Shift+click additional takes in the same slate or across slates to select them.
t
Drag a lasso through an entire region of the script. All takes within the lasso are
selected.
Selecting multiple takes is especially useful when you add or delete color or off-screen
dialog indicators. See “Using Color Indicators” on page 272 and “Indicating Off-Screen
Dialog” on page 272.
Adding Takes
To add another take to an existing slate:
1. Select the region of the script that the take covers.
2. Open the bin where the clip for the take is located.
3. Drag the clip to the slate.
The new take appears in the slate and is applied to the selected region of the script.
n
You need to manually adjust the take lines if the new take covers a region different from the
existing slate. See “Adjusting Take Lines” on page 271.
Deleting Takes
As you screen clips, you might find that a take has been applied to the wrong scene and
should be deleted from the slate. You might also decide to delete a bad take to simplify the
script interface for the editor.
c
You cannot undo the deletion of takes. To restore a take after deletion, see “Adding
Takes” on page 269.
269
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
To delete one or more takes:
1. Select the takes in the Script window.
2. Press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box opens.
3. Select Delete Takes, and click OK.
The takes are deleted.
Displaying Take Numbers
To display the take numbers in the tab of each take:
t
Type the numbers in the Take column of the source bin for the clips.
Numbers in the Take column
appear in the tabs for each take.
Changing the Representative Frame for a Take
To change the representative frame that appears in the slate for a take:
1. Select the Takes tab in the Script window.
2. Press the appropriate arrow keys or step keys on the keyboard to advance the footage
displayed in the slate forward or backward to the frame you want.
You can also select multiple takes and advance them all at once.
270
Manipulating Takes
Loading Takes
To load individual takes into the Source monitor:
t
Double-click any Takes tab.
To load multiple takes into the Source monitor:
t
Select multiple takes, and then double-click any take you selected.
Playing Takes
To play back a take, do one of the following:
t
Double-click a take to load it into the Source monitor, and then click the Play button or
press the Play key.
The clip plays back and stops when it reaches the end.
t
Select a take in the script, and then click the Play button at the top of the Script window.
The clip loads and plays back in a continuous loop until you press the space bar. If you
selected more than one take, each take plays in sequence.
Adjusting Take Lines
As you screen clips in the script, you might find that a take or group of take lines should
begin earlier or end later in the script. You can adjust the take lines by moving the beginning
mark, the end mark, or both.
To change the length of a take line:
1. Press the Ctrl key.
Notice the movement icon that appears when you place the pointer at either end of the
take.
2. Click the end mark or beginning mark of a take, and drag it until you reach the correct
line in the script.
3. Press the Ctrl key, and drag the opposite end of the take to a new location, if necessary.
4. Repeat the procedure for other takes in the slate as necessary.
271
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Indicating Off-Screen Dialog
In the traditional lined script, you indicate off-screen dialog by drawing a jagged line next to
the dialog. You can apply a similar effect to lines in the Script window.
To indicate off-screen dialog:
1. Select the range of script containing the off-screen dialog.
2. Select one or more takes that you want to mark with the off-screen indicator.
3. Click the Set Offscreen button in the Script window toolbar.
The off-screen indicator appears, superimposed on the selected takes of the highlighted
range of the script. You can switch the indicators on or off by clicking the button
repeatedly.
n
You must select the range of the script that contains the off-screen dialog before enabling the
off-screen function.
To remove one or more off-screen indicators:
1. Select the range of script containing the off-screen indicators.
2. Select only those takes that display the indicators.
3. Click the Set Offscreen button.
Using Color Indicators
You can use color to indicate several pieces of information, including:
272
•
Preferred takes or takes used in the current active sequence
•
Picture versus audio track used in the current active sequence
•
Line changes in dialog
•
Use of multiple cameras
Using Script Marks
To apply color to takes:
1. Select Script > Color > color.
2. Select the region of the script that covers the range within the take or takes that you want
to highlight with color.
3. Select one or more takes.
4. Click the Set Color button in the Script window toolbar.
The color appears only in the highlighted script region of the selected takes. You can
switch the indicators on or off by clicking the button repeatedly.
n
You must select the range of the script that you want to highlight with color before enabling
the color indicator function.
To remove one or more color indicators:
1. Select the range of script containing the color indicators.
The first take in the selected region determines the color indicator status displayed in the
Set Color button.
2. Select only those takes that display the indicators.
3. Click the Set Color button.
Using Script Marks
Script marks allow you to synchronize individual lines of script with matching points in
captured clips. When you place a mark in the script, an IN point also appears in the clip
when you load it into a monitor for editing. This provides line-by-line control over
alternative takes that the editor can instantly load and edit into the sequence.
You can place script marks in several ways:
•
One take at a time: see “Placing Script Marks Manually” on page 274.
•
In a playback loop in real time: see “Using Real-Time Screening and Marking” on
page 275.
•
Automatically using ScriptSync: “Marking with ScriptSync” on page 277.
273
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Placing Script Marks Manually
To place script marks manually:
1. Map the Add Script Mark button from the Other tab in the Command palette to a
user-customizable palette or to the Keyboard palette.
2. Double-click in the Script window at the intersection of a take and the line of dialog that
you want to mark.
Intersection of
take and line
of dialog
The take is selected in the slate, the selected line of the dialog is highlighted, and the clip
loads into the Source monitor.
3. Click the Play button, or press the Play key. The take plays in the monitor.
Alternatively, you can step (jog) or shuttle through the footage, place the position
indicator on the exact frame, or scrub the audio to find the exact line of dialog. The clip
does not have to be playing.
274
Using Script Marks
4. When the playback reaches the selected line of dialog, click the Add Script Mark button
or press the Add Script Mark key.
The line is marked in the Script window with a small horizontal bar, and play stops.
The script mark
appears.
5. Repeat these steps to add more script marks.
Using Real-Time Screening and Marking
The Script window provides controls for automating the process of screening and placing
script marks for a single take or across multiple takes.
To use real-time screening and marking:
1. Select one or more takes.
2. Click the Record button in the Script window toolbar.
275
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
The first selected take changes to green in the Script window, the system automatically
loads the clip into the Source monitor, and the clip begins to play.
Several takes
are selected for
automated playback.
Current playback is
highlighted in green.
3. As you hear a line of dialog (or see a particular clip) that you want to mark, click the
matching line in the Script window.
A script mark appears at that location in the take, and the clip continues to play.
n
You can scroll through the Script window without affecting playback.
4. Continue to mark additional sync points using one of the following methods:
t
Click a line that already contains a mark to replace the previous mark and update
the sync point in the clip.
t
Click a line in the script before or after the range of the existing take line, and the
mark is added while the take line is extended to include the new line.
t
Use variable-speed play controls (J-K-L keys on the keyboard) to shuttle, step, or
pause during playback.
t
Press the Tab or Shift+Tab keys on the keyboard to begin playback of the next or the
previous take.
As each take reaches its end, the system automatically loads and plays the next take.
5. Continue to place marks until all takes have been screened.
To stop the playback loop:
t
276
Press the space bar.
Using Script Marks
Marking with ScriptSync
ScriptSync uses phonetic-indexing technology from Nexidia™ to analyze the audio portion
of a clip and match it to lines of the script text.
To add script marks with ScriptSync:
1. Select one or more takes that include audio.
2. Double-click any line in the take to select the take and load it into a monitor.
277
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
3. Select Script > ScriptSync.
The ScriptSync dialog box opens.
4. Select options as described in the following table.
ScriptSync Options
Option
Description
Language
Select the language of your script (this setting is for both the audio and
the text).
n
Depending on the language you select, the Acoustic model used by
Nexidia changes; the models are Broadcast and Telephony. Only one
model applies per language. Broadcast has a higher resolution and can
be more accurate than Telephony in some cases. The Broadcast model is
used for North American English, Dutch, Latin American Spanish, and
Modern Standard Arabic.
Tracks
Select the audio tracks you want as input to ScriptSync.
Skip lines that only contain
CAPITAL letters
Select this option if lines that contain only all-capital letters are not part of the
spoken dialog. Dramatic scripts often use all-capital letters to identify the
speaker or for scene descriptions.
278
Using Script Marks
ScriptSync Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Skip text in parentheses ‘()’ or Select this option if parenthetical expressions in your script are not spoken.
brackets ‘[]’
Skip text before colon ‘:’
Select this option to skip all text before the first colon in a line of text. For
example, select this option if your script uses the convention of placing a
character’s name before a colon when the character begins to speak.
Skip lines indented less than
dialog
Select this option if action is indented less than dialog in your script. If you
select this option, also type the number of characters that dialog is indented in
the Dialog Indent (characters) text box, or click the Select Dialog button, select
a line of dialog from the Script so the application can automatically infer the
correct number of characters, and then click OK.
Overwrite existing marks
Select this option if the take you are syncing already contains script marks and
you want ScriptSync to update those marks.
Sync between first and last
mark
Select this option to restrict ScriptSync to analyze only the script between the
lines of text and the media specified by the first and last script marks in a take.
If there is only one mark in the take, ScriptSync analyzes the script from the
text and the media specified from the first mark to the end of the take and
media. This can be useful if there is non-dialog talking on the audio clip that
you want to exclude from the syncing process.
n
If you select this option and the last script mark in the take is not at the
end of the take, ScriptSync operates only until the last mark in the text.
5. Click OK.
The syncing process starts. A thermometer tracks the progress.
6. (Option) Press Ctrl+. (period) to cancel the process after it has started.
279
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
When ScriptSync finishes, your take includes a script mark for every line of text the
application found in the audio.
7. Check through the marks. If ScriptSync missed any, add them manually as described in
“Placing Script Marks Manually” on page 274.
Loading and Playing Marked Segments
Once you have placed marks syncing lines in your script to points in the source clips, you
can quickly load and cue takes for selected lines of dialog. You can load a single take, or you
can load all the coverage for any given range of lines.
To load the marked segment of a take:
t
Double-click the script mark at the line of dialog that you want to cue.
The take is loaded into the Source monitor and is cued to the synced line of dialog. An
IN point is placed at the sync location.
To load all the coverage for a range of lines:
1. Select the lines in the Script window, dragging through all intersecting takes.
The script lines and takes are highlighted.
2. Click the Play button in the Script window if you want to screen the takes for those
lines, or click the Record button if you want to add script marks.
The takes load and play back one after another. You can use the Tab key or J-K-L keys
to jump between takes and to control playback.
280
Using Script Marks
Moving a Script Mark
When you move a script mark up or down, the mark in the source clip remains at the same
frame but is resynced to a new line in the script.
To move a script mark:
1. Press the Ctrl key.
Notice the movement indicator that appears when you move the pointer to a mark in the
script.
2. Click the mark, and drag it to the new position.
Deleting a Script Mark
When you remove a script mark, you do not delete the marked portion of the take, only the
sync point between the script and the source clip.
c
You cannot undo the deletion of script marks. To restore a script mark after deletion,
see “Placing Script Marks Manually” on page 274.
To delete a script mark:
1. Click once on a script mark to select it. (If you double-click, you load the clip and make
the Composer window active.)
n
You can select multiple script marks for removal by highlighting an entire region of text and
selecting the takes containing the script marks you want to remove.
2. Press the Delete key.
The Delete dialog box opens.
3. Select Delete 1 mark(s), and click OK.
The mark is deleted.
281
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Finding Clips and Script
After you have placed script marks, which synchronize lines in the Script window to frames
in the source clips, you can use the Find Bin or Find Script buttons to search back and forth
between the two items.
Finding Script
The Find Script button allows you to quickly match back from currently loaded clips to
portions of script in the Script window to which the clip has been linked.
To find the script linked to a loaded clip:
1. Place the position indicator in the clip at the line of dialog (or within a range of dialog)
that you want to find.
2. Click the Find Script button in the Other tab of the Command palette.
The Script window instantly scrolls to and highlights the portion of script that most
closely matches the clip location.
Finding Clips and Bins from the Script Window
Script integration allows you to search instantly through bins and to find the source clips for
takes that have been linked to the script. You can search on a single take or on multiple takes
across several slates.
To find source clips and bins:
1. Select the takes that you want to find.
2. Click the Find Bin button in the Script window toolbar.
Your Avid editing application searches through bins linked to the project, opens the bin
containing the linked clips, and highlights them in the bin.
282
Editing with the Script Window
Editing with the Script Window
Using the Script window in combination with the Single Mark Editing feature, you can edit
in a highly streamlined manner. For information about the Single Mark Editing feature, see
the Help.
To use the Script window most effectively during a session, make sure:
•
The Script window is fully prepared, including preferred takes, alternative takes
(indicated with colors), and script marks for matching lines of text to sync points in the
clips.
•
The Single Mark Editing option is selected in the Edit tab of the Composer Settings
dialog box. This option allows you to skip several steps by performing edits on-the-fly
while playing back clips (without marking OUT points). For more information, see
“Single-Mark Editing” in the Help.
Assembling a Rough Cut
To quickly assemble a rough cut from the Script window:
1. Open the Script window for the current cut.
2. Double-click the first preferred take to load it into the Source monitor. The IN point is
already marked and cued.
3. Play the take until the appropriate OUT point is reached, and stop play.
4. Click the Splice-in or the Overwrite button to make the first edit.
5. Prepare the sequence for the next edit:
a.
Create new tracks, if necessary.
b.
Enable the appropriate source and record tracks.
c.
Patch the tracks, if necessary.
d. Mark an IN point in the sequence for the next edit.
6. Double-click the next preferred take to load it.
7. Play the clip until you reach the appropriate OUT point, and stop play.
8. Perform the edit on-the-fly.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 until you have moved through the entire scene or segment.
10. Fine-tune the edits by using normal trimming and editing procedures. Continue to use
the Script window to quickly load and cue alternative takes as necessary.
283
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
Splicing a Script Range
During editing, you can use the Ctrl and Alt keys to instantly splice clips linked to ranges of
script directly from the Script window into the sequence. To use this feature with accuracy,
you should carefully mark with script marks the ranges of script during the screening and
marking phase.
To splice a range:
1. Mark an IN point or place the position indicator at the location in the sequence where
you want to splice in the segment.
2. Press the Ctrl key and Alt key. Notice that the Splice-in arrow appears when you point to
a take.
3. Double-click the preferred take within the range of dialog that has been marked with
script marks.
The marked section of the clip is spliced into the sequence.
Revising the Script
During or after each session, or when a scene or segment is completed, the editor or assistant
editor can update the Script window to reflect the final edit decisions made during the day. In
this way, you can maintain a complete record of the elements used to construct the scene or
segment, as well as all existing alternatives. When further changes or repackaging are
required, you can quickly retrieve all the source material in one window.
Interactive Screenings
The Script window is a valuable tool during screenings of work in progress, allowing you to:
•
Quickly search for scenes and pages with clips attached for instant retrieval.
Sequences are not loaded into the Script window. Instead, you can perform a video
mixdown and load the resulting master clips. For more information, see the Help.
•
Match back and cue source material to compare alternative takes.
•
Quickly find and open bins for retrieval of additional material not included in the Script
window.
•
Enlarge script font and slate frames for better viewing by your audience.
The Script window provides a visual, interactive look at the content of the original script
against the elements in the final piece.
284
Editing with the Script Window
Sequences cannot be loaded into the Script window. Alternatively, you can perform a video
mixdown and load the resulting master clips instead. For more information, see “Performing
a Video Mixdown” in the Help.
All alternative takes are
available for viewing and
comparing.
Matching colors indicate takes
used in the preferred cut as well
as alternative cuts.
You can mix down alternative
cuts to form master clips and
place them next to the script.
285
Chapter 8 Script-Based Editing
286
Chapter 9
Viewing and Marking Footage:
Advanced
Before making your first edit, you can review your footage, add locators and comments to
clips, mark IN to OUT points, and create subclips. By viewing and marking your material in
advance, you can concentrate on editing and refining your sequence at a later time without
having to pause and set marks each time you load a new clip.
The following topics describe advanced techniques for playing back, viewing, and
subcataloging clips:
•
Displaying the Info Window
•
Displaying Timecode in the Timecode Window
•
Adjusting the Play Delay Offset
•
Using the Tool Palette
•
Playing Selected Clips in a Loop
•
Using Locators
For basic information about viewing and marking footage, see “Viewing and Marking
Footage: Basics” in the Help or the Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Displaying the Info Window
The Info window displays statistical information about clips and sequences. You can open
the Info window from the Source/Record monitor or a bin. The Info window updates the
information automatically.
You can cut, copy, and paste information from the Info window anytime, but you cannot edit
or change any information within the window.
n
If no clip or sequence is loaded in the Source/Record monitor, the Info window is not
available.
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
To display information from the Source/Record monitor:
1. Place the mouse pointer in the gray area to the right of the Clip icon.
2. Press and hold the mouse button.
The Info window opens. Only fields with data are displayed.
3. Drag the window to a new location to leave the window open.
To display information from a pop-up monitor:
1. Move the pointer to the left part of the top gray area.
2. Press and hold the mouse button.
The Info window opens. Only fields with data are displayed.
3. Drag the window to a new location to leave it open.
To display information from a bin:
1. Do one of the following:
t
Press and hold the mouse button over the Clip icon in the bin.
t
Press Ctrl+Alt and click the clip for which you want to display information.
The Info window opens. Only fields with data are displayed.
2. Drag the window to a new location to leave it open.
To copy text from the Info window:
1. Select the information you want to copy.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the information.
3. Place and click the mouse pointer where you want to paste the information, and press
Ctrl+V.
288
Displaying Timecode in the Timecode Window
Displaying Timecode in the Timecode Window
Each monitor has two lines available to display timecode as described in “Displaying
Tracking Information” in the Help. The Timeline also displays one line of timecode. In
addition, the Timecode window allows you to display up to 48 lines of timecode in a
separate window.
When you are working with a 24p or 25p project, you can display additional timecode
information in the Timecode window. The output format timecodes TC 24, TC 25, TC 25P,
and TC 30 are available from the Timecode menu, as are the source timecodes for clips and
subclips.
n
You need to add the timecode track to the clip or sequence before the timecode tracking
formats appear in the Timecode menu. For more information, see Displaying Timecodes in a
24p or 25p Project.
When displaying TC 30 source or M 30 timecodes, the pulldown phase for NTSC reference
is displayed.
To set a timecode display:
1. Select Tools > Timecode Window.
The Timecode window opens.
2. Click anywhere in the Timecode window, and select an option.
Timecode menu
289
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
The window displays the timecode you have chosen. The Timecode menu contains the
same options as the Tracking Information menu. For a description of the Timecode
options, see “Displaying Tracking Information” in the Help.
3. To add an additional line of timecode, click Add Line, then click the new line and select
an option.
4. To change the size of the font displayed in the Timecode window, select Size > font size.
5. Click the Close button to close the Timecode window.
Adjusting the Play Delay Offset
Your Avid editing application uses a combination of hardware to provide for full audio and
video playback capabilities. The use of an OHCI (Open Host Controller Interface) or a 1394
card to input and output DV signals along with the output to a computer’s desktop monitor
and consumer audio chip could present playback sync issues.
If you do have 1394 selected from the Device menu, the Desktop Play Delay option allows
you to adjust the offset between audio and video playback on the Avid system.
With a camera or transcoder connected to your system, when you play a sequence in the
Timeline and the Composer (desktop) monitor plays back video and audio ahead of the
camera or transcoder, you can adjust this offset. Playback on the Composer monitor can be
delayed by the number of frames chosen as an offset so that the video and audio play
simultaneously to the camera or transcoder and the Composer monitor.
To adjust the offset:
1. In the Project window, click the Settings tab.
The Settings list appears.
2. Double-click Video Display.
The Video Display Settings dialog box opens.
3. Click the Desktop Play Delay slider to increase or decrease the amount of frame offset.
You might need to readjust the frames a few times to find the correct offset.
290
Using the Tool Palette
Using the Tool Palette
The Tool palette provides additional buttons for editing and navigating with your Avid
editing application. The Tool palette buttons can appear with or without labels, and you can
“tear off” the Tool palette to display it in another screen location.
You can also map other functions and buttons to the Tool palette for easy access. See “Using
the Command Palette” on page 65.
To use the Tool palette with the Source monitor or a pop-up monitor:
1. Click the Fast Menu button under the Source monitor or on a pop-up monitor.
The Tool palette opens.
2. Click a button in the Tool palette.
Your Avid editing application performs the function associated with the button.
To use the Tool palette with the Record monitor:
1. Click the Toggle Source/Record button until the word “Source” appears next to the title
in the monitor and the button changes to green.
2. Click the Fast Menu button under the Source monitor.
3. Click the Tool palette, and drag it to another location in the application.
4. Click the Toggle Source/Record button again until the word “Sequence” appears next to
the title in the monitor.
To leave the Tool palette open and move it to another location:
1. Click the Fast Menu button under the Source monitor or on a pop-up monitor.
2. Click the location where you want the Tool palette to be displayed.
n
If a subset of the buttons appears in the Tool palette, click the lower right corner and drag it
to the right and down to reveal the full Tool palette.
To view the names of the buttons in the Tool palette:
t
Move the pointer over a button.
The name of the button appears in a ToolTip box.
291
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
To display labels on the Tool palette buttons:
1. In the Project window, double-click the Interface Setting.
The Interface Setting dialog box appears.
2. Select Show Labels in Tool Palette.
3. Click OK.
Labels appear on the buttons under the icons.
Playing Selected Clips in a Loop
You can view several clips one after another in a continuous loop by selecting Bin > Loop
Selected Clips. This feature is useful if you want to view several versions of the same scene.
While playing the loop, you can jump to the next clip by pressing the Tab key or jump to the
previous clip by pressing Shift+Tab.
To play several clips in a continuous loop:
1. Select the clips in the bin that you want to play in a loop.
2. Select Bin > Loop Selected Clips.
The clips begin playing in the Source monitor from the IN point to the OUT point.
3. Press the space bar to stop the play loop.
If you want to play the clips from start to end, press the Alt key while performing this
procedure.
Using Locators
Locators are a type of electronic bookmark. They allow you to find and identify specific
frames during editing. Keywords that you enter in the comments attached to a locator allow
you to use standard Find procedures to call up the clips quickly. You can display information
about the locators using the Locators window. For more information about the Locators
window, see “Using the Locators Window” on page 297.
There are eight Add Locator buttons in the More tab of the Command palette. Each Add
Locator button is a different color, which allows you to group locators by color. For
example, you can use the red Add Locator button to identify color correction frames and use
the blue Add Locator button to identify cutaway shots.
You can map Add Locator buttons, as described in “Understanding Button Mapping” on
page 66.
292
Using Locators
Ways to Use Locators
The following table describes some possible uses for locators and the Locators window:
Use
Description
Color correction
notations
Use locators to mark clips or specify frames that require color correction,
noting the specific correction to perform if someone else does the job.
Visual track
alignments
Use locators at matching points in synchronized audio and video tracks
so that if the tracks lose sync, you can visually realign the locators in the
Timeline to restore sync. For more information on sync, see “Managing
Sync with Multiple Tracks” on page 308.
Music cues
Use locators to mark the IN and OUT points for music.
Trim markers
Use locators in the Timeline to return directly to an edit you have
designated for further trimming at a later time.
Cutaway markers
Use locators to identify cutaway shots with comments so that when you
return to cover jump-frame edits with cutaway footage, you can quickly
call up the shots using basic Find procedures.
Replace markers
Use locators to mark filler segments with comments to identify the items
that should replace the filler.
Semi-permanent IN or
OUT points
Use locators with the Mark Locators button to put multiple sets of
locators on a long clip, and so on.
Add comments for
EDLs
Use locators to add comments to sequence clips to appear in lists that
you create, such as an EDL or cut list.
Viewing reviewer
comments
Use the Locators window to view reviewer comments and the specific
frame. See “Using the Locators Window” on page 297.
Print a list of reviewer
comments
Use the Locators window to print a list of changes or comments that you
can distribute to other people in the production. See “Using the Locators
Window” on page 297.
Import and export
locators
Import or export locators from one sequence or clip into another
sequence or clip. See “Exporting and Importing Locators” on page 300.
293
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
When you insert a locator, it appears as an oval in the Timeline, in the position bar, and at the
bottom of the frame in the monitor. The color of the oval corresponds to the color of the
locator button you used.
Locator displayed in
the monitor and in
the Timeline
You can add locators to your source material while you are in an editing session, as
described in “Adding Locators While Editing” on page 294.
Adding Locators While Editing
To add locators and comments while in an editing session:
1. Load a clip or sequence.
2. (Option) Select a specific track by using the Track Selector panel.
See “Using the Track Selector Panel” in the Help.
3. Cue to the frame, and click an Add Locator button. The Add Locator buttons are in the
More tab of the Command palette.
The Locator edit entry window opens. The locator name, color, frame, and track
information appear.
294
Using Locators
The following illustration shows the Locator edit entry window.
Comment area
Click to open the
Locators window.
n
By default, the locator name is the user name logged onto your system. You can change this
by typing a new name in the Name text box.
4. Type your comments in the comment area of the Locator edit entry window.
5. Change the color from the Color menu or change the locator name.
6. To save your information, click OK, or press the Enter key.
The information is stored with the marked frame.
The locator oval appears in the Timeline, in the position bar, and at the bottom of the
frame in the monitor.
Finding Locators
To quickly go to a frame with a locator while editing:
t
Search for a particular comment by selecting Edit > Find.
Editing Locator Information
You can open the Locator edit entry window directly from a monitor, from the position
indicator bar, or from the Locators window. In the Locator edit entry window, you can
change the color of a locator, the locator name, or the text of the comment associated with a
locator.
295
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
To edit Locator information in the Locator edit entry window:
1. Do one of the following:
t
Click the oval Locator icon in the Source/Record monitor.
t
Double-click the locator in the position indicator bar.
t
In the Locators window, right-click a locator item, and then select Edit Locator.
The Locator edit entry window opens.
2. Do one or more of the following:
t
Select from the Color menu to change the color of the Locator icon.
t
Type a new locator name.
t
Enter new text or update the current text comment.
3. Click OK.
Marking an Area Using Locators
You can mark the area between two locators by using the Mark Locator button.
To mark the area between two locators:
1. Move the position indicator between two locators.
2. Click the Mark Locators button in the Edit tab of the Command palette.
The area between the two locators is selected.
Moving to the Previous or Next Locator
You can move to a frame marked by a locator by using the Go to Previous Locator button or
the Go to Next Locator button.
To move to the previous locator:
t
Click the Go to Previous Locator button in the Move tab of the Command palette.
To move to the next locator:
t
296
Click the Go to Next Locator button in the Move tab of the Command palette.
Using Locators
Deleting Locators
You can delete locators using the Delete key, or the Locators window.
To delete a single locator:
1. Select a locator in the Timeline or in the position bar.
2. Press the Delete key.
The selected locator is removed.
n
To delete locators using the Locators window, see “Working in the Locators Window” on
page 298.
Using the Locators Window
The Locators window allows you to quickly add comments, go to locator marks, copy and
paste locators, export and import locators, delete locators, and print a list of locators in the
currently loaded clip or sequence. Many features of the Locators window are similar to those
of the Bin window.
You can use the Locators window to:
•
Go to the locator in the sequence or clip.
•
Find frame, timecode, and footage information about each locator.
•
Modify and sort the display.
•
Display frames for easy visual reference.
•
Change the color of the Locator icons.
•
Delete a single locator or multiple locators.
•
Export locators to send out as a review and approval file.
•
Print the Locators window.
This is especially useful for identifying and listing specific frames to be used in an
effect, for example. You can also make a list of IN and OUT points for adding music.
•
Copy and paste locators from one clip or sequence to another.
297
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
The following illustration shows a Locators window with three locators.
Viewing Locators in the Locators Window
To view locators in the Locators window:
1. Load the sequence containing the locators.
2. Do one of the following:
n
t
Right-click the Source/Record monitor and select Locators.
t
Select Tools > Locators.
The Locators window is monitor specific. If you have selected the Source monitor, the
Locators window displays the locators for the clip in the Source monitor. If you have
selected the Record monitor, the Locators window displays the locators for the sequence in
the Record monitor. If you are using the single monitor and switching back and forth, the
Locators window displays the locators for either the source or the sequence, whichever is
active at the time.
Working in the Locators Window
The following table describes a number of basic procedures that you can perform while in
the Locators window, allowing you to select locators, go to the frame marked by a locator,
display locator frames or additional information, sort locators, change locator column
widths, change locator colors, and delete locators.
298
Using Locators
Using the Locators window, you can also:
•
Export and import locators. For more information, see “Exporting and Importing
Locators” on page 300.
•
Copy and paste locators. For more information, see “Copying and Pasting Locators
Using the Locators Window” on page 301.
•
Print the contents of the Locators window. For more information, see “Printing the
Contents of the Locators Window” on page 302.
Task
Procedure
To select a locator item:
t
Click anywhere in the locator item’s row except in the Comment
column.
To browse through the list of
locator items:
t
Press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys.
To go to the frame marked by a
locator item:
t
Do one of the following:
Double-click the locator in the Locators window.
Right-click the locator, and select Jump to Locator.
To display the frame associated t
with a locator:
Right-click, and select Show Images.
To display a timecode column, a t
footage column, or a frame
number column in the Locators
window
Right-click, and select Display > Frame Number, Timecode, or
Footage.
To display XML and Trigger
columns:
t
To sort locators:
1. Click the heading of the column that you want to sort.
Right-click, and select Show MetaSync.
2. Right-click, and select Sort Column (to sort in ascending order) or
Reverse Sort Column (to sort in descending order).
To change column widths:
1. Click the heading of the column that you want to sort.
2. Right-click, and select Enlarge Column or Reduce Column.
To change the color of a Locator t
icon:
To delete locators:
Right-click the locator icon, select Change Locator Color, and select a
color.
1. Click a locator item, or Ctrl+click multiple locator items.
2. Press the Delete key.
299
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
Exporting and Importing Locators
You can export locators from a sequence or a clip. A text (.txt) file is created when you
export the locator and a tab-delimited file displays all the information about the locator. You
can then send the text file to those who need to review and give feedback about the sequence
or clip. They can place additional comments in the text file and send it back for you to
reimport the locator comments back into your sequence.
n
You can also import the text file into a spreadsheet program, such as Excel.
You can also use the Locators window to import locators back into your sequence.
For information about creating or editing a locators text file, see “Creating a Locator Text
(.txt) File” on page 300.
To export locators:
1. From the Locators window, right-click and select Export Locators.
A dialog box opens, asking if you want to export only the selected locators or export all
locators.
2. Click All or Selected.
The Choose location for Exported Locators dialog box opens.
3. Type a file name and click Save.
The locator is saved as a text file (.txt).
To import locators.
1. With a sequence loaded in the Source/Record monitor, right-click and select Locators.
2. From the Locators window, right-click and select Import Locators.
The Import dialog box opens.
3. Select the tab-delimited file containing the locators you want to import, and then click
Open.
n
Another way to import a locator file is to select the tab-delimited locator file and drag it into
the Locators window.
Creating a Locator Text (.txt) File
You can create a Locator text file if you don’t have access to an Avid system. This allows
you to make timecode-specific comments offline and give them to an editor to import into a
sequence. The Locator text file is a tab-delimited file which must be created with certain
300
Using Locators
parameters. This file can be edited in a text editor application or in a spreadsheet program.
The Locator text file can be exported from or imported into the Locators window. See
“Exporting and Importing Locators” on page 300.
To add comments or information into the Locator text file:
t
Type each line of the file using the following syntax:
Name<tab>Frame<tab>Track<tab>Color<tab>Comment
-
These fields are required and must be in the order specified.
-
Enter the color names as follows: red, green, blue, cyan, magenta,
yellow, black, white
-
Enter the track names as follows: V1, V2, V3, etc, A1, A2, TC1
The following lines are examples:
John<tab>203<tab>V1<tab>red<tab>Correct tint
Mary<tab>354<tab>A1<tab>blue<tab>Add voice-over
Copying and Pasting Locators Using the Locators Window
You can use the Locators window to copy a single locator or multiple locators and then paste
them into another clip or a sequence. The copied locator is placed in the same frame position
when it is pasted into the new clip. If the frame position does not exist in the new clip, then
the paste does not occur.
To copy locators from a clip and paste them into a new clip using the Locators
window:
1. Select the locators in the Locators window by doing one of the following:
t
Click a single locator.
t
Ctrl+click multiple locators.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Copy.
t
Press Ctrl+C.
3. Load a new clip in the Source/Record monitor.
4. Click the Locator window and do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Paste.
t
Press Ctrl+V.
The locator is pasted into the new clip.
301
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
To copy locators from a clip and paste them into a sequence using the Locators
window:
1. Select the locators in the Locators window by doing one of the following:
t
Click a single locator.
t
Ctrl+click multiple locators.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Copy.
t
Press Ctrl+C.
3. Load a sequence into the Source/Record monitor or into the Timeline.
4. Click the Locator window and do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Paste.
t
Press Ctrl+V.
The locator is pasted into the sequence.
You can also use a text editor to cut and paste locators in the Locators window. This allows
you to move locators easily between clips, sequences, tracks, or different users on your
system.
To copy and paste locators using the Locators window and a text editor:
1. Select the locators in the Locators window by doing one of the following:
t
Click a single locator.
t
Ctrl+click multiple locators.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Select Edit > Copy.
t
Press Ctrl+C.
3. Open a text editor application, and paste the selection into the document.
The locator information displays in the text document.
Timecode, clip data, color, locator identification, and comments are all associated with a
locator entry. You can edit the entries before pasting them into a new clip or sequence using
the Locators window, or you can save the locator information as a text file and distribute it as
needed.
Printing the Contents of the Locators Window
You can print the complete contents or the current view of the Locators window.
302
Using Locators
n
If you select Show Images to display the frame associated with each locator and you want to
print the frames, you must use the procedure for printing the current view of the Locators
window. Printing the complete contents does not print the frames.
To print the current view of the Locators window:
1. Make sure your printer is correctly set up.
2. Expand the view of the Locators window to display the information you want to print.
3. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
4. Select the Page Setup options.
5. Click OK.
6. Select File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
7. Select the Print options.
8. Click OK.
The system prints the current view of locator information.
To print the complete contents of the Locators window:
1. Make sure your printer is correctly set up.
2. Click the Locators window to make it active.
3. Press Ctrl+Alt+P to place the locator information in the Console window.
4. Select Tools > Console.
The Console window opens.
5. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
6. Select the Page Setup options.
7. Click OK.
8. Select File > Print.
The Print dialog box opens, reflecting the specific options for your printer.
9. Select the Print options.
10. Click OK.
The system prints the locator information displayed the Console window.
303
Chapter 9 Viewing and Marking Footage: Advanced
304
Chapter 10
Creating and Editing Sequences:
Advanced
After you have viewed and marked your clips or created subclips, you are ready to create a
sequence.
The following topics describe advanced procedures that you use when creating and editing
sequences:
•
Playback Performance Tips
•
Playback Performance Tips
•
Playing a Limited Duration of a Sequence
•
Autosyncing Clips
•
Managing Sync with Multiple Tracks
•
Ganging Footage in Monitors
•
Synchronizing Metadata Using MetaSync
For basic information about editing, see “Creating and Editing Sequences: Basics” in the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
For information on editing with remote assets in an Avid Interplay environment, including
editing with in-progress clips captured using Frame Chase capture capabilities, see “Editing
with Remote Assets” in the Help.
Playback Performance Tips
As you continue to edit, you might find the playback performance of the system diminishing
as the sequence grows in length and layers. This can happen when you are using a great deal
of system memory for playback of large and complex sequences. The following are a few
tips for improving playback performance:
Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced
•
Check the number of media objects in use for your project in the Memory window, as
described in “Viewing Memory” on page 42. If this number is large, reduce the number
of media objects by doing one of the following:
t
Close bins that are not in use.
t
Reduce the number of clips in the open bins.
t
Unmount drives that are currently not in use. See “Mounting and Unmounting
Drives” in the Help. You can remount the drives at any time by selecting File >
Mount All.
•
When displaying real-time effects, adjust the video quality as described in “Optimizing
Your Playback Performance” in the Help.
•
Restart the computer once a day to refresh the system memory.
•
Split the sequence into two or more segments, if possible.
Playing a Limited Duration of a Sequence
Long sequences with many effects can be time-consuming to work with in the Timeline.
Working with a shorter sequence can save time. The Play Length Toggle feature allows you
to switch between playing the entire sequence and playing a limited duration centered
around the current position of the sequence. When you use the Play Length Toggle feature,
the Play button and Play Length Toggle button change to white.
To play a limited duration of a sequence:
1. Map the Play Length Toggle button from the Play tab of the Command palette, for
example, to a monitor toolbar button.
For information about mapping buttons, see “Understanding Button Mapping” on
page 66.
2. Move the position indicator to the location where you want to start playing the
sequence.
3. Click the Play Length Toggle button.
The Play button and the Play Length Toggle button change to white, indicating the Play
Length Toggle feature is active.
4. Click the Play button.
The sequence plays for the default Play Length, which is 1 minute.
5. To set the Play Length back to play the entire sequence, click the Play Length Toggle
button again.
306
Autosyncing Clips
Autosyncing Clips
When you capture footage that includes both audio and video, your Avid editing application
automatically establishes sync when it creates clips in the bin. Autosyncing applies to audio
and video clips that are captured separately, usually from two separate sources. Autosyncing
creates a new subclip that displays sync breaks in the Timeline as though the audio and
video were captured simultaneously.
Sync break displayed in
the Timeline
n
For more information on tracking sync breaks, see “Displaying Sync Breaks” in the Help.
Understanding Autosyncing
Autosyncing is often used for 24p and 25p projects in which picture and sound were
captured separately. These clips are often synced based on common film timecode, sound
timecode, or auxiliary timecode.
You can also autosync™ any audio and video clips based on a user-defined IN point or OUT
point relationship that you establish with marks. For example, you can use the slate as a
common visual and audio reference for autosyncing the clips.
Use the following guidelines when autosyncing:
•
You can autosync audio clips with video clips only. To link two or more video clips or
audio clips, use the Grouping option described in “Understanding Grouping and
Multigrouping Clips” on page 529.
•
You can create only one autosynced subclip at a time. You cannot autosync numerous
pairs of audio and video clips simultaneously.
•
If the audio and video clips do not have matching source or auxiliary timecode, you
must establish common sync frames. To do this, mark IN points (or OUT points) on
both clips before autosyncing. When you autosync using this method, the whole clip is
taken into the subclip.
•
If you are autosyncing clips of different lengths, the longer clip is truncated to the length
of the shorter clip; video clips override audio clips.
•
If you autosync according to common timecodes that are staggered (one clip starts later
than the other), the later starting timecode becomes the start of the new subclip. The clip
with the earlier starting timecode is trimmed accordingly.
307
Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced
Creating an Autosynced Subclip
To create an autosynced subclip:
1. Highlight the two clips in the bin.
2. Select Bin > AutoSync.
The Sync Selection dialog box opens.
3. Select an option, based on the following:
-
Film TC/Sound TC, if you are syncing clips with matching film and sound
timecode recorded in the field. This option appears dimmed if you are not working
on a 24p or 25p project.
-
Inpoints, if you are syncing according to IN points set in both clips.
-
Outpoints, if you are syncing according to OUT points set in both clips.
-
Source Timecode, if the two clips have matching timecode.
-
Auxiliary TC1–TC5, if the two clips have matching timecode in the same
Auxiliary Timecode column. Select an Auxiliary TC, 1 through 5, from the menu.
4. Click OK.
The subclip is created and named by default after the video clip with the file name
extension .sync.n, where n is the incremental number of subclips created with the same
name.
You can change the name according to preference. You can load an autosynced subclip into
the Source/Record monitor and immediately edit it into a sequence.
Managing Sync with Multiple Tracks
Displaying sync breaks in the Timeline makes it easy to manage sync between video and one
or two audio tracks. You can use additional techniques to manage sync when you work with
four or more tracks. The techniques include using the Sync Lock feature, syncing with tail
leader, syncing with locators, and using add edits
308
Managing Sync with Multiple Tracks
Using Sync Lock
The Sync Lock feature allows you to maintain sync among several tracks while adding,
moving, trimming, or removing material in a sequence. For example, if you insert an edit
into one track that is sync locked to a second track, the system automatically inserts filler in
the second track to maintain sync between the two.
Sync Lock icon
Sync Lock All button
You activate sync locking by clicking a Sync Lock button in the Track Selector panel to
display the Sync Lock icon. You can also switch all sync locks on or off by clicking the Sync
Lock All button.
There are several unique aspects to sync locking:
•
In Segment mode, sync locking is controlled by the Segment Drag Sync Locks option in
the Edit tab of the Timeline Settings dialog box and the Sync Lock icons in the
Timeline. For more information on sync locking tracks in Segment mode, see
“Maintaining Sync in Segment Mode” in the Help.
•
In Trim mode, sync locking applies only to single-roller trims because dual-roller trims
do not break sync. For more information on sync locking tracks in Trim mode, see
“Maintaining Sync While Trimming” on page 335.
•
You can sync lock any number of tracks in any combination. The tracks do not require
matching timecode or common sources and can include multiple video tracks as well as
audio tracks.
•
Sync locking affects entire tracks. This means that parallel segments in other
sync-locked tracks are affected when you add, move, trim, or remove material anywhere
in the sequence.
Syncing with Tail Leader
You can add tail leader to the audio or video material to provide a useful visual reference in
the Timeline for tracking and fixing sync breaks across any number of tracks.
Film editors traditionally use standard head and tail leaders for this purpose. You can create
your own leader according to any specification, as described in “Creating Leader” on
page 215.
309
Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced
With tail leader added to synchronized tracks, you can go to the end of the sequence after
making a complicated edit and see whether the leaders are lined up. If they are out of line,
this indicates a sync break that you can measure and eliminate.
Tail leaders out of sync
To eliminate a sync break when the leaders do not line up:
1. Move the position indicator to the black segment that follows the out-of-sync leader.
2. Select the track, and then click the Mark Clip button. You can measure the break by
checking the IN to OUT duration of the marked segment.
Mark Clip allows you to
measure the break.
3. Find the point at which the sync was lost.
4. Add or remove frames by using the appropriate edit function, as described in “Fixing
Sync Breaks” in the Help.
As a quick fix, you can enter Segment mode by clicking the Extract/Splice-in (yellow arrow)
button. Drag the black segment at the end of the out-of-sync tail leader to the location where
the sync was lost. This segment of black, created when the track went out of sync, is the
exact length of the sync break.
Move the black
segment using
Extract/Splice-in.
310
Managing Sync with Multiple Tracks
Syncing with Locators
Like tail leaders, you can add locators to material in the Timeline to track and adjust breaks
in sync between any number of tracks. You can place locators anywhere in the sequence and
you can add specific notes.
For more information on using locators, see “Using Locators” on page 292.
To mark sync points with locators:
1. Move the position indicator to the point in the sequence where you want to maintain
sync between two or more tracks.
2. Select all tracks where you want the locators to appear.
3. Click an Add Locator button.
The system adds a locator to the enabled tracks in the Timeline and in the Record
monitor.
Locators in sync
Focus button
To add a note that appears in the Source/Record monitor whenever you park on the
locator frame (such as Music sync or Sound Effect sync):
1. Double-click the locator in the Source/Record monitor.
2. Type your comments in the comment entry area of the Locator window.
To determine if sync is broken after an edit:
t
Return to the segment that contains the locators and click the Focus button.
If the locators are not lined up, the sync is broken.
You can use the Find procedure to go to a locator quickly with text. For more information,
see “Finding Frames, Clips, and Bins” in the Help.
311
Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced
To adjust the sync break:
1. Measure the sync break by first moving the position indicator to the leftmost locator and
clicking the Mark IN button. Then move it to the other locators, and click the Mark
OUT button.
2. Check the IN to OUT duration of the marked section.
To restore sync:
1. Find the point at which the sync was lost.
2. Add or remove frames by using the appropriate edit function, as described in “Fixing
Sync Breaks” in the Help.
Using Add Edit When Trimming
When trimming with several audio tracks in sync, you can use the Add Edit button to create
an edit in the silent or black areas of the synced tracks. They occur in line with the track you
are trimming, and they trim all the tracks at once to maintain sync.
n
You can also add an edit to filler. For more information, see “Adding Edits to Filler Clips”
on page 326.
To use the Add Edit button while trimming:
1. Move the position indicator to the edit that you want to trim.
2. Select only the additional tracks that are in sync, and click the Add Edit button.
The system adds a transition at the location of your position indicator in the Timeline.
Add edits in black
3. Select the transition and trim (be sure to select all the synced tracks).
As you trim, frames are added or removed from the additional tracks as well.
4. When you are finished trimming, remove the add edits from the sync tracks by selecting
Clip > Remove Match Frame Edits.
312
Ganging Footage in Monitors
Ganging Footage in Monitors
The Gang function does not combine tracks into a synced relationship but locks monitors in
sync so that you can move through footage in two or more monitors simultaneously. This
function is convenient for viewing and marking the sequence and source material
simultaneously, based on syncing of the position indicators in each monitor.
You can gang the Source monitor and any number of pop-up monitors with the Record
monitor. For instance, before editing them into a sequence, you can gang a music track in a
pop-up monitor, source footage in the Source monitor, and a sequence in the Record
monitor. Then you can view the footage, adjust the sync points, and mark them before
completing the edit.
To gang footage in monitors:
1. Load a sequence into the Record monitor.
2. Load one or more clips into the Source monitor and pop-up monitors.
3. Click the Gang button on the Other tab of the Command palette for each monitor that
you want to synchronize (the Record monitor is always ganged).
The button changes to green when the function is enabled.
4. View the footage in any of the monitors using standard playback methods.
As you move through footage in one monitor, the footage in all other monitors freezes.
The footage is updated when the play stops. Simultaneous full-motion playback is not
possible, although sync is maintained at all times.
Synchronizing Metadata Using MetaSync
Avid MetaSync gives editors the tools to synchronize metadata with traditional video and
audio content. With MetaSync, you can insert pointers to metadata directly into the Timeline
and easily modify the timing and duration of the enhanced material. The metadata, in turn,
point to additional content, such as files from a script-writing program, closed captioning,
HTML files, database records, machine controls, or remote commands. Other applications
can then process this additional content for final production and distribution, opening new
opportunities for content creation in the emerging areas of ITV (interactive television),
DVD, broadband, and converging media.
For more information, see “MetaSync Overview” in the Help.
313
Chapter 10 Creating and Editing Sequences: Advanced
314
Chapter 11
Using the Timeline: Advanced
Your Avid editing application represents each edit and effect in a graphical timeline structure
to help you track and manipulate the elements of your sequence. The Timeline continuously
updates as you work, displaying an extensive array of icons and information that you can
customize in various ways. In addition, the Timeline has its own set of editing tools that you
can use to create and revise edits and transitions across multiple tracks.
The following topics provide advanced information on using the Timeline:
•
Timeline Views: Advanced
•
Navigating in the Timeline: Advanced
•
Using Advanced Timeline Techniques
•
Adding an Edit (Match Framing)
•
Detecting Duplicate Frames
•
Finding Black Holes and Flash Frames
•
Printing the Timeline
For basic information about the timeline, see “Using the Timeline: Basics” in the Help or the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
Timeline Views: Advanced
You can customize your view of the Timeline to display a variety of information about your
sequences and clips. This allows you to set up a Timeline view that works more efficiently
for you.
Displaying the Timeline Top Toolbar
You can display a top toolbar in the Timeline for easy access to editing buttons. You can also
map additional buttons to the Timeline top toolbar. For information about mapping buttons,
see “Mapping User-Selectable Buttons” on page 67.
You can choose to show or hide the Timeline top toolbar.
To show the Timeline top toolbar:
1. In the Project window, double-click the Timeline Setting.
The Timeline Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select Show Toolbar in the Display tab.
3. Click OK.
To hide the Timeline top toolbar:
t
Deselect Show Toolbar, and then click OK.
Displaying Timecode Tracks in the Timeline
You can display separate tracks for different timecodes in the Timeline. By default, the
Timeline displays all the tracks. You can hide the timecode tracks by deselecting them in the
Show Track submenu of the Timeline Fast menu.
To customize the tracks to be displayed in the Timeline:
t
n
316
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Show Track > tracks.
The TC1 track represents the timecode of the project in which you are working.
Timeline Views: Advanced
Assigning Local Colors to Clips in the Timeline
You can assign local colors to clips in the Timeline to indicate clips that should be grouped
together.
To assign a local clip color:
1. Click one of the Segment Mode buttons, and select a clip.
2. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Clip Color > Local.
A check mark indicates that Local is active.
3. Select Edit > Set Local Clip Color > color.
4. Click the Segment button.
The assigned local color appears in the clip in the Timeline.
For information on how to assign colors to mixed-format clips in the Timeline, see
“Highlighting Clips in a Mixed-Format Timeline” in the Help.
Displaying Local and Source Colors in the Timeline
You can display source colors and local colors for clips in the Timeline. Source colors are
assigned to clips in bins and local colors are assigned to clips in the Timeline. By default, the
Timeline is set to display no colors.
n
Displaying source colors and local colors overrides any track color assigned from the
Timeline Fast menu.
To display source colors in the Timeline:
t
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Clip Color > Source.
The source colors assigned to clips in the bin appear in the Timeline.
n
Clip colors assigned to sequences, groups, motion effects, and title clips do not appear as
source colors in the Timeline.
To display local colors in the Timeline:
t
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Clip Color > Local.
The local colors assigned to clips appear in the Timeline.
317
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
n
If both Source and Local are selected in the Clip Color submenu, the local color overrides
the source color.
Changing the Timeline Background Color
To change the background color of the Timeline:
1. Deselect all the tracks in the Timeline.
2. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Background Color > color.
n
The Background Color command appears only when all tracks are deselected.
Changing the Timeline Track Color
To change the color of the selected tracks in the Timeline:
1. Click in the Timeline to activate it.
2. Select the tracks whose color you want to change.
3. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Track Color > color.
If you want to choose a custom color for the tracks, press the Alt key while performing this
procedure. When you release the mouse button on the color palette, the Windows Color
dialog box opens.
Showing Locators in the Timeline
When you add locators to a sequence, the locators are displayed in the Timeline. You can
modify which locators are displayed in the Timeline by selecting Show Locators from the
Timeline Fast menu. When you select a color from the Show Locators submenu, only
locators of that color appear in the Timeline. You can select All from the Show Locators
submenu to display all the locators, or you can select None to prevent any locators from
being displayed in the Timeline.
n
Show Locators affects only how the locator icons are displayed in the Timeline. The locators
are not affected.
To change the display of locators in the Timeline:
1. Load a sequence that contains locators into the Record monitor.
2. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, select Show Locators, and then select the colors of
the locators you want to display in the Timeline.
The Timeline displays only those locators with the colors you selected.
318
Navigating in the Timeline: Advanced
Navigating in the Timeline: Advanced
The Timeline window provides various controls for quickly moving through a sequence and
adjusting your view of details displayed in the tracks while editing.
Using the Full-Screen Timeline
As an alternative to constantly scrolling through the Timeline window or resizing tracks to
get a view of the material, you can resize the Timeline window to full-screen display. You
can also enlarge the tracks to view complex audio or video layers in greater vertical detail.
A Timeline with reduced tracks wraps around to show more of the sequence. As you reduce
tracks in a full-screen Timeline, the sequence wraps around, allowing you to examine a long
sequence in greater horizontal detail.
To resize the Timeline window:
t
Click the Resize box at the lower right corner of the window, and drag it.
The Timeline expands to full-screen size.
Resize box
To restore a resized Timeline window to its default position:
t
Click the Timeline and select Windows > Home.
To control whether the Timeline wraps around in the Timeline window:
t
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Wrap Around.
319
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
To enlarge tracks:
t
Select the tracks, and press Ctrl+L.
To reduce tracks:
t
Select the tracks, and press Ctrl+K.
You can also continue to work in Source/Record mode by resizing the Timeline window so
that it overlaps the Composer window.
You can click in either window to activate it and bring it forward at any time, or you can
click in the title bar of the Timeline window and drag it to the Bin monitor to place each
window in its own monitor.
n
If the Timeline or Composer window is hidden behind another window, select the window
again from the Tools menu.
Displaying Source Material in the Timeline
The Toggle Source/Record in Timeline button allows you to view multitrack source material
quickly in the Timeline for selecting and marking specific tracks.
By default, the Timeline displays only the available tracks for source material.
When you click the button to display the source material, both the button and the position
indicator turn green to indicate that you are viewing source material.
Source tracks
Button and position
indicator change to
green.
Toggle Source/Record in Timeline button
This feature is particularly useful when you are editing with a sequence or subclip created
from a sequence; you can also use it to look at the contents of any source clip in a Timeline
display.
n
320
Heads and Tails view is disabled when you are displaying material from the Source monitor.
Using Advanced Timeline Techniques
IN to OUT Highlighting in the Timeline
When you mark a sequence with IN to OUT points, the system indicates the selection by
highlighting the marked region in the Timeline. Only selected tracks are highlighted.
Highlighted region
All tracks selected
This visual guide helps you monitor track and segment selection more carefully when
mixing or applying effects across multiple tracks and segments.
To turn the highlighting feature on and off:
t
Select the Show Marked Region option in the Display tab of the Timeline Settings
dialog box.
IN point
OUT point
Using Advanced Timeline Techniques
There are several advanced techniques for displaying and editing in the Timeline that you
can use in any combination, including:
•
Bin Editing into the Timeline
•
Bin Editing Directly into a Sequence Using the Keyboard
•
Editing with the Film Track
•
Editing in Heads or Heads Tails View
•
Performing a Quick Edit Using the Top and Tail Commands
321
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
Bin Editing into the Timeline
You can use Segment mode to edit clips directly from a bin into the sequence in the
Timeline. Bin editing allows you to bypass the process of loading clips into the monitor,
setting marks, and clicking the Splice-in button or Overwrite button.
For information on editing multiple clips directly from the bin into the Source/Record
monitor, see “Creating an Instant Rough Cut” in the Help.
To perform a direct edit from a bin into your Timeline:
1. For a more accurate edit, mark IN and OUT points for each clip or create subclips, as
described in “Marking and Subcataloging Footage” in the Help. Otherwise, the entire
clip is edited into the sequence.
2. Click one of the Segment Mode buttons:
-
Lift/Overwrite (red) acts as an overwrite edit, causing the clip to overwrite material
of the same length in the sequence while maintaining the same duration of the
sequence.
-
Extract/Splice-in (yellow) acts as a splice edit, inserting the clip into the sequence,
moving existing material down, and lengthening the total duration.
3. Drag a clip from the bin into the Timeline. You can edit only one clip at a time.
4. When you find the right placement for the clip, release the mouse button.
The Timeline reflects the new edit.
n
After the edit is completed, you remain in Segment mode until you click the active Segment
Mode button again to deactivate it.
Bin Editing Directly into a Sequence Using the Keyboard
Bin editing allows you to bypass the process of loading clips into the monitor, setting marks,
and clicking the Splice-in button or Overwrite button. You can use keyboard shortcut keys to
edit clips directly from a bin into the sequence in the Timeline.
To perform a direct edit from a bin into a sequence:
1. Activate bin editing:
a.
Double-click Bin in the Settings list in the Project window.
b.
Select the “Enable edit from bin (Splice, Overwrite)” option.
c.
Click OK.
2. Mark an IN or OUT point in the Timeline, or move the position indicator to the location
where you want the clip to appear.
322
Using Advanced Timeline Techniques
3. Select a clip in the bin.
The entire clip is edited into the sequence, unless you have marked IN and OUT points.
4. Do one of the following:
t
Press the V key to perform a splice-in edit, which inserts the clip into the sequence
and moves existing material down, lengthening the total duration of the sequence.
t
Press the B key to perform an overwrite edit, which causes the clip to overwrite
material of the same length in the sequence while maintaining the same duration of
the sequence.
The Timeline reflects the new edit.
Editing with the Film Track
You can use the film track to examine each frame of the sequence in a linear display, much
as you would when looking at a strand of film on a flatbed or workbench. Unlike your view
of the footage in the monitors, that display one frame at a time, the film track within the
Timeline allows you to compare individual frames side by side within a range of frames.
To display the film track:
t
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Show Track > Film.
A row of film frames appears at the top of the Timeline. The film track displays as many
representative frames as possible within the window.
Film track
To adjust your view of the Timeline quickly for frame-by-frame viewing and editing:
t
n
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Show Every Frame.
The film track displays frames for the topmost video track only. You cannot display more
than one film track at a time.
To quickly view more frames as you scroll:
t
Drag the resize box in the lower right corner of the Timeline for a full-screen view. You
can reduce the size of Timeline tracks to wrap the sequence around several times.
As you continue to scroll, each strand of the Timeline wraparound is updated.
323
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
Editing in Heads or Heads Tails View
While in the early stages of editing a project, you can rearrange clips in the sequence
visually by using Heads view or Heads Tails view. These display formats are useful for
rearranging simple straight-cut edits.
c
If you rearrange a split edit (in which the audio extends beyond the video, or the
reverse), the system cuts all tracks to the same edit point. To rearrange split edits or
edits on multiple video tracks, or to move audio and video separately, use the Segment
Mode editing techniques described in “Using Segment Mode” in the Help.
To edit in Heads view or Heads Tails view:
1. Click the Track buttons to select the tracks to be edited.
2. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select View Type > Heads or Heads Tails.
The Timeline changes to one of the following displays.
Head frame for each clip
Heads view
Head and tail frames for each clip
Heads Tails
view
3. Press and hold the Alt key, click the frames representing the clip you want to move, and
drag the clip to its new position. The sequence is rearranged to match the changes you
made.
Performing a Quick Edit Using the Top and Tail Commands
The Top and Tail commands allow you to perform quick edits to segments in the Timeline.
Use the Top button in the Edit tab of the Command palette to extract footage from the start
of the clip or segment to the position indicator. This action is equivalent to the T-R-X
keyboard command sequence: Mark Clip, Mark OUT, Extract.
324
Adding an Edit (Match Framing)
Use the Tail button in the Edit tab of the Command palette to extract footage from the
position indicator to the end of the clip or segment. This action is equivalent to the T-E-X
keyboard command sequence: Mark Clip, Mark IN, Extract.
For information about how the Mark Clip button works, see “Marking an Entire Clip or
Segment” in the Help.
To edit using the Top and Tail commands:
1. Load a sequence into a monitor.
2. Select the track or tracks you want to edit, and deselect all other tracks.
3. Move the position indicator to the location where you want to perform an edit.
4. Do one of the following:
t
Click the Top button to extract footage from the start of the clip or segment to the
position indicator.
t
Click the Tail button to extract footage from the position indicator to the end of the
clip or segment.
Adding an Edit (Match Framing)
The Add Edit function places an artificial edit point between frames of a clip. The edit
appears in the Timeline as a transition between two clips, but when you play the clip, the
footage appears unchanged because the frames are continuous.
Add edit placed between frames
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Footage plays back continuously.
This form of edit is also known as a match frame. In traditional analog editing, match
framing accomplishes specific tasks, such as creating a dissolve between two clips. In Avid
editing applications, however, Add Edits (or match frames) function differently. Use match
frames primarily to divide and isolate portions of a clip or sequence to modify that portion
without affecting the rest of the footage. You can also add edits to filler segments to maintain
sync while trimming. Once you make the adjustment, playback of the clip is no longer
seamless because the two portions of the clip are different.
325
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
You can add an edit to a single audio or video track, or you can place the Add Edit across
several tracks at once.
The Add Edit button appears in the Edit tab of the Command palette. Depending on the
model of your Avid editing application and your button mappings, it might appear in other
locations such as the Tool palette or the Timeline top toolbar. You can also map the Add Edit
button to a custom location. For information about mapping buttons, see “Mapping UserSelectable Buttons” on page 67.
To add a match-frame edit:
1. Move the position indicator to the selected frame.
2. Select the tracks where you want to add the edit.
3. Click the Add Edit button.
The edit appears in the sequence with an equal sign to indicate a match frame.
Equal sign indicates a match frame.
n
By default, the match-frame indicator is white. If a change in level occurs, the match-frame
indicator changes to red.
Adding Edits to Filler Clips
You can add an edit to all tracks with filler, regardless of the track selection.
To add an edit to filler clips at the position indicator:
1. Move the position indicator to the selected frame.
2. Alt+click the Add Edit button.
The edit appears on all tracks with filler in the sequence at the position indicator.
Removing Match-Frame Edits
If you make a mistake when adding an edit, or if you have finished performing edit functions
with multiple Add Edits and want to remove them, you can remove all Add Edits in the
entire sequence or within a selected portion of the sequence.
326
Detecting Duplicate Frames
You can also remove individual match frames by using the Undo command, or by selecting
them in Trim mode and pressing the Delete key. For more information on Trim mode, see
“Undoing or Redoing Edits” and “Working in Trim Mode: Basics” in the Help.
To remove match-frame edits:
1. Select the entire sequence or a portion of it as follows:
t
Select the entire sequence by removing any IN and OUT points.
t
Select a portion of the sequence by marking an IN point and an OUT point
surrounding the match-frame edits (Add Edits) you want to remove.
2. Select the tracks from which you want to remove the edits.
3. Select Clip > Remove Match Frame Edits.
Your Avid editing application removes the edits.
c
You cannot remove match-frame edits between segments in which segment effects and
audio pan or volume adjustments have been applied.
Detecting Duplicate Frames
When you edit offline with plans to generate an EDL, the Dupe Detection feature allows you
to visually track duplicate frames of footage while editing so that you can eliminate or
manage the requirements of an online dupe reel.
n
The Dupe Detection feature works only for track V1.
When you activate Dupe Detection, each set of duplicate frames is tagged with a different
color. (Up to 10 color sets can be distinguished during a single detection process.) Matching
frames have matching colors. You can use any of the Trim Mode options to remove the
duplicate frames, if necessary.
The colored bars that distinguish duplicate frames in the sequence are automatically drawn
above the frames in the Timeline, as shown.
Two duplicate frames marked above the clip
by the automatic Dupe Detection option
327
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
Orange bars mark the first set of duplicate frames, green bars mark the second set, and so on.
You can use Dupe Detection while you are editing to locate duplicate frames, and remove
them as the sequence evolves.
To activate Dupe Detection:
t
Click the Timeline Fast Menu button, and select Dupe Detection.
Dupe Detection is instantaneous and retroactive; if duplicate frames already exist in your
sequence, the colored bars appear immediately. As you edit, your Avid editing application
shows duplicate frames as they occur.
n
c
You can change the handle size used by Dupe Detection in the Edit tab of the Timeline
Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Adjusting Handle Length in Dupe
Detection” on page 328.
Your Avid editing application might mark a special effect optical (such as a blowup) as
a duplicate frame. Double-check your sequence for this possibility before deleting
frames.
Adjusting Handle Length in Dupe Detection
You change handle length information for the display of dupes in the Timeline.
There are two methods:
•
In 35mm film editing (using the single-strand method), one extra frame, known as the
safety frame, provides tabs for the negative cutter to use when cutting two segments of
film together. However, this frame is always lost during the negative conform.
35mm conforming: Preparing for a cut
Frames A and C
can still be used
in a sequence,
but frame B is cut
in the middle.
A
328
Safety frame
Splice is made here.
B
C
Adjusting Handle Length in Dupe Detection
•
In 16mm film editing (using the multiple-strand method), labs sometimes use the
zero-frame cutting method to avoid seeing each splice in a 35mm blowup print. In this
method, the negative is conformed along with the handles so that the cuts appear as soft
frame handles rather than jumps in the resulting 35mm blowup.
Different labs have different standards depending on the equipment used; usually, a
minimum of four frame handles is needed.
16mm conforming: Zero-frame cutting method
Segments of sequence
Transition
Handles
Adding specific handle lengths to dupes (as they appear both in the sequence and in film
lists) has the following advantages:
•
In 35mm single-strand conforming: Editors can better track duplicate frames and
provide the negative cutter with more than one safety frame to avoid losing specific
frames.
•
In 16mm multiple-strand conforming: For labs using the zero-frame cutting method,
editors can track the number of handles during editing according to the specific
standards of a particular lab.
To adjust handle lengths in Dupe Detection:
1. Double-click Timeline in the Settings list in the Project window.
The Timeline Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Dupe Detection Handles menu in the Edit tab, and select the number of handle
frames. The typical 35mm safety frame setting is 0.5 frame (amounting to a 1-frame
total with both sides of a cut).
3. Click OK.
The selected value is applied to the head and tail of every event.
329
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
When you enable Dupe Detection during editing, the handles are added to the colored dupe
indicators that appear in the Timeline.
Finding Black Holes and Flash Frames
You can use the Find Black Holes and Find Flash Frames commands to help you quickly
find parts of your sequence that you might want to delete from the final sequence:
Black holes are segments of the sequence that consist of one or more frames of filler. Flash
frames are clips that have an extremely short duration, for example, fewer than 10 frames.
To find black holes:
1. Click the Timeline to activate it.
2. Select the tracks you want to search.
3. Move the position indicator to the beginning of the sequence or before the part of the
sequence you want to search.
4. Select Clip > Find Black Holes.
The position indicator moves to the first segment that contains filler. You can then edit
or delete the filler, if necessary.
To find the next segment that contains filler:
t
Select Clip > Find Black Holes again.
To find flash frames:
1. Set the maximum frame length that you want to detect:
a.
In the Project window, double-click the Timeline Setting.
The Timeline Settings dialog box opens.
b.
Click the Edit tab.
c.
In the option Find Flash Frames Shorter Than, type the maximum number of frames
you want to detect. The default is 10, which indicates the system will detect clips
with 9 or fewer frames.
d. Click OK.
2. Click the Timeline to activate it.
3. Select the tracks you want to search.
4. Move the position indicator to the beginning of the sequence or before the part of the
sequence you want to search.
330
Printing the Timeline
5. Select Clip > Find Flash Frames.
The position indicator moves to the first flash frame.
To find the next flash frame:
t
Select Clip > Find Flash Frames again.
Printing the Timeline
To print the Timeline:
1. Click the Timeline to activate it.
2. Select File > Print Timeline.
The Print dialog box opens.
n
The name of the printer and details of the dialog box will vary, depending on your facility.
3. Select the Print options.
4. Click OK.
Your Avid editing application prints the current view of the Timeline. You can also use
the Print Timeline command to print the Timeline in Heads view or in Heads Tails view.
331
Chapter 11 Using the Timeline: Advanced
332
Chapter 12
Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
After creating a rough version of a sequence, you can enter Trim mode and fine-tune the
transitions between each clip or between whole segments. You can also trim edits as you
build a sequence rather than create a rough cut first.
The following topics provide advanced information on trim mode:
•
Creating Overlap Edits
•
Extending an Edit
•
Maintaining Sync While Trimming
•
Slipping or Sliding Segments
For basic information about trimming, see “Working with Trim Mode: Basics” in the Help.
Creating Overlap Edits
You can use an overlap edit (or L-edit) to smooth a transition by giving the viewer the
illusion that the audio or video is shared between two separate but adjacent clips.
Audio overlap example
Before trimming
V1
A1
A2
Clip A
Clip B
Clip C
After trimming
V1
A1
A2
Clip A
Clip B
Clip C
Clip B audio is extended.
Clip C audio is trimmed in.
To create an overlap edit:
1. Perform a straight-cut edit between two clips, including audio and video tracks:
-
If the timing of the video edit is crucial, mark edit points according to video.
-
If the timing of the audio transition is crucial, mark edit points according to audio.
Chapter 12 Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
2. Perform a dual-roller trim on either the video track or the audio track, but not on both:
-
If the video transition occurs at the correct place but you want the audio from one
clip to linger into the other (or the reverse), trim the audio tracks accordingly.
-
If the audio transition occurs at the correct place but you want the video to transition
either before or after the audio cut, trim the video track accordingly.
You can also create an overlap edit for an audio track by using the Audio Mark buttons. See
“Marking Audio Clips” in the Help.
Extending an Edit
Use an extend edit to perform dual-sided (A-side and B-side) trims on selected tracks. An
extend edit allows you to quickly create a split edit without entering Trim mode. It also
allows you to establish the exact frame that you want to trim to by using the position
indicator. (When you enter Trim mode, the position indicator moves to the nearest transition
by default.)
You can extend edits backward or forward in the Timeline. In either case, like a dual-roller
trim, the extend edit function always maintains sync relationships.
To perform an extend edit:
1. Select the tracks you want to extend.
n
To extend multiple tracks, all the tracks must have the same edit point in the Timeline.
Otherwise, you must extend the tracks separately.
2. Find the point in the sequence to which you want to trim. If the trim point is before the
edit, mark an IN point. If the trim point is after the edit, mark an OUT point.
n
If you are extending the edit to an OUT point, remove any IN points that might be on the
track. Otherwise, the extend edit goes in the wrong direction.
Audio track is selected for extending backward.
Mark IN
334
Maintaining Sync While Trimming
3. Click the Extend button.
The Extend button appears in the Trim tab of the Command palette. You can map the
Extend button to a custom location. For information on the Command palette and button
mapping, see “Understanding Button Mapping” in the Help.
The adjustment appears in the Timeline.
Video track is extended backward.
Maintaining Sync While Trimming
Because single-roller (A-side or B-side) trims shorten or lengthen the duration of the track
being trimmed, any relationships that exist with other tracks downstream of the trim are
thrown out of sync. Trim mode has two features to ensure that you do not break sync
unintentionally between two or more video and audio tracks when performing single-roller
trims:
n
•
You can add black to the track while trimming.
•
You can sync lock tracks that maintain a synchronized relationship.
Because dual-roller trims do not cause sync breaks, you can add black only while
performing single-roller trims.
Adding Black When Trimming
You can add black filler on either the A-side or the B-side of a transition while maintaining
the overall duration of the track and the sync relationships. Your Avid editing application
adds a black segment to fill the duration of trimmed frames.
To add black filler while trimming:
1. Click the Trim Mode button to enter Trim mode.
2. Select the transition.
3. Deselect Sync Lock for the tracks to which you want to add black filler.
4. Press and hold the Alt key while dragging the A-side or B-side trim roller.
335
Chapter 12 Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
A black segment is added without changing the duration of sequence.
Trimming without adding black
Adding black while trimming
No black is added and sync
breaks appear in the Timeline.
Black fills the trim duration and
sync is maintained.
After you have added black filler to a video track, you can replace the filler with footage by
performing a replace edit. For more information, see “Performing a Replace Edit” in the
Help.
Trimming with Sync-Locked Tracks
You can sync lock tracks to maintain a synchronized relationship when you perform a
single-roller trim.
Sync Lock icon
Before
trimming
Single-roller A-side trim
A1
A2
A3
Maintains the relationship
After
trimming
n
336
A1
A2
A3
Sync-locked tracks aid only single-roller trim functions in Trim mode because dual-roller
trims do not cause sync breaks.
Slipping or Sliding Segments
To trim with sync-locked tracks:
1. Sync lock the tracks as follows:
t
Click the Sync Lock button in the Track Selector panel for the track you want to
keep in sync. The Sync Lock icon appears.
t
Click the Sync Lock All button to switch sync lock on and off for all tracks.
Sync Lock icon
Sync Lock All button
2. Perform single-roller trims as necessary, with the following results:
-
When you trim the A-side of a transition forward, all other segments locked in sync
move forward with the trim. If the transitions are staggered, this action might split
one or more of the segments at the sync point established by the position indicator,
leaving filler.
If you trim the B-side of the transition in the same direction, the additional
sync-locked segments slide back in the sequence to maintain sync until they
encounter another segment in the same track. At this point, you can trim no further
and the system emits a warning sound.
-
When you trim back the A-side of a transition, additional segments locked in sync
move back as well. If the segments are staggered and one of the additional synclocked segments encounters another segment on the same track, you can trim no
further and the system emits a warning sound.
If you trim the B-side of the transition in the same direction, all other segments
locked in sync move forward to stay in sync. If the transitions are staggered, this
action might split one or more of the sync-locked segments at the sync point
established by the position indicator. Filler is added where the split occurs.
n
Slip and slide trims are not protected for sync. Select all synced tracks for simultaneous
slipping or sliding to avoid sync breaks.
Slipping or Sliding Segments
Slip and slide procedures are two unique Trim mode techniques that allow you to make
frame-accurate adjustments to a selected segment. They do not affect the overall duration of
the sequence or the sync relationships between multiple tracks.
337
Chapter 12 Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
Slip or Slide trimming allows you to do the following:
•
Slip or slide the video and audio segments together.
•
Slip or slide a single segment of video or audio independently from the rest of the
segment.
The type of trim you perform (slip or slide) determines which frames are updated, as
follows:
•
In slip trimming, the two inner monitors for the head and tail frames of the clip change
because only the contents of the clip are adjusted. The frames that precede and follow
the clip are not affected.
Surrounding material
remains fixed.
Before slip
Slip 1 frame to the right.
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
Frames
After slip
•
In slide trimming, the two outer monitors for the outgoing (A-side) and incoming
(B-side) frames change because the clip remains fixed while the footage before and after
it is trimmed.
Surrounding material
is selected.
Before slide
1
2
3
Slide 1 frame to the right.
1
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
Frames
After slide
338
1
2
3
4
5
Slipping or Sliding Segments
Selecting Segments for Slip or Slide Trimming
To select segments for either slip or slide trimming, do one of the following:
t
In Segment mode, select a segment for slip trimming. Then enter Trim mode by clicking
the Trim Mode button.
t
In Trim mode, Alt+double-click a segment to select it for slide trimming.
You can also select two or more segments on different tracks for simultaneous slip or
slide trimming. To do so, Shift+click the segments. Then press the Shift key as you enter
Trim mode.
t
In Trim mode, press the Shift key and select both the head and tail of a clip for slipping.
Alternatively, select the outgoing tail frame of the preceding clip and the incoming head
frame of the following clip in the sequence to prepare the clip for sliding.
You can also use this method to select two or more contiguous segments on the same
track and additional segments on other tracks for slipping or sliding as a group.
n
You cannot perform both slipping and sliding functions simultaneously.
Slipping or Sliding Segments in a Four-Frame Display
If you expand the Source/Record monitors to a two-monitor display, you can use four-frame
display when trimming. For more information on expanding the Source/Record monitor, see
“Expanding the Source/Record Monitor” in the Help.
To slip and slide segments in a four-frame display:
1. Click the Trim Mode button to enter Trim mode.
2. Place the position indicator on the segment you want to slip or slide.
339
Chapter 12 Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
3. Right-click in the Timeline, and then select Select Slip Trim or Select Slide Trim.
The four-frame display appears.
Outgoing and Incoming video (or A- and B-side)
Tail and head frames of the selected clip
Performing the Slip or Slide Trim
To slip or slide a shot:
1. After selecting the segments, as described in “Selecting Segments for Slip or Slide
Trimming” on page 339, do one of the following:
340
t
Click any roller in the Timeline, drag the selected material to the left or right, and
release the mouse button.
t
Use the numeric keypad to enter specific frame-count or timecode values, and press
Enter.
t
Use the trim keys or buttons to shift the selection by 1-frame or 10-frame (8-frame
for 24p) increments.
t
Use the J-K-L keys.
Slipping or Sliding Segments
2. Monitor the progress of the trim by using the monitors, the Trim counters, and the
Timeline.
When you reach the end of available material while slipping a shot, the trim stops.
Similarly, when you reach the next transition while sliding a shot along a track, the trim
stops. A red bracket at the transition indicates the limit. After completing the initial
slide, you can perform another slide in the same direction.
3. When you finish, exit Slip mode or Slide mode by doing one of the following:
t
Click another transition for trimming.
t
Click the Trim Mode button on the Tool palette.
t
Press the Escape key.
341
Chapter 12 Working in Trim Mode: Advanced
342
Chapter 13
Working with Audio: Advanced
You edit audio by using many of the same techniques and tools you use to edit video,
including Source/Record mode, Segment mode, and Trim mode functions. Your Avid
system also provides several unique features that facilitate audio editing, such as audio
scrub, waveform displays, and tools for adjusting and mixing audio levels and pan between
speakers. In addition, you can adjust the high, low, and midrange frequency ranges of
segments by using the Audio Equalization (EQ) tool.
You can also transfer files to Pro Tools through Avid Interplay, work on them there, and then
import them back into the Avid editing application. For more information, see “Using Pro
Tools and Interplay” in Avid Interplay Best Practices.
The following topics provide advanced information on working with audio:
•
Audio Gain Staging and an Audio Editing Workflow
•
Using External Fader Controllers
•
Configuring USB-to-MIDI Software for External Controllers
•
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
•
Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X
•
Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V
•
Using the Audio EQ Tool
•
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in
•
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool
•
Displaying Audio Formats in Bins
•
Using Automatic Voice-Over
For basic information about audio, see “Working with Audio: Basics” in the Help or the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Audio Gain Staging and an Audio Editing Workflow
You can adjust the volume or gain of an audio clip at several points during an editing
session. For example, you can adjust volume using the Audio Mixer tool in Clip Gain mode
and Automation Gain and Pan mode. Also, the EQ tool and many of the AudioSuite plug-in
effects allow you to modify the volume of the clip. When you can adjust the volume in a
signal chain at several points, the process is referred to as audio gain staging. This section
describes the audio gain staging model used by Avid editing applications. It also describes a
basic workflow for taking advantage of the gain staging.
You can set audio volume levels with the Audio Mixer tool. When the Audio Mixer tool is in
Clip Gain mode, values set by the volume level sliders are referred to as system clip gain
values. When the Audio Mixer tool is in Automation Gain and Pan mode, values set by the
Audio Mixer tool are additive to the system clip gain values. This allows you to adjust the
values separately. You typically adjust clip gain values first, as shown in the following
workflow.
Clip Gain
1. Adjust overall volume.
Audio Effect
Processing
2. Apply effects.
Automation Gain
3. Fine-tune volume.
This workflow allows you to apply effects to an audio clip in a way that is similar to the
signal flow in a mixing console.
In this workflow, clip gain is like a trim level, where you can lower (attenuate) or increase
(amplify) the levels of a clip before applying any other effects. For example, when importing
a sound file from an audio CD, you notice when the level of the clip is very high and close to
clipping (distortion). If you add an EQ effect to raise the level of the bass, the audio starts to
distort. To solve this problem, you can use clip gain to lower the signal level. Then you can
adjust the bass in the EQ tool without distorting the audio.
For example, you have copied an audio file from a CD-ROM and you want to equalize the
audio, but the overall volume is too loud. To lower volume, do the following:
1. Use the Audio Mixer tool in Clip Gain mode to lower the overall volume.
2. Apply an EQ effect and any other audio effects.
3. Use the Audio Mixer tool in Automation Gain and Pan mode to fine-tune the volume of
different sections of the audio in the sequence.
344
Audio Gain Staging and an Audio Editing Workflow
This workflow also applies to using AudioSuite plug-ins because some AudioSuite plug-ins
affect the level of the audio. Often, if you use clip gain to raise or lower the level before you
apply an audio effect, you can achieve higher quality results.
In this workflow, the Audio Mixer tool in Automation Gain and Pan mode acts like the level
faders on a console for final mixing of the audio material.
Rendering and Unrendering Order for Audio Effects
The following illustration shows the order that the system uses to process audio effects. You
can also think of this as the audio gain staging.
Render order
Automation Gain and Pan
Audio Mixer tool in Automation Gain and Pan mode (real-time)
Audio Fade/Dissolve
Quick Dissolve button (real-time, can be rendered)
EQ
EQ tool (real-time, can be rendered)
AudioSuite plug-ins
AudioSuite tool (non-real-time, must be rendered)
Clip Gain and Pan
Audio Mixer tool in Clip Gain mode (real-time)
The preceding illustration demonstrates how the render order fits into the audio workflow.
Changing an audio effect unrenders any audio effect above it in the render order but does not
affect audio effects below it in the render order. For example, if you have a clip that contains
clip gain, an AudioSuite plug-in effect, and automation gain, and you change the automation
gain, the system does not unrender the AudioSuite plug-in effect. This fits into the workflow
because automation gain is used for finishing the audio levels. You need to hear how changes
in the automation gain affect the rendered effects. You could add, render, and modify EQ and
audio dissolves on the same clip and you still would not unrender the AudioSuite plug-in
effect.
However, if you change the clip gain on the same clip, the system unrenders the AudioSuite
plug-in. This also fits into the workflow because, when you reset the level of the clip, you
need to reprocess any effects applied to the clip.
n
If you have an AudioSuite plug-in and an Audio EQ effect applied to the same effect, only the
Audio EQ effect icon is displayed. The AudioSuite plug-in still applies even though the icon
is not visible.
345
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Viewing Clip Gain and Automation Gain Values
You can view the clip gain and the automation gain values in the Timeline at the same time.
To turn on the display of clip gain values and automation gain values:
1. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button
2. Select Audio Data.
3. Select Auto Gain, Clip Gain, or both.
n
You can also view automation pan values by selecting Auto Pan from the Timeline Fast
menu. You cannot display Auto Gain and Auto Pan values at the same time in the Timeline.
Bypassing Existing Volume Settings
You can instruct your Avid editing application to ignore the volume settings established with
the Audio Mixer tool when playing back or recording a sequence.
To turn off current volume adjustments, do one of the following:
t
Click the Bypass button in the Audio Mixer tool.
t
Click the Clip Gain button in the Effects Bypass panel in the Effects tab of the Audio
Project Settings window. See “Audio Project Settings: Effects Tab” on page 567.
The volume controls disappear.
To restore the previous settings:
t
Click the Bypass button or the Clip Gain button again.
About Adjusting Volume While Playing a Clip Gain Effect
You can use the Audio Loop Play button to change the volume on an existing Clip Gain
effect while you play the clip.
The Audio Loop Play button appears in several of the audio effect tools and is also a
mappable button in the Play tab of the Command palette. For more information on mapping
buttons, see “Mapping User-Selectable Buttons” on page 67.
346
Audio Gain Staging and an Audio Editing Workflow
You can do the following while your Avid editing application plays the loop:
•
Adjust audio effects.
•
Use the Peak Hold menu in the Audio tool to change between Peak Hold and Infinite
Hold.
•
Use the Reset Peak button in the Audio tool.
For more information on the Audio tool, see “Understanding the Audio Tool” in the Help.
For information on improving response time, see “Improving Response Time When
Adjusting Volume” on page 348.
n
For additional ways to change the volume while playing an Audio Mix effect, see “Recording
Automation Gain or Automation Pan Information” in the Help.
Adjusting Volume While Playing a Clip Gain Effect
To adjust volume while playing a Clip Gain effect:
1. Do one of the following:
t
Select an existing Clip Gain effect.
t
Identify an area of the clip with IN and OUT points.
t
Place the position indicator over an audio clip.
2. Click the Audio Loop Play button in the Audio Mixer tool.
Your Avid editing application repeatedly loops through the selected area as follows:
-
If you have IN and OUT points on your sequence, the command loops over the
selected area.
-
If there are no IN or OUT points, the command loops over the shortest segment on
the selected audio track at the position indicator.
-
If you have only an IN point or only an OUT point, the system uses the location of
the position indicator as the second point. For example, if there is an IN point and
no OUT point, the system loops from the IN point to the end of the (smallest
selected) audio segment under the position indicator.
3. Adjust the volume as necessary.
4. Click the Audio Loop Play button to stop.
Your Avid editing application automatically saves your changes as part of a Clip Gain
effect.
347
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Improving Response Time When Adjusting Volume
If there is no Clip Gain effect on the clip before you start, you do not hear any changes until
you click the Audio Loop Play button to stop and replay the effect.
As you adjust the volume values on an existing Clip Gain effect, you might not hear the
results immediately. It takes a few seconds for your Avid editing application to apply the
changes to the clip. The response time for this feature is considerably longer than it is when
changing EQ parameters while using Audio Loop Play. You might need to click the Audio
Loop Play button to complete the edit and then play the effect to hear the result.
To improve the response time, do any of the following:
t
Monitor as few audio tracks as possible.
t
Deselect the video track, if practical.
t
Use IN and OUT points to select a narrow interval to adjust.
Using External Fader Controllers
Your Avid editing application supports the following external fader controllers or mixers as
control surfaces or for Automation Gain and Automation Pan recording.
•
Digi 002 and Command|8. These units support touch-sensitive flying faders. While
recording automation gain, the faders automatically move. Touch sensitivity means that
you can grab a fader and move it during an automation gain recording to quickly punch
in a small change in volume. Each track has a separate pan control knob that you can use
for automation pan recording.
You can also use these units as control surfaces for other parts of your Avid editing
application. Besides basic functions such as Play, Stop, and Rewind, you can map
buttons and menu items to the different buttons on the control surface.
n
The Digi 002 and Command|8 are the only controllers that can be used as control surfaces
to control other parts of the application.
For more information, see “Using the Digi 002 and Command|8” on page 353.
•
348
JL Cooper MCS-3000X MIDI automation controller. This unit supports touch-sensitive
flying faders. This controller is emulated by the JL Cooper FaderMaster 4/100 and by
the Zaxcom Cameo SV.
Using External Fader Controllers
•
JL Cooper FaderMaster Pro MIDI automation controller. This low-cost unit allows you
to make fine adjustments to audio clips. This unit does not support flying faders, which
means that the faders don’t move automatically as you record audio gain information
and they must be zeroed manually prior to recording. For information on setting the
faders manually, see “Interpreting Position Indicator Lights” in the Help.
For more information, see “Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X” on page 367.
•
Yamaha® 01V/96 and Yamaha 01V digital mixing console. These units are full-feature
digital mixers that also support Audio Gain Automation with flying faders. These faders
are not touch-sensitive. Your Avid editing application uses the MIDI controller portion
of the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V mixer for automation gain control.
For more information, see “Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V” on
page 370.
n
The JL Cooper controllers and Yamaha mixing consoles do not support automation pan
recording.
n
An external fader controller or mixer is optional. It is not required to perform automation
gain or automation pan recording.
The following table compares the external fader controllers and mixers.
External Fader Controller and Mixer Features
Digi 002 and
Command|8
FaderMaster
Pro
MCS-3000X
Yamaha 01V/96 and
Yamaha 01V
Control surface for
transport controls and
other functions
Yes
No
No
No
Provides audio play,
input, and output
Digi 002 only
No
No
No
Record automation gain Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Record automation pan Yes
No
No
No
Flying faders
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Touch-sensitive faders
Yes
No
Yes
No
Feature
349
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
External Fader Controller and Mixer Features (Continued)
Feature
Digi 002 and
Command|8
FaderMaster
Pro
MCS-3000X
Yamaha 01V/96 and
Yamaha 01V
Solo/mute
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
n
Supports audio mixing No
n
No
No
Yes
Solo works only if
you don’t use the
unit for audio
mixing at the same
time
The Digi 002 can
be used as a
standalone audio
mixer but not at
the same time as it
is being used as
an automation
gain or
automation pan
controller or
control surface.
Latch mode (also
known as Snap mode)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Number of steps of
accuracy
1024
128
1024
256
The following list provides additional information on touch sensitivity and automatically
stopping recording:
•
Touch sensitivity: As soon as you touch a moving fader on the Digi 002, Command|8,
or MCS-3000X, the unit passes control of the fader to you. For more information, see
“Using the Latch Mode Feature on the Digi 002 and Command|8” on page 363 or
“MCS-3000X Buttons” on page 368.
On the Yamaha 01V/96 or on the Yamaha 01V, you must press the fader’s On button to
gain control of a moving fader. For a description of how to control the faders on the
Yamaha 01V/96 and the Yamaha 01V, see “Operating the Yamaha 01V/96 and Yamaha
01V” on page 373.
350
Using External Fader Controllers
•
Latch mode: In Latch mode (also known as Snap mode), the fader controller
automatically stops recording as soon as you release the fader. When you release the
fader, it resumes following the volume information in the Timeline. For more
information, see “Using the Latch Mode Feature on the Digi 002 and Command|8” on
page 363 and “Using the Snap Mode Feature on the MCS-3000X” on page 369.
For more information on using these external fader controllers or mixers, see “Recording
Automation Gain or Automation Pan Information” in the Help.
Adjusting the Volume of Individual Keyframes
To edit the volume for individual keyframes using an external fader controller or mixer:
1. Check the color of the position indicator lights.
Position
indicator
lights
If the external fader controller or mixer is on and is correctly attached to the system, at
least one of the position indicator lights on each enabled track is blue.
2. Click an audio gain keyframe.
3. (FaderMaster Pro only) Adjust the sliders on the fader controller until both lights for
each enabled track are lit. This indicates that the slider on the fader controller matches
the current volume in the Timeline. For more information, see “Position Indicator
Lights” in the Help.
n
On the Digi 002, Command|8, MCS-3000X, Yamaha 01V, and Yamaha 01V/96, the faders
automatically adjust to the volume setting.
4. Move the corresponding fader to adjust the volume for the keyframe.
For information on connecting a fader controller or mixer, see “Using an External Fader
Controller or Mixer to Record Automation Gain” on page 352.
Adjusting the Pan of Individual Keyframes
To edit the pan values for individual keyframes using a Digi 002 or Command|8:
1. Click an audio gain keyframe.
2. Activate the track on the Digi 002 or Command|8.
3. Move the corresponding pan knob to adjust the pan for the keyframe.
Your Avid editing application displays the values in the Pan Value display for the
corresponding track in the Audio Mixer tool.
351
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
n
The position indicator lights do not apply to automation pan.
For information on connecting a fader controller or mixer, see “Using an External Fader
Controller or Mixer to Record Automation Gain” on page 352.
Using an External Fader Controller or Mixer to Record Automation
Gain
To record audio gain information using an external fader controller or mixer:
1. Attach the fader controller or mixer to your system.
For more information, see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port Devices” in the Help.
The position indicator lights change to blue when the fader controller or mixer is on and
correctly attached to the system.
Position
indicator
lights
2. Move the blue position indicator to the section of audio that you want to adjust and mark
IN to OUT points.
3. (FaderMaster Pro only) Note the colors of the position indicator lights for the track you
want to adjust. Move the fader until both lights are blue. If you cannot adjust it to the
exact position where both lights are blue, get it as close as you can.
4. Set Preroll and Postroll values, if necessary.
5. Click the Record button to start recording your actions.
6. Depending on the fader controller or mixer, listen to the audio and do the following:
n
352
t
FaderMaster Pro: When you want to start recording volume information, move
the corresponding fader. The system does not begin recording until you move a
fader.
t
Digi 002, MCS-3000X, and Command|8: When you want to start recording
volume information, either touch or move the corresponding fader. The MCS3000X faders are touch sensitive.
t
Yamaha 01V and Yamaha 01V/96: When you want to start recording volume
information, click the fader’s On button and move the fader.
If the Yamaha 01V fader or the Yamaha 01V/96 fader is not moving, you can move it without
first clicking the On button.For more information, see “Operating the Yamaha 01V/96 and
Yamaha 01V” on page 373.
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
n
When you record over previously recorded audio volume keyframes, the MCS-3000X, the
Yamaha 01V, and the Yamaha 01V/96 automatically display the changing values. This
allows you to make quick adjustments to existing automation gain recordings.
7. Click the Record button again to stop recording.
8. Click the Audio Loop Play button to play the clip and test your results.
9. To decrease the number of keyframes, click the Audio Mixer Tool Fast Menu button,
and select Filter Automation Gain on Track — In/Out. (Click the Track Selection button
for a track to enable Filter Automation.)
n
If you delete too many keyframes, use the Undo command to restore them.
10. Repeat step 9 until you have decreased the number of keyframes to an acceptable level.
You should remove as many excess keyframes as possible while still maintaining the
volume changes.
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
You can use the Command|8 as a control surface for your Avid editing application as well as
a controller for automation gain and automation pan recording.
You can use the Digi 002 as an audio input and output device for your Avid editing
application. You can also make use of its control surface capabilities and use it as a
controller for live mix mode and for automation gain and automation pan recording.
The following table compares some of the features of the Digi 002 and Command|8.
Digi 002 and Command|8 Comparison
Feature
Digi 002
Command|8
Connection type
FireWire
USB
Use as an audio device for Avid editing application
(play, record, output)
Yes
No
Control surface for Avid editing application
Yes, when used as an
audio I/O device
Yes
Control surface for automation gain and automation pan Yes, when used as an
recording
audio I/O device
Yes
The following topics provide more information on using the Digi 002 or Command|8:
353
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Using the Digi 002 with Avid DNA Hardware (Windows Only)
Windows systems with Avid DNA hardware (Avid Adrenaline, Avid Mojo, or Avid Mojo
SDI) can use the Digi 002 as an external audio device. This means you can use the Digi 002
to play, record, and output audio.
n
You can also use the Digi 002 as a standalone mixer. However, you cannot use the Digi 002
as a mixer while you are using it as the audio input and output device for your Avid editing
application.
When the Digi 002 is attached to the Avid editing system, all of its audio input and output
connections are live. However, the Avid DNA and Digi 002 remain as two separate audio
sub-systems. They are not combined to increase the number of available audio channels.
Audio I/O works as follows:
•
The system creates a list of input options based on the audio devices that are present. For
example, Digi 002 analog, Digi 002 S/PDIF, and Avid DNA analog.
•
For output, all 8 channels are played to the Digi 002 and the Adrenaline hardware
simultaneously.
You might need to make additional cable connections between the Digi 002 and your Avid
DNA hardware in order to maintain sync between audio and video. When the sync cable is
connected correctly between the Digi 002 and your Avid DNA hardware, your Avid editing
application displays a green 002 in the Timeline top toolbar. The following table describes
this connection for each Avid DNA device:
Avid DNA Device
Audio/Video Sync Connection
Avid Adrenaline
Connect one end of an RCA cable to the RCA S/PDIF connector on the
Avid Adrenaline, and connect the other end to the S/PDIF input on the
Digi 002. This allows the Digi 002 to maintain S/PDIF clock signals and
receive video sync from the Adrenaline and the optional blackburst
generator.
(Option) Connect a black burst generator to the Ref connector on the
Avid Adrenaline.
n
354
Avid recommends using a black burst generator when performing
an audio-only capture.
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
Avid DNA Device
Audio/Video Sync Connection
Avid Mojo
Connect one end of an RCA cable to the analog audio output connectors
labeled Clk on the Avid Mojo (white audio output) and connect the other
end to the S/PDIF input on the Digi 002. This allows the Digi 002 to
receive video sync from the Avid Mojo and the optional blackburst
generator.
(Option) Connect a blackburst generator to the Ref connector on the Avid
Mojo.
n
Avid Mojo SDI
Avid recommends using a blackburst generator when you are
performing an audio-only capture.
Connect one end of a BNC-to-RCA cable to the Word-clock and S/PDIF
Out BNC connector (black cable) on the video output cable from the
Avid Mojo SDI. Connect the other end of the BNC-to-RCA cable to the
S/PDIF input on the Digi 002. This allows the Digi 002 to receive video
sync from the Avid Mojo SDI and the optional blackburst generator.
(Option) Connect a blackburst generator to the Ref connector (black
cable) on the video input cable to the Avid Mojo SDI.
n
Avid recommends using a blackburst generator when you are
performing an audio-only capture.
For more information on connecting the Digi 002 hardware to your Avid DNA hardware and
on audio and video synchronization, see “Using the Avid Adrenaline,” “Using the Avid
Mojo,” or “Using the Avid Mojo SDI” in the Help.
n
You cannot hear the results of audio scrubbing when the Digi 002 is attached to the Avid
Adrenaline system.
355
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Using the Command|8 with Your Avid Editing System
The Command|8 is primarily a control surface. It can be used for controlling aspects of the
user interface as well as for automation gain and automation pan recording. The Command|8
can be used by all the Avid editing applications that use Avid DNA hardware.
The following describes some of the analog audio features of the Command|8 that can be
used by Avid editing applications:
•
The Command|8 has two stereo inputs, one stereo output, and a headphone jack.
•
You can use the stereo inputs as follows:
-
Avid Adrenaline users can connect channel 1 and 2 from the Adrenaline hardware
to the first stereo pair input and connect channels 3 and 4 to the second pair. Then
you can switch between the two inputs.
-
Avid Mojo or Mojo SDI users can connect the audio outputs to one stereo input pair
Configuring the Digi 002 or Command|8
Before you configure your Digi 002 or Command|8 with your Avid editing application,
install and configure the device as described in the documentation that comes with the Digi
002 or Command|8.
n
The Digi 002 or Command|8 must be turned on before you start your Avid editing
application. If you start the application when the controller is turned off, you must exit the
application, turn the controller on, and then start the Avid editing application.
To set the correct ports in the Controller Settings dialog box.
1. Connect the Digi 002 or Command|8 to your Avid editing system and turn on the unit.
2. Start your Avid editing application.
3. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
356
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
4. Double-click Controller Settings.
The Controller Settings dialog box opens. The Controller menu, Port menu, and Edit
Settings button apply to the control surface. You can use either a Digi 002 or a
Command|8. The Gain Controller Port applies to any controller that you connect for
automation gain or automation pan recording.
5. From the Controller menu, select one of the following:
-
Digidesign 002
-
Digidesign Command|8
6. From the Port menu, select “Digi 002 Control Port” or “C|8 Surface.”
7. From the Gain Controller Port menu, select a controller for automation gain or
automation pan recording.
The Gain Controller Port menu displays all COM or MIDI ports that are available on the
system.
8. (Option) Click Edit Settings to view or modify the button assignments.
Mapping Buttons and Menu Commands
You can map the buttons in the Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box to buttons on
the Command palette and to menu commands.
To display the dialog box for mapping buttons and menu commands:
t
Click the Edit Settings button in the Controller Settings dialog box.
The Digidesign 002 Controller Settings or Digidesign Command|8 Controller Settings
dialog box opens.
The following illustration shows both the Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box and
the layout on the Digi 002 itself. Compare the two layouts to see which buttons are
mappable using the Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box.
357
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Console View
Open Command Palette button
Display Controls and Foot Switch
Keyboard Modifier switches
Transport and Navigation controls
Mic/Line/Inst
Input controls
Monitor Section
Console/channel
view section
(contains a pan
knob for each
track)
Status indicators and
Display controls
Keyboard
Modifier
switches
Transport and
Navigational controls
Fader Section
358
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
The following illustration shows the Digidesign Command|8 Controller Settings dialog box
as well as the layout on the Command|8 itself. Compare the two illustrations to see which
buttons are mappable using the Digidesign Command|8 Controller Settings dialog box.
Console
View
Display Controls
and Foot Switch
Transport and
Navigation
controls
Open Command Palette button
Keyboard Modifier switches
Mic/Line/Inst Input controls
Console/channel
view section
Keyboard
Modifier
switches
Monitor Section
Status indicators and
Display controls
Transport and
Navigational controls
The Console/channel
view section contains a
pan knob for each track
Fader Section
a
359
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Button Layouts on the Digi 002 and Command|8
The buttons on the Digi 002 and Command|8 can have different functions if you press the
Shift, Control, Option, or Command keys. You can either use the keyboard or press one of
the Keyboard Modifier switches on the controller surface.
Button on Controller
Keyboard key
Shift
Shift
Control
Control
Option
Alt
Command
NA
To view the different button settings on the Controller Settings dialog box:
t
Press the Shift, Control, Option, or Command key while viewing the Digidesign
Command|8 Controller Settings dialog box.
You can change the Keyboard Modifier switches by selecting a new button from the
appropriate menu in the Keyboard Modifiers area.
Each Controller Settings dialog box has an Open Command Palette button. Use the standard
techniques for mapping buttons and menu selections from the Avid interface to the buttons
on the control surface. For more information, see “Mapping User-Selectable Buttons” on
page 67 and “Mapping Menu Commands” on page 68.
To map a menu command to a button on a Controller Settings dialog box:
1. Click the Settings tab on the Project window.
2. Double-click Controller Settings.
The Controller Settings dialog box opens.
3. Choose either Digidesign 002 or Digidesign Command|8 from the Controller menu.
4. Click Edit Settings.
The Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box or Digidesign Command|8
Controller Settings dialog box opens.
5. Click Open Command Palette.
The Command palette opens.
6. Click Menu to Button Reassignment on the Command palette.
As you move the mouse over a button, the cursor changes to a menu icon.
360
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
7. Click the button on the dialog box that you want to change.
The system highlights the button.
8. Select a menu command. For example, select Tools > Audio Punch-In.
The system maps the menu command to the button.
9. When you finish mapping menu commands, click Active Palette on the Command
palette or Button to Button Reassignment to map buttons.
10. When you finish mapping menu commands and buttons and you want to save your
changes, click OK.
The Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box or the Digidesign Command|8
Controller Settings dialog box closes and the Controller Settings dialog box appears.
11. Click OK.
The system makes the new button assignments.
c
The assignments do not take effect until you click OK in both dialog boxes.
Using Buttons to Change Focus in the Avid Editing
Application Interface
Many buttons perform different functions depending on which window in the Avid interface
is active (has focus). For example, if the Timeline is active, pressing Play plays the sequence
in the Timeline. If a bin is in Frame view and a clip is selected, pressing Play plays the
footage in the clip.
To ensure that you perform the correct operation when you press a button on the control
surface, you can map some buttons to menu commands that give focus to a particular
window or tool. For example, on the Digi 002, the F5 key is mapped to Tools > Timeline by
default. Pressing the F5 button on the Digi 002 puts focus on the Timeline.
n
n
c
To see the function of a mapped button, hold the cursor over the button to view the tooltip.
You cannot assign a function to the F1 key on a Command|8. The F1 key is a local function
on the device.
Do not press the Standalone button on the Digi 002 while you are using it as a control
surface for your Avid editing application. This puts the controller in Standalone mode
and closes the FireWire connection. To use the controller again, you must exit the
application, power cycle the controller, and then relaunch your Avid editing
application.
361
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Using a Foot Pedal as a Foot Switch
The Digi 002 and Command|8 each have a connection on the back for a foot pedal. The
system accepts any “normally open” foot pedal. For example, you can use a standard
normally-open sustain pedal for an electronic keyboard.
You can assign any button or menu item to the foot pedal. By default, the system assigns the
foot pedal to the Record button on the Audio Punch-In tool. You could also assign the foot
pedal to the Shift key function.
Switching Between the Digi 002 and Command|8
The button mappings for the Digi 002 carry over to the Command|8. The button-mapping
dialog boxes for the Digi 002 and Command|8 are set up differently to match the layout of
the controllers, but the same settings are used for both controllers.
There are several buttons on the Command|8 that are not on the Digi 002:
•
Mon 0
•
Default
•
MemLock
These buttons appear in the Digidesign Command|8 Controller Settings dialog box and do
not appear in the Digidesign 002 Controller Settings dialog box.
Using a Digi 002 or Command|8 to Record Automation Pan
To record automation pan information using a Command|8:
1. Attach the Digi 002 or Command|8 to your system. See “Configuring the Digi 002 or
Command|8” on page 356.
The position indicator lights change to blue when the fader controller or mixer is on and
correctly attached to the system.
Position
indicator
lights
2. Click the Timeline Fast Menu button and select Audio Data > Auto Pan.
3. Move the blue position indicator to the section of audio that you want to adjust and mark
IN to OUT points.
4. Set Preroll and Postroll values, if necessary.
5. Click the Record button to start recording your actions.
362
Using the Digi 002 and Command|8
6. Listen to the audio and turn the pan knob for the track.
The system displays the values in the Pan Value display for the corresponding track in
the Audio Mixer tool.
7. Click the Record button again to stop recording.
8. Click the Audio Loop Play button to play the clip and test your results.
9. To decrease the number of keyframes, click the Audio Mixer Tool Fast Menu button,
and select Filter Automation Pan on Track — In/Out. (Click the Track Selection button
for a track to enable Filter Automation.)
n
If you delete too many keyframes, use the Undo command to restore them.
10. Repeat step 9 until you have decreased the number of keyframes to an acceptable level.
You should remove as many excess keyframes as possible while still maintaining the
pan changes.
Using the Latch Mode Feature on the Digi 002 and Command|8
The Digi 002 and Command|8 have a Latch Mode button for each track that allows you to
easily punch-in and punch-out small sections of automation gain information. The Channel
View buttons on the Digi 002 are used as the Latch Mode buttons. These buttons are directly
above the display on the Digi 002. On the Command|8, the Latch Mode buttons are directly
below the display. The first two buttons are labeled EQ and Dynamics.
When a fader is not in Latch Mode, it automatically stops recording as soon as you release
the fader. When you release the fader, it begins moving again as it follows the volume
information in the Timeline.
n
The light inside the Latch mode button is on when a fader is not in Latch mode.
To use Latch Mode:
1. Click the Latch Mode button for the appropriate tracks on the controller. You can click
the button before or during a recording session.
2. Set IN and OUT points, and click the Record button. The system begins playing the
section and the faders move accordingly.
3. When you want to make an adjustment, grab the fader and move it to change the
volume. The system immediately begins recording.
4. When you are finished adjusting the section, release the fader. The system stops
recording (but keeps playing) and the fader snaps back to the level that is in the
Timeline.
363
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
When the track is in Latch mode, the system continues to record audio volume information
after you release the fader. Press the Latch Mode button to stop recording and snap the
button back to its current Timeline position.
Configuring USB-to-MIDI Software for External
Controllers
Once you have connected a fader controller to your Avid editing system, you can install
USB-to-MIDI software and configure the software to recognize your fader controller.
For information on connecting a fader controller, see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port
Devices” in the Help.
The term fader controller applies to the following third-party controllers:
•
JL Cooper FaderMaster Pro MIDI automation controller
•
JL Cooper MCS-3000X MIDI automation controller
•
Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V digital mixing console
Avid supports the MIDIMAN™ MIDISPORT™ 2x2 USB-to-MIDI converter.
c
To reduce traffic on the USB, connect the USB-to-MIDI converter only if you need to
use the JL Cooper FaderMaster Pro, JL Cooper MCS-3000X, Yamaha 01V/96, or
Yamaha 01V fader box.
Installing USB-to-MIDI Software
To install the MIDISPORT 2x2 driver software:
1. Make sure the MIDISPORT 2x2 USB-to-MIDI converter is not connected to the system.
When you are ready to load the drivers, you will use a USB connector to connect the
MIDISPORT 2x2 USB-to-MIDI converter to your Avid system.
2. Download the latest MIDISPORT 2x2 drivers from the following Web site:
www.m-audio.com.
The system downloads a compressed, executable file.
3. Double-click the downloaded file to uncompress the driver files to a storage device or to
a folder on your Avid system.
4. Double-click the Install.txt file included with the downloaded files. This file contains
the instructions for loading the drivers.
364
Configuring USB-to-MIDI Software for External Controllers
5. To initiate the driver installation, use a USB connector to connect the MIDISPORT 2x2
USB-to-MIDI converter to the system. You do not need to connect the external fader to
the MIDISPORT 2x2 device.
The system automatically detects that a new device has been connected and opens the
Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box.
6. Follow the instructions in the Install.txt file.
n
If you uncompressed the files to a folder on your system, two drivers might appear in the list.
Choose either one.
www.m-audio.com.
Testing the Fader Connections
To test the external fader controller connections:
1. Connect all MIDI hardware devices.
For more information, see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port Devices” in the Help.
n
MIDI port A is the default port used by the Avid system. To change the port configuration,
see “Switching Between MIDI Connections on the USB-to-MIDI Converter” on page 366.
2. Move the sliders on the fader controller, and confirm that the MIDI IN LED indicator on
the USB-to-MIDI converter turns on and off appropriately.
The USB LED indicator pulses — this is expected behavior.
3. Start your Avid editing application, and open the Project window.
4. Click the Settings tab and double-click Controller Settings.
The Controller Settings dialog box opens.
5. Choose the appropriate port for the device from the Gain Controller menu.
6. Click OK.
7. Select Tools > Audio Mixer.
8. Do one of the following:
t
Click and hold the Audio Mixer Mode button and select Automation Mode from the
menu.
t
Click the Audio Mixer Mode button and cycle through the Audio Mix mode settings
to the Automation Mode setting.
365
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
9. Click the Audio Mixer Tool Fast Menu button, and select Calibrate Hardware Sliders.
If the external fader controller is connected and the system is using the correct MIDI
port, then the Audio Mixer tool displays the following:
-
At least one of the position indicator lights is on (blue).
Position
indicator
lights
-
The Recording Status Light changes to gold.
10. If the lights do not change to blue, see “Troubleshooting the MIDI Connections” on
page 367.
11. To disable the hardware calibration, click the Audio Mixer Tool Fast Menu button, and
select Calibrate Hardware Sliders.
The Recording Status Light changes to black.
12. Move the sliders on the external fader controller.
The corresponding sliders move in the Audio Mixer tool.
Now you are ready to use the fader controller with your Avid editing application. For more
information on using the Audio Mixer tool, see “Understanding Automation Gain and Pan”
in the Help.
Switching Between MIDI Connections on the USB-to-MIDI Converter
If you need to switch to a different MIDI port connection, change the hardware connections
and then make the appropriate change in the Controller Settings dialog box.
To change the MIDI port connection in your Avid editing application:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Double-click Controller Settings.
The Controller Settings dialog box opens.
3. Select the correct MIDI port from the Gain Controller menu.
4. Click OK.
5. Select Tools > Audio Mixer.
366
Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X
6. Do one of the following:
t
Click and hold the Audio Mixer Mode button and select Automation Mode from the
menu.
t
Click the Audio Mixer Mode button and cycle through the Audio Mix mode settings
to the Automation Mode setting.
If the fader or mixer is on and correctly configured, the indicator lights on the Audio
Mixer tool should change to blue. If the lights do not change to blue, see
“Troubleshooting the MIDI Connections” on page 367.
Troubleshooting the MIDI Connections
Do the following if the Audio Mixer tool does not respond to the external fader
controller:
1. Make sure the MIDI hardware devices are connected.
For more information, see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port Devices” in the Help.
2. Make sure the MIDISport driver software is installed. See “Installing USB-to-MIDI
Software” on page 364.
3. Check that the MIDI cable connections are correct. Check that the cables are connected
from Out to In and from In to Out.
4. Check the Controller Settings dialog box in the Settings list of the Project window.
Verify that the correct Gain Controller port is selected.
Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X
The setup procedure is similar for both units. To connect and initialize the fader controllers,
see “Connecting Serial and MIDI Port Devices” in the Help.
c
For the MCS-3000X to recognize the Avid application software, you must set the rear
DIP switch #4 down (ON).
To set the correct port in the Controller Settings:
1. Start your Avid editing application.
2. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
3. Double-click Controller Settings.
4. In the Gain Controller Port menu, select the port that corresponds to the FaderMaster
Pro or MCS-3000X.
5. Click OK.
367
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
To test the external fader controller:
1. Select Tools > Audio Mixer.
The Audio Mixer tool opens.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Click and hold the Audio Mixer Mode button and select Automation Mode from the
menu.
t
Click the Audio Mixer Mode button and cycle through the Audio Mix mode settings
to the Automation Mode setting.
3. Click the Audio Mixer Tool Fast Menu button, and select Calibrate Hardware Sliders.
The box changes to blue.
4. Check the color of the position indicator lights. If the external fader controller is
connected, at least one of the lights should be on (blue). If the external fader controller is
not connected properly, the lights will probably appear gray.
Position
indicator
lights
5. Move the faders on the external fader controller.
The corresponding fader should move in the Audio Mixer tool.
n
An external fader controller is optional. It is not required to perform Automation gain
recording.
MCS-3000X Buttons
There are four rows of unlabeled buttons at the top of the MCS-3000X fader controller.
The following illustration labels each row of buttons:
Select
Snap Mode
Solo
Mute
368
Using the FaderMaster Pro and MCS-3000X
•
Select buttons: The green light next to the Select button for a track is on when you are
recording Audio Gain Automation on the track. The green light is off when you are
listening to the volume level in the Timeline.
If the track is in Snap mode, as soon as you touch the fader, the Select button light turns
on to indicate that you are recording. When you release the fader, the Select button light
turns off and the fader begins moving with the Timeline volume.
When the track is not in Snap mode, as soon as you touch the fader, the Select button
light turns on to indicate that you are recording. However, when you release the fader,
the Select button light stays on, indicating that you are still recording. To stop recording,
press the Select button.
•
Snap Mode buttons: For information on these buttons, see “Using the Snap Mode
Feature on the MCS-3000X” on page 369.
•
Solo buttons: These buttons solo the selected tracks.
•
Mute buttons: These buttons mute the selected tracks.
Using the Snap Mode Feature on the MCS-3000X
The MCS-3000X has a Snap Mode button (Snap mode is also known as Latch mode) for
each track that allows you to easily punch-in and punch-out small sections of automation
gain information. The second row from the top contains the Snap Mode buttons. For more
information on button locations, see “MCS-3000X Buttons” on page 368.
In Snap mode, the fader automatically stops recording as soon as you release the fader. In
addition, the fader continues to display the volume information in the Timeline.
To use Snap mode:
1. Click the Snap Mode button for the appropriate tracks on the external fader controller.
You can click the button before or during a recording session.
2. Set IN and OUT points, and click the Record button. The system begins playing the
section and the faders move accordingly.
3. When you want to make an adjustment, grab the fader and move it to change the
volume. The system immediately begins recording.
4. When you are finished adjusting the section, release the fader. The system stops
recording (but keeps playing) and the fader snaps back to the level that is in the
Timeline.
When the track is not in Snap mode, the system continues to record audio volume
information after you release the fader. Press the Select button (top row) to stop recording
and snap the button back to its current Timeline position.
369
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
The green light next to the Select button for a track is on when you are recording automation
gain on the track. The green light is off when you are listening to the volume level in the
Timeline.
Ganging Faders on the FaderMaster Pro
You can use the features available on the FaderMaster Pro to gang faders. When the faders
for two tracks are ganged, the fader sends identical volume messages for both tracks when
you move one fader. This can be useful when you have stereo tracks.
The ganged faders do not move together physically. For information on ganging the faders,
see the FaderMaster Pro user’s manual.
If you have two stereo tracks and want to gang faders 1 and 2 to respond to movement
on fader 1:
1. On the FaderMaster Pro, press the PROG button to light the Fader LED.
2. Press the Group button, and move fader 2 until 1 is displayed.
3. Press the PROG button to turn off the Fader LED.
Now, when you move fader 1, your Avid editing application will receive identical volume
information for fader 2.
To turn off the group feature, repeat steps 1 to 3, but assign fader 2 to 0.
n
You cannot gang faders on the Digi 002, the MCS-3000X fader controller, the Yamaha
01V/96 mixer, or the Yamaha 01V mixer.
Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V
Your Avid editing application supports the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V digital mixing
console. The Yamaha 01V/96 and the Yamaha 01V are fully functional digital audio mixers
that also support automation gain recording.
Setting Up the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V
This section describes how to set up the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V digital mixer.
For instructions on connecting the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V to your Avid system, see
“Connecting the Yamaha 01V/96 Mixer” in the Help.
370
Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V
Initializing the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V
This section describes how to initialize the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V digital mixer.
These procedures should have to be done only once and repeated only if the mixer’s
operational parameters have been manually changed to settings that are incompatible with
your Avid editing application.
You should perform these procedures when you first set up the unit. You might also find it
necessary to perform the steps if the unit stops working correctly with your Avid editing
application. Because you can carry out a wide variety of mixing tasks with the Yamaha
01V/96 and the Yamaha 01V, it is possible that some changes you make to the unit might
cause it to stop working with your Avid editing application. If this happens, use the
following procedures to reinitialize the mixer to the factory defaults.
To return to factory defaults for the Yamaha 01V:
1. Turn on the mixer while pressing and holding the red Memory button.
Memory button
6
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
0
6
0
6
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
CURSOR
+1/inc button
ENTER
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
10
11
12
13/14 15/16 STEREO
MASTER
The LCD panel displays a message asking if you want to reset the system.
2. Answer yes by pressing the +1/inc button.
To return to factory defaults for the Yamaha 01V/96:
1. Turn on the mixer while pressing and holding the STORE button.
2. The LCD panel displays a message asking if you want to Initialize or Password reset.
3. Select Initialize, and press Enter.
Configuring the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V to Recognize
Control Messages
After you initialize the mixer, you must configure it to receive and transmit control
messages. The Yamaha 01V/96 and Yamaha 01V can both receive MIDI messages. The
Yamaha 01V can also be controlled via a serial port and must be configured to receive serial
control messages if you are using a serial connection. The Yamaha 01V/96 can receive USB
control messages.
371
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
n
Configure the mixer whether you are using a USB connection or a MIDI connection.
To configure the Yamaha 01V/96 or Yamaha 01V to recognize MIDI control messages:
1. Press the MIDI button.
The system displays the first pane of the MIDI Options window.
2. Set the following controls in the MIDI Options window:
-
Set Control Change TX to ON.
-
Set Control Change RX to ON.
3. Set Port to MIDI.
To reconfigure the Yamaha 01V to recognize serial control messages:
1. Press the MIDI button.
The system displays the first pane of the MIDI Options window.
2. Set the following controls in the MIDI Options window:
-
Set Control Change TX to ON.
-
Set Control Change RX to ON.
3. Set Port to PC-2.
To configure the Yamaha 01V/96 to recognize USB control messages:
1. Press the DIO/Setup button repeatedly until the MIDI/TO HOST SETUP pane appears.
The system displays the first pane of the MIDI Options window.
2. Set the following controls in the USB Options window:
a.
Set RX Port to USB 1.
b.
Set TX Port to USB 1.
3. Do the following to load the driver:
372
a.
Insert the Studio Manager CD-ROM before plugging in the board.
b.
Plug the board into a USB port and allow the Plug & Play to install the MIDI driver.
c.
Start your Avid editing application, and in the Controller Settings dialog box, select
the YAMAHA USB IN 0-1 port.
Using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V
Starting the Avid System with the Yamaha 01V/96 or the
Yamaha 01V Attached
To set the correct port in the Controller Settings:
1. Start your Avid editing application.
2. From the Project window, click the Settings tab.
3. Double-click Controller Settings.
4. From the Gain Controller Port menu, select one of the following:
-
In-A-USB MidiSport 2x2 for MIDI
-
YAMAHA USB IN 0-1 for USB (01V/96 only)
-
COM portnumber for Serial (01V only)
When you start your Avid system with the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V attached, you
can use the faders for mixing audio channels or for performing automation gain recording.
Use the following buttons to switch between audio mixing and gain recording:
Buttons
Yamaha 01V
Yamaha 01V/96
Channel buttons for audio
mixing
Home
1 - 16 channel
17 - 32 channel
Gain editing buttons for
Option I/O
automation gain recording
n
Master
The Yamaha 01V supports a digital I/O option that uses channels 17 through 24. If you
intend to use the digital I/O option, you should move the digital I/O option to channels 1
through 8 by using the Swap mode. You can access Swap mode from pane 5 of the OPTION
I/O screen. For more information, see the Yamaha documentation.
Operating the Yamaha 01V/96 and Yamaha 01V
The following procedures explain how to access the Yamaha 01V/96 or 01V for audio
mixing and how to perform automation gain recording.
To access the faders for audio mixing (channels 1–16):
t
Press the Home (Yamaha 01V) or 1-16 or 17-32 (Yamaha 01V/96) button.
When the button is lit, you can use the faders for audio mixing.
For information on audio mixing, see the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V
documentation.
373
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
To record automation gain information:
1. Select Tools > Audio Mixer.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Click and hold the Audio Mixer Mode button and select Automation Mode from the
menu.
t
Click the Audio Mixer Mode button and cycle through the Audio Mix mode settings
to the Automation Mode setting.
1. Press the Option I/O (Yamaha 01V) or Master (Yamaha 01V/96) button.
The faders move into the correct position for recording automation gain.
2. When recording automation gain, use the On button on each channel to switch between
Timeline control of audio gain to user control of audio gain.
You can punch-in and punch-out of gain recording as many times as you want.
n
The Automation Gain window must be in 8-channel mode and you need to have 8 tracks of
audio to use all 8 faders of the Yamaha 01V/96.
The Yamaha 01V/96 and the Yamaha 01V faders are not touch sensitive in the same way as
the JL Cooper MCS-3000X MIDI fader controller. As soon as you touch a moving fader on
the MCS-3000X, the unit passes control of the fader to you. On the Yamaha 01V/96 or the
Yamaha 01V, you must press the fader’s On button to gain control of a moving fader.
n
c
If a fader is not moving, you can move the fader to take control without pressing the On
button.
If you attempt to catch a moving fader, the mixer will try to control the fader. Press the
On button to take control of the fader.
Soloing Avid System Channels
If you are not using the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V to mix the audio outputs from
the Avid system, you can use the Solo button on the Yamaha 01V/96 or the Yamaha 01V to
solo audio channels during automation gain recording.
To enable Solo mode:
1. Press the MIDI button.
The mixer displays pane 1 of the MIDI Options window in the LCD display.
2. Set the following controls in the MIDI Options window:
374
-
Set Param Change TX to ON.
-
Set Param Change RX to ON.
Using the Audio EQ Tool
n
If Solo mode is on when you are mixing audio, it interferes with the normal operation of the
mixing board functions. If the audio outputs from your Avid system are connected to the
Yamaha 01V, leave the Param Change TX and Param Change RX controls set to OFF.
Using the Audio EQ Tool
The Audio Equalization (EQ) tool supports real-time, segment-based frequency equalization
on individual clips. This feature allows you to adjust the high, low, and midrange frequency
ranges of an audio clip. You can also save a variety of audio EQ effects and apply them in
different circumstances, as described in this section.
To access the Audio EQ tool, do one of the following:
t
Select Tools > Audio EQ.
t
If one of the Audio tools is already open, click the Effect Mode Selector menu, and
select EQ.
The Audio EQ tool opens.
Render Effect button
Audio Loop Play button
Fast Menu button
Effect icon
Effect Mode Selector menu
Display/Hide EQ Graph button
Track Selection Menu button
Enable/Disable EQ Effect button
EQ Parameter display
Bypass RT EQ button
Low shelf
Parametric midrange
3-band controls
High shelf
EQ Range slider
EQ Parameter graph
375
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Audio EQ Tool Features
This section describes the basic buttons and menus on the Audio EQ tool as well as the
EQ-specific items on the tool.
Basic EQ Tool Features
The following table describes the buttons that appear along the top portion of the Audio EQ
tool:
Button
Description
Effect Mode Selector
Allows you to select among the Audio EQ, Audio Mixer, and
AudioSuite Plug-In tools.
Audio Loop Play
Allows you to make adjustments to an EQ effect while you play the
effect. This button is also a mappable button on the Command palette.
For more information about using this button, see “About Adjusting
Volume While Playing a Clip Gain Effect” on page 346.
Render Effect
Allows you to render an effect without leaving the Audio EQ tool.
Effect icon
Allows you to create an EQ template. Drag the icon to an open bin to
create the template.
Fast Menu
Allows you to perform the following tasks:
Track Selection Menu
n
•
Set EQ for enabled tracks.
•
Remove EQ for one or more tracks.
•
Apply an effect template. See “Using Audio EQ Templates” on
page 384.
Allows you to choose which tracks are enabled for the EQ effect.
When you select an item from this menu, the system selects or
deselects the corresponding track in the Timeline.
If you enable more than one track in the Timeline, the tracks are designated by plus signs (+).
They indicate that the effect will be applied to more than one track.
Display/Hide EG Graph
Allows you to display or hide the Parametric Curve display.
Bypass RT EQ
Allows you to instruct the system to ignore all the EQ effects. This
button is also available in the Automation Gain tool and the Output tab
in the Audio Project Settings dialog box. If you select this feature in
one place, it is selected in the others as well.
Enable/Disable EQ Effect Allows you to enable or disable the current EQ effect. When the button
is yellow, the effect is enabled. (The button text IN stands for inline.)
376
Using the Audio EQ Tool
EQ-Specific Features
The Audio EQ tool provides three bands of control:
•
The first band, the low shelf, has four turnover points (50 Hz, 80 Hz, 120 Hz, and
240 Hz). A turnover point is the point at which the curve starts to return to 0.
A shelf affects all frequency values within the range of the shelf. The low shelf affects
all frequencies from 20 Hz to the low shelf turnover point. For more information, see
“Low Shelf Example” on page 382.
•
The second band is the parametric midrange. This band has two bandwidth values, 1/4
octave and 2 octaves. These values control the width of the curve. For more information,
see “Small Octave Range Example” on page 383.
•
The third band, the high shelf, has four turnover points (6 kHz, 8 kHz, 12 kHz, and
15 kHz). The high shelf affects all frequencies from the high shelf turnover point to
20 kHz.
The horizontal center line of the graph is 0 (zero). As you move the curve below the zero
line, the corresponding frequencies are deemphasized. Above the zero line, the
corresponding frequencies are emphasized. The parametric midrange allows a smooth
transition from deemphasized frequencies to emphasized frequencies.
The IN button allows you to turn off an individual EQ effect (the currently selected effect).
The button is yellow when the EQ effect is on (inline) and gray when the EQ effect is off.
The Ignore EQ option turns off all EQ effects for the sequence. Rendered EQ effects still
play correctly.
When you apply Audio EQ effects, consider the following:
•
Apply Audio EQ to entire segments only. You cannot isolate portions of a segment for
an Audio EQ effect by using IN to OUT points. You must use add edits (match frames)
to mark off a smaller segment.
•
Use IN to OUT points to select a range of complete segments for applying an Audio EQ
effect. Segments that fall within the marks, either in part or whole, have the effect
applied to them.
377
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
The following illustration shows the Audio EQ tool with the frequency response curve
displayed and identifies the related areas of the tool.
EQ Parameter display
Bandwidth around the center point of
the parametric curve – 1/4 octave
(narrow) or 2 octaves (wide)
Current values of the EQ
parameters
Turnover point where low
shelf curve starts moving
back toward 0
Turnover point where high shelf
curve starts moving back toward 0
Center point of the
parametric midrange
curve
High shelf
0 line
Low shelf
Parametric midrange
The Audio EQ tool allows you to emphasize or de-emphasize audio frequencies. The height
of the curve in the bottom pane shows the amount of emphasis or de-emphasis (also called
boost or cut) that is being applied. The range is from +15 dB to –20 dB.
Applying Audio EQ Effects
To adjust audio EQ for a track:
1. Load the sequence containing the audio track.
2. (Option) Isolate a portion of an audio segment by placing add edits.
3. (Option) Mark a range of audio segments by adding IN to OUT points in the track.
4. Select Tools > Audio EQ.
378
Using the Audio EQ Tool
5. Click and hold the Track Selection Menu button in the Audio EQ tool, and select a track
to be adjusted.
Track
Selection
Menu button
The Track Selector panel in the Timeline is updated to reflect your selection.
n
If multiple tracks are enabled in the Timeline, then plus signs (+) appear next to the enabled
tracks in the Audio EQ tool.
6. Click the Audio Loop Play button to play the currently selected audio clip within the
current IN to OUT range. To stop playing the loop, click the button again or click
anywhere in the Timeline.
7. Use one of the following methods to change a value in the Audio EQ tool:
t
Click a number along the vertical edge of the Low Shelf, Parametric Midrange, or
High Shelf sliders.
t
Click the Low Shelf, Parametric Midrange, or High Shelf slider, and type a value.
Values are cumulative until you press Enter. For example, if you want to enter the
value 12, simply type it. However, if you enter 1 and then want to change the value
to 2, press Enter before typing the 2.
t
Click a slider, and then drag the slider to a new position.
t
Click the EQ Parameter display, and type a value on the numeric keypad.
t
Set a value of 0 dB by clicking the slider and entering 0, or by clicking 0 along the
vertical edge of the Low Shelf, Parametric Midrange, or High Shelf sliders.
8. Click the Audio EQ Tool Fast Menu button, and select Set EQ to apply the adjustments
to the track. The command works as follows on the selected tracks:
-
IN and OUT points: Apply the EQ effect to selected tracks between the points.
-
An IN point (no OUT point): Apply the EQ effect to full clips from the IN point to
the end of selected tracks.
-
No points: Apply the EQ effect globally (across entire tracks).
The Audio EQ Tool Fast menu also allows you to remove EQ effects from one track or
all enabled tracks and provides access to a number of predefined EQ templates. For a
description of predefined audio templates, see “Using Audio EQ Templates” on
page 384.
379
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
For example, the following illustration shows a segment with one EQ effect applied to
Audio Clip 2 in track A1. If you select Set EQ In/Out, the current EQ effect is also
applied to Audio Clip 1 and Audio Clip 3 on track A1.
Before Set EQ In/Out
After Set EQ In/Out – EQ effect is added to Audio Clip 1 and Audio Clip 3.
If there is no EQ setting on the currently selected clip, selecting Set EQ In/Out deletes
the EQ settings on all clips within the IN to OUT range. For example, because there is
no EQ setting on Audio Clip 3 in the following example, Set EQ In/Out deletes the EQ
effect from Audio Clip 1 and Audio Clip 2.
Before Set EQ In/Out
After Set EQ In/Out – EQ effect is deleted from Audio Clip 1 and Audio Clip 2.
Set EQ In/Out applies only to the audio track currently selected by the Audio EQ tool.
You can change your selected region by eliminating or adding marks in the Timeline, or
by selecting a different track.
9. Play through the audio again, using the Audio Loop Play button.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until you are satisfied with the EQ adjustments.
380
Using the Audio EQ Tool
Saving Audio EQ Effects
Your Avid editing application treats an EQ setting as an effect. You can save EQ settings in a
bin just as you save any other effect template. This makes it easy to save EQ settings and
apply them whenever you need them. The following illustration shows an EQ Effect icon in
a bin and in the Timeline.
EQ effect icon in a bin
EQ effect in the Timeline
To save EQ settings in a bin:
t
Drag the effect icon in the Audio EQ tool to a bin.
To copy the settings to another audio clip:
t
Drag the effect icon in the Audio EQ tool to another audio clip in the Timeline.
For more information on using effect templates, see “Working with Effect Templates” in the
Help.
381
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Removing Audio EQ Effects
To remove an Audio EQ effect:
1. Move the position indicator to the effect in an active track.
2. Do one of the following:
t
Click the Remove Effect button on the Tool palette.
For more information, see “Using the Tool Palette” on page 291.
t
In Trim or Effect mode, press the Delete key.
You can also use the commands from the Audio EQ Tool Fast menu.
Audio EQ Examples
The following examples show two different ways to use the Audio EQ tool to remove excess
bass from an audio track. In these examples, assume that a bass drum in the sound track is
very pronounced and the Audio EQ tool is used to deemphasize it. Also assume that there
are voices on the same track as the music. The human voice covers a wide range of
frequencies, and the challenge is to preserve the bass frequencies of the voices while
deemphasizing the bass drum sound.
Consider that the goal of the adjustments is the final sound. You should use small
adjustments to preserve as much of the original sound track as possible. Do not be overly
concerned about specific parameter values.
Low Shelf Example
This example adjusts the low shelf to deemphasize the bass. By dropping the low shelf to
–20 dB, we are able to deemphasize it. However, there are voices on this track, and simply
dropping the low shelf also removes some bass from the voices.
382
Using the Audio EQ Tool
To compensate for the loss of bass:
1. Use the 2-octave midrange setting to create a wide midrange.
2. Move the midpoint of the parametric curve to 88 Hz.
3. Boost the midrange of the parametric curve to +7.7 dB.
Small Octave Range Example
This example isolates the particular frequency that we want to deemphasize. In this example,
we do not use the low shelf, but instead use the parametric midrange to isolate the frequency.
To isolate the frequency:
1. Use the ¼-octave influence range.
2. Set the midrange EQ parameter to –15 dB.
383
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
3. Use the EQ Range slider to move the midpoint of the parametric curve until it isolates
the bass frequency. In this case, the bass frequency that we want to deemphasize is
approximately 80 Hz.
Use the EQ Range slider to
move the center point of the
parametric curve and locate
a specific frequency.
To locate a specific frequency and either emphasize or deemphasize it:
•
Use the ¼-octave influence range and a large negative decibel value.
•
Keep both the high shelf and low shelf set to zero.
•
Use the EQ Range slider to move the center point of the parametric curve along the
frequency range while you play the audio track.
Once you locate the frequency you want, you can adjust it as needed.
Using Audio EQ Templates
Your Avid editing application provides a set of predefined audio EQ templates. These
templates address a number of common audio problems such as removing tape hiss or
boosting the low frequency on a music track. The templates are accessible from the Fast
menu on the Audio EQ tool. You can also add your own custom EQ templates to the Fast
menu.
384
Using the Audio EQ Tool
The Fast menu on the Audio EQ tool provides access to a number of predefined EQ
templates, as shown in the following illustration.
The EQ templates are designed to fix problems that you often encounter with audio clips.
For example, Tape Hiss Filter rolls off frequencies above 4 kHz. NTSC Hum Buster cuts the
bass on frequencies that often cause hum on NTSC systems.
Applying an EQ Template
To apply an EQ template from the Audio EQ Tool Fast menu:
1. Move the position indicator to the audio clip in the Timeline.
2. Click the Audio EQ Tool Fast Menu button, and select the template.
Your Avid editing application places the EQ effect on the audio clip.
385
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
The following illustration shows the contents of the Audio EQ tool when you select the
Female Voice with Presence template in the Timeline. As explained in the tool, you cannot
change the parameters of a predefined EQ template.
n
To see the parameter values of one of the EQ templates that cannot be edited, view the
Console window after you apply the effect. To open the Console window, select
Tools > Console.
Creating Your Own Templates
If you create an EQ effect, you can use it again as a template in another sequence or on
another track.
To create your own EQ effect template:
1. Drag the effect icon from the Audio EQ tool to a bin.
Your Avid editing application creates an EQ effect in the bin.
2. Rename the template by clicking the text and typing a new name.
Adding an EQ Template to the Audio EQ Tool Fast Menu
Your Avid editing application stores predefined EQ templates in a special bin named
Site_EQs_Bin.avb. You can add your own EQ templates to the Audio EQ Tool Fast menu by
storing your EQ templates in the same bin as the predefined templates.
386
Using the Audio EQ Tool
To add an EQ template to Site_EQs_Bin:
1. Open the bin containing your EQ templates.
2. Select File > Open Bin.
A dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the bin named Site_EQs_Bin.avb in one of the following locations:
drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\ SupportingFiles\Site_Effects
4. Double-click the Site_EQs_Bin.avb file.
The Site_EQs_Bin window opens.
5. Drag one of your EQ templates into the Site_EQs_Bin window.
6. Name the template by clicking the text and typing a name.
7. Close the bin.
n
Your Avid editing application does not save the effect to the bin until you close the bin.
8. Click the Audio EQ Tool Fast Menu button, and look for your new template.
Adjusting EQ While Playing an Audio Effect
You can use the Audio Loop Play button to create or change an EQ effect while a clip is
playing.
Audio Loop Play button
Use the same procedure as described in “About Adjusting Volume While Playing a Clip
Gain Effect” on page 346.
If there is no existing EQ effect on the clip before you start, you do not hear any changes
until you click the Audio Loop Play button to stop and replay the effect.
As you adjust the EQ values on an existing EQ effect, you might not hear the results
immediately. It takes a few seconds for the changes to be applied to the clip.
To improve the response time, do one of the following:
t
Monitor as few audio tracks as possible.
t
Deselect the video track, if practical.
t
Use IN and OUT points to choose a narrow interval to adjust.
387
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Recording Voice-Over Narration
Your Avid editing application provides you with two ways to record voice-over narration:
•
Using the Capture tool.
•
Using the Audio Punch-in tool.
Recording voice-over narration directly into your Avid editing application saves you the
extra steps of recording the narration to tape first, capturing the narration audio to your Avid
system, and then editing the audio clip into the sequence.
Audio punch-in allows you to record audio directly into the Timeline for voice-over
narration.
The following topics provide more information on recording voice-over narration:
•
Connecting Voice-Over Recording Hardware
•
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using the Capture Tool
•
Understanding the Audio Punch-In Tool
•
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in
Connecting Voice-Over Recording Hardware
Before you can record voice-over narration, you need to connect a microphone or other input
device to your system. The following are typical examples:
•
Connect a microphone to a mixer, and connect the mixer to the audio interface I/O
device on your Avid system.
•
Connect a microphone to a microphone preamplifier, and connect the preamplifier to the
audio interface I/O device on your Avid system.
For information on connecting the hardware, see “Using the Avid Adrenaline,” “Using the
Avid Mojo,” or “Using the Avid Mojo SDI” in the Help.
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using the Capture Tool
The Capture tool allows you to record up to two channels of audio directly into the Timeline
for voice-over narration.
You can also use the Audio Punch-in tool to record audio directly into the Timeline. For
more information, see “Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in” on
page 393.
388
Recording Voice-Over Narration
To capture voice-over narration using the Capture tool:
1. Mark the IN and OUT points in the Timeline.
2. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
Voice-over button
Audio Input menu
3. Click the Voice-over button in the Capture tool.
4. Click the Audio Input menu, and select the appropriate input.
5. In the Timeline, patch the source track to the record track you want.
For more information on patching, see “Patching Tracks” in the Help.
6. Click the Record button.
7. Stop the recording as follows:
t
If you started with both IN and OUT points in the Timeline, the system
automatically stops recording when it reaches the OUT point (or after it adds the
appropriate audio handle after the OUT point).
t
If you added only an IN point, click the Record button a second time to stop the
recording.
389
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Your Avid editing application automatically names the voice-over. You can change the
name as you would for any clip (for example, change the name in the bin).
The following illustrations show the results of adding a voice-over.
Voice-over adding a new track
Voice-over replacing a portion of a track
Understanding the Audio Punch-In Tool
You can use the Audio Punch-in tool to record voice-over narration directly into the
Timeline.
You can “rehearse” the voice-over while listening to the sequence. The voice-over is not
recorded while you are rehearsing. You can continue to rehearse until you get it right. While
recording, you can watch and listen to the sequence and hear the playback of edited sound
tracks.
This topic describes the features of the Audio Punch-in tool and several typical scenarios for
its use.
390
Recording Voice-Over Narration
Audio Punch-in Tool Features
The following illustration shows the features of the Audio Punch-In tool. The following
table describes the features of the tool.
Record button
Stop button
Play In/Out button
Go to Mark IN button
Passthrough Mix Tool button
Cancel button
Audio Tool button
Preroll and Postroll text boxes
Handles text box
Input Source menu
Input Channels
buttons
Timeline Track menus
Target Drive menu
Target Bin menu
Audio Punch-In Tool Features
Feature
Description
Play In/Out button
Starts playing with the ability to perform a real-time punch-in. The play loops
from the IN point to the OUT point but stops looping once recording is done.
This button blinks bright green while playing.
Record button
Starts and stops the recording. If an IN point and OUT point are set, recording
automatically starts at the IN point and stops at the OUT point. This button blinks
bright red while recording.
Stop button
Stops playing or recording and saves the last recorded data. This button is bright
blue when recording stops.
Go to Mark IN button
Moves the position indicator to the IN point. If there is no IN point, your Avid
editing application goes to where the position indicator was previously located or
to the start of the sequence.
Cancel button
Stops a recording without saving the recorded data.
Audio Tool button
Opens the Audio tool so you can monitor and adjust the audio levels during
recording.
391
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Audio Punch-In Tool Features (Continued)
Feature
Description
Passthrough Mix Tool
button
Opens the Passthrough Mix tool so you can monitor the audio levels during
recording.
Preroll text box
Allows you to provide an audiovisual cue before the recording begins. Your Avid
editing application backs up the position indicator for the prescribed number of
seconds. You can hear the audio during preroll.
When starting a punch-in with the Record button, a preroll allows you to provide
the duration, in seconds, of the audiovisual cue before the recording begins.
n
The Record button takes precedence over preroll. During preroll, if you press the Record button, the
system starts recording immediately.
Postroll text box
Allows you to provide the same kind of audiovisual cue after the recording ends
as that provided by the Preroll text box before the recording begins.
Handles text box
Instructs your Avid editing application to record audio at the beginning and end
of the clip. This allows you to perform trim edits on the audio.
This feature applies only when you start recording with the Record button. You
can record real-time punch-in only until the end of the handle.
Input Channels button
n
The selected input channels are not used for playback. Do not select the same channels as mix output on
the Audio Mixer tool.
Input Source menu
n
Identify the channels on the audio hardware that are used for recording. Click the
appropriate button to select the channel. The button changes to pink when it is
selected. Alt+click the button to display a menu and select another channel.
Includes several optional sources for audio input, depending on your system and
audio board.
To view the audio input sources available on your system, see the Input Source menu in the Input tab in
the Audio Project Settings dialog box.
Timeline Track menus
Allow you to specify where your Avid editing application places the audio in the
Timeline. Select either New Track or an existing track. When you select an
existing track, your Avid editing application overwrites the audio on that track
and silences that portion during playback.
Target Drive menu
Allows you to choose a target drive.
Target Bin menu
Allows you to choose a target bin.
392
Recording Voice-Over Narration
Audio Punch-in Tool Scenarios
You can punch-in audio in several ways:
•
Scenario 1 – Set only an OUT point. The position indicator is used as the IN point. Set
a preroll time. Click the Play In/Out button to loop continuously through the sequence.
Click the Record button when you find what you want to punch-in, and then click the
Record button again to end recording.
•
Scenario 2 – Set an IN point and an OUT point around the material you want to record.
Set a preroll time. Click the Record button to start the preroll. When the system arrives
at the OUT point, recording ends. The last region including the OUT point is recorded.
Repeat recording over the same region until you are satisfied with the results.
•
Scenario 3 – With no IN point or OUT point set, click the Record button continuously
throughout your sequence. Click the Record button to start recording, and then click the
Record button again to end recording. Continue this process to record multiple punchins.
Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in
The steps below are general guidelines for recording audio punch-ins, regardless of your
scenario. You should determine when to add the IN and OUT points, when to use the Play
In/Out button, and when to use the Record button, based on your needs. For more
information, see the scenarios described in “Understanding the Audio Punch-In Tool” on
page 390.
n
When performing an audio punch-in, the video resolution is dropped a quarter-frame due to
bandwidth limitations.
393
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
To use the Audio Punch-In tool:
1. Load a sequence into the Timeline.
2. Select Tools > Audio Punch-In.
The Audio Punch-In tool opens.
Record button
Play In/Out button
Stop button
Input Source menu
Timeline Track
menus
Input Channels
buttons
3. Select the input source and input channels that correspond to your hardware setup, and
set other values in the window as appropriate.
To select the input channels you want, click and hold the appropriate Input Channels
button.
4. Click the Timeline Track menus, and select either New Track or an existing track to
specify where your Avid editing application places the audio voice-over in the Timeline.
You can replace part (or all) of an existing track, or you can create a new track for the
voice-over.
IN point
OUT point
5. (Option) Set IN and OUT points in the Timeline to specify the part of the sequence to
which you want to add narration.
394
Recording Voice-Over Narration
6. Click the Play In/Out button or press the V key.
Loop play begins over the entire sequence. If you set an IN point and an OUT point,
loop play begins from the IN point to the OUT point.
The Play In/Out button blinks bright green while playing.
7. When you are ready to start the voice-over, click the Record button or press the B key.
The Record button blinks bright red while recording, and the Play In/Out button is a
steady green. The Audio Meter Channel button in the Audio tool becomes an I and
changes to orange.
8. Continue to click the Record button to record additional voice-overs.
During the audio punch-in process, you have the ability to record over the duration of
the sequence or from the IN point to the OUT point.
9. Click the Stop button, or press the space bar to stop play and recording.
Your Avid editing application automatically names the voice-over and saves it as an
audio clip. You can change the clip name as you would for any other clip. The position
indicator stops to get ready for your next voice-over.
n
n
To go to the IN point at any time, click the Go to Mark IN button.
Your Avid editing application creates one master clip, regardless of how many punch-ins you
perform.
The following illustrations show the results of adding a voice-over.
Voice-over adding a new track
Voice-over replacing a portion of a track
n
Three Undo functions can be performed during one session. The first undo removes the most
recent punch-in, the second undo removes the second-to-last punch-in, and the third undo
removes all the punch-ins.
395
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
To cancel an audio punch-in at any time:
t
Click the Cancel button, or press the Esc or the period (.) key.
Monitoring Previously Recorded Tracks While
Recording Voice-Over Narration
You can monitor previously recorded audio tracks while you record a voice-over narration.
To monitor other audio tracks:
1. Select Tools > Audio Tool.
The Audio tool opens.
2. Click the Output Options menu, and select Mono.
3. Record your voice-over as described in “Recording Voice-Over Narration Using the
Capture Tool” on page 388 or “Recording Voice-Over Narration Using Audio Punch-in”
on page 393.
4. As you record, monitor the previously recorded audio tracks along with your current
recording from the meters in the Audio tool and from the sound on the speakers.
Using Peak Hold While Recording Voice-Over Narration
Peak Hold allows you to customize the meter displays, and sets and plays back the internal
calibration tone. You can use Peak Hold while recording a punch-in as follows:
•
Use the Peak Hold menu in the Audio tool to change between Peak Hold and Infinite
Hold.
•
Use the Reset Peak button in the Audio tool.
For more information about Peak Hold, see “Using the Audio Tool” in the Help.
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool
Your Avid editing application can send signals to a V-LAN® VLXi® deck controller and a
general-purpose interface (GPI) device that trigger GPI actions. These signals are sent when
playback begins and ends, and also when recording with the Audio Punch-In tool begins and
ends.
396
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool
If you have a V-LAN VLXi deck controller and a GPI device connected to your Avid system
and they are configured correctly, you can use the GPI to control additional external
hardware while you are working with the Audio Punch-In tool. For example, you might want
to control an indicator light in a recording studio to provide a visual cue for performers or a
control light outside the studio that indicates when recording is in progress.
To make use of this feature, you must:
•
Understand when your Avid editing application sends GPI trigger signals. For more
information, see “Understanding GPI Trigger Signals” on page 397.
•
Connect a V-LAN VLXi deck controller and a VLXi-GT GPI to your Avid system. For
more information, see “Connecting a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI” on page 399.
•
Configure the V-LAN VLXi deck controller and the GPI. For more information, see
“Configuring a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI” on page 399.
•
Create GPI settings for your specific needs. For more information, see “Working with
GPI Settings” on page 400.
Understanding GPI Trigger Signals
Your Avid editing application sends three different GPI trigger signals under the following
circumstances:
Trigger Signal Sent
When
Play Out
Playback begins.
Recording with the Audio Punch-In tool ends but
playback continues because a postroll value is set in
the Audio Punch-In tool (that is, the signal is sent
when the Stop button in the Audio Punch-In tool
changes to blue).
Record Out
Recording with the Audio Punch-In tool begins.
Stop Out
Playback stops.
For more information on using the Audio Punch-In tool, see “Recording Voice-Over
Narration Using Audio Punch-in” on page 393.
397
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
GPI Signal Sequences
GPI signal sequences differ, depending on whether or not you are using the Audio Punch-In
tool with preroll and postroll.
When you use the Audio Punch-In tool without any preroll or postroll, the following occurs:
•
Record Out is sent when recording begins.
•
Stop Out is sent when recording (and playback) ends.
When you use the Audio Punch-In tool with preroll and postroll, the following occurs:
n
•
Play Out is sent when preroll begins (the position indicator begins moving in the
Timeline, and the Play In/Out button in the Audio Punch-In tool blinks green).
•
Record Out is sent when recording begins (the Record button in the Audio Punch-In
tool blinks red).
•
Play Out is sent when recording ends and postroll begins (the Stop button in the Audio
Punch-In tool changes to blue).
•
Stop Out is sent when postroll ends (the position indicator stops moving).
Record Out and Play Out repeat if you perform additional recordings.
Example of Linking GPI Actions to Trigger Signals
You can configure the GPI to respond to each signal sent by your Avid editing application in
a specific manner. For a simple indicator light, you might create a GPI setting linking the
Record Out signal from your Avid editing application to the GPI Set action (to turn the light
on) and a setting linking the Stop Out signal from your Avid editing application to the GPI
Reset action (to turn the light off).
For information on GPI actions, see “Working with GPI Settings” on page 400.
If you are working with preroll and postroll values, you might also link the Play Out signal
to the GPI’s Pulse action to flash the light on and off repeatedly during the preroll and
postroll periods. (Since the Pulse action does not switch between on and off very rapidly,
your preroll and postroll durations might need to be quite long to allow for the light to flash
enough times to be meaningful.)
For more information on configuring the GPI, see “Configuring a V-LAN VLXi Controller
and GPI” on page 399.
398
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool
Connecting a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI
The V-LAN VLXi controller and VLXi-GT GPI connect to your Avid system through a
direct serial connection as shown in the following figure.
GPI terminals (for connections
to external hardware)
VLXi-GT GPI
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
SERIAL
LAN
AC
1
2
3
4
5
6
Terminator (required when
cable length is more than
50 feet [15.24 meters])
V-LAN connection
SERIAL
V-LAN VLXi
controller
CF
PARALLEL
REF
SERIAL A
TIMECODE A
IN OUT
SERIAL B
TIMECODE B
IN OUT
LAN
CF
AC
VLX TRANSMITTER
VLX 2R DUAL RECEIVER
VLXi transmitter
serial input
Note: All cables are
customer supplied.
Serial cable to serial port connector on Avid system, or
to serial port connector on a USB-to-serial adapter
You must configure the V-LAN VLXi controller to work with the VLXi-GT GPI. Assign the
VLXi-GT to a V-LAN node address between 16 and 19. LAN connections of more than 50
feet (15.24 meters) must have a terminator. For more information on configuring the
V-LAN, see the Videomedia VLXi User’s Guide.
Configuring a V-LAN VLXi Controller and GPI
Once you have connected a V-LAN VLXi controller and VLXi-GT GPI to your Avid
system, you can configure the system to communicate with the controller and the GPI, and
create GPI settings appropriate to your needs. For more information on creating settings, see
“Working with GPI Settings” on page 400.
To configure the V-LAN VLXi controller and the VLXi-GT GPI:
1. In the Project window, double-click Deck Configuration.
The Deck Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click Add Channel.
3. Click the Channel Type menu, and select VLAN VLX.
399
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
4. Click the Port menu, and select the serial port to which the V-LAN VLXi is connected.
5. Click OK.
The Autoconfigure message box opens.
6. Click Yes.
The connected GPI is automatically detected and appears in the Deck Configuration
dialog box.
Working with GPI Settings
You must create a separate GPI setting for each trigger signal you want the GPI to recognize.
For example, you would need one setting for the Record Out signal and another for the Stop
Out signal.
You might also create GPI settings for other control purposes, such as starting and stopping
capture.
n
V-LAN VLXi is not compatible with the V-LAN Express® single-device controller. For device
connectivity information, refer to your V-LAN documentation.
You can also edit an existing GPI setting or delete a GPI setting so that it no longer appears
as an option in the GPI Settings dialog box.
Creating a GPI Setting
To create a GPI setting:
1. In the Project window, double-click Deck Configuration.
The Deck Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Double-click the VLXi-GT text box.
The GPI Settings dialog box opens.
3. Select the appropriate settings.
For more information about GPI settings option, see “GPI Settings Options” on
page 401.
4. Click Add.
The GPI Node Settings dialog box opens.
5. Select the appropriate settings.
For more information about GPI Node settings option, see “GPI Settings Options” on
page 401.
400
Using a GPI Device with the Audio Punch-In Tool
6. Click OK.
The GPI Settings dialog box opens.
7. Click OK to set the GPI.
8. Click Apply in the Deck Configuration dialog box.
GPI Settings Options
The following tables describe the GPI settings and GPI Node settings options.
GPI Settings Options
Option
Description
Name
Keep the default V-LAN VLXi name, or type a new name.
Description
(Option) Add a description of the GPI trigger.
Device Type
Select V-LAN, which is the Avid-supported device type.
Address
Select the V-LAN network address to which the VLXi-GT is assigned.
Valid addresses on the V-LAN network are 16 through 19. This address
must match the internal V-LAN address.
Pulse Duration
Leave this setting at its default value; it does not alter the length of the
Pulse action in the GPI.
GPI Control Enable
When you deselect this option, you disable the GPI but keep the GPI
settings. This is useful for troubleshooting purposes.
Edit
Click to edit an existing GPI node setting.
Delete
Click to delete an existing GPI node setting.
Add
Click to add another GPI node setting.
401
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
GPI Node Settings Options
Option
Description
Function
Select a function for a particular node:
•
Capture in (Satellite mode)
•
Play in
•
Cue to first frame
•
Stop in
•
Capture out (Satellite mode)
•
Play out
•
Stop out
Node
Click the Node menu, and select a node. Nodes 1 through 6 correspond to
the physical connectors on the back of the VLXi-GT GPI device.
Action
Select an action:
•
Set activates a command.
•
Reset deactivates a command.
•
Pulse switches the state between active and inactive.
Editing a GPI Setting
To edit a GPI setting:
1. In the Project window, double-click Deck Configuration.
The Deck Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click the VLXi-GT text box.
3. Select the name of the GPI you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
5. Make the applicable changes to the setting.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Apply.
The GPI setting is updated.
402
Displaying Audio Formats in Bins
Deleting a GPI Setting
To delete a GPI setting:
1. In the Project window, double-click Deck Configuration.
The Deck Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click the VLXi-GT text box.
3. Select the name of the GPI you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
The GPI setting is deleted.
Displaying Audio Formats in Bins
You can select a bin heading to display the audio formats in the bin. The applicable audio
format, AIFF-C, WAVE, or PCM, appears in the Audio Format column for master clips.
To add the Audio Format column to a bin:
1. With a bin in Text view, select Bin > Headings.
The Bin Column Selection dialog box opens.
2. Ctrl+click Audio Format in the list to select it.
3. Click OK.
The Audio Format column appears in the bin.
Using Automatic Voice-Over
The Automatic Voice-Over feature (Auto VO) allows you to automatically remove certain
segments from a sequence based upon their relationship to a selected audio track. You can
do either of the following:
t
Extract all the segments whose audio appears on the selected track.
t
Extract all other segments from the sequence, leaving only those segments whose audio
appears on the selected track.
The system creates a new sequence with a .vo file name extension that contains only the
material remaining after the Auto VO process. The original sequence is retained and is
unaffected.
403
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
Auto VO might be useful whenever you have organized the audio tracks in your sequence so
that audio from one type of material is isolated on one audio track. For example, a common
approach in broadcast news is to create a sequence that intersperses interview material with
B-roll (background or location) footage. The audio from the interview is edited onto one
audio track while the audio from the B-roll footage is edited onto another audio track, as
shown in the following illustration.
B-roll footage
Interview footage
You can use automatic voice-over to quickly create a new sequence that consists only of the
background material or only of the interview material. You can then use the new sequence as
a starting point for a revised version of the story, for example, in a follow-up newscast.
To create an edited sequence by using Auto VO:
1. Open the bin that contains the sequence you want to edit.
2. Select the sequence in the bin.
3. Select Bin > Auto VO.
The Auto VO dialog box opens.
4. From the Using track menu, select the audio track that you want to control the edit.
404
Using Automatic Voice-Over
5. Select one of the following:
-
Extract segments, to remove all segments with audio on the track selected in step 4
-
Keep segments, to retain all segments with audio on the track selected in step 4 and
remove all other segments
6. Click OK.
The system creates a new sequence in the bin and names it by adding a .vo file name
extension to the original sequence name.
Sequence with segments extracted with Auto VO
Sequence with segments kept with Auto VO
405
Chapter 13 Working with Audio: Advanced
406
Chapter 14
Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
This chapter describes how to access and use the AudioSuite plug-ins, including the set of
core plug-ins that comes with your Avid editing application. It also provides a list of other
plug-ins that are supported by this version.
•
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
•
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
•
Non-Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Your Avid editing application supports AudioSuite, the Digidesign host-based, file-based
plug-in specification. Users have access to audio-processing plug-ins developed by
Digidesign and by Digidesign third-party developers. These plug-ins perform pitch
processing, artifact removal, audio reversal, and many other processes.
For information on Digidesign and third-party plug-ins, go to the Digidesign Web site at
www.digidesign.com.
For information on plug-ins that are not supported by your Avid editing application, see
“AudioSuite Plug-in Limitations” on page 417.
Installing AudioSuite Plug-Ins
The installer for your Avid editing application automatically creates a Plug-Ins folder that
stores AudioSuite plugins in the following location:
drive:\Program Files\Common Files\Digidesign\DAE
A set of core plug-ins is installed automatically. When you purchase additional plug-ins, the
third-party vendor provides instructions on how to load the plug-ins. Some vendors might
require you to drag the plug-in to the Plug-Ins folder; other vendors might perform the task
automatically for you by using an installation program.
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
c
n
Your Avid editing application requires the files in this folder named
AvidAppPlugIn.dpm and AvidAppPlugIn.dpm.rsr. Do not delete them.
AudioSuite Plug-ins supported by Avid are added to the Plug-In Selection menu in the
AudioSuite window. If you install a plug-in that is not officially supported by Avid, the plugin name is still added to the Plug-In Selection menu, but a ~ character precedes the name,
informing you that this plug-in is not supported. If you attempt to use the plug-in, a dialog
box appears informing you that this plug-in is not supported and might cause an error.
Using Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
You can use AudioSuite plug-ins in two different ways. You can
•
Apply a plug-in to a clip in the Timeline. The end result is a rendered effect. For more
information, see “Applying an AudioSuite Plug-in to a Clip in the Timeline” on
page 409.
•
Use the controls in the AudioSuite window to create a new master clip. This method
allows you to process more than one channel at a time and to create new media that is
longer or shorter in duration than the source media. For more information, see “Creating
New Master Clips with AudioSuite Plug-Ins” on page 412.
By default, the AudioSuite window displays the controls for applying a plug-in to a clip in
the Timeline. When you drag a master clip into the window, the window expands to display
additional parameters for working with master clips. The following illustration shows the
expanded view.
Additional parameters for
working on master clips
Status display
408
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Applying an AudioSuite Plug-in to a Clip in the Timeline
The following illustration shows the default layout of the AudioSuite window.
Effect Mode Selector menu
Render Effect button
Fast Menu button
Audio Loop Play button
Effect icon
Display/Hide Master
Clip Controls button
Plug-In Selection menu
Target Drive menu
Status display
Activate Current Plug-In button
Track Selection Menu button
To apply an AudioSuite plug-in to a clip in the Timeline:
1. Open the AudioSuite window by doing one of the following:
t
Select Tools > AudioSuite.
t
If an audio tool is already open, click the Effect Mode Selector menu, and select
AudioSuite.
2. Use the Track Selection Menu button to select the tracks that you want to modify. When
you select an item from this menu, the system selects or deselects the corresponding
track in the Timeline.
n
To select multiple tracks, press the Shift key while you select additional tracks from the Track
Selection menu. The tracks are designated by plus signs (+), which indicate that the effect is
applied to more than one track.
3. Click the Plug-In Selection menu, and select a plug-in.
Your Avid editing application automatically applies the plug-in effect to the track or
tracks in the Timeline.
4. Click the Activate Current Plug-In button.
A dialog box associated with the plug-in opens.
5. Make any necessary adjustments, and click the Preview button to preview the effect. For
more information, see “Using an AudioSuite Plug-In Dialog Box” on page 410.
409
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
6. To save the effect, click OK. To close the dialog box without saving the effect, click
Cancel.
7. (Option) To save the effect as a template, drag the effect icon to a bin.
n
If you want to use plug-ins that operate on stereo pairs or that change the length of the audio
clip, use the methods described in “Creating New Master Clips with AudioSuite Plug-Ins”
on page 412.
Using an AudioSuite Plug-In Dialog Box
The contents of the plug-in dialog boxes vary, but the top six buttons are always visible. If a
particular button is not available, it appears dimmed. The following illustration shows the
Digidesign Gain plug-in.
These six buttons
appear on all
AudioSuite Plug-In
dialog boxes.
The following table describes the six common buttons:
Button
Description
OK
Saves the effect and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box and does not save the effect.
Preview
Plays back a portion or all of the currently selected audio clip with processing.
Some plug-ins can preview in real time and some cannot. If a plug-in cannot preview in real time,
your Avid editing application plays back the processed audio in 2-second intervals: it processes
2 seconds of audio, plays it, processes the next 2 seconds, plays it, and so on.
Render
410
Renders the effect and creates a new audio media file.
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Button
Description
Bypass
Plays the selected audio without processing. This is useful for comparing the audio with and
without processing applied.
Find level
Performs an analysis pass on the audio. Depending on the plug-in, the text and function of this
button might change.
Some plug-ins require an analysis pass on the audio data before they can process the
information. If so, they perform the first pass automatically. Other plug-ins do not require a
first pass but can achieve more accurate results if you allow them to perform a first pass. If
the plug-in supports the optional pass, this button is available. Otherwise, it is dimmed.
AudioSuite Fast Menu
The AudioSuite Fast menu allows you to perform the following tasks:
•
Apply an existing AudioSuite template. See “Using AudioSuite Effect Templates” on
page 416.
•
Set, render, or remove AudioSuite plug-ins. The menu text differs, depending on
whether you have IN to OUT points in the sequence.
The following commands appear in the menu:
•
Global: There are no IN points on the segment. The command affects all the plug-ins on
the enabled tracks.
•
IN/OUT: There are IN to OUT points on the segment. The command affects the plugins on the enabled tracks within the marked region.
•
From IN: There is an IN point and no corresponding OUT point. The command affects
all plug-ins on enabled tracks, starting with the IN point.
Rendering AudioSuite Plug-in Effects
You need to render all AudioSuite plug-ins before you can play back the effect. If you do not
render the effect manually, your Avid editing application automatically renders the effect
before it creates an audio mixdown or audio dissolve containing the effect.
For more information, see “Troubleshooting AudioSuite Plug-Ins” on page 418.
411
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Creating New Master Clips with AudioSuite Plug-Ins
You can use AudioSuite plug-ins to create new master clips. This allows you to use multiple
input and output channels and to change the length of the media. You can perform the
following operations on the media you create:
•
Apply AudioSuite plug-ins to more than one track (also referred to as a channel or
stream) at the same time. For example, a plug-in might allow you to process two
separate tracks as a stereo pair. This enables you to use plug-ins that perform linked
compression, reverb, and other effects that allow multichannel input.
•
Create new media that is longer or shorter in duration than the source media. This allows
you to use effects that perform time compression and expansion. For example, you can
use a Time Compression Expansion plug-in to change the length of the audio file, or you
can lengthen the file in order to add a reverb trail.
•
Apply one mono AudioSuite effect to multiple inputs of a master clip in a multiplemono fashion.
AudioSuite Controls for Creating New Master Clips
When you drag a master clip onto the AudioSuite window, the window automatically
expands to display additional controls. You can also click the Display/Hide Master Clip
Controls button to display or hide the additional parameters.
The following illustration identifies the controls that appear when you expand the
AudioSuite window.
Display/Hide
Master Clip
Controls button
Activate Current
Plug-In button
Toggle Master
Clip Mode
button
Track Selection
Menu button
Clip Selection
menu
Mark IN to OUT
indicators
Input Source Track
selectors
Processing Mode
Selection menu
Find Source From
Effect button
Load In Source
Monitor button
Target Bin for New
Master Clip menu
Status display
412
Load Result check box
Handle Length for End of
Master Clip (seconds) text box
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
The following table describes the controls in the AudioSuite window.
AudioSuite Window Controls
Control
Description
Track Selection Menu
button
This menu is not active in Master Clip Processing mode.
Clip Selection menu
This menu allows you to choose the active clip. It lists the current active clip and
other clips you dragged into the AudioSuite window. The window controls change
to reflect the active clip.
Input Source Track
selectors
These buttons allow you to choose the input source tracks for the effect.
Processing Mode
Selection menu
This menu displays the current processing mode of the AudioSuite effect on a given
clip. For more information, see “Mono, Stereo, and Multichannel Processing in
AudioSuite Plug-Ins” on page 414.
Target Bin for New
Master Clip menu
This menu allows you to choose the target bin. The system will place the new media
and a corresponding AudioSuite effect template in the bin. The template allows you
to modify the effect at a later time.
Toggle Master Clip
Mode button
This button activates the master clip processing mode. The button is yellow when
master clip processing mode is active.
Mark IN to OUT
indicators
These lights change to green when a mark IN or mark OUT exists on the current
master clip.
The system automatically chooses a preview track and displays a blue Speaker icon
on the track. To change the preview track, Alt+click the appropriate source track. If
the source track that is set as the current preview track is deselected, the system
chooses the lowest available track.
Find Source From Effect his button allows you to find the master clip associated with an AudioSuite
button
template. When you drop an AudioSuite effect template into the AudioSuite
window, the system activates this button. Click the button to load the master clip
into the AudioSuite window as the active master clip.
n
The template you drop in the window must reference an existing master clip.
Load In Source Monitor This button loads the current source master clip into the Source monitor. This is
button
useful if you want to add or change IN to OUT points on the clip.
Load Result check box
This check box enables you to instruct the system to automatically load the
resulting master clip into the Source monitor.
413
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
AudioSuite Window Controls (Continued)
Control
Description
Handle Length for End This text box allows you to add filler at the end of a master clip. The value
of Master Clip (seconds) represents the number of seconds to add. For example, use this feature to add filler
text box
at the end of a master clip when you use a reverb effect to add a reverb trail to the
end of the clip. Select the value before you run the plug-in.
Status display
This display provides information about the current state of the Digidesign Audio
Engine (the software that manages the AudioSuite plug-ins) and the currently
applied effect. For stereo and multichannel processing plug-ins, the Status display
identifies the maximum number of tracks that can be processed. If more than the
maximum are initially selected, the system automatically disables tracks until it
reaches the plug-in’s maximum number.
Mono, Stereo, and Multichannel Processing in AudioSuite Plug-Ins
AudioSuite plug-ins allow you to select the following types of processing:
n
•
Mono processing only: This option is available for plug-ins that operate on only one
audio track at a time. The other option (Stereo) appears dimmed. The plug-in applies the
effect to each source track individually, in a serial manner.
•
Mono and stereo processing: These options are available for plug-ins that can treat two
tracks as a stereo pair. This allows the system to apply the audio effect simultaneously to
each track. For example, the Time Compression Expansion plug-in typically operates on
a stereo pair. You can choose mono if you want the plug-in to operate on each track
individually, in a serial manner.
•
Mono and multichannel processing: These options are available for plug-ins that can
process multiple tracks simultaneously. For example, the Normalize plug-in allows you
to adjust the volume separately for each track or to adjust the volume for all tracks at the
same time. In the latter case, the system examines all enabled tracks for the loudest
volume and then adjusts all tracks relative to that value.
You can think of stereo processing as a special case of multichannel processing.
For mono processing, the system creates a new master clip with the same number of tracks
that you selected in the AudioSuite window.
For stereo and multichannel processing, the plug-in creates a master clip with the number of
tracks equal to the number of output streams from the plug-in. For example, a plug-in that
operates on stereo pairs creates a two-channel master clip. A plug-in such as Normalize, that
operates on multiple channels, creates a master clip with the same number of tracks that
were selected in the AudioSuite window.
414
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
The Status display at the bottom of the AudioSuite Plug-in window indicates how many
tracks the plug-in can process. If more tracks are enabled than can be processed, the plug-in
automatically selects the correct number of tracks. You can change the track selection based
on your needs.
Most AudioSuite plug-ins automatically select the appropriate processing mode and label
the values in the Processing Mode Selection menu. For example, the Normalize plug-in
offers two choices: Peak On Each Track and Peaks From All Tracks (default).
You select the processing mode from a menu in the AudioSuite window as described in the
next section.
Using AudioSuite Plug-ins to Create New Master Clips
To create new master clips using the AudioSuite plug-ins:
1. Drag one or more master clips or subclips into the AudioSuite window.
Your Avid editing application automatically enters Master Clip Processing mode and
expands the AudioSuite window, if necessary.
You can click the Display/Hide Master Clip Controls button to display or hide the
controls for processing a master clip. To enter or exit Master Clip Processing mode,
click the Toggle Master Clip Mode button. The button is yellow when Master Clip
Processing mode is active.
2. If you dropped more than one master clip in the AudioSuite window, select a clip to
work on from the Clip Selection menu.
3. Select the input sources from the Input Source Track selectors.
4. (Option) Alt+click the Input Source Track selector to change the preview source track.
5. (Option) Type a value in the Handle Length text box to lengthen the clip by a specific
amount. For example, type 2 if you plan to add a 2-second reverb trail.
n
If you are using Time Compression/Expansion plug-ins, the plug-ins automatically lengthen
or shorten the clip.
6. Click the Plug-In Selection menu, and select a plug-in.
7. Click the Activate Current Plug-In button to open the plug-in’s dialog box. For more
information, see “Using an AudioSuite Plug-In Dialog Box” on page 410.
8. Make any changes, and click the Preview button to preview the effect.
415
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
9. Either render the plug-in from the Plug-In dialog box, or return to the AudioSuite
window. For more information on rendering, see “Rendering AudioSuite Plug-in
Effects” on page 411.
When you click the Render Effect button, your Avid editing application creates a new
master clip in the target bin. Your application names the new master clip by combining
the original clip name with the effect name, for example, Test Audio clip_Normalize.
Your Avid editing application also creates an AudioSuite effect template in the bin as
described in “Using AudioSuite Effect Templates” on page 416.
Using AudioSuite Effect Templates
When you create a new master clip, your Avid editing application also creates an AudioSuite
effect template in the bin. This effect template contains a reference to the original master clip
to which the effect was applied.
The original clip name is combined with the effect name, for example, Test Audio clip AudioSuite Plug-In Effect: Normalize.
The template is useful if you want to modify the effect after it is created.
To use a template to modify a master clip:
1. Drag an AudioSuite plug-in template into the AudioSuite window.
The Find Source From Effect button becomes active.
2. Click the Find Source From Effect button to load the master clip into the AudioSuite
window.
If a corresponding master clip exists, the system loads the master clip with its associated
plug-in values.
3. Modify the effect as described in “AudioSuite Controls for Creating New Master Clips”
on page 412.
To add a template to the AudioSuite Fast menu:
1. Open the bin containing your AudioSuite templates.
2. Select File > Open Bin.
A dialog box opens.
3. Navigate to the AudioSuite Site bin file in the following location:
drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\
SupportingFiles\Site_Effects\Site_AudioSuite_Bin.avb
416
Understanding Digidesign AudioSuite Plug-Ins
4. Double-click the Site_AudioSuite_Bin file.
The Site_AudioSuite_Bin window opens.
5. Drag one of your AudioSuite templates to the Site_AudioSuite_Bin window.
6. If you have not already done so, name the template by clicking the text and typing a
name.
7. Close the bin.
n
Your Avid editing application does not save the effect to the bin until you close the bin.
8. Click the AudioSuite Fast Menu button, and look for your new template.
Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins in Stereo
Some AudioSuite plug-ins can be used in either mono or stereo. If you plan to use them in
stereo, be aware of the following:
•
To process a mono track and obtain a stereo result, select the desired track or mark an IN
point and an OUT point, then either select an empty track or add an new one. When you
process the audio, the result will be two tracks or regions that represent the right and left
channels of the processed audio. You should then pan these tracks hard right and hard
left in your mix.
•
If you set a plug-in to Stereo mode, then select an odd number of tracks for processing,
the plug-in will process the selected tracks in pairs to create the stereo effect. However,
the last odd, unpaired track will be processed as mono, using the left channel settings of
the stereo plug-in. If you want the last track to be processed in stereo, you must select an
additional track to pair it with — an empty one, if necessary.
AudioSuite Plug-in Limitations
The following limitations apply to the AudioSuite plug-ins:
•
Some plug-ins that perform analysis passes on the audio data are not supported. This
includes plug-ins that use playlist information to cache analysis data.
•
If you want to use plug-ins that change the length of an audio clip or that operate on
multiple inputs at the same time, use the method described in “Creating New Master
Clips with AudioSuite Plug-Ins” on page 412. Applying an effect to a clip in the
Timeline does not work for these operations.
417
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Troubleshooting AudioSuite Plug-Ins
You might need to respond to an error message or cancel a render operation when rendering
AudioSuite plug-ins.
If the Digidesign Audio Engine is not running when you start to render an AudioSuite plugin effect, the system displays an error message stating that the DAE connection does not
exist. The dialog box gives you the following options:
•
Cancel stops the rendering process. This allows you to open the AudioSuite tool and
then start rendering again.
•
Bypass continues the rendering process but doesn’t render the plug-in effect.
In most cases, you should click Cancel and open the AudioSuite window.
If the plug-in is not installed when you go to render a plug-in effect, your Avid editing
application displays an error message and tells you which plug-in is not installed. At that
time, you can cancel or bypass the rendering process as previously described.
To cancel a render operation:
t
n
Press Ctrl+period.
Be careful not to press these keys multiple times. If you press Ctrl+period after the render
operation is stopped from a previous Ctrl+period, your Avid editing application closes the
window after it cancels the render operation.
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
A set of core AudioSuite plug-ins are installed with your Avid editing application.
AudioSuite Plug-ins supported by Avid, such as the core set, are added to the AudioSuite
Plug-in Selection menu using their plug-in name. If you install a plug-in that is not officially
supported by Avid, the plug-in name is still added to the AudioSuite Plug-in Selection menu,
but a ~ character precedes the name, informing you that this plug-in is not supported. If you
attempt to use the plug-in, a dialog box appears informing you that this plug-in is not
supported and might cause an error.
n
Other AudioSuite plug-ins might get installed on your system for use with ProTools, or you
might download plugins. These plug-ins might not work correctly with your Avid
application, and are not supported by Avid. Use any unsupported plug-ins at your own risk.
The following table provides a brief description of each of the core AudioSuite plug-ins,
with cross-references to more detailed information in the remaining topics in this section.
418
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
You can use some AudioSuite plug-ins in either mono or stereo. For guidance on working in
stereo, see “Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins in Stereo” on page 417.
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Plug-In
Description
Chorus
Provides time-delay and pitch-shift effects, added to the clip to create a multi-layered
sound. For more information, see “Chorus AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 420.
D-Verb™
Provides a studio-quality reverberation or ambience processing to single or multiple
tracks. For more information, see “D-Verb AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 422.
Compressor
Reduces the dynamic range of signals that exceed a selected threshold by a specific
amount. For more information, see “Compressor AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 423.
Limiter
Prevents signal peaks from exceeding a chosen level so that they don’t overload
amplifiers or recording devices. For more information, see “Limiter AudioSuite Plug-In”
on page 425.
Expander-Gate
Performs the same function as the Gate plug-in with the addition of expander features.
Expanders are particularly useful for reducing noise or signal leakage that creeps into
recorded material as the signal level falls, which often occurs with headphone leakage.
For more information, see “Expander-Gate AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 426.
Gate
Reduces noise by decreasing the gain of signals that fall below a user-selectable
threshold. For more information, see “Gate AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 428.
DeEsser
Reduces sibilants (“s,” “sh,” and “ch” sounds) and other high-frequency noises that can
cause distortion in audio signals. For more information, see “DeEsser AudioSuite PlugIn” on page 429.
EQ
Allows you to adjust frequency equalization on individual audio clips. Four EQ plug-ins
are available: 1-Band EQ II, 4_Band EQ II, 1-Band EQ III, and 7-Band EQ III. For more
information, see “EQ AudioSuite Plug-Ins” on page 430.
Flanger
Creates a flange effect that approximates a true tape-generated flange. For more
information, see “Flanger AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 434.
Invert
Inverts the polarity (phase) of the audio file. For more information, see “Invert
AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 435.
Duplicate
Creates a new master clip from a selected audio clip. The plug-in uses the IN and OUT
points on the selected clip to define the boundaries of the new clip. For more information,
see “Duplicate AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 435.
Delay
Provides time-delay-based effects. Effects obtained through the use of Delay include slap
echo, doubling, chorusing, and flanging. For more information, see “Delay AudioSuite
Plug-In” on page 436.
419
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins (Continued)
Plug-In
Description
Multi-Tap Delay
Allows you to control up to four independent delays applied to the audio clip. For more
information, see “Multi-Tap Delay AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 437.
Normalize
Finds the peak value in the source audio file and scales the entire file proportionally to
that maximum value. For more information, see “Normalize AudioSuite Plug-In” on
page 438.
Gain
Same as Normalize, but allows positive or negative gain adjustment. For more
information, see “Gain AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 438.
Ping-Pong Delay
Allows you to add a delay to an audio clip to create a ping-pong echo effect. For more
information, see “Ping-Pong Delay AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 439.
Reverse
Rewrites the selected audio in reverse. For more information, see “Reverse AudioSuite
Plug-In” on page 439.
DC Offset Removal
Removes an audio artifact that is common in digital audio files. A DC offset is caused by
poorly calibrated analog-to-digital converters (A/Ds), and can produce clicks and pops on
clip edit transitions if not removed. For more information, see “DC Offset Removal
AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 440.
Signal Generator
Produces audio test tones in a variety of frequencies, waveforms, and amplitudes. For
more information, see “Signal Generator AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 440.
Time Compression
Expansion
Allows you to adjust the duration of a selected clip by creating a new master clip. This
increases or decreases the selection’s length without changing pitch. For more
information, see “Time Compression Expansion AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 440.
Pitch Shift
Changes pitch with or without changing length. For more information, see “Pitch Shift
AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 443.
Time Shift
Adjusts both the duration and the pitch of a selected clip. For more information, see
“Time Shift AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 444.
Chorus AudioSuite Plug-In
The Chorus plug-in modifies an audio signal by combining a time-delayed, pitch-shifted
copy with the original signal. It is ideal for thickening and adding a shimmering quality to
guitars, keyboards, and other instruments.
420
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Chorus Parameters
The following table lists the Chorus plug-in parameters:
Parameter
Description
Gain
Allows you to adjusts the input volume of the chorus to prevent clipping or increase the level of
the processed signal. This slider is set to a default of +3 dB. If your source audio has been
recorded very close to peak level, this +3 dB default setting could cause clipping. Use this
control to reduce the input level.
Sum Inputs
button
When you use the Chorus plug-in Stereo mode, a Sum Inputs button appears next to the right
channel Gain slider. Clicking the Sum Inputs button sums the source input signals (regardless of
whether the input is mono or stereo) before processing them.The source signal then appears in
the center of the stereo field, and the processed signal is output in stereo. When you click the
Sum Inputs button, the LFO waveform on the right channel is automatically phase inverted to
enhance the mono-stereo effect.
Mix
Allows you to adjust the balance between the Dry (source) signal and the Wet (processed)
signal, giving you control over the depth of the effect.
Low Pass
Filter
Controls the cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter, allowing you to attenuate the high
frequency content of the feedback signal. The lower the setting, the more high frequencies are
removed from the feedback signal. The range of the Low Pass Filter is 20 Hz to 19.86 kHz, with
a maximum value of Off (which effectively means bypass).
Delay
Sets the delay time between the source signal and the processed signal. The higher the setting,
the longer the delay and the wider the chorusing effect. Delay is adjustable from
0 to 20 milliseconds.
LFO Rate
Allows you to adjust the rate of the low frequency oscillator (LFO) applied to the delayed signal
as modulation. The higher the setting, the more rapid the modulation. You can select either a
sine wave or a triangle wave as a modulation source, using the LFO Waveform selector.
LFO Width
Allows you to adjust the intensity of the LFO applied to the delayed signal as modulation. The
higher the setting, the more intense the modulation. Use the LFO Waveform selector to select a
sine or a triangle wave as a modulation source.
Feedback
Controls the amount of feedback applied from the output of the delayed signal back into its
input. Negative settings provide a more intense effect.
LFO
Waveform
Selects a sine wave or triangle wave for the LFO. This affects the character of the modulation.
The sine wave has a gentler ramp and peak than the triangle wave.
421
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
D-Verb AudioSuite Plug-In
Digital reverberation processing can simulate the complex natural reflections and echoes
that occur after a sound has been produced. Reverberation can take relatively lifeless mono
source material and create a stereo acoustic environment that gives the source a perceived
weight and depth in a mix. In addition, digital signal processing can be used creatively to
produce reverberation characteristics that do not exist in nature.
The character of reverberation depends on a number of factors. These include proximity to
the sound source, the shape of the space, the absorptivity of the construction material, and
the position of the listener. D-Verb provides control over these reverberation parameters so
that extremely natural sounding reverb effects can be created and applied.
D-Verb Parameters
The D-Verb plug-in has the following parameters:
Parameter
Description
Input
Allows you to adjust the input volume of the reverberation.
Mix
Allows you to adjust the balance between the Dry (source) signal and the Wet (processed)
signal, giving you control over the depth of the effect.
Algorithm
Allows you to select one of seven reverberation algorithms. Selecting an algorithm changes the
preset provided for it.
Size
422
•
Hall — Good, general-purpose concert hall with a natural character
•
Church — Dense, diffuse space simulating a church or cathedral
•
Plate — Simulation of the acoustic character of a metal plate–based reverberation, which
has the general effect of thickening the initial sound itself
•
Room 1 — Medium-sized, natural, rich-sounding room that can be effectively varied in
size between very small and large
•
Room 2 — Smaller, brighter reverberant characteristic than Room 1, with a useful
adjustment range that extends to very small
•
Ambient — Transparent response useful for adding a sense of space without adding a lot
of depth or density
•
Nonlin — Nonlinear reverberation with a natural buildup and an abrupt cutoff similar to a
gate
In conjunction with the Algorithm parameter, allows you to adjust the overall size of the
reverberant space. There are three sizes: Small, Medium, and Large. The character of the
reverberation changes with each setting (as does the relative value of the Decay parameter).
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Diffusion
Sets the degree to which initial echo density increases over time. High settings result in high
initial buildup of echo density. Low settings cause low initial buildup. This control interacts
with the Size and Decay parameters to affect the overall reverberation density.
Decay
Controls the rate at which the reverberation decays after the original direct signal stops. The
value of the Decay parameter is affected by the Size and Algorithm parameters. This parameter
can be set to infinity on most algorithms for infinite reverberation times.
Pre-Delay
Allows you to determine the amount of time that elapses between the original audio event and
the onset of reverberation.
HF (High
Frequency)
Cut
Controls the decay characteristic of the high frequency components of the reverberation. It acts
in conjunction with the LP Filter control to create the overall high frequency contour of the
reverberation.
LP Filter
Controls the overall high frequency content of the reverberation by allowing you to set the
frequency above which a 6-dB-per-octave filter attenuates the processed signal.
Compressor AudioSuite Plug-In
The Compressor plug-in reduces the dynamic range of signals that exceed a selected
threshold by a specific amount. The increase of input signal needed to cause a 1-dB increase
in the output signal of the compressor is called the compression ratio. With a ratio of 4:1, for
example, an 8-dB increase of input produces a 2-dB increase in the output.
Audio material often varies in loudness, and can be above the threshold at one moment and
below it the next. The Attack slider sets the Compressor’s response time, or attack. The
Release slider sets the amount of time that it takes for the Compressor’s gain to return to its
original level.
Using Compression Effectively
To use compression most effectively, the attack time should be set so that signals exceed the
threshold level long enough to cause an increase in the average level. This helps to ensure
that gain reduction doesn’t decrease the overall volume.
Release times should be set long enough so that if signal levels repeatedly rise above the
threshold, they cause gain reduction only once. If the release time is too long, a loud section
of the audio material could cause gain reduction that persists through a soft section. Of
course, compression has many creative uses that break these rules.
423
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
The Compressor has built-in metering that allows you to monitor the amount of gain
reduction taking place. The Gain Reduction meter usually remains at 0-dB level when the
input signal is below the threshold, and falls to the left to show the amount of gain reduction
in decibels when the input signal exceeds the threshold.
Compressor Parameters
The following table lists the Compressor plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Indicates the level of the unprocessed input signal to the Compressor.
Output
Indicates the output level of the Compressor, including any gain compensation added through
the Gain parameter.
Reduction
Indicates the amount of gain reduction in dB.
Gain
Provides overall output gain adjustment. It allows you to compensate for heavily compressed
signals.
Threshold
Allows you to set the threshold level. Signals that exceed this level are compressed. Signals
that are below it are unaffected. A level setting of 0 dB is equivalent to no compression. Unlike
scales on analog compressors, metering scales on a digital device reflect a 0-dB value, which
indicates full scale (FS) — the full-code signal level. There is no headroom above 0 dB.
Ratio
Allows you to set the compression ratio. The range is based on decibels above the threshold. If
this parameter is set to 2:1, for example, it compresses changes in signals above the threshold
by one half.
Attack
Allows you to set the Compressor’s attack time. The smaller the value, the faster the attack.
The faster the attack, the faster the Compressor applies attenuation to the signal. If you use fast
attack times and heavy limiting, you should use a proportionally longer release time,
particularly with material that contains many peaks in close proximity.
Release
Allows you to control how long it takes for the Compressor to be fully deactivated after the
input signal drops below the threshold level. If you use heavy compression, you should use
proportionally longer release times. This prevents pumping, which might occur when the
Compressor is forced to jump back and forth between compressed and uncompressed signal
levels. Lengthening the release time helps smooth these changes in level by introducing a lag
in the ramp-up and ramp-down times of attenuation. Use shorter release times on material with
few peaks that do not occur in close proximity to each other.
Knee
Allows you to set the rate at which the compressor reaches full compression once the threshold
has been exceeded. This parameter ranges from 0 (hardest response) to 200 (softest response).
Graph
Displays the response curve set by the Compressor’s Threshold, Ratio, and Knee settings. As
you adjust these parameters, refer to the graph to see how the shape of this curve changes. It
allows you to see the effect of your settings.
424
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
External Key
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key Listen
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Limiter AudioSuite Plug-In
The Limiter plug-in is used to prevent signal peaks from exceeding a chosen level so that
they don’t overload amplifiers or recording devices. Most limiters have ratios of 10:1 or
20:1, although some provide ratios of up to 100:1. Large ratios effectively limit the dynamic
range of the signal to a specific value by setting an absolute ceiling for the dynamic range.
Limiting is used to prevent short-term peaks from reaching their full amplitude. Used
carefully, limiting allows you to achieve higher average levels while avoiding overload
(clipping or distortion) by limiting some short-term transients in the source audio. To
prevent the ear from hearing the gain changes, use extremely short attack and release times.
Limiting is used to remove occasional peaks because gain reduction on successive peaks
wouldn’t be noticeable. If audio material contains many peaks, the threshold should be
raised and the gain manually reduced so that only occasional, extreme peaks are limited.
The Limiter’s ratio is internally set to 100:1 and the attack time is automatically set to 0
milliseconds. The Limiter is similar to heavy compression. It can be useful for reducing pops
and clicks, or for hard-limiting dynamic range for broadcast or band-limited media such as a
cassette.
Limiter Parameters
The following table lists the Limiter plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Indicates the level of the unprocessed input signal to the Limiter.
Output
Indicates the output level of the Limiter, including any gain compensation added through the
Gain parameter.
Reduction
Indicates the amount by which the signal is being attenuated.
Gain
Provides overall output Gain adjustment.
Threshold
Allows you to set the threshold level. Signals that exceed this level are limited. Signals that
are below it are unaffected.
425
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Attack
Allows you to set the Limiter’s attack time. The smaller the value, the faster the attack. The
faster the attack, the faster the Limiter applies attenuation to the signal. If you use fast attack
times and heavy limiting, you should use a proportionally longer release time, particularly
with material that contains many peaks in close proximity.
Release
Allows you to control how long it takes for the Limiter to be fully deactivated after the input
signal drops below the threshold level. If you use heavy limiting, you should use
proportionally longer release times.This prevents pumping, which can occur when the
Limiter is forced to jump back and forth between limited and unlimited signal levels.
Lengthening the release time helps smooth these changes in level by introducing a lag in the
ramp-up and ramp-down times of attenuation. Use shorter release times on material with few
peaks that do not occur in close proximity to each other.
Graph
Displays the response curve set by the Limiter’s Threshold setting. As you adjust this
parameter, refer to the graph to see how the shape of this curve changes. It allows you to see
the effect of your settings.
External Key
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key Listen
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Expander-Gate AudioSuite Plug-In
The Expander-Gate plug-in reduces noise by decreasing the gain of signals that fall below a
user-selectable threshold. Expanders are particularly useful for reducing noise or signal
leakage that creeps into recorded material as its level falls, which often occurs with
headphone leakage.
Expanders can be thought of as soft-noise gates because they provide a gentler way of
cutting off noisy low-level signals than the typically abrupt cutoff of a gate. If you want,
however, you can use this plug-in as a gate by setting the Ratio to its maximum value and
using short Attack, Decay, and Hold settings.
426
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Expander-Gate Parameters
The following table lists the Expander-Gate plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Reduction
Indicates the amount of signal reduction in dB.
Threshold
Allows you to set the threshold level. Signals that fall below the threshold are reduced in
gain. Signals that are above it are unaffected. (When you adjust the Threshold slider, be
sure that audio material is playing through the Expander-Gate to see changes reflected in
the Reduction meter.)
Ratio
Allows you to set the amount of expansion. If this parameter is set to 2:1, for example, it
lowers signals below the threshold by one half. At higher ratio levels (30:1 or 40:1, for
example) the Expander-Gate functions as a gate by reducing lower level signals
dramatically. As you adjust the Ratio parameter, refer to the built-in graph to see how the
shape of the expansion curve changes.
Attack
Allows you to set the Expander’s attack time. This parameter determines how quickly a
signal’s level is reduced once it falls below the threshold. This setting, along with the
Ratio setting, allows you to control the softness of the Expander’s gain reduction curve.
Hold
Allows you to specify a duration (in seconds or milliseconds) that the Expander-Gate
stays open after the initial attack cycle. This parameter can be used as a one-time
function to keep the Expander-Gate open for longer periods of time with a single
crossing of the threshold. It can also be used to prevent gate chatter, which might occur if
varying input levels near the threshold cause the Gate to open and close very rapidly.
Decay
Allows you to control how long it takes for the Gate to close after the input signal falls
below the threshold level and the hold time has passed.
Range
Sets the depth of the Gate when closed. This parameter has a maximum depth of –80 dB.
Setting the Gate to higher range levels allows more of the gated audio that falls below the
threshold to peek through the Gate at all times.
External Key
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key Listen
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key HPF
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key LPF
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Graph
Displays the response curve set by the Expander-Gate’s Threshold, Ratio, and Range
settings. As you adjust these parameters, refer to the graph to see how the shape of this
curve changes. It allows you to see the effect of your settings.
427
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Gate AudioSuite Plug-In
The Gate plug-in reduces noise by decreasing the gain of signals that fall below a userselectable threshold.
Gate Parameters
The following table lists the Gate plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Reduction
Indicates the amount of reduction in dB.
Threshold
Allows you to set the threshold level. Signals that exceed this level pass through. Signals
that are below it are gated, depending on the settings of the Attack, Hold, Decay, and
Range parameters.
Attack
Allows you to set the attack time of the Gate.
Hold
Allows you to specify a duration (in seconds or milliseconds) that the Gate stays open after
the initial attack cycle. This parameter can be used as a one-time function to keep the Gate
open for longer periods of time with a single crossing of the threshold. It can also be used
to prevent gate chatter, which might occur if varying input levels near the threshold cause
the Gate to open and close very rapidly.
Decay
Allows you to control how long it takes for the Gate to close after the signal falls below the
threshold level.
Range
Sets the depth of the Gate when closed. This parameter has a maximum depth of –80 dB.
Setting the Gate to higher range levels allows more of the gated audio that falls below the
threshold to peek through the gate at all times. This is useful for problems such as drum
leakage, where you might want to suppress the overall drum kit sound by a specific amount
while emphasizing the gated instrument such as a snare.
Graph
Displays the response curve set by the Gate’s Threshold and Range settings. As you adjust
these parameters, refer to the graph to see how the shape of this curve changes. It allows
you to see the effect of your settings.
External Key
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
Key Listen
This parameter has no effect on the AudioSuite plug-ins.
428
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
DeEsser AudioSuite Plug-In
The DeEsser plug-in isolates and attenuates sibilants (“ess” sounds: “s,” “sh,” and “ch”) and
other high-frequency distortions. It removes these sounds by using a fast-acting compression
monitored by a Threshold control that sets the frequency above which compression starts
and a Frequency control that sets the frequency band in which the plug-in operates.
n
The DeEsser is a monophonic-only plug-in.
Using DeEsser Effectively
n
For best results, use the DeEsser before any other compressor or limiter plug-in.
Because too much “de-essing” can make audio clips sound lifeless, apply the plug-in to
individual tracks rather than entire mixes. To improve audio quality in your project:
•
Set the Frequency slider to remove sibilants (typically in the 4– to 10–kHz range) and
not other parts of the signal. This prevents de-essing from changing the original
character of the audio material.
•
Set the Threshold control high enough to trigger de-essing by sibilants only. If you set
the Threshold too low, a loud, nonsibilant section of audio material could cause
unwanted gain reduction or overattenuation of sibilants.
•
Automate the Threshold control so that it is lower on soft sections when the audio
material has both very loud and very soft passages.
DeEsser Parameters
The following table lists the DeEsser plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Indicates the level of the unprocessed input signal to the DeEsser.
Output
Indicates the output level of the DeEsser.
Reduction
Indicates the amount of gain reduction in decibels. It remains at the 0-dB level when the
input signal is below the threshold.
Threshold
Sets the threshold level. Signals that exceed this level will be compressed; signals that are
below it will be unaffected. A setting of 0 dB is equivalent to no de-essing.
429
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Frequency
Sets the frequency band in which the DeEsser operates. Frequencies in the specified range
will be gain-reduced. To find the optimum Frequency setting, slide this control back and
forth during playback.
Key Listen
Monitors the sibilant peaks used by the DeEsser as a key input to trigger compression. This
is useful for listening only to the sibilants and fine-tuning settings to remove them.
EQ AudioSuite Plug-Ins
There are four EQ plug-ins:
•
1-Band EQ II
•
4-Band EQ II
•
1-Band EQ III
•
7-Band EQ III
The EQ plug-ins provide a set of high-quality options for adjusting the frequency spectrum
of audio material
EQ II Parameters
The following table lists the EQ II plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Allows you to control the input gain of the EQ to prevent the possibility of clipping.
Phase Invert
Allows you to invert the phase (polarity) of the input signal in order to change frequency
response between “multi-miked” sources (a common technique for “miking” a guitar
amplifier), or to correct for miswired microphone cables.
Type
Allows you to select an EQ type (High-Pass, Low-Shelf, Peak, High-Shelf or Low-Pass).
Gain
Allows you to control the amount that the selected frequencies are cut or boosted (for Peak,
High-Shelf, and Low-Shelf only).
Freq
Allows you to designate the center of the frequency region to be cut or boosted.
Q
(Peak only) Allows you to set the bandwidth of the Peak filter. Higher values represent
narrower bandwidths. Lower values represent wider bandwidths.
Bypass
Bypasses the EQ. The 4-Band EQ II has individual Bypass buttons for each band (black
buttons with EQ curve icons).
430
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
High-Pass
Attenuates all frequencies below the selected cutoff frequency setting at a rate of 12 dB per
octave while allowing all others above the frequency to pass through. For this reason, no
gain control is available for this filter. High-pass filters can be useful for removing lowfrequency rumble or for thinning out the lower end of a sound for special effects, such as a
“telephone simulation” effect.
Low-Shelf
Produces a lift or a cut below the specified frequency.
Peak
Boosts or cuts only those frequencies around the selected center frequency. The Q button
sets the bandwidth of the Peak filter, which determines the width of the filter’s overall slope
— from a broad “bell” shape to a narrow notch. Broad curves tend to be most useful for
musical applications. Narrow curves are useful for special-purpose processing such as hum
removal. Higher values represent narrower bandwidths. Lower values represent wider
bandwidths.
High-Shelf
Produces a lift or a cut at the specified frequency and above it.
Low-Pass
Attenuates all frequencies above the selected cutoff frequency setting at a rate of 12 dB per
octave while allowing all others below the frequency to pass through. For this reason, no
gain control is available for this filter.
1-Band EQ III Parameters
The following table lists the 1-Band EQ III plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Sets the input gain of the plug-in before EQ processing, letting you make up gain or prevent
clipping at the plug-in input stage.
Input Polarity
control
Inverts the phase (polarity) of the input signal, to help compensate for phase anomalies
occurring in multi-microphone environments, or because of mis-wired balanced
connections.
Type
Allows you to select an EQ type (High-Pass, Notch, High-Shelf, Low-Shelf, Peak, or LowPass). The name of the type you select appears in the text field.
Filter
431
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Q
Description
(Peak and Notch) Controls the width of the EQ band. Higher values represent narrower
bandwidths. Lower values represent wider bandwidths.
(High-Shelf and Low-Shelf) Changes the Q of the shelving filter. Higher Q values represent
steeper shelving curves. Lower Q values represent broader shelving curves.
(High-Pass and Low-Pass) Lets you select from any of the following Slope values: 6 dB, 12
dB, 18 dB, or 24 db per octave.
Freq
Allows you to set the center frequency (Peak, High-Shelf, Low-Shelf, and Notch) or the
cutoff frequency (High-Pass and Low-Pass).
Gain
Allows you to control the amount that the selected frequencies are cut or boosted (for HighShelf, Low-Shelf, and Peak only).
Frequency Graph
Display
Shows a control dot that indicates the center frequency or cutoff frequency for the currently
selected filter type, and a frequency response curve. You can adjust the parameters by
dragging the control dot.
7-Band EQ III Parameters
The following table lists the 7-Band EQ III plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
In and Out meters Show peak signal levels before and after EQ processing. Green indicates nominal levels.
Yellow indicates pre-clipping levels, starting at –6 dB below full scale. Red indicates full
scale (clipping) levels.
The clip indicators to the right of each meter indicate clipping at the input of output stage of
the plug-in. Click a clip indicator to clear it.
Input
Sets the input gain of the plug-in before EQ processing, letting you make up gain or prevent
clipping at the plug-in input stage.
Input Polarity
control
Inverts the phase (polarity) of the input signal, to help compensate for phase anomalies
occurring in multi-microphone environments, or because of mis-wired balanced
connections.
Output
Sets the output gain after EQ processing, letting you make up gain or prevent clipping on the
channel where the plug-in is being used.
432
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Bands
The plug-in has separate parameter controls for each of the following 7 bands:
•
High-Pass/Low-Notch (HPF)
•
Low-Pass/High-Notch (LPF)
•
Low Shelf/Low Peak (LF)
•
Low-Mid Peak (LMF)
•
Mid-Peak (MF)
•
High-Mid Peak (HMF)
•
High Shelf/High Peak (HF)
Band Enable
button
Toggles the band in and out of the circuit. When a band’s Enable button is highlighted, the
band is in circuit. When a band’s Enable button is dark gray, the band is bypassed.
Type selectors
The HPF, LPF, LF, and HF band sections have type selectors that toggle between the two
available filter types for that section, as follows:
•
High-Pass Filter (HPF band) — Attenuates all frequencies below the Frequency setting
at the selected slope while letting all frequencies above pass through.
•
Low-Notch EQ (HPF band) — Attenuates a narrow band of frequencies centered around
the Frequency setting. The width of the attenuated band is determined by the Q setting.
•
Low-Pass Filter (LPF band) — Attenuates all frequencies above the Frequency setting at
the selected slope while letting all frequencies below pass through.
•
High-Notch EQ (LPF band) — Attenuates a narrow band of frequencies centered around
the Frequency setting. The width of the attenuated band is determined by the Q setting.
•
Low-Shelf EQ (LF band) — Boosts or cuts frequencies at and below the Frequency
setting. The amount of boost or cut is determined by the Gain setting. The Q setting
determines the shape of the shelving curve.
•
Low Peak EQ (LF band) — Boosts or cuts a band of frequencies centered around the
Frequency setting. The width of the selected band is determined by the Q setting.
•
High-Shelf EQ (LF band) — Boosts or cuts frequencies at and above the Frequency
setting. The amount of boost or cut is determined by the Gain setting. The Q setting
determines the shape of the shelving curve.
•
High Peak EQ (LF band) — Boosts or cuts a band of frequencies centered around the
Frequency setting. The width of the selected band is determined by the Q setting.
433
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Q
Description
(Peak and Notch bands) Controls the width of the EQ band. Higher values represent
narrower bandwidths. Lower values represent wider bandwidths.
(Shelf bands) Changes the Q of the shelving filter. Higher Q values represent steeper
shelving curves. Lower Q values represent broader shelving curves.
(High-Pass and Low-Pass bands) Lets you select from any of the following Slope values: 6
dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, or 24 db per octave.
Freq
Allows you to set the center frequency (Peak, Shelf, and Notch EQs) or the cutoff frequency
(High-Pass and Low-Pass filters).
Gain
Allows you to control the amount that the selected frequencies are cut or boosted (for Shelf
and Peak only).
Frequency Graph
Display
Shows a color-coded control dot that corresponds to the color of the Gain control for each
band, and a frequency response curve. You can adjust the parameters by dragging one or
more of the control dots.
Flanger AudioSuite Plug-In
The Flanger plug-in combines a time-delayed, pitch-shifted copy of an audio signal with
itself. The Flanger differs from other digital flangers in that it uses a through-zero flanging
algorithm that results in a truer tape-like flange. This technique delays the source signal very
slightly (approximately 256 samples), and then modulates the delayed signal back and forth
in time in relation to the source signal, passing through its zero point on the way.
The Flanger plug-in is ideal for thickening and adding a swirling, moving quality to guitars
and other instruments. The following table lists the Flanger plug-in parameters:
Parameter
Description
Input Level
Allows you to adjust the input volume of the flanger to prevent clipping or increase the level of
the processed signal. This slider is set to a default of +3 dB. If your source audio has been
recorded very close to peak level, this +3 dB default setting could cause clipping. Use this
control to reduce the input level.
Sum Inputs
button
When you use the Flanger plug-in in Stereo mode, a Sum Inputs button appears next to the
right channel Input Level slider. Clicking the Sum Inputs button sums the source input signals
(regardless of whether the input is mono or stereo) before processing them.The source signal
then appears in the center of the stereo field, and the processed signal is output in stereo. When
you click the Sum Inputs button, the LFO waveform on the right channel is automatically
phase inverted to enhance the mono-stereo effect.
434
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Mix
Allows you to adjust the balance between the Dry (source) signal and the Wet (processed)
signal, giving you control over the depth of the effect.
High Pass
Filter
Controls the cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter, allowing you to attenuate the frequency
content of the feedback signal and the frequency response of the flanging. The higher the
setting, the more low frequencies are removed from the feedback signal.
LFO Rate
Allows you to adjust the rate of the low frequency oscillator (LFO) applied to the delayed
signal as modulation. The higher the setting, the more rapid the modulation. Use the LFO
Waveform selector to select either a sine wave or a triangle wave as a modulation source.
LFO Width
Allows you to adjust the intensity of the LFO applied to the delayed signal as modulation. The
higher the setting, the more intense the modulation.
Feedback
Controls the amount of feedback applied from the output of the delayed signal back into its
input. Negative settings provide a more intense effect.
LFO
Waveform
Selects a sine wave or triangle wave for the LFO. This affects the character of the modulation.
The sine wave has a gentler ramp and peak than the triangle wave.
Invert AudioSuite Plug-In
The Invert plug-in reverses the polarity of the selected audio. All positive sample amplitude
values are made negative, and all negative amplitudes are made positive. This process is
useful for permanently altering the phase (polarity) relationship of tracks. Inverting can be
useful when mixing because it alters frequency response between source tracks recorded
with multiple microphones and also allows you to correct for audio that was recorded out of
phase.
Duplicate AudioSuite Plug-In
The Duplicate plug-in creates a new master clip from a selected audio master clip. The plugin uses the IN and OUT points on the selected clip to define the boundaries of the new clip.
This plug-in applies only if you are using the Create New Master Clips features of the
AudioSuite plug-ins.
435
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Delay AudioSuite Plug-In
The Delay plug-in provides time-delay-based effects.
Delay Parameters
The following table lists the Delay plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Input
Controls the input volume of the delay to prevent clipping.
Mix
Allows you to control the balance between the delayed signal and the original signal. If
you are using a delay for flanging or chorusing, you can control the depth of the effect
somewhat with the Mix setting.
LPF (Low-Pass
Filter)
Controls the cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter. This parameter allows you to attenuate
the high-frequency content of the feedback signal. The lower the setting, the more high
frequencies are attenuated.
Delay
Sets the delay time between the original signal and the delayed signal.
Depth
Controls the depth of the modulation applied to the delayed signal.
Rate
Controls the rate of modulation of the delayed signal.
Feedback
Controls the amount of feedback applied from the output of the delay back into its input.
Also controls the number of repetitions of the delayed signal. Negative Feedback settings
give a more intense “tunnel-like” sound to flanging effects.
Tempo
Sets the desired tempo in beats per minute. When a specific Duration is selected, moving
this control will affect the Delay setting.
Meter
Use this to enter either simple or compound time signatures. The default time signature is
4/4.
Duration
Click one or more of the buttons to specify a desired delay from a musical perspective. You
can click one of the note value buttons (whole note, half note, quarter note, eighth note,
sixteenth note). If necessary, click the Triplet modifier or Dot modifier button to dot the
selected note value or make it a triplet.
Groove
Provides fine adjustment of the delay in percentages of a 1:4 subdivision of the beat. You
can use this parameter to add “swing” by slightly offsetting the delay from the precise beat
of the track.
436
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Multi-Tap Delay AudioSuite Plug-In
The Multi-Tap Delay plug-in adds up to four independently controlled delays (or “taps”) to
the original audio signal. By allowing you to control the delay time and number of
repetitions of each tap individually, the Multi-Tap Delay plug-in provides greater flexibility
than standard single-delay devices.
The Multi-Tap Delay plug-in is ideal for adding spatialization or complex rhythmic echo
effects to virtually any instrument or sound.
Multi-Tap Delay Parameters
The following table lists the Multi-Tap Delay plug-in parameters:
Parameter
Description
Gain
Controls the input level of each of the four delay lines for individual delay taps. Adjust Gain to
prevent clipping or increase the level of the processed signal.
Feedback
Controls the amount of feedback applied from the output of the delay into its input. It also
controls the number of repetitions of the delayed signal. For the feedback parameter to
function, the Gain slider must be raised above its lowest setting.
Pan
Controls the apparent location of each tap in the stereo field.
Delay
Sets the delay time between the original signal and the delayed signal. The higher the setting,
the longer the delay. This parameter is adjustable from 0 to 1500 milliseconds (1.5 seconds).
Mix
Allows you to adjust the balance between the source signal and the processed signal, giving
you control over the depth of the effect.
Sum Inputs
button
When you use the Multi-Tap Delay plug-in in Stereo mode, a Sum Inputs button appears next
to the Mix sliders. Clicking the Sum Inputs button sums the source input signals (regardless of
whether the input is mono or stereo) before processing them.The source signal then appears in
the center of the stereo field, and the processed signal is output in stereo.
437
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Normalize AudioSuite Plug-In
In cases where a sound file has been recorded with too little amplitude, the Normalize
plug-in ensures that the inherent dynamics of the performance remain unchanged while the
overall volume level of the passage is raised.
The controls let you specify how close to maximum level (the clipping threshold) the peak
level of your selection or file is boosted. You can enter this information in the following
ways:
t
Enter a numeric decibel value below the clipping threshold.
t
Enter a percentage of the threshold.
t
Drag the slider.
t
Press and hold the Ctrl key, then before you drag the slider to fine-adjust.
Use the rms and peak buttons to switch the calibration of normalizing between RMS and
Peak modes. Peak normalizes the signal at the maximum possible level without clipping.
RMS normalizes the input signal at a level consistent with the root-mean-square value, or
the effective average level of the selected material.
Gain AudioSuite Plug-In
Gain allows you to boost or lower amplitudes in a file or selection by a specified amount.
Use Gain for smoothing out undesirable peaks and other dynamic inconsistencies.
Specify the desired gain level by doing one of the following:
t
Enter a numeric decibel value.
t
Enter a percentage value.
t
Drag the slider.
t
Press and hold the Ctrl key, then before you drag the slider to fine-adjust.
Use the rms and peak buttons to switch the calibration of gain adjustment between RMS and
Peak modes. Peak adjusts the gain of the signal to the maximum possible level without
clipping. RMS adjusts the input signal to a level consistent with the root-mean-square value,
or the effective average level of the selected material.
438
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Ping-Pong Delay AudioSuite Plug-In
The Ping-Pong Delay plug-in modifies an audio signal by adding a controllable delay to the
original signal. It is ideal for adding spatialization and creating a characteristic ping-pong
echo effect.
Ping-Pong Delay Parameters
The following table lists the Ping-Pong Delay plug-in parameters:
Parameter
Description
Gain
Adjusts the input volume of the Ping-Pong Delay to prevent clipping or increase the level of
the processed signal.
Sum Inputs
button
When you use the Ping-Pong Delay plug-in in Stereo mode, a Sum Inputs button appears next
to the Gain sliders. Clicking the Sum Inputs button sums the source input signals (regardless
of whether the input is mono or stereo) before processing them.The source signal then
appears in the center of the stereo field, and the processed signal is output in stereo.
Mix
Allows you to adjust the balance between the source signal and the processed signal, giving
you control over the depth of the effect.
Delay
Sets the delay time between the original signal and the delayed signal. The higher the setting,
the longer the delay. This parameter is adjustable from 0 to 1500 milliseconds (1.5 seconds).
Lowpass Filter
Controls the cutoff frequency of the Lowpass Filter, allowing you to attenuate the high
frequency content of the feedback signal. The lower the setting, the more high frequencies are
removed from the feedback signal. The range of the Lowpass Filter is 20 Hz to 19.86 kHz,
with a maximum value of Off (which effectively means bypass).
Feedback
Controls the amount of feedback applied from the output of the delay into its input. It also
controls the number of repetitions of the delayed signal.
Cross-Feedback Feeds the delayed signals to their opposite channels. The result is a stereo echo that pingpongs back and forth between the right and left channels.
Reverse AudioSuite Plug-In
Reversed sounds are useful effects in many music and film and video projects. The Reverse
plug-in lets you perform this type of processing very easily.
439
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
DC Offset Removal AudioSuite Plug-In
The DC Offset Removal plug-in removes DC offset from your audio files. The term “DC
offset” describes a specific type of audio artifact that might appear in digital audio signals.
DC Offset can be identified in a waveform overview because it appears to have a nearvertical fade-in with a constant or “steady-state” offset from zero when the file is actually
“silent” (it contains no audible audio). The DC Offset plug-in can help remove (or at least
reduce) the DC offset from your source audio files.
Signal Generator AudioSuite Plug-In
The Signal Generator plug-in produces audio test tones in a variety of frequencies,
waveforms, and amplitudes. The plug-in has the following options:
•
Frequency: This option sets the frequency of the signal in hertz. Values range from a
low of 20 Hz to a high of 20 kHz.
•
Level: This option sets the amplitude of the signal in decibels. Values range from a low
of –95 dB to a high of 0.0 dB.
•
Signal: These buttons allow you to select the waveform. The waveform choices are sine,
square, sawtooth, triangle, white noise, and pink noise.
Use the rms and peak buttons to switch the calibration of the generated signal between RMS
and Peak modes. Peak generates the signal at the maximum possible level without clipping.
RMS generates the signal at levels consistent with the root-mean-square value, or the
effective average level of the signal.
n
The Signal Generator produces a tone as soon as it is inserted on a track. To mute the tone,
click the Bypass button.
Time Compression Expansion AudioSuite Plug-In
The Time Compression Expansion plug-in allows you to adjust the duration of any selected
regions by increasing or decreasing the selection’s length without changing pitch. This
function is particularly important in audio postproduction applications because it allows you
to adjust sounds to specific time lengths or timecode durations for synchronization.
n
440
To change duration (length) and pitch simultaneously, use the Pitch Shift plug-in.
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Master Clip Mode Parallel Processing
The Time Compression Expansion plug-in allows two tracks to be time-compressed or
expanded as a “stereo pair,” so that the two sides of the stereo signal are processed relative to
each other.
The Time Compression Expansion plug-in has special parameters that let you enter time
compression or expansion values in different formats. They are located in the Source and
Destination columns, and also include the Ratio slider. Additional controls for fine-tuning
the compression and expansion process are also included.
To use the special control features:
t
Press and hold the Ctrl key to engage slider fine-tune mode.
t
Alt+click a field or slider to reset its default value.
Time Compression Expansion Parameters
The following table lists the Time Compression Expansion plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Source and
Destination
The Source text boxes display the length of the current selection before processing in
each of the listed formats. All the text boxes in both columns are constantly active, and a
change made to one value is immediately reflected in the values displayed in the other
text boxes.
The text boxes in the Destination column display and control the length of the selection
after processing using the current settings. You can enter the length of the Destination file
by double-clicking the appropriate text box in the Destination column. Type the number
of samples in min:secs:msec format or type timecode values as start and end locations.
All the Destination text boxes are constantly updated, and a change made to one value is
immediately reflected in the values displayed in the other text boxes.
You can also enter a new tempo, bars:beats:ticks length, or time signature for regions that
have tempo or Bars & Beats settings. This can be any region associated with a MIDI
Metronome value (such as an overdub recorded to a MIDI click) or regions that have been
processed with the Pro Tools Identify Beat command.
The Ratio slider lets you set the destination length in relation to the source length.
Dragging the slider to the right increases the length of the destination file, and dragging
the slider to the left decreases its length.
The controls below the bar line allow you to fine-tune the time compression and
expansion process. They include the Crossfade, Min Pitch, and Accuracy sliders.
441
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Crossfade
The Crossfade slider allows you to manually adjust the crossfade length in milliseconds
to optimize performance of the Time Compression Expansion plug-in according to the
type of audio material you are processing. The Time Compression Expansion plug-in
achieves length modification by replicating or subtracting very small portions of audio
material and very quickly crossfading between these alterations in the waveform of the
audio material.
Crossfade length essentially affects the amount of smoothing performed on audio
material to prevent audio artifacts such as clicks. In general, small narrow-range time
(length) changes require longer crossfades while larger changes in length require shorter
crossfades. The disadvantage of long crossfade times is that they smooth the signal,
including any transients. While this can be desirable for audio material such as vocals, it
is not appropriate for material with sharp transients such as drums or percussion.
The default setting for this parameter is Auto (leftmost position), in which crossfade
times are set automatically according to the percentage of change in length for the current
process. This setting should be sufficient for most applications; however, you can use this
slider to manually adjust and optimize crossfade times, if necessary. For audio material
with sharper attack transients, use shorter crossfade times. For audio material with softer
attack transients, use longer crossfade times with a range in values of 1 to 200 ms.
Min Pitch
The Min Pitch slider lets you select the minimum (lowest) pitch that is used in the plugin’s calculations during the time compression and expansion process. The slider has a
range of 40 Hz to 1000 Hz. By controlling the minimum pitch, you can focus the time
compression and expansion process for maximum efficiency — it all depends on the
audio’s spectral shape.
This slider should be set lower when you process bass guitar or another instrument with a
similarly low range. Set the min pitch higher when processing instruments such as snare
drums, violins, and other higher range instruments and sounds. Experiment with
combinations of the other fine-tune controls in relation to the Min Pitch slider.
Accuracy
Use the Accuracy slider to prioritize the processing resources allocated to audio quality
(sound) or timing (rhythm). Dragging the slider toward sound generally results in better
sonic quality and fewer audio artifacts. Dragging the slider toward rhythm puts the
emphasis on keeping the tempo consistent. When working with loops, listen carefully and
adjust accuracy until you find the setting that keeps timing solid within the region. Start
and end times are precise, but the perception of beats might be “shuffled” if the Accuracy
slider’s rhythm setting is too low.
smallest time ratio allowed for time compression and expansion is 0.25.
c The
The largest time ratio allowed is 4.0.
a selection before applying the Time Compression Expansion plug-in
n Normalizing
can sometimes produce better-sounding results.
442
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Pitch Shift AudioSuite Plug-In
The Pitch Shift plug-in allows you to adjust the pitch of any source audio file with or without
a change in its duration. This powerful function allows sounds to be transposed a maximum
of a full octave up or down in pitch with or without altering playback speed.
Edit the Pitch Shift parameters by double-clicking and typing in any Destination text box or
by dragging a slider to adjust. All Pitch Shift plug-in controls are linked, so that changing
one changes the others.
Pitch Shift Parameters
The following table lists the Pitch Shift plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Gain
The Gain controls set the input level, in tenths of a decibel. The input level should be set
so that the plug-in can adequately handle amplitude peaks in the selection. Dragging the
slider to the right increases gain, and dragging the slider to the left decreases gain.
Coarse and Fine
Adjust the pitch by dragging either of the two faders, or by typing values in the Coarse
and Fine text boxes. The Coarse slider transposes in semitones (half steps); the Fine
slider transposes in cents (hundredths of a semitone).
Ratio
The Ratio slider lets you set the amount of transposition (pitch change). Dragging the
slider to the right raises the pitch of the processed file, and dragging the slider to the left
decreases its pitch. Press and hold the Ctrl key when you drag the slider to fine-adjust.
Crossfade, Min
Pitch, Accuracy
For information on these parameters, see the parameters table in “Time Compression
Expansion AudioSuite Plug-In” on page 440.
Time Correction
Clicking the Time Correction check box allows you to enable or disable time correction.
can deselect the Time Correction check box if you are using the Create
c You
New Master Clips feature of the AudioSuite plug-ins. The Time Correction
check box must be selected, however, when you are applying AudioSuite plugins to audio clips in the Timeline.
If the Time Correction check box is deselected, it has the effect of “permanently
varispeeding” your audio file. Like working with tape, the file’s duration is compressed
or extended according to the settings of the Coarse and Fine controls. Playback speed
increases proportionally as the sound file is transposed up in pitch and decreases
proportionally as it is transposed down in pitch, just like a tape recorder that is
varispeeding.
Consider that altering a file in this way has little detrimental effect on the fidelity of
audio files, whereas time correction can affect fidelity in a pronounced way.
443
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Reference Pitch
The Reference Pitch feature generates a sine wave tone that you can adjust to match a
selected portion of audio material, and then use as an audible reference when pitchshifting other audio material in your session.
To use the Reference Pitch feature:
1. Select the audio material you want to use as a pitch reference. Click the Preview
button to begin playback of the selected audio.
2. Click the Reference Pitch button to activate the reference sine wave tone.
3. Adjust the Note and Detune settings to match the reference tone to the pitch of the
audio playback. Adjust the Level setting to change the relative volume of the
reference tone. It might also be helpful to switch the Reference Pitch on and off to
compare pitch.
4. Select the audio material to be pitch shifted.
Adjust the Coarse and Fine controls to match the pitch of the audio playback to the
reference pitch.
Time Shift AudioSuite Plug-In
The Time Shift plug-in provides high quality time compression and expansion algorithms
and formant-correct pitch-shifting. Time Shift is ideal for music production, sound design,
and post-production applications. You can use it to manipulate audio loops for tempo
matching or to transpose vocal tracks using formant-correct pitch-shifting, or you can use it
in audio postproduction for pullup and pulldown conversions as well as for adjusting audio
to specific time or SMPTE durations for synchronization purposes.
The Time Shift plug-in has special parameters that let you enter time compression or
expansion values in different formats and edit the pitch shift parameters displayed in the
plug-in window. Time Shift plug-in controls are organized in four parts: Audio, Time,
Formant/Transient, and Pitch.
444
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Time Shift Parameters
The following table lists the Time Shift plug-in parameters.
Parameter
Description
Audio
You use the Audio parameter controls to select the most appropriate time compression
and expansion mode for the type of material you want to process, and to attenuate the
gain of the processed audio to avoid clipping.
Audio parameter controls allow you to select the following Mode settings to determine
the correct time compression and pitch shift algorithms:
•
Monophonic — for processing monophonic sounds (such as a vocal melody)
•
Polyphonic — for processing complex sounds (such as a multipart musical selection)
•
Rhythmic — for processing percussive sounds (such as a mix or drum loop)
•
Varispeed — for linking time and pitch change for tape-like pitch and speed change
effects, and postproduction workflows
You can also select the following frequency Range settings:
•
Low — for low-range material, such as a bass guitar
•
Mid — for mid-range material, such as male vocals
•
High — for material with a high fundamental frequency, such as female vocals
•
Wide — for more complex material that covers a broad frequency spectrum
n
In Polyphonic mode, Wide is the default Range setting and is usually best for all
material. In Monophonic mode, Mid is the default Range setting and usually
matches the range of most monophonic material. Range settings are not available
when you select either Rhythmic mode or Varispeed mode.
The Audio Gain control attenuates the input level to avoid clipping. Adjust the Gain
control from 0.0 dB to –6.0 dB to avoid clipping in the processed signal.
The Clip indicator is active when clipping occurs in the processed signal. If the processed
signal clips, remove the AudioSuite plug-in effect, attenuate the input gain using the Gain
control, and then reapply the plug-in.
The Level indicator displays the level of the output signal, which uses the full range of
plasma-level meter colors.
445
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Time
You use the Time parameter controls to specify the amount of time compression or
expansion you want to apply.
The Original column displays the Start and End times, and Length of the edit selection.
Times are displayed in units of the timebase selected in the Units menu.
The Processed column displays the target End time and Length of the processed signal.
Times are displayed in units of the timebase selected in the Units menu. You can click the
Processed End and Length text boxes to type the desired values. These values update
automatically when you are adjusting the Time control.
The Tempo row displays the Original Tempo and Processed Tempo in beats per minute
(bpm). You can click the Original Tempo and Processed Tempo text boxes to type the
desired values. The Processed Tempo value updates automatically when adjusting the
Time control.
You use the Units menu to select the desired timebase for the Original and Processed time
fields:
•
Bars|Beats
•
Min:Sec
•
Time Code
•
Feet+Frames
•
Samples
The Shift text box displays the target time compression or expansion as a percentage of
the original. You can adjust the Time control, or click the Shift text box and type the
desired value. Time can be shifted from 25.00% to 400.00% of the original speed (or 4 to
1/4 times the original duration). The default setting is 100.00%, or no time shift.
Selecting 25.00% results in 4 times the original duration and 400.00% results in 1/4 of the
original duration.
n
446
The Shift field displays up to 2 decimal places, but you can type in as many
decimal places as you require (up to the IEEE standard). While the display rounds
to 2 decimal places, the actual time shift is applied based on the number typed in
the Shift text box. This is useful for postproduction pullup and pulldown factors.
Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Parameter
Description
Formant/Transient You use the Formant or Transient parameter controls to adjust either the amount of
formant shift or the transient detection parameters, depending upon which mode you have
selected in the Audio section.
n
The Formant parameter is available only when you select Monophonic as the
Audio mode. The Transient section is available with slightly different controls,
depending on whether you select Polyphonic or Rhythmic as the Audio mode.
The Formant section provides a single control for transposing the formants of the selected
audio by –24.00 semitones (–2 octaves) to +24.00 semitones (+2 octaves). You can
specify a Formant value by adjusting the Formant Shift control or typing a value in the
Shift text box.
Transient material tends to change its content quickly in time, as opposed to parts of the
sound which are more sustained. You can use the controls in the Transient section to
adjust the following:
•
Threshold — the transient detection threshold in the processed audio when you are
time-stretching; you can set the threshold from 0.0 dB to –40.0 dB (the default is –6.0
dB)
•
Window — the analysis window length for processing audio (Polyphonic mode
only); you can set the window length from 6.0 milliseconds (ms) to 185.0 ms (the
default is 18.0 ms) by adjusting the Window control or typing in the Window text box
•
Decay Rate — the amount of decay, or audio fade, from a transient that is heard in the
processed audio when you are time-stretching (Rhythmic mode only)
The Follow button enables an envelope follower that simulates the original acoustics of
the audio being stretched (Polyphonic mode only). Click the Follow button to enable or
disable envelope following.
Pitch
You use the Pitch parameter controls to shift the pitch of the audio. You can pitch shift
audio by using the Transpose and Shift text boxes:
•
Transpose — displays the transposition amount in semitones; you can transpose pitch
from –24.00 semitones (–2 octaves) to +24.00 semitones (+2 octaves)
•
Shift — displays the pitch shift amount as a percentage; you can pitch shift from
25.00% (–2 octaves) to +400.00% (+2 octaves)
n
In Monophonic mode, pitch shift can also be formant-correct.
447
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Non-Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Non-core AudioSuite plug-ins are also supported, but are not installed with your Avid
editing application. They are located in the Goodies folder. These plug-ins can be used on a
trial basis and then purchased through Digidesign. All others are not supported at this time.
The supplied non-core AudioSuite plug-ins are briefly described in this topic. The plug-ins
have their own detailed documentation. For more information, see the following Web site:
www.digidesign.com.
Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction (DINR) — Broadband Noise Reduction
(BNR)
The BNR feature of the Digidesign Intelligent Noise Reduction™ (DINR™) plug-in provides
broadband and narrow-band noise reduction for suppressing unwanted elements such as tape
hiss, air-conditioning rumble, and microphone preamplifier noise.
Focusrite d3
Focusrite® d3 is a high-quality, dynamic processor plug-in that contains a compressor and a
limiter. The d3 compressor reduces the dynamic range of audio signals that exceed a
user-selectable threshold by a specific amount. The d3 does this by reducing output levels
when input levels increase above the threshold.
The d3 limiter operates as a fast-attack compressor with a high compression ratio. Like the
compressor, the limiter is activated when the signal exceeds a user-selectable threshold. The
limiter then compresses any signal above the selected threshold to the lower threshold limit
that you have set.
There are two versions of the plug-in:
•
ff d3 Mono, which operates on channels (tracks) separately.
•
ff d3 Stereo, which operates on a composite of the two channels of the stereo signal. It
prevents image shift when signal levels differ between the two channels.
Maxim
The Maxim™ plug-in performs peak limiting and sound maximizing. Maxim takes
advantage of the random-access nature of disk-based recording to anticipate peaks in audio
material and preserve their transient attacks when performing reduction. It helps to preserve
the character of the original audio signal without clipping peaks or introducing distortion.
448
Non-Core AudioSuite Plug-Ins
Digidesign D-Fi
The set of D-Fi™ plug-ins provides analog synthesizer effects:
•
Lo-Fi™ adds noise generation, bit-rate reduction, distortion, and saturation to sound.
•
Sci-Fi™ adds analog synthesizer-type ring modulation, frequency modulation, and
variable frequency resonator.
•
Recti-Fi™ generates new harmonics and subharmonics through waveform rectification.
•
Vari-Fi™ adds tape and turntable “start up” and “slow down” effects.
449
Chapter 14 Using AudioSuite Plug-Ins
450
Chapter 15
Exporting and Transferring Material:
Advanced
You can export files for use with another system, another application, or another platform.
Your Avid video-based editing system provides tools for exporting clips and sequences in
various formats. The following topics provide advanced information on exporting:
•
Exporting Using Send To Templates
•
Exporting OMFI and AAF Files
•
Exporting Projects and Bins Using AFE Files
•
Exporting Video in DV Stream Format
•
Exporting QuickTime Movies
•
Exporting As an AVI File
•
Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for QuickTime on Other Systems
•
Exporting from a Third-Party QuickTime or AVI Application
•
Exporting as Windows Media
•
Exporting Tracks As Audio Files
•
Exporting As a Graphic File
•
Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices
For basic information about exporting, see “Exporting and Transferring Material: Basics” in
the Help or the Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
451
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Exporting Using Send To Templates
The Send To feature is the quickest and simplest way to perform most common export tasks.
Send To enables you to send sequences or master clips from your Avid editing system to
other applications, automating your workflow.
The Send To option provides you with a choice of several pre-defined templates to
streamline your workflow. These templates are set to default parameters, customized for the
specific workflow. In many instances you can choose to automatically launch the application
to which you are sending your clip or sequence.
Avid recommends you use the pre-defined template default settings, which have been
qualified by Avid.
To use the predefined templates:
1. Select a sequence in a bin.
2. Select File > Send To.
3. Select the desired Send To template option.
4. Click Set and choose a destination folder for the exported files.
5. Click OK.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
For more details about individual Send To options, see the following topics:
n
452
•
Send To DigiDelivery
•
Send To Digidesign Pro Tools
•
Send to DVD Authoring
•
Send to DVD One Step
•
Send to Sorenson Squeeze
•
Send To Avid DS
•
Send To Third-Party Applications
An Avid Studio products Send To submenu might appear in your editing application, but is
applicable only when running an Avid Studio package.
Exporting Using Send To Templates
Send To DigiDelivery
You can export a sequence directly to DigiDelivery®, the file-exchange service from Avid
Digidesign®. You must have a DigiDelivery account to deliver your exported sequence. For
information about obtaining an account, go to the Avid DigiDesign web site,
www.digidesign.com, and select Products > DigiDelivery.
To export directly to DigiDelivery:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a sequence in a bin.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Select File > Send To > DigiDelivery.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > DigiDelivery.
The DigiDelivery template options appear.
4. Select one of the options in the following table.
Send To DigiDelivery Options
Option
Description
Avid Video - Embed Audio
Select this option to send to a Digidesign Pro Tools® system that supports
playing back Avid video. The Pro Tools system has either an Avid Mojo or a
Digi V10 for video playback.
A video mixdown of the tracks is created at DV 25; the audio is consolidated
and embedded into the AAF file.
QuickTime - Embed Audio
Select this option to send to a Digidesign Pro Tools system that supports
QuickTime video only. The system does not have an Avid Mojo or a Digi V10.
A QuickTime movie of video is created; the audio is consolidated and
embedded into the AAF file.
453
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
The Send To dialog box opens with the template you selected.
The Filename text box displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose, and Auto
Launch is selected by default to launch DigiDelivery automatically after you click OK.
If the option you chose involves linking to media, Include Linked Media is also selected
by default.
5. (Option) Change the file name.
6. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence
locally before you upload it to DigiDelivery.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
7. Review the Export Setting Summary.
454
Exporting Using Send To Templates
8. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and click Save.
9. (Option) Do the following if your sequence includes MetaSync tracks:
a.
Select Export MetaSync tracks, and then select XML or AAF. If you select XML,
the system performs an AAF export, and then automatically opens MetaSync
Publisher, which produces the XML file.
For more information on MetaSync Publisher, see “Using MetaSync Publisher” in
the Help.
b.
(Option) If you want to automatically load the XML files in another application,
choose Auto Launch, and select the application.
10. (Option) If you make any changes to the Send To dialog box, do the following if you
want to save these changes as a new template.
a.
Click the Save As Template button.
b.
Rename the file. Make sure you leave the .stt extension.
c.
Click Save.
The new template is saved. The next time you select a sequence, and choose File >
Send To, the new template appears in the list.
11. Click OK.
The sequence is exported, a QuickTime movie or video mixdown is created, and the
audio is embedded into the AAF file.
DigiDelivery opens. The name in the Delivery Name text box is the same name as that
of your sequence.
Send To Digidesign Pro Tools
When you want to export a sequence to Digidesign Pro Tools®, you can send it to movable
storage and then take the storage to a Pro Tools system, or you can export it directly to
Digidesign® over an Avid Unity™ system. Sending it to movable storage lets you assemble
all the media in one location for moving to a Pro Tools system. For each export method, you
can select a template that meets your needs.
You can also transfer files to Pro Tools through Interplay. For more information, see “Using
Pro Tools and Interplay” in Avid Interplay Best Practices.
To export to Digidesign Pro Tools:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a sequence in a bin.
455
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
3. Do one of the following:
t
Select File > Send To > Digidesign Pro Tools, for sequences that you want to
transfer on movable media.
t
Select File > Send To > Digidesign Pro Tools on Avid Unity, for sequences that are
located on the same Avid Unity environment.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > Digidesign
Pro Tools or Digidesign Pro Tools on Avid Unity.
The Send to Digidesign Pro Tools template options appear.
4. Select one of the options in the following tables:
Send To Digidesign Pro Tools Options
Option
Description
Avid Video - Embed Audio
Select this option to send to a Digidesign Pro Tools system that supports
playing back Avid video. The Pro Tools system has either an Avid Mojo® or a
Digi V10 for video playback.
A video mixdown of the tracks is created at DV 25; the audio is consolidated
and embedded into the AAF file.
QuickTime - Embed Audio
Select this option to send to a Digidesign Pro Tools system that supports
QuickTime video only. The system does not have an Avid Mojo or a Digi V10.
A QuickTime movie of video is created; the audio is consolidated and
embedded into the AAF file.
Send To Digidesign Pro Tools on Avid Unity Options
Option
Description
Link to Video and Audio
Select this option to export AAF metadata only (no media is exported). The
Pro Tools links to, or references, the Avid video and audio files located on the
Avid Unity. The Pro Tools user can copy media during the AAF import into
Pro Tools. This is the fastest export from Avid.
Video Mixdown - Link to
Audio
Select this option to create a flattened video mixdown of the tracks. The AAF
links to the Avid audio media files located on the Avid Unity. The Pro Tools
user can copy media during the AAF import into Pro Tools.
QuickTime - Link to Audio
Select this option to send to a Digidesign Pro Tools system that supports
QuickTime video only. The AAF links to the Avid audio media files located on
the Avid Unity. The Pro Tools user can copy media during the AAF import
into Pro Tools.
456
Exporting Using Send To Templates
The Send To dialog box opens with the template you chose.
The Filename text box displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose.
5. (Option) Change the file name.
6. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
7. Review the Export Setting Summary.
For more information about Export options, see “Export Settings” on page 584.
8. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and click Save.
9. Do the following if your sequence includes MetaSync tracks:
a.
Select Export MetaSync tracks, and then select XML or AAF. If you select XML,
the system performs an AAF export, and then automatically opens MetaSync
Publisher, which produces the XML file.
For more information on MetaSync Publisher, see “Using MetaSync Publisher” in
the Help.
b.
(Option) If you want to automatically load the XML files in another application,
choose Auto Launch, and select the application.
457
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
10. (Option) If you make any changes to the Send To dialog box, do the following if you
want to save these changes as a new template.
a.
Click the Save As Template button.
b.
Rename the file. Make sure you leave the .stt extension.
c.
Click Save.
The new template is saved. The next time you select a sequence, and choose File >
Send To, the new template appears in the list.
11. Click OK.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
Send to DVD Authoring
You can export your sequence directly to Avid DVD by Sonic and then perform authoring
functions in the Avid DVD by Sonic application. If your sequence includes MetaSync tracks,
the MetaSync tracks are exported by default as XML into Avid DVD by Sonic.
To export directly to DVD:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence in a bin.
3. Do one of the following:
458
t
Select File > Send To > DVD > DVD Authoring.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > DVD > DVD
Authoring.
Exporting Using Send To Templates
The Send To DVD Authoring dialog box opens with a default export template.
The Filename text box displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose.
4. (Option) Change the file name.
5. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
6. Review the Export Setting Summary.
7. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and then click Save.
459
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
8. (Option) If you make any changes to the Send To dialog box, do the following if you
want to save these changes as a new template.
a.
Click the Save As Template button.
b.
Rename the file. Make sure you leave the .stt extension.
c.
Click Save.
The new template is saved. The next time you select a sequence, and select File >
Send To, the new template appears in the list.
9. Click OK.
The sequence and optional MetaSync files are exported to the selected destination.
Avid DVD by Sonic opens with your sequence loaded in its Timeline. You can use the
Avid DVD by Sonic features to author menus, graphics, and other navigation devices
before you burn your DVD. For more information, see the Avid DVD by Sonic
documentation.
Send to DVD One Step
You can choose to export directly to Avid DVD by Sonic and burn your DVD in one step.
This eliminates the necessity for further authoring work and lets you create a DVD that plays
without the encumbrance of graphics, menus, or other navigation devices.
To export directly to DVD:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence in a bin.
3. Do one of the following:
460
t
Select File > Send To > DVD > DVD One Step.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > DVD > DVD One
Step.
Exporting Using Send To Templates
The Send To DVD One Step dialog box opens with a default export template.
The Filename text box displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose.
4. (Option) Change the file name.
5. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
6. Accept the default settings for the rest of the options.
7. Insert a blank DVD in your DVD drive.
461
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
8. Click OK.
The Burn to DVD dialog box opens.
9. Select the capacity of your DVD medium from the Capacity menu.
c
The capacity of your DVD medium must match the size you select from the Capacity
menu.
10. For information about the other options, see the Sonic printed or pdf documentation.
11. Click OK.
Your DVD is burned.
Send to Sorenson Squeeze
When you send directly to Sorenson Squeeze, a QuickTime Reference template is selected.
1. Make sure the Sorenson Squeeze application is installed on your system.
2. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
3. Select a sequence in a bin.
462
Exporting Using Send To Templates
4. Do one of the following;
t
Select File > Send To > Encoding > Sorenson Squeeze.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > Encoding >
Sorenson Squeeze.
The Send To dialog box opens with a default template.
The Filename text box displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose.
5. (Option) Change the file name.
6. Click the Options button to select Sorenson Squeeze settings. For more information, see
the Sorenson Squeeze documentation.
7. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
8. Review the Export Setting Summary.
9. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and then click Save.
10. (Option) Do the following if your sequence includes MetaSync tracks:
a.
Select Export MetaSync tracks, and then select XML or AAF. If you select XML,
the system performs an AAF export, and then automatically opens MetaSync
Publisher, which produces the XML file.
For more information on MetaSync Publisher, see “Using MetaSync Publisher” in
the Help.
b.
(Option) If you want to automatically load the XML files in another application,
choose Auto Launch, and select the application.
11. (Option) If you make any changes to the Send To dialog box, do the following if you
want to save these changes as a new template.
a.
Click the Save As Template button.
b.
Rename the file. Make sure you leave the .stt extension.
c.
Click Save.
The new template is saved. The next time you select a sequence, and choose File >
Send To, the new template appears in the list.
12. Click OK.
The QuickTime references movie and optional MetaSync files are exported to the
selected destination.
463
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Send To Avid DS
When you choose to send to Avid DS, the sequence is exported as an AFE file.
To export directly to Avid DS:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence in a bin.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Select File > Send To > Avid DS.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > Avid DS
The Send To dialog box opens with a default export template.
The filename displays the name of the sequence or clip you chose.
4. (Option) Change the file name.
5. Click Set to browse to the drive and folder to which you want to export the sequence,
and then click OK.
464
Exporting Using Send To Templates
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
6. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and then click Save.
7. (Option) Do the following if you want the Avid DS application to automatically launch
after you export.
a.
(Option) Click the Auto Launch button, and select Add Item.
b.
(Option) Browse to find the Avid DS application.
c.
Click OK Open.
d. Select Auto Load Exported File(s) if you want the files you export to automatically
load in the Avid DS application.
e.
Select Reveal Exported File(s) if you want the system to search available drives,
open Windows Explorer, and highlight related media files.
8. (Option) Do the following if your sequence includes MetaSync tracks:
a.
Select Export MetaSync Tracks and then select XML or AAF. If you select XML,
the system performs an AAF export, and then automatically opens MetaSync
Publisher which produces the XML file.
For more information on MetaSync Publisher, see “Using MetaSync Publisher” in
the Help.
b.
(Option) If you want to automatically load the XML files in another application,
choose Auto Launch, and select the application.
9. (Option) If you make any changes to the Send To dialog box, do the following if you
want to save these changes as a new template.
a.
Click the Save As Template button.
b.
Rename the file. Make sure you leave the .stt extension.
c.
Click Save.
The new template is saved. The next time you select a sequence, and choose File >
Send To, the new template appears in the list.
10. Click OK to save the AFE file.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
n
If you are editing and finishing an offline sequence that will be finished on Avid DS, make
sure to consult the Avid DS Nitris Conform Guide. This guide contains important
information about the most efficient way of preparing a sequence for the conform process.
You can download this guide from the Avid Knowledge Base (www.avid.com/onlinesuppport)
or the Avid DS Support Center (www.softimage.com/avidds).
465
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Send To Third-Party Applications
Avid provides a Make New option that allows you to customize your own Send To template
for third-party applications.
To create your own template:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence in a bin.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Select File > Send To > Make New.
t
Right-click the clip or sequence in the bin, and select Send To > Make New.
The Send To dialog box opens with a default export template.
466
Exporting Using Send To Templates
4. (Option) Change the file name.
5. Select the destination folder for the file, and then click OK.
n
Whenever you return to a Send To dialog box, the destination folder that was last set appears
in the destination field.
6. Review the Export Setting Summary.
7. (Option) If you need to make any changes, select the Options button, make any
necessary changes, and then click Save.
8. (Option) Do the following if you want the third-party application to automatically
launch after you export.
a.
(Option) Click the Auto Launch button, and select Add Item.
b.
(Option) Browse to find the third-party application.
c.
Click OK Open.
d. Select Auto Load Exported File(s) if you want the files you export to automatically
load in the third-party application.
e.
Select Reveal Exported File(s) if you want the system to search available drives,
open Windows Explorer, and highlight related media files.
9. (Option) Do the following if your sequence includes MetaSync tracks:
a.
Select Export MetaSync Tracks and then select XML or AAF. If you select XML,
the system performs an AAF export, and then automatically opens MetaSync
Publisher which produces the XML file.
For more information on MetaSync Publisher, see “Using MetaSync Publisher” in
the Help.
b.
(Option) If you want to automatically load the XML files in another application,
choose Auto Launch, and select the application.
10. Click OK.
The Save As dialog opens.
11. Name the new Send To (.stt) template.
12. Click Save.
You can use this new template when working with the third-party application.
467
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Exporting OMFI and AAF Files
OMFI and AAF are industry-standard file formats that let you exchange compositions and
media between applications.
Exporting Through OMF Interchange
OMF Interchange® (OMFI) is a platform-independent file format that stores both the digital
media (video, audio, graphics, animation) and the information describing how the media is
edited together to form a final sequence. This editing information, called a composition, is
the OMFI representation of the sequence created in your Avid editing application. The OMF
Interchange format is the result of cooperative efforts of many industry and standards
partners and Avid Technology, Inc.
Any other program that supports OMFI can read OMFI files, even if the program resides on
a different computer platform. As a result, with OMFI, you can transfer between different
applications on different platforms without worrying about cross-platform translations. This
can be very effective for importing animation or audio files created on proprietary platforms.
c
To avoid errors and incompatibilities when you import and export OMFI files, observe
the recommendations in “File Format Specifications” on page 661.
Exporting Through AAF
Advanced Authoring Format (AAF), is a cross-platform, multimedia file format that allows
interchange of media and composition information between AAF-compliant applications.
These applications are primarily content creation tools such as Avid editing applications,
Avid DS, and Sonic Foundry's Sound Forge®, to name a few.
There are two general types of data in an AAF file:
n
468
•
Media such as audio and video
•
Composition information, or metadata, that provides the instructions needed to combine
and modify the media portions of the AAF file to produce a complete multimedia
program
When you export sequences with effects through AAF, certain effect types are not exported to
the AAF file. When you check compositions into an asset manager through AAF, all effects
are exported. For export to Avid DS, use AFE files. See “Exporting Projects and Bins Using
AFE Files” on page 473.
Exporting OMFI and AAF Files
Selecting an OMFI or an AAF Transfer Method
OMF Interchange and AAF, as implemented in Avid editing applications, provide two basic
methods for exporting files.
Method 1: Compositions with Linked Media
Avid editing applications can export an OMFI or an AAF file that contains only the editing
information about a selected master clip or sequence. The file also contains links to the
media used in the clip or sequence. You then need to transfer the OMFI or AAF file to the
other system, and either transfer the media files or recapture the media. After you have
transferred or recaptured the media, you can transfer revised composition-only files.
However, if you consolidate the media, you must transport the consolidated media files, as
well. You can consolidate media during the export, see “Exporting As an OMFI or an AAF
File” on page 469, or before the export. See “Consolidating Media” in the Help.
Method 2: Compositions with Embedded Media
Avid editing applications can export an OMFI or an AAF file that contains all the editing
information for the selected master clip or sequence along with the video and audio media
files for that master clip or sequence. See “Exporting As an OMFI or an AAF File” on
page 469.
Exporting As an OMFI or an AAF File
n
n
You cannot export OMFI files that are larger than 2 GB. If you exceed this limit, an error
message is displayed. For information on exporting large sequences, see “Preparing to
Export a Sequence” in the Help.
When you export sequences with effects through AAF, certain effect types are not exported to
the AAF file. When you check compositions into an asset manager through AAF, all effects
are exported. For export to Avid DS, use AFE files. See “Exporting Projects and Bins Using
AFE Files” on page 473.
To export master clips or sequences as an OMFI or an AAF file:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
469
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click the Options button.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
6. Click the Export As menu, and select OMF 1.0, OMF 2.0, or AAF.
7. Select other options as described in “Export Settings: OMFI, AAF, and AFE” on
page 595.
n
470
For additional guidelines on suitable export options for AAF export to Pro Tools, see
“Guidelines for Exporting AAF Files to Pro Tools” on page 471.
Exporting OMFI and AAF Files
8. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens.
Name the setting by typing a name in the Setting Name text box, and click OK.
9. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
10. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
11. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Guidelines for Exporting AAF Files to Pro Tools
You use the same basic method to create an AAF export for use with Pro Tools that you use
when creating any other type of AAF export. For more information, see “Exporting OMFI
and AAF Files” on page 468.
Several of the options you can select in the Export Settings dialog box have particular
significance for exports to Pro Tools, so you need to select your options with care. The
following table provides information on these settings. (For complete information on all the
options available in the Export Settings dialog box for AAF export, see “Export Settings:
OMFI, AAF, and AFE” on page 595.)
471
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Export Settings Guidelines for AAF Export to Pro Tools
Setting
Guidelines
Media Destinations
(Video Details and
Audio Details tabs)
•
Using the Folder option with “Use Same Folder as AAF File” is very convenient for
moving files back and forth between the Avid editing application and Pro Tools.
If you select Folder and then check “Use Same Folder as AAF File,” your Avid
editing application stores the media in the same folder as the exported AAF files (the
folder that you select in the Export As dialog box when your start the export
operation). For example, you can easily store both the AAF files and the media in a
single folder on a Firewire drive that you can move between the editing application
system and the Pro Tools system.
You can also select Consolidate Media from the Export Method menu to copy
consolidated media instead of all media.
•
The Embedded in AAF option is not generally useful for export to Pro Tools because
Pro Tools does not support embedded video media in AAF files.
Export Method: Video •
Mixdown
(Video Details tab)
The Mixdown with Video Edits option is only compatible with Pro Tools v7.2 or
later, and takes advantage of the fact that Pro Tools v7.2 or later can display multiple
video tracks. This allows you to add a video track that shows the video edits. This
can be very useful to the Pro Tools editors because it allows them to view the edit
points between the various video clips without actually importing the individual
video files into Pro Tools.
The system creates the following tracks as part of the export:
-
Video tracks that represent each track and edit in the original sequence
-
A “render track” that contains the single video mixdown track
The system stores the metadata for the video mixdown “render track” within the
AAF file. The render track points to the actual mixed-down video media file. If you
open the exported sequence in an Avid editing application, you do not see the video
mixdown track. However, when you import the file into Pro Tools v7.2 or later, Pro
Tools imports the video mixdown track as a separate video track. Pro Tools
composites the edit points from all of the original Avid video tracks into a single
track.
Pro Tools displays the video edit track as well as the video mixdown (render) track.
This allows the Pro Tools editor to view the video edits. One benefit to this method
is that you only bring the video mixdown into Pro Tools. The clips in the edit tracks
do not reference any media. They simply match up with the video mixdown.
•
472
The Mixdown without Video Edits option is compatible with all versions of Pro
Tools, and is the only option suitable for versions of Pro Tools earlier than v7.2. This
option replaces all of the video tracks with a single video track named Video
Mixdown in the Track Panel.
Exporting Projects and Bins Using AFE Files
Exporting Projects and Bins Using AFE Files
AFE (Avid File Exchange) files are an efficient way to transfer project information between
Avid applications. For example, you can use AFE files to transfer projects and bins from an
offline to an Avid DS finishing system.
n
You can import an AFE file into Avid DS v6.0 or later only.
AFE files are based on AAF (Advanced Authoring Format) technology. AFE files, however,
are especially designed for sharing project information among Avid applications. AFE files
let you transfer one or more bins, their contents, and information about the contents,
including master clips, subclips, titles, and sequences.
n
Specific information for transferring projects to Avid DS is contained in the Avid DS
Conform Guide, which is available from the Avid Knowledge Base at
www.avid.com/onlinesupport or the Avid DS Support Center at www2.softimage.com.
To create an AFE file that includes all bins in a project:
1. Click the project window and select File > Export.
The Export Project As dialog box opens.
2. Select a location, name the file, and click Save.
3. Transfer the AFE file to a location you can access from the other Avid application.
You can use removable media, a network connection, or an Avid Unity shared storage
system.
473
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
To create an AFE file that includes the contents of a single bin:
1. Open the bin.
2. Click the bin, and select File > Export.
The Export Bin As dialog box opens.
3. Select Avid File Exchange from the Export Bin As list.
4. Select a location, name the file, and click Save.
5. Transfer the AFE file to a location you can access from the other Avid application.
You can use removable media, a network connection, or an Avid Unity shared storage
system.
Exporting Video in DV Stream Format
Use the DV Stream format when exporting video that will be combined or processed with
other DV-formatted media. This option requires a video track.
n
The DV Stream format appears after you have installed QuickTime. If you want to use the
QuickTime application for exporting sequences, download the latest version of QuickTime
from the Apple® Web site at: www.apple.com/.
To export in DV Stream format:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
474
Exporting Video in DV Stream Format
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
6. Click the Export As menu, and select DV Stream.
7. Select other options as described in “Export Settings: DV Stream” on page 594.
8. Click Format Options.
The DV Export Settings dialog box opens.
9. Select the DV format, video format, and audio format options you want.
475
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
n
If you select DV as the DV format, you can choose to provide locked or unlocked audio. For
compatibility with DV cameras that require unlocked audio, deselect Locked.
If you select DVCPRO as the DV format, audio is always locked and the Locked option is
grayed out. Also, the audio rate is always 48 kHz and the Audio Rate menu is grayed out.
10. Click OK.
11. In the Export Settings dialog box, do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens. Name the setting by typing a name in the
Setting Name text box, and click OK.
12. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
13. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
14. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
476
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Exporting QuickTime Movies
Exporting QuickTime Movies
You can export a sequence as a QuickTime movie for final distribution or for further
processing in another application. There are three basic methods for QuickTime export, as
described in the following table.
Selecting a QuickTime Export Option
Option
Description
Same as Source
This option is available when you select QuickTime Movie from the Export
Settings dialog box. When you select this option, your Avid editing
application copies the media files directly with no resolution change. This
method is fast and creates output that uses the same quality as your source
files. Selecting Same as Source is the best method to use if you plan to process
the video on another system, using a third-party application. See “Exporting
As a QuickTime Movie” on page 477.
Custom
This option is also available when you select QuickTime Movie from the
Export Settings dialog box. When you select this option, your Avid editing
application decompresses the files, processes them, and compresses the files at
the requested resolution. This method is slower and often loses quality. In
general, you should only use the Custom option if you have to directly export
a clip or sequence in a particular file format. See “Exporting As a QuickTime
Movie” on page 477.
The Custom format is useful if you plan to export to an older ABVB or
NuVista system.
QuickTime Reference
QuickTime Reference is available from the Export As menu in the Export
Settings dialog box. This option is similar to Same as Source, but your Avid
editing application links to the original media files. This is the fastest method
of export, but the movie can only be run or processed on your local system or
in an Avid Unity workgroup environment. If you want to transfer a QuickTime
movie to another system, you must also move the associated media files by
creating a self-contained QuickTime movie. See “Exporting As a QuickTime
Reference Movie” on page 479.
Exporting As a QuickTime Movie
To export as a QuickTime movie:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
477
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click the Options button.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
6. Click the Export As menu, and select QuickTime Movie.
n
If you installed additional QuickTime Export formats, they appear in the menu with tildes (~)
before their names. This indicates they have not been qualified and are not supported by
Avid.
QuickTime Movie (Same as Source)
QuickTime Movie (Custom)
7. Select the Same as Source option to use the resolution of the source file or select the
Custom option to customize your settings.
478
Exporting QuickTime Movies
n
Using Same as Source results in the fastest export and is usually the best selection for a
movie that will be processed by another application. See “Exporting QuickTime Movies” on
page 477.
8. Select the remaining options as described in “Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export
Options” on page 588.
To change the codec (compressor/decompressor) used for compression, click the Format
Options button. For a description of the options, see “Export Settings: QuickTime
Movie Settings” on page 591.
9. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens. Name the setting by typing a name in the
Setting Name text box, and click OK.
10. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
11. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
12. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Exporting As a QuickTime Reference Movie
A QuickTime reference movie is a QuickTime movie that contains composition information
but no movie data. Instead, the movie contains pointers to the original media in the OMFI
MediaFiles directory or the Avid MediaFiles directory on local or network media drives.
Because the QuickTime reference movie does not contain media, the file is much smaller
than a QuickTime movie, usually only a few kilobytes per file. Therefore, exporting a
sequence as a QuickTime reference movie is faster and takes up less disk space than
exporting a sequence as a QuickTime movie. When you play back the movie in QuickTime
Player, the movie references the media files for playback.
QuickTime reference movies are useful as long as you are working with Avid media files
available on your local system or in an Avid Unity workgroup. Advantages are speed and
small file size because the system does not copy the source media files into the exported
QuickTime file. However, if you expect to move the exported QuickTime file to a system
that doesn't have access to the media, then you should use the standard QuickTime export so
the media files and QuickTime wrapper can be moved as one file.
479
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
To export as a QuickTime reference movie:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
6. Click the Export As menu, and select QuickTime Reference.
The Export Settings dialog box displays the QuickTime Reference options.
7. Select other options as described in “Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options”
on page 585.
480
Exporting QuickTime Movies
8. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens.
Name the setting by typing a name in the Setting Name text box, and click OK.
9. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
10. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
11. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Using Avid Codecs for QuickTime
The following Avid codecs for QuickTime are installed automatically when you install your
Avid editing application. You can use these codecs when exporting QuickTime files from
your Avid system or from third-party applications for fast import into an Avid system:
•
Avid 1:1x (Uncompressed MXF 8-bit or 10-bit resolution)
•
Avid DNxHD™ (HD MXF 8-bit and 10-bit resolutions)
•
Avid DV (DV 25/DV 50 resolutions)
•
Avid DVCPRO (DVCPRO MXF resolution)
•
Avid Meridien™ Compressed (JFIF resolutions)
•
Avid Meridien Uncompressed (OMF 8-bit resolution)
•
Avid MPEG-50 mbit (MPEG-IMX™ resolutions)
•
Avid Packed (Uncompressed MXF 10-bit resolution)
The Avid codecs create encapsulated media files for export of high-resolution files that are
readable within QuickTime applications. The Avid codec you use to export the file must be
loaded on the system running the QuickTime application for the application to read the
exported file. See “Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for QuickTime on Other Systems”
on page 487.
n
You get the best results by using the Same as Source option. See “Exporting As a QuickTime
Movie” on page 477.
481
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
To export a clip or sequence by using one of the Avid codecs:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click the Options button.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
6. Click the Export As menu, and select QuickTime Movie.
7. Select the Custom option.
8. Click the Format Options button.
The Movie Settings dialog box opens.
9. Click Settings in the Video area.
The Compression Settings dialog box opens.
482
Exporting QuickTime Movies
10. Select the codec that you want to use for export.
11. Click the Options button.
A Codec Configuration dialog box opens. The settings depend on the codec that you
selected.
483
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
n
The Quality slider does not affect your settings.
12. Select the settings that you want, and click OK.
For Color Levels or Color Input, select the color levels of the source media. If you are
exporting from an Avid editing system, use ITU-R 601 (SD) or 709 (HD).
13. Click OK in the Compression Settings dialog box.
14. Click OK in the Movie Settings dialog box.
The Export Settings dialog box reopens.
15. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens. Name the setting by typing a name in the
Setting Name text box, and click OK.
16. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
17. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
18. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
484
Exporting As an AVI File
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Exporting As an AVI File
To export as an AVI file:
1. Prepare the sequence, as described in “Preparing to Export a Sequence” in the Help.
2. Select a clip or a sequence to export, as described in “Exporting Frames, Clips, or
Sequences” in the Help.
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click the Options button.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
485
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
6. Click the Export As menu, and select AVI.
7. Select the AVI options you want.
“Export Settings: AVI” on page 599 describes the AVI settings options in the Export
Settings dialog box. In the Video Format tab, you can also select further options by
clicking the Codec Options button.
8. Select an AVI codec by clicking Codec Options.
The Video Compression dialog box opens.
9. Select the compressor you want, and click the Configure button to further configure the
codec.
For more information, see “Export Settings: AVI Video Compression” on page 601.
10. Click OK to close the Video Compression dialog box and to return to the Export
Settings dialog box.
11. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens. Name the setting by typing a name in the
Setting Name text box, and click OK.
12. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
13. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
14. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
486
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for QuickTime on Other Systems
Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for
QuickTime on Other Systems
When you install the Avid editing application on your system, the Avid Codecs for
QuickTime are automatically installed. If you want to export a QuickTime movie from a
third-party application such as Adobe After Effects® for use on an Avid system, you should
have the appropriate Avid codec installed on the system running the third-party application.
You can either install the Avid Codecs directly from the Avid editing application CD-ROM
or copy them from one system to another.
To install the Avid QuickTime Codecs from the application CD-ROM on a system
without an Avid editor:
1. Insert the Avid application CD-ROM.
2. Click Install Products.
3. Click Install Avid QuickTime Codecs.
4. Follow the instructions in the installation program.
The Avid QuickTime Codecs install on your system.
To copy the Avid QuickTime Codecs from one system to another system:
1. On your Avid system, open one of the following folders:
drive:\Program Files\QuickTime\QTComponents
drive:\Windows\System32
2. Copy the codecs you need to a removable device or network server.
The following table describes the codecs:
Codec
Description
AvidAV1xCodec.qtx
Avid 1:1x codec (Uncompressed MXF 8-bit or 10-bit)
AvidAVd1Codec.qtx
Avid DVCPRO codec (MXF)
AvidAVdnCodec.qtx
Avid DNxHD codec (MXF)
AvidAVdvCodec.qtx
Avid DV codec (DV 25 and DV 50, OMF and MXF)
AvidQTAVjiCodec.qtx
Avid Meridien Compressed codec (OMF 8-bit)
AvidAVmpCodec.qtx
Avid MPEG 50 codec (MPEG-IMX, OMF and MXF)
487
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Codec
Description
AvidAVpkCodec.qtx
Avid Packed codec (Uncompressed MXF 10-bit)
AvidQTAVuiCodec.qtx
Avid Meridien Uncompressed codec (OMF 8-bit)
For the DVCPRO and DNxHD codecs, you must also copy the following files:
-
libmmd.dll
-
msvcr71.dll
3. On the other system, copy the files to one of the following folders:
drive:\Program Files\QuickTime\QTComponents
drive:\Windows\System32
n
Once the Avid Codecs for QuickTime are installed on the system, you can export files from
the QuickTime compatible application for reimport into the Avid editing system.
Exporting from a Third-Party QuickTime or AVI
Application
To export files from a QuickTime compatible application or from an AVI compatible
application on a Windows system for import (or reimport) into your Avid system:
1. Make sure the applicable codec is installed on the system. See “Installing or Copying
the Avid Codecs for QuickTime on Other Systems” on page 487.
2. Conduct the export procedure according to the procedures used by the particular
software.
3. When you get to the step where the standard Export Settings dialog box opens, select
the applicable Avid compressor.
For QuickTime exports, most applications have format options similar to those
described in “Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options” on page 588. Make
sure you select settings that will be compatible with your existing media on the Avid
system.
n
If you select a nonstandard frame size, your Avid system does not import the file quickly.
4. Complete the export.
488
Exporting as Windows Media
Exporting as Windows Media
Your Avid editing application allows you to export your sequence as native Windows Media.
Before you perform any export procedures, make sure you have reviewed “Preparing to
Export a Sequence” in the Help.
Exporting Using an Avid Supplied Template
Your Avid editing application includes a number of Windows Media templates you can use
to export media.
To export as Windows Media using an Avid-supplied template:
1. Select the sequence or clips to export.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
3. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Export As menu, select Windows Media.
5. (Option) Select Use Marks.
When Use Marks is selected the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
489
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
6. (Option) Select Use Enabled Tracks.
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, the system uses tracks that are enabled in the
Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
7. Select Windows Media Legacy Template.
8. Click the Version button, and select v8, v7 or v4.
This refers to the available version 8, version 7, and version 4 Windows Media
templates.
9. Click the Templates button, and select the Windows Media option that best fits your
needs.
n
Windows Media Legacy Template compatibility is subject to Windows media updates.
10. Click Save.
11. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
12. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
13. Click Save.
The sequence is exported using the selected template.
490
Exporting as Windows Media
Exporting Using an Existing Windows Media Profile
A Profile is a group of settings that matches content type and bit rate with the appropriate
audio and video codecs. Profiles have the file name extension .prx. If you have an existing
.prx file, select that file to use for the Windows Media export settings.
n
A .prx file is basically a saved template. You can create and save .prx files to share with
others.
To use an existing Windows Media Profile:
1. Select the sequence or clips you want to export.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
3. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Export As menu, select Windows Media.
5. (Option) Select Use Marks.
When Use Marks is selected the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
491
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
6. (Option) Select Use Enabled Tracks.
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, the system uses tracks that are enabled in the
Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
7. Select Windows Media Custom Profile.
8. Click Set.
9. Browse to the location where the .prx file is located on your system, and select the file.
10. Click Open.
11. Click Save.
12. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
13. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
14. Click Save.
The file is exported using the selected profile settings.
Exporting Using a Custom Profile
Your Avid editing application allows you to create custom audio and video profiles. Once
you create the profile, you can use the settings in that profile to export a sequence.
Creating a Custom Video Profile
To create a custom video profile:
1. Select the sequence or clips you want to export.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
492
Exporting as Windows Media
3. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
Add Button
4. In the Export As menu, select Windows Media.
5. (Option) Select Use Marks.
When Use Marks is selected the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
6. (Option) Select Use Enabled Tracks.
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, the system uses tracks that are enabled in the
Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
7. Click the Add button and select Video.
8. Choose the custom profile settings according to “Windows Media Options Video
Settings” on page 603.
493
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
9. (Option) If you want to save the .prx file, do the following:
a.
Click Save As Custom Profile.
b.
Browse to the location on the system where you want to save the .prx file.
c.
Name the file and click Save.
The .prx file is saved.You are returned to the Export Settings window
10. Click Save to export the sequence.
11. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
12. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
13. Click Save.
The sequence is exported using the selected profile settings.
Creating a Custom Audio Profile
To create a custom audio profile:
1. Select the sequence or clips you want to export.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
494
Exporting as Windows Media
3. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Export As menu, select Windows Media.
5. (Option) Select Use Marks.
When Use Marks is selected the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
6. (Option) Select Use Enabled Tracks.
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, the system uses tracks that are enabled in the
Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
7. Click the Add button and select Audio.
8. Choose the custom profile settings according to “Custom Profile Audio Settings” on
page 605.
495
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
9. (Option) If you want to save the .prx file, do the following:
a.
Click Save As Custom Profile
b.
Browse to the location on the system where you want to save the .prx file.
c.
Name the file and click Save.
The .prx file is saved. You are returned to the Export Settings window
10. Click Save to export the sequence.
11. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
12. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
13. Click Save.
The sequence is exported using the selected profile settings.
Exporting Tracks As Audio Files
To export the audio tracks in a clip or sequence as an audio file:
1. (Option) Mark IN or OUT points to identify a particular portion of the audio in a
sequence.
2. Select the clip or sequence in one of two ways:
t
Click the monitor that displays the clip or sequence you want to export.
t
Click the clip or sequence in a bin.
3. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
4. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
5. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
496
Exporting Tracks As Audio Files
6. Click the Export As menu, and select Audio.
The Export Settings dialog box displays the Audio options.
7. Select the options you require. Use the “Export Settings: Audio” on page 607 to make
your selections.
8. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens.
Name the setting by typing a name in the Setting Name text box, and click OK.
9. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
10. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
11. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
497
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
Exporting As a Graphic File
You can export a single frame as a graphic file or you can choose to export multiple frames
as sequentially numbered files.
To export as a graphic file:
1. Do one of the following:
t
If you plan to export a single frame, mark an IN point to export the marked frame
from a bin or a monitor, or move the position indicator to the frame you want to
export.
t
If you plan to export multiple frames, use IN and OUT points to identify the region
to export.
2. Select File > Export.
The Export As dialog box opens.
3. Click the Export Settings menu, and select a setting.
If you want to create a new setting, select Untitled. You can create settings in advance.
See “Customizing Export Settings” in the Help.
4. Click Options.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.
498
Exporting As a Graphic File
5. Click the Export As menu, and select Graphic.
The Export Settings dialog box displays the Graphic options.
6. Click the Graphic Format menu, and select a format. Use “Export Settings: Graphic
Format” on page 609 to make your selection.
7. Select other options as appropriate. Use “Export Settings: Graphic” on page 608 to
make your selection.
8. Do one of the following:
t
To save your settings in the existing settings file, click Save.
t
To create a new settings file, click Save As.
The Save Export Setting dialog box opens.
Name the setting by typing a name in the Setting Name text box, and click OK.
9. In the Export As dialog box, select the destination folder for the file.
499
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
10. (Option) Change the file name.
In most cases, keep the file name extension the same.
11. Click Save.
The file is exported to the selected destination.
When you are working with the Format Options settings, you can click Defaults to return the
settings to their default values.
c
If a power failure or application error occurs during the export process, the entire file
is unusable. You need to repeat the export process.
Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices
XDCAM™ decks and camcorders from Sony® use an optical disc with a capacity to store up
to 23.3 GB of media. The XDCAM devices can store media in high-resolution MPEG
IMX™, DVCAM™, and XDCAM HD formats.
You can export a clip, subclip, or sequence. You cannot export titles, effects, group clips, or
rendered effects. The export mixes down the sequence and creates an XDCAM clip. All
clips are given a new sequential name of Cxxxx.mxf, for example, C0019.mxf. This
sequential file name system is created by the Sony deck. If you want to change the file name,
your Sony deck needs Sony’s firmware version 1.5 or higher.
For information on connecting your XDCAM device, see “Connecting the XDCAM
Device” in the Help.
The following table lists the formats and resolutions you can export to the XDCAM device:
XDCAM Resolutions
Format/Resolution
XDCAM HD (1080i/59.94, 1080i/50,
1080p/23.976):
Number of Audio Channels
(maximum)
2
XDCAM HD 17.5 Mbits
XDCAM HD 25 Mbits
XDCAM HD 35 Mbits
HDV 1080i (25 Mbits CBR)
DVCAM:
DV 25 411 (NTSC and PAL)
DV 25 420 (PAL)
500
2
Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices
XDCAM Resolutions (Continued)
Format/Resolution
Number of Audio Channels
(maximum)
MPEG IMX: (NTSC and PAL)
2
MPEG 30
MPEG 40
MPEG 50
Exporting to XDCAM
You can export NTSC and PAL projects. Depending on the format (SD or HD), you need to
use the appropriate XDCAM device (if you export SD media, use an XDCAM SD device; if
you export HD media, you must use an XDCAM HD device).
To export to an XDCAM device:
1. Connect your XDCAM device.
2. Select the appropriate mode on your XDCAM device that corresponds to the video
format that you will be exporting.
For example, set your XDCAM device to 1080i 59.94 if you want to export a clip or
sequence at XDCAM-35 1080I/59.94.
3. Select the sequence or clips to export.
4. With an XDCAM device connected to your system, select Output > Export to Device >
XDCAM.
If you have a sequence loaded in the Record monitor, the sequence is exported when you
select Export to Device from the Output menu.
n
You can also right-click the clip or sequence in a bin and select Export to Device.
501
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
The XDCAM Export Settings dialog box opens.
5. (Option) Select Use Marks.
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
6. (Option) Select Use Enabled Tracks.
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, the system uses tracks that are enabled in the
Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
7. Select an XDCAM disk from the Target XDCAM Disk list.
If the target XDCAM disk you are exporting to already has other clips on it, you are
only allowed to export a clip with the same number of audio tracks. For example, if the
target XDCAM disk has a clip with 4 tracks of audio, you cannot export a new XDCAM
clip with 2 tracks. You either have to reformat the disk and wipe it clean or add two
dummy tracks to your 2-track sequence before you export.
8. Select a video format:
-
For SD projects, select DV-25, IMX30, IMX40, or IMX50.
For SD, a disk cannot have mixed formats. For example, a disk that contains IMX40
material can only have IMX40 media added to it, unless you reformat the disk.
-
For HD projects, select XDCAM-35, XDCAM-25, or XDCAM-17.
For HD, a single disk can have clips with mixed bit rates (17.5, 25, and 35 Mbits).
Additionally, a sequence that is being exported to an HD XDCAM disk can have
mixed bit rates, as well.
If your exported sequence has more than two audio tracks, only two tracks are exported,
even though the Sony XDCAM device is capable of handling 4 to 8 tracks. If your
sequence has more than two tracks, they are mixed down during export.
9. Select a Sample Bit Depth: 16 or 24 bits.
502
Exporting Media to XDCAM Devices
For HD projects, select 16 bits. XDCAM HD devices are not capable of handling 24
bits.
10. Click OK.
Sony applies its own file-naming convention. All exported clips are given a new
sequential name of Cxxxx.mxf, for example, C0019.mxf.
A progress bar appears displaying the new Sony XDCAM sequential clip name. The
sequence is exported.
503
Chapter 15 Exporting and Transferring Material: Advanced
504
Chapter 16
Generating Output: Advanced
Your Avid editing application provides tools for generating output for individual tracks or
entire sequences to various videotape or audiotape formats. You can also generate an edit
decision list (EDL) for use in an online suite.
The following topics provide advanced information about output:
•
Advanced Video Output Calibration
•
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
•
Using EDL Manager
•
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval
•
Preserving HD Closed Captioning and Ancillary Data
For basic information about output, see “Generating Output: Basics” in the Help or in the
Basics Guide for your Avid editing application.
Advanced Video Output Calibration
Advanced users and site engineers can use the following procedures to fine-tune output
signals by using various test patterns and phase control. You can also adjust output by using
the passthrough signal from an input device.
c
You cannot set separate calibration levels for S-Video output, Composite output, and
Component output. When calibrating video output, select one video output for
calibration. The two other outputs are not guaranteed to be properly calibrated. If you
need to send output to more than one SD device, Avid recommends that you use one
analog output (Composite, Component, or S-Video) and one digital output (SDI).
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Using Test Patterns
Use the menu of test patterns to calibrate the system output.
To display a test pattern:
t
In the Video Output tool, click the Test Patterns menu, and select a pattern.
Calibrating the System with Passthrough Signals
If you work in a production environment in which house standards are used to synchronize a
number of devices including the source decks connected to your Avid system, you can
calibrate the system one time to conform to existing standards with the least amount of
alteration of the signal. This method involves the use of a passthrough signal (a signal that
gets sent directly from an input source through to the output channels).
This advanced form of calibration is an alternative to Video Input tool Calibration settings
for each source tape, and involves calibrating tapes at the source device, using external timebase correction. You need a signal generator and external Waveform and Vectorscope
monitors to calibrate the system with passthrough.
To calibrate using a passthrough signal:
1. Connect a source signal with a test pattern from a signal generator.
2. Select Tools > Video Input Tool.
The Video Input tool opens.
3. Click the Input menu, and select a video format.
The selected input provides the passthrough signal.
4. Calibrate the input if necessary by using the Video Input tool, as described in
“Calibrating Video Input” in the Help.
5. Save the input calibration settings as the system Default setting, as described in “Saving
Video Input Settings” on page 121.
6. Select Tools > Video Output.
The Video Output tool opens.
7. Select Tools > Capture.
The Capture tool opens.
With the Capture tool active, the input signal passes through to the output channels.
506
Advanced Video Output Calibration
8. Select an output format in the Video Output tool.
n
You can precisely match only one output format at a time in phase with the reference signal.
In most cases, you should select either Composite or Serial Digital.
9. Calibrate any of the available controls in the Video Output tool while checking the
external Waveform and Vectorscope monitors. For example, composite output provides
Gain and Saturation controls.
n
For more information on using the Video Output tool, see “Preparing for Output” in the
Help.
10. In the Video Output tool, click the Test Patterns menu, and select a test pattern.
The test pattern appears and is sent to the output channels (the input signal is no longer
passed through). Additional controls are enabled in the Video Output tool for phase
control.
11. Make any necessary adjustments to H phase, SC phase, and Hue by using the sliders in
the Video Output tool while checking the external Waveform and Vectorscope monitors.
n
Whenever the Capture tool is active, hue, horizontal phase (H phase), and subcarrier phase
(SC phase) are set to values determined by the input circuitry and are not available to
control the outputs. These controls appear dimmed during passthrough.
12. Save this setting with an appropriate name:
a.
Click the Settings menu in the Video Output tool, and select Save As.
b.
Type a name.
c.
Click OK.
The Video Output setting, a Site setting, applies to all users and all projects on the system.
The Video Input setting you saved and named Default is recalled each time a new tape is
loaded for capturing in the current project only.
507
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
The Digital Cut tool provides controls when you record a sequence to tape. This section
describes some of the more advanced digital cut features.
Output Mode Resolution Options
The output mode menu in the Digital Cut tool displays the relevant resolution options,
depending on your project type and the output device. The connected output device is
displayed in the Digital Cut tool.
Connected
Output Device
Output Mode
Resolution
menu
508
Bit Depth menu
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
The following table provides information on the available output resolutions.
n
There are restrictions for progressive formats. See “Output Mode Resolutions with
Progressive Projects” on page 510.
Output Mode Resolution Options
Project Type
30i and 25i, or
25p SD Project
Device
Adrenaline,
Mojo,
Mojo SDI
Available Output Mode
Resolution and Bit Depth
n
Comments
RT indicates real-time effects playback is supported
RT DNA (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV 25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
DV 25
With RT DNA selected, you can output
through the following connectors:
Composite, S-Video, Component, SDI, or
DNA-1394.
With RT DNA selected, output is 1:1
uncompressed.
With RT DV 25 selected, full real-time
effects playback is supported.
With DV 25 selected, real-time effects
playback is not supported. All media must
be DV 25.
23.976p
SD Project
Adrenaline,
Mojo,
Mojo SDI
RT DNA (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV 25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
30i, 25i, or 25p
SD Project
Separate
IEEE 1394
board or
Mojo SDI
RT DV 25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV 50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
DV 25
DV 50
With DV 50 selected, real-time effects
playback is not supported. All media must
be DV 50.
HD Project
Adrenaline
HD
DNxHD
Does not support real-time effects
playback. All media must be DNxHD.
HD Project
Separate
IEEE 1394
board or
Mojo SDI
DVCPRO HD
Does not support real-time effects
playback. All media must be DVCPRO
HD.
n
Performing a digital cut to a serial-controlled deck might not be frame-accurate if the output
resolution is set to RT DV 25 or DV 25. When performing a digital cut to a serial-controlled
deck, set the output resolution to RT DNA and make sure your output device is connected to
a connection other than 1394 (for example, SDI or Composite).
509
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Output Mode Resolutions with Progressive Projects
The availability of the Output Mode resolutions for progressive projects depends on the
Output Format play rate in the Digital Cut tool.
The following table describes the Output Mode resolutions for progressive projects.
Progressive Project Output Mode Resolution Options
Project Type
Play Rate
Available Output Mode
Resolution and Bit Depth
PAL 25p project
25
DV25
DV50
RT DV50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
NTSC 23.976p projects
23.976
RT DV50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
NTSC 24p projects
24
RT DV50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
n
510
PAL 24p Method 1
For information on Method 1 and
Method 2, see “Transferring 24-fps
Film to PAL Video” on page 710.
25
PAL 24p Method 2
For information on Method 1 and
Method 2, see “Transferring 24-fps
Film to PAL Video” on page 710.
24
RT DV50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV50 (8-bit or 10-bit)
RT DV25 (8-bit or 10-bit)
Performing a digital cut to a serial-controlled deck might not be frame-accurate if the output
resolution is set to RT DV25 or DV25. When performing a digital cut to a serial-controlled
deck, set the output resolution to RT DNA and make sure your output device is attached to a
connection other than 1394 (for example, SDI or Composite).
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
Outputting DV 50 and DVCPRO HD Media Directly to a DV Device
You can output DV 50 or DVCPRO HD sequences directly to a DV device. This lets you
output without any loss due to compression and decompression.
DV 50 and DVCPRO HD Output
You can output:
If the project is:
And if the output
device is:
DV 50
Any SD project
1394
DVCPRO HD
The following HD
projects:
1394
•
720p/23.976
•
720p/50
•
720p/59.94
•
1080i/50
•
1080i/59.94
To output DV 50 or DVCPRO HD media directly to a DV device:
1. Select the DV 50 or DVCPRO HD sequence you want to output.
2. Render all effects.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Click the DNA/1394 button above the Timeline to display the 1394 label.
t
Select Special > Device > IEEE 1394.
The 1394 icon displays above the Timeline, and a check mark appears next to IEEE
1394 in the Device menu.
4. Select Clip > Digital Cut.
The Digital Cut tool opens.
5. Select other Digital Cut options.
For more information, see “Using the Digital Cut Tool” in the Help.
6. Perform the digital cut.
511
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Selecting Output and Timecode Formats for 23.976p and 25p Projects
When you are working in a 23.976p or 25p project, you can output multiple formats from the
same progressive media. You click the Output Format menu in the Digital Cut tool to select
the formats you want, as described in “Selecting Output Formats for 23.976p and 25p
Projects” on page 512.
Depending on the format you select, you also need to:
•
Select the timecode to output. See “Selecting the Timecode Format for Output” on
page 515.
•
Indicate the Destination Timecode Rate. See “Indicating the Destination Timecode
Rate” on page 516.
Selecting Output Formats for 23.976p and 25p Projects
To output a particular format:
1. Select Clip >Digital Cut.
Output Format
menu
2. Click the Output Format menu, and select a play rate.
A brief description of each output format is displayed in the Digital Cut tool. “23.976p and
25p Project Output Options” on page 513 provides more extensive descriptions.
512
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
The play rate you select determines how the digital cut is recorded. For example, if you
select 23.976, you tell your Avid editing application to slow down the play rate to match the
play rate used during an NTSC telecine transfer. When your application records the digital
cut, it adds the pulldown frames and re-creates a telecine transfer to an NTSC videotape.
For NTSC output, your Avid editing application automatically sets the pulldown if necessary
and turns on an indicator on the Avid Adrenaline.
23.976p and 25p Project Output Options
Digital Cut
Tool Output
Format (Play
Rate)
Target Project or System
Pulldown
Indicator on Output Format and
Adrenaline
Recording Media
23.976 (NTSC) NTSC TV; video screenings;
digital audio workstations
(DAWs) that support pulldown
On (0.99)
Picture and sound to NTSC tape;
sound to video-referenced
audiotape
24 (NTSC)
Audio for film projection;
DAWs (video for
reference only)
Off (1.00)
Picture and sound to NTSC tape;
sound to DAT or mag tape
29.97 (NTSC)
Animation projects; negative
cutting with lockbox; some
kinescope printing
On (0.99)
Picture and sound to NTSC tape
(sound for reference only)
24 (PAL)
Audio for film projection;
DAWs (video for
reference only)
Off (1.00)
Picture and sound to PAL tape;
sound to DAT or mag tape
25 (PAL)
PAL TV; video screenings
Off (1.00)
Picture and sound to PAL tape;
sound to DAT or mag tape
The following information describes what happens when you select each of these options:
•
23.976 (NTSC): Plays back the sequence at 23.976 fps (film rate). This play rate tells
the Avid system to replicate a telecine transfer with perfect 2:3 pulldown. The system
adds frames and slows the playback speed to create a digital cut to 29.97 fps. Use this
option for NTSC video output, such as broadcast masters.
513
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
•
24 (NTSC): Plays back the sequence at 24 fps (film rate). This play rate tells the system
to record audio at the film rate. If the system records video, it maintains sync by adding
pulldown fields and dropping every 1000th frame. This video should be used for
reference only. Use this setting for direct audio output to be used in sync with film
projection. Also use this setting when audio media files are being used in a digital audio
workstation (DAW) and you need a digital cut for picture reference.
Before you output the digital cut, make sure you select the correct destination timecode
rate. See “Indicating the Destination Timecode Rate” on page 516.
•
29.97 (NTSC): Plays back the sequence at 29.97 fps. This play rate tells the system to
speed up the playback speed without adding pulldown fields. As a result, the sequence
plays faster (25 percent faster for 24p, 20 percent faster for 25p). Use this option for
animations and tape-to-film transfers where the pulldown needs to be removed to have
an exact frame-to-frame relationship between the film and video.
•
24 (PAL): Plays back the sequence at 24 fps. This play rate tells the system to record
audio at the film rate. For 25p projects, audio is slowed down 4 percent. Video, when
output to tape, can be used only for reference because, to maintain sync, the system
replicates a pulldown telecine transfer with one extra pulldown field occurring every
12th and 24th frame. Use this option when audio media files are being used for film
projection (PAL Method 2) or in a DAW, and you need a digital cut for picture
reference.
•
25 (PAL): Plays back the sequence at 25 fps. For 24p projects, this play rate tells the
system to speed up the sequence by 4.1 percent, creating a frame-to-frame relationship
between film and video (PAL Method 1). For 25p projects, there is no change in
playback speed. There are no pulldown frames with this setting. Use this option for PAL
video output, such as a broadcast master.
Audio play rates differ depending on your project type.
If you are working in a 25p project, changes in audio rates are as described in the following
table:
Audio Play Rates for 25p Projects
Output Play Rate
25p Source
24 PAL
4% slowdown
25 PAL
No change
If you are working in a 23.976 project, all output play rates are available, but only
23.976 NTSC maintains the original audio quality. For 23.976 NTSC, the audio rate is not
slowed down for output and remains at 48 kHz. For 29.97 NTSC, the audio rate is sped up
514
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
25 percent and is not usable. Use this output rate for animations and other special
applications. 24 fps NTSC requires a sample-rate conversion, so high-quality audio is not
guaranteed.
The following table summarizes the change in audio rates for 23.976p output options.
Audio Play Rates for 23.976p Projects
Output Play Rate
Source
Output Audio Rate
23.976 NTSC
23.976 fps
48 kHz (no change)
24 NTSC
23.976 fps
48.048 kHz (0.1% speedup)
29.97 NTSC
23.976 fps
60 kHz (25% speedup)
Selecting the Timecode Format for Output
If you select one of the three NTSC output formats, you need to indicate the timecode format
for output: drop-frame or non-drop-frame.
You can designate drop-frame or non-drop-frame timecode for devices connected to one or
both of the following outputs:
n
•
RS422 Output (serial port on the computer)
•
LTC (LTC OUT on the Avid Adrenaline hardware)
To output LTC timecode, you need to select the option “Generate LTC on Playback” in the
General Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Using LTC Timecode for Output”
in the Help.
By default, the menus display the timecode format of the sequence you loaded into the
Timeline.
n
Your Avid editing application can generate LTC at 29.97 fps only. See “Indicating the
Destination Timecode Rate” on page 516.
To select the timecode format for output:
1. Select Clip > Digital Cut.
2. Do one or both of the following:
t
Click the RS422 Output menu, and select Drop or Non-Drop
t
Click the LTC Output menu, and select Drop or Non-Drop
515
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Outputting Drop-Frame and Non-Drop-Frame Timecode
Simultaneously for Downstream Encoding
You can output drop-frame and non-drop-frame NTSC timecode simultaneously from a
23.976p or 25p project. A broadcast production company might need to output drop-frame
timecode for a broadcast master while outputting non-drop-frame timecode to track NTSC
film pulldown.
Tracking the pulldown is important because some networks require the 2:3 pulldown phase
to be inserted in the VITC (vertical interval timecode). Inserting the pulldown phase enables
downstream encoding of various compression formats (like MPEG-2) to be faster and of
higher quality.
n
For information about 2:3 pulldown, see “Transferring 24-fps Film to NTSC Video” on
page 706.
It is easy to track pulldown information within non-drop-frame timecode, because the
relationship stays the same for the length of the digital cut. The Avid system can use LTC to
output the non-drop-frame timecode.
To output drop-frame and non-drop-frame timecode simultaneously for downstream
encoding:
1. Select Clip > Digital Cut.
2. Do the following:
t
Click the RS-422 Output menu, and select Drop.
t
Click the LTC Output menu, and select Non-Drop.
Indicating the Destination Timecode Rate
When you select 24 (NTSC) as your output format, the Destination Timecode Rate menu
(labeled Dest. TC Rate) opens. Select a timecode rate that matches the timecode rate of the
recording device, such as a DAT deck.
If you select 29.97 fps as your Dest. TC Rate, the sequence duration displayed in the
Timecode Duration display of the Digital Cut tool is slightly shorter than the duration shown
in the Timeline. This shorter duration occurs because the video play rate is sped up in
comparison with the audio timecode rate. If you select 30.00 fps, the sequence duration in
the Digital Cut tool matches the sequence duration in the Timeline.
The value you select (29.97 or 30.00) also sets the rate for LTC output, if any, without
changing the play rate of the media being output (24 NTSC).
516
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
n
Your Avid editing application can generate LTC at 29.97 fps only. No LTC will be output if
you select 30.00.
To indicate the destination timecode rate:
1. Select Clip > Digital Cut.
2. Click the Dest. TC Rate menu, and select 29.97 fps or 30.00 fps.
Digital Cuts and Audio
You can use one of several tape formats and methods for audio output, but the following are
most common:
n
•
Record a digital cut directly to videotape by using analog output.
•
Record a digital cut directly to DAT or DA-88 by using digital output.
•
Play the sequence to an audiotape recorder by using analog output.
You cannot control some analog audio decks from the Digital Cut tool. If the deck does not
have a serial control port, you need to select Local when you record the digital cut.
Your output choice in the Digital Cut tool automatically sets the pulldown switch).
If you perform an audio-only digital cut, your Avid editing application plays the video tracks
in the Client monitor to ensure the most accurate audio sync. A message appears at the
bottom of the Digital Cut tool.
Information on connecting decks and cabling varies depending on the Avid DNA device you
use. See the appropriate ”Connecting Peripheral Equipment” topic for your Avid DNA
device in the Help, within the “Using the Avid Adrenaline,” “Using the Avid Mojo,” or
“Using the Avid Mojo SDI” sections.
n
If your sequence contains audio clips with different sample rates, use the Change Sample
Rate dialog box to ensure that all the clips have the same sample rate. For more information,
see “Changing the Sample Rate for Sequences and Audio Clips” in the Help.
517
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Understanding DV Digital Cut Delay
DV digital cut delay affects the timing of the DV data sent to the DV device for a digital cut.
Increasing the digital cut delay will cause the sequence stream to be to delayed when it is
sent to the DV device when digital cut begins. While the system is waiting for this delay, the
first frame of the sequence is continually sent to the DV device.
There are several components to this setting.
•
The recommended value represents the delay that is found in the machine template for
the online DV device. If for some reason, there is no “online” DV device, the
recommended value is set to the delay in the machine template of the “offline” DV
device. If no DV device is configured in the Deck Configuration and Deck Settings
dialog boxes, this value is set to 0.
•
If you want to override the recommended digital cut delay, select the Override
Recommended Digital Cut Delay option, and type a delay value into the Digital Cut
Delay (frames) text box. When a digital cut is performed, the delay value used for the
cut is based on whether the Override Recommended Digital Cut Delay option is
selected. If the option is deselected, the recommended value is used.
Before setting this delay, you should perform several digital cuts to determine the frameaccuracy behavior of the recording device. Begin with the DV digital cut delay set to 0
frames. If the digital cut frame accuracy of the device is inconsistent, the results of using the
delay are also inconsistent. If the sequence is missing frames at the beginning of the digital
cut on the tape, increase the delay. If the first frame of the sequence is repeated, decrease the
DV digital cut delay. The starting frame of the sequence should change according to your
delay.
518
Using the Digital Cut Tool: Advanced
For example, suppose the DV digital cut delay is set to 0 frames. The digital cut is expected
to begin with the first frame of the sequence being recorded on the IN point designated on
the tape. In this example, the IN point is set to frame number 6. This is where the recording
would begin on the tape. However, due to the behavior of the particular DV device, the
digital cut does not perform as expected. The first frame of the sequence recorded on the
tape is actually the fourth frame, as shown in the following figure.
Digital Cut with no delay
Sequence frames
Tape frames
Tape IN point
To correct this, the DV digital cut delay should be increased to have
the Avid system delay sending the sequence to the device. If the DV digital cut delay is set to
three frames, this should cause recording on the tape to begin with the correct sequence
frame, as shown in the following figure.
Digital Cut with delay
Sequence frames
Tape frames
Tape IN point
519
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Delaying the Sequence for a Digital Cut
You can delay the sequence stream being sent to a DV device during a digital cut. This can
help you to ensure that the first frame recorded is the first frame of your sequence. For more
information, see “Understanding DV Digital Cut Delay” on page 518.
To delay the sequence for a digital cut:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
2. Double-click Deck Preferences.
The Deck Preferences dialog box opens.
3. Select Override Recommended Digital Cut Delay.
4. Determine the approximate delay and type the delay in the Digital Cut Delay (frames)
text box.
5. Click OK.
6. Perform a digital cut.
See “Using the Digital Cut Tool” in the Help.
7. Repeat this process until you achieve the appropriate delay.
Using EDL Manager
An edit decision list (EDL) is a detailed list of the edits contained in a sequence, including
all the timecode and supported effects information required to re-create the sequence in an
online videotape suite. The EDL is organized into a series of chronological instructions
called events, which are interpreted by an edit controller that automates the assembly of the
videotape master.
Your Avid editing application includes EDL Manager, an application with powerful features
and sorting capabilities to help you prepare an EDL.
For more information on specific features and capabilities of EDL Manager, see the EDL
Manager Help.
520
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking
Interval
You can choose whether or not to display 5 lines above each field in NTSC and 8 lines above
each field for PAL and whether to preserve the lines when you perform a digital cut. These
lines can be used to store additional encoded information such as closed captioning,
edgecodes or key numbers for film projects, or various interactive or enhanced TV codes.
This section describes when it is useful to preserve the information and describes the
limitations involved when preserving these lines.
c
n
You can preserve VBI information for JFIF, uncompressed, and MPEG IMX
resolutions. You cannot preserve VBI information for DV resolutions.
In the majority of cases, you should not preserve these extra lines when you perform a
digital cut. Only do so if you have a special need for the information.
Line Ranges
Your Avid editing application is capable of capturing 248 lines per field in NTSC or 296
lines per field in PAL. For NTSC, only 243 of these lines are in RP-187’s production
aperture. For PAL, the number is 288. The additional lines in each field are located
immediately above the active part of each of the two fields. These lines (5 per field in NTSC
and 8 per field in PAL) can be used for carrying additional data.
The following table lists the extra vertical blanking lines for both NTSC and PAL:
Field
Video Raster Line Number Ranges
NTSC (5 Lines/Field)
PAL (8 Lines/Field)
Field 1
16-20
15-22
Field 2
278-282
328-335
521
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Displaying and Preserving Vertical Blanking Information
Avid editing applications using Avid DNA hardware automatically preserve the extra lines
of VBI information when you capture footage. You can choose whether to display the lines
and whether to retain the lines when you output your sequence as a digital cut.
You might want to preserve the following vertical blanking information:
•
Edgecode or key number information for a film project
You might want to preserve edgecode information to easily identify the source film reel
for a clip. In this case, the edgecode information would have been originally inserted
during the telecine process.
•
Closed-captioning information
If you are repurposing a finished sequence for another market, you might want to retain
closed-captioning codes that were added after the tape was output from the Avid system.
This would allow you to perform some basic editing on the recaptured sequence and not
to have to reapply the closed-captioning codes afterward.
n
522
Your Avid editing application does not interpret the vertical blanking information (i.e.,
encoded data). It treats the coded values simply as pixels in the video frame. If you want to
read the vertical blanking information during editing, you must connect an external vertical
blanking information reader to the Avid system.
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval
To display VBI information and preserve VBI information for a digital cut:
1. Select Tools > Video Output Tool.
The Video Output tool opens.
VBI menu
2. Click the VBI menu and select Preserve.
n
If you select Blank, your Avid editing application fills the vertical blanking interval with
video black (R=G=B=16).
3. Close the Video Output tool.
Any VBI information that is present in your clips or sequences will now be displayed. If you
perform a digital cut, any VBI information that is in your sequence will be output.
523
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
c
The VBI value resets to Blank each time you launch the application. If you want to
preserve VBI information on output, set the value before you perform a digital cut.
Editing a Sequence with VBI Information
After a sequence is created and output from the Avid editing system, some facilities apply
VBI information to the tape to add information such as closed captioning. Often, the tape is
recaptured so that the sequence can be repurposed for another market. The VBI option in the
Video Output tool allows you to display the VBI information and maintain the information
when you output the repurposed sequence.
Your Avid editing application uses the following rules when applying effects to material
containing VBI information:
n
•
Single track effects do not alter the VBI information. For example, if you apply a color
correction effect to the sequence, the VBI lines are not affected.
•
Multi-track effects such as picture-in-picture effects or 3D Warp effects use the VBI
information of the track on the lowest layer. (Swap sources is ignored in the VBI area).
If you apply a multi-track effect such as a 3D Warp effect to a sequence with a single track,
the VBI information will not be visible. One way to work around this problem is to create a
second video track and duplicate that portion of the sequence on the second track. Then
apply the 3D Warp effect to the top track. The VBI information will display on the bottom
track.
•
Transitions are treated as cuts in the VBI area.
•
Timewarp effects copy the VBI of the input’s temporally nearest field. In mild timewarp
effects this may allow VBI to pass through unaltered.
n
You cannot add or remove VBI information from a sequence. However, you can use the
Blank option to turn off the VBI display for the entire sequence.
n
You cannot preserve VBI information for DV resolutions. You can only preserve VBI
information for JFIF, uncompressed, and MPEG IMX resolutions.
524
Preserving Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval
Effects of Preserving Vertical Blanking Information on
Compressed Video Quality
For resolutions other than 1:1, preserving vertical blanking information when you capture
can affect the video quality in the rest of the frame. For example, depending on the
compression ratio, a video frame might look more blocky with vertical blanking information
included.
Your Avid editing application performs the following operations when capturing a frame:
1. It captures the entire frame (including the 5 or 8 extra lines per field) as an
uncompressed frame.
2. It compresses the frame if compression is selected.
The following problems may occur:
•
If the frame contains vertical blanking information, the picture quality of the entire
frame might be slightly degraded due to the added entropy or complexity from the
vertical blanking lines.
The higher the compression ratio, the greater the number of artifacts that might be
visible. For a compression ratio of 2:1, the number of artifacts might not be noticeable at
all.
•
Depending on the compression ratio, the vertical blanking information itself may be
distorted.
If you want to preserve vertical blanking information, either use the 1:1 (uncompressed)
resolution or experiment with different compression ratios to make sure the captured footage
or the vertical blanking information is not unacceptably affected by the compression.
525
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
Comparison with VBI on Meridien Systems
The following table shows the differences between how VBI is treated on systems with
Meridien hardware (for example, Media Composer v12.0 or Avid Symphony v5.0) and
systems with Adrenaline DNA hardware.
Vertical Blanking Information on Avid Editing Systems
Feature
Meridien
Adrenaline DNA
When does the system give you the opportunity to During capture and during a During playback and
blank VBI information?
digital cut
during a digital cut
n
In order to view VBI on a Meridien system you must disable the 3D hardware.
What dialog box or tool do you use to set VBI
blanking?
General Settings dialog box Video Output tool
Is VBI supported for DV resolutions?
No
No
Is VBI supported for MPEG IMX?
No
Yes
Does NewsCutter support VBI?
No
Yes
Doe NewsCutter XP support VBI?
No
No (Adrenaline only)
Is VBI supported for JFIF and uncompressed
resolutions?
Yes
Yes
Is VBI information preserved when you apply
effects?
Not always
Yes (see “Editing a
Sequence with VBI
Information” on
page 524.)
Can you use a two layer effect to wipe in VBI
information?
n
For example, a color
effect can modify the
VBI information on a
Meridien system.
Yes
No
Can VBI information affect compression quality? Yes
Yes
Can compression affect VBI quality?
Yes
Yes
For details on how Meridien systems support VBI, see the white paper entitled Preserving
Information in the Vertical Blanking Interval on the Avid Knowledge Base.
526
Preserving HD Closed Captioning and Ancillary Data
Preserving HD Closed Captioning and Ancillary
Data
Your Avid editing application lets you capture closed-captioning and other ancillary data in
HD media and preserve this data throughout the editing and output processes. The following
information is preserved:
•
Closed Captioning (CEA 608, CEA 708): Closed capturing ancillary data packets are
captured from the HD-SDI source according to the SMPTE 334M standard.
•
Program Description (DTV): DTV ancillary data packets are captured from the HD-SDI
source according to the SMPTE 334M standard.
•
Ancillary Time Code: Ancillary time code packets are captured from the HD-SDI
source.
These packets are transferred in the HD-SDI data stream, unlike SD closed captioning,
which is transferred in the VBI (vertical blanking interval).
To enable capture of HD ancillary data:
1. Select Tools >Console.
2. Enter the following command:
EmbedDNXCC
This console command is persistent: it remains active until you disable it by entering the
command again.
c
HD ancillary data is preserved only when playing a clip or sequence at full quality, and
in cuts-only sequences. Other actions will make the ancillary data unusable and
prevent it from being preserved.
The following tasks prevent the ancillary data from being preserved:
•
Playing back clips in draft quality or best performance quality.
•
Adding or rendering effects.
•
Transcoding media.
•
Downconverting HD media (SD downconverts do not preserve closed captioning).
•
Cross-converting HD media.
•
Outputting through the DVI port of the Adrenaline. Output must be through the HD-SDI
port.
527
Chapter 16 Generating Output: Advanced
You can play HD media that contains ancillary data in the following applications:
c
•
Media Composer Adrenaline v2.2.2 or later
•
NewsCutter Adrenaline and NewsCutter XP v6.2.2 or later
•
Avid Xpress Pro v5.2.2 or later
•
Symphony Nitris v1.0.1 or later
Earlier versions of these applications cannot play HD media that contains ancillary
data. The application displays an error message if you try to play this media.
Although you can play clips in these applications, ancillary data is preserved on output only
through the HD-SDI port of the Adrenaline hardware connected to a system running Media
Composer 2.5 or later.
528
Chapter 17
MultiCamera Editing
The Avid MultiCamera editing features allow you to incorporate multiple camera angle
sources into the nonlinear editing process. Techniques for using these features are described
in the following topics:
•
Understanding Grouping and Multigrouping Clips
•
Creating Group Clips
•
Creating Multigroup Clips
•
MultiCamera Displays
•
MultiCamera Editing Techniques
•
Selective Camera Cutting
Understanding Grouping and Multigrouping Clips
The grouping and multigrouping procedures gather selected clips into a single unique clip.
Both procedures allow you to use special MultiCamera editing features, such as multi-split
views in MultiCamera mode.
The differences between the two procedures are summarized as follows:
•
Grouping creates a separate group clip out of a single set of master clips, from the IN
point to the OUT point of the longest clip. Multigrouping takes the Group function one
step further, literally stringing numerous sequential groups into a rough sequence. For
this reason, multigroups are also known as sequence clips.
•
The Group function allows you to sync clips based on common source timecode,
auxiliary timecode, or marks placed in the footage. Because of the need for complete
accuracy in sorting and grouping the clips, multigrouping is performed on the basis of
common source timecode only.
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
•
The MultiGroup function is designed primarily for situation comedies and similar
productions that record multiple takes sequentially on the same source tapes.
Multigrouping does not provide any benefit when you edit with clips that do not share
common timecode or were not recorded sequentially, and might even cause the wrong
clips to be grouped together.
•
Because the Group function allows you to sync the clips based on customized IN points
or OUT points, you can group any collection of clips for quick cutting of montage
sequences or music-video sequences.
Creating Group Clips
In addition to the multicamera context, you can use grouped clips in other situations. Unlike
multigrouping, which requires clips with matching source timecode, you can group clips that
were shot at different times, on different days, and on completely different source tapes. This
means that you can use group clips to:
•
Create montage sequences quickly with fast-cutting between unrelated clips.
•
Sync and edit an audio track (music, for example) with two or more video tracks, useful
in music-video editing.
•
Isolate each take as a group for multicamera editing and edit selectively, rather than
build a larger sequence clip.
•
Group selected portions of multicamera clips using carefully synchronized marks.
The last two options are generally used in smaller multicamera projects. Sorting, marking,
selecting, and grouping individual takes of a larger project can be very time-consuming.
To create a group clip:
1. If you are using a sync point, load the clips and mark an IN point at the sync point at the
start of each clip, or mark an OUT point at the sync point at the end of each clip.
n
For multicamera video or film shoots, you typically use a slate for marking IN and OUT
points; however, you can use any visual or aural event that is recorded by all cameras
simultaneously.
2. In the bin, select all the clips you want to group.
3. Select Bin > Group Clips.
The Group Clips dialog box opens.
530
Creating Multigroup Clips
4. Select an option, based on the following:
Option
Description
Film TC/Sound TC
Use this option if you are syncing clips with
matching film and sound timecode recorded in the
field. This option appears dimmed if you are not
working in a 24p or 25p project.
Inpoints
Use this option if you are syncing according to IN
points set in each clip.
Outpoints
Use this option if you are syncing according to OUT
points set in each clip.
Source Timecode
Use this option if the clips have matching timecode.
Auxiliary TC1–TC5
Use this option if the clips have matching timecode
in the same Auxiliary Timecode column. Select an
Auxiliary TC, 1 through 5, from the menu.
5. Click OK.
A group clip appears in the bin, with the name of the first clip in the group, followed by
the file name extension Grp.n.
The n is the incremental number of group clips with the same name in the same bin. You
might want to rename them for easier reading, such as name.Group.
Creating Multigroup Clips
Multigrouping is strictly for use in large multicamera productions, such as situation
comedies, in which all synchronous camera shots are recorded with the same timecode. The
MultiGroup function is a single Bin menu command that eliminates the time-consuming
steps of collecting, sorting, grouping, and assembling large volumes of multicamera clips.
To multigroup your material:
1. Sort the clips by name in the bin.
2. Select Edit > Select All to select the master clips.
3. Select Bin > MultiGroup.
The Sync Selection dialog box opens.
531
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
4. Select an option, based on the following:
Option
Description
Film TC/Sound TC
Use this option if you are syncing clips with
matching film and sound timecode recorded in the
field. This option appears dimmed if you are not
working in a 24p or 25p project.
Inpoints
Use this option if you are syncing according to IN
points set in each clip.
Outpoints
Use this option if you are syncing according to OUT
points set in each clip.
Source Timecode
Use this option if the clips have matching timecode.
Auxiliary TC1–TC5
Use this option if the clips have matching timecode
in the same Auxiliary Timecode column. Select an
Auxiliary TC, 1 through 5, from the menu.
5. Click OK.
Your Avid editing application creates several group clips for each take in the bin, and
then creates a multigroup clip from the groups. The multigroup clip has the same icon as
the group clips, but the icon is preceded by a plus sign.
MultiCamera Displays
There are several displays that allow you to view and edit with multiple camera angles. You
can edit with either group clips or multigroup clips in all of the displays.
•
Full-Monitor Display—The Source monitor displays a single frame from one clip in
the group clip. You can view each angle in full-monitor size as you edit.
•
Quad Split Source View—This display allows you to view four different camera angles
of a group clip in the Source monitor. The Quad Split button switches the Source
monitor from Full-Monitor display to Quad Split Source view. The Record monitor and
Source monitor are not synchronized in Quad Split Source view.
•
Nine Split Source View—This display allows you to view nine different camera angles
of a group clip in the Source monitor. The Nine Split button switches the Source
monitor from Full-Monitor display to the Nine Split Source view. The Record monitor
and Source monitor are not synchronized in Nine Split Source view.
You can switch the Nine Split Source view from one bank of nine camera angles to a
second bank of nine camera angles by using the Swap Cam Bank or Quad Split button.
532
MultiCamera Displays
•
n
MultiCamera Mode: MultiCamera Quad Split Edit and MultiCamera Nine Split
Edit—After you create a sequence that includes group clips, you can display the
sequence in MultiCamera mode. MultiCamera mode is similar to Quad Split Source
view or Nine Split Source view, except that it gangs the Source and Record monitors
under one set of controls. All camera angles displayed in the Source monitor are
synchronized and update when stopped or scrubbing through the timeline.
To use the MultiCamera displays, you must stretch the Source/Record monitor so that both
the Source and Record monitors are visible.
Full-Monitor Display
When you first load a grouped or multigrouped clip, the Source monitor displays a single
frame from one clip in the group. This is called Full-Monitor display when working with
group clips because you can view each angle in full-monitor size as you edit.
The basic features of Full-Monitor display are as follows:
•
Provides source-oriented control of multicamera material. You can switch camera
angles, cue, and mark material without affecting the sequence.
•
Provides the same Source monitor controls that are available when you edit other clips.
•
Provides the same MultiCamera editing features that are available in Quad Split Source
view, Nine Split Source view, and MultiCamera mode. These features are described in
“MultiCamera Editing Techniques” on page 538. The only difference is that in
Full-Monitor display, you can view each angle as full size while you edit.
533
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
Quad Split Source View
After loading a group clip into the Source monitor, you enter Quad Split Source view by
clicking the Quad Split button located in the Command palette in the MCam tab. The Source
monitor splits into four camera angles of the group clip. A Group Menu icon appears in the
second row of information above the Source and Record monitors.
Quad Split Source view
Group Menu icon
Sequence
The basic features of Quad Split Source view are as follows:
534
•
Provides source-oriented control of multicamera material. You can switch camera
angles, play back (one camera angle at a time), cue, and mark material without affecting
the sequence.
•
Provides the same Source monitor controls that are available when you edit other clips.
•
Provides the special MultiCamera editing features that are available in Full-Monitor
display, Nine Split Source view, and MultiCamera mode. These features are described in
“MultiCamera Editing Techniques” on page 538.
•
Provides a list of all group clip video and audio tracks in the Group menu for custom
selection and patching.
•
Allows you to use the Quad Split button to switch the Source monitor between
Full-Monitor display and Quad Split Source viewing and editing modes (editing
functions are the same in both displays).
•
Allows you to use the Swap Cam Bank button to switch the Quad Split Source view
from one bank of four camera angles to another bank of four camera angles. The
Multi-angle View menus allow you to change the camera angles of the split displays.
•
Does not gang the Record monitor with Quad Split Source view.
MultiCamera Displays
Nine Split Source View
After loading a group clip into the Source monitor, you enter Nine Split Source view by
clicking the Nine Split button located in the Command palette in the MCam tab. The Source
monitor splits into nine camera angles of the group clip. A Group Menu icon appears in the
second row of information above the Source and Record monitors.
Nine Split Source view
Group Menu icon
Sequence
The basic features of Nine Split Source view are as follows:
•
Provides source-oriented control of multicamera material. You can switch camera
angles, play back (one camera angle at a time), cue, and mark material without affecting
the sequence.
•
Provides the same Source monitor controls that are available when you edit other clips.
•
Provides the special MultiCamera editing features that are available in Full-Monitor
display, Quad Split Source view, and MultiCamera mode. These features are described
in “MultiCamera Editing Techniques” on page 538.
•
Provides a list of all group clip video and audio tracks in the Group menu for custom
selection and patching.
•
Allows you to use the Nine Split button to switch the Source monitor between FullMonitor display and Nine Split Source viewing and editing modes (editing functions are
the same in both displays).
•
Allows you to use the Swap Cam Bank button to switch the Nine Split Source view from
one bank of nine camera angles to another bank of nine camera angles. The Multi-angle
View menus allow you to change the camera angles of the split displays.
•
Does not gang the Record monitor with Nine Split Source view.
535
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
MultiCamera Mode
After loading a group clip into the Source monitor and editing it to create a new sequence,
select MultiCamera Mode from the Special menu to activate the features. The MultiCamera
Quad Split Edit or MultiCamera Nine Split Edit is displayed, depending on whether you
were in Quad Split Source view or Nine Split Source view before entering MultiCamera
mode.
n
You can also enter MultiCamera mode by clicking the Quad Split button or the Nine Split
button if you have previously mapped the button to one of the toolbars in the Timeline or the
Source/Record monitor.
MultiCamera mode takes the Nine Split Source view and Quad Split Source view one step
further: it gangs all clips in the group clip displayed in the Source monitor with the sequence
displayed in the Record monitor. All clips are synchronized and continuously updated
during playback and editing.
n
You see the best real-time playback performance when you play material that was recorded
at 10:1m, 4:1m, or 1:1 resolutions. Also, you see better performance when you play in Best
Performance mode rather than in Full Quality mode. For more information about these
modes, see “Playing Back at Different Video Qualities” in the Help.
When you play back multicamera material, you can cut by using the MultiCam keys to
select different camera angles when stopped. The camera angles you selected with the
MultiCam keys are recorded as cuts in the Timeline and are displayed in the Record monitor.
Source monitor controls are disabled.
536
Group Menu icon
Gang icon changes to green.
MultiCamera Displays
The basic features of MultiCamera mode are as follows:
•
Provides sequence-oriented control of multicamera material, in contrast to Full-Monitor
display, Nine Split Source view, and Quad Split Source view. Whenever you play back,
cue, switch camera angles, or mark material, your changes occur in the sequence.
•
Synchronizes all camera angles displayed in the Source monitor and continuously
updates during playback and editing.
•
Lets you perform live bank swaps while playing in MultiCamera Quad Split Edit mode
by using the Swap Cam Bank button.
•
Provides only Record monitor controls.
•
Provides special MultiCamera editing features that are available in Full-Monitor display,
Quad Split Source view, and Nine Split Source view. These features are described in
“MultiCamera Editing Techniques” on page 538.
•
Allows you to cut between clips as you would during live switching of a show.
•
Provides a list of all group clip video and audio tracks in the Group menu for custom
selection and patching.
•
Lets you deselect MultiCamera Mode in the Special menu at any time to switch between
source-oriented and sequence-oriented MultiCamera editing.
•
Lets you switch between singular and multi-angle playback without exiting
MultiCamera mode.
Real-time Playback in MultiCamera Mode
You can use the Video Quality options to achieve better real-time playback performance in
SD projects when you display multiple views (Quad Split Source view or Nine Split Source)
in MultiCamera Mode. In HD projects, the Best Performance Video Quality option is the
only option available for multiple views in MultiCamera Mode. For more information on the
Video Quality menu, see “Optimizing Your Playback Performance” in the Help.
Your Avid editing application remembers your most recent Video Quality setting for
multicamera or group clips separately from your most recent Video Quality setting for
normal clips, and automatically switches to the appropriate setting when you open or close
clips in monitors.
For example, you might be working with group clips and set the Video Quality menu to Best
Performance, then close all group clips and work with single clips. When you reopen a
group clip in a monitor, your Avid editing application remembers your last group clip setting
and switches to Best Performance, regardless of the video quality you were using for single
clips.
537
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
Whenever you have a multicamera or group clip open in a monitor, your Avid editing
application uses the Video Quality setting for multicamera or group clips, even if the clips
you are currently playing are single clips. To change the Video Quality setting, you can
make a new selection from the Video Quality menu, or you can close all multicamera or
group clips to revert to your most recent Video Quality setting for single clips.
Limitations on Playback of MultiCamera Media
To play back a group clip or a multigroup clip, you must be in MultiCamera mode. In
addition, the following limitations apply to playback performance for standard-definition
projects and high-definition projects:
•
In an HD project, playback in any of the multicamera displays uses the Best
Performance mode for video quality. For information on Best Performance mode, see
“Playing Effects Back at Different Video Qualities” in the Help.
•
In an SD project, you must have an Avid DNA device attached to your system in order
to view multicamera display in a client monitor during a digital cut. Alternatively, you
can view multicamera display using Full Screen Playback.
•
In an HD project, you cannot play back a multicamera sequence to the client monitor. To
view multicamera playback, use Full Screen Playback.
For more information on full screen playback, see “PLaying Video to a Full-Screen
Monitor” in the Help.
•
In an SD project, multicamera editing works only with 8-bit resolutions. If you use
media with a 10-bit resolution, your Avid editing application automatically plays the
media at the appropriate 8-bit resolution.
MultiCamera Editing Techniques
When you load a group or multigroup clip into the Source monitor and begin editing, the
Timeline adds a unique identifier to indicate the presence of a group.
The system uses the name of the clip within the group to identify the clip in each cut, and
adds a G in parentheses to indicate the group.
(G) indicates a group clip.
538
MultiCamera Editing Techniques
Using various keys and functions, you can switch and edit the displayed group clip at any
point in the sequence. These techniques apply to both group and multigroup clips.
Switching Clips with the Arrow Keys
You can switch the display of camera angles by using the Previous In Group button and the
Next In Group button. These buttons are mapped by default to the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. The angle selection switches in either the Source monitor (source material) or
in the Record monitor (sequence material), whichever is active.
If the group contains more camera angles than the multi-split display, the Up Arrow and
Down Arrow keys cycle through all the clips. Only the first four clips are shown in the Quad
Split display and only the first nine clips are shown in the Nine Split display.
When the Record monitor is active, you can place the position indicator within any segment
and use the arrow keys to switch the group clip selected for that segment.
n
Whenever you switch camera angles, you also switch the frame representing the group in the
bin. You can use this method to change the representative frame for bin display and
storyboarding.
Using the Add Edit Button
You can use the Add Edit button like a hot key to add edits while stepping through a
sequence during playback. The only difference is that you are not switching camera angles
until after you set the edit points.
This method is especially useful when editing to music because it allows you to concentrate
on the beats and ignore camera angles until the edits are placed.
To use this method, you must first map the Add Edit button onto the keyboard. Consider
mapping the Add Edit button to a function key next to the default MultiCam keys. For more
information on mapping keys, see “Understanding Button Mapping” on page 66.
To add edits:
1. Load the group or multigroup clip into the Source monitor and splice it into a sequence.
2. Play the sequence. Each time you want to make an edit, stop and press the Add Edit key.
The edits appear in the Timeline.
Play the sequence repeatedly to add more edits, or remove edits in Trim mode by
lassoing them in the Timeline and pressing the Delete key.
3. After adding the edits, place the position indicator within each segment and use the
arrow keys to switch camera angles.
539
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
Using the Group Menu
The Group menu allows you to select video or audio channels from any of the clips in the
group and patch to the tracks available in the sequence. You can have nine camera angles
and nine or more audio tracks synchronized and available for patching at any time.
Click the
Group
Menu icon
to display
the menu.
In addition, you can select the Audio Follow Video option from the Group menu to instruct
the system to switch both audio and video for each camera angle or selective camera style.
The Group Menu icon changes to green when you select the Audio Follow Video option.
Audio Follow Video overrides the track selection beside the Timeline and switches audio in
track A1 only. Audio-Follow-Video edits appear in the Timeline as match frames (that is, the
transition contains an equal sign).
To use the Group menu:
1. Click the Group Menu icon in the second row of information above the Source monitor
to display the Group menu.
2. Select video or audio channels from any clip in the group to patch the video or audio
channels to the tracks available in the sequence.
3. (Option) Select the Audio Follow Video option to switch both audio and video for each
camera angle when you cut.
540
MultiCamera Editing Techniques
Using the Multi-angle View Menus
You can use the Multi-angle View menus to group up to 18 clips at a time, and select
additional clips to be shown in any of the multi-split displays in the Source monitor. You can
also select Sequence from the Multi-angle View menus to display the entire sequence.
To select an additional clip from the group to appear in one of the multi-split displays:
1. Press the Ctrl key to activate the display of clip names in the multi-split displays.
2. Ctrl+click the multi-split display where you want to show the new clip.
The clips in the group are listed in the Multi-angle View menu.
Select
additional
angles from
the Multiangle View
menu.
3. Select the clip you want to display from the Multi-angle View menu.
The new clip appears in the multi-split display.
Using Match Frame in MultiCamera Editing
You can use the Match Frame button to display the matching clip within the group when
match framing from the sequence, or you can display the original clip when match framing
from the source group. For more information on using the Match Frame feature, see “Using
Match Frame” in the Help.
n
If the group contains more clips than are displayed and you match a clip that is not visible
(for example, clip 5 and above for the Quad Split display), your Avid editing application
selects the clip but does not display it.
541
Chapter 17 MultiCamera Editing
Selective Camera Cutting
Selective camera cutting involves marking and editing source material into the sequence,
much as you build a sequence by using nongrouped clips in a normal session. You can play,
cue, and mark clips on the source side, and then splice, overwrite, and trim clips in the
sequence.
Perform selective camera cutting in one of the following ways:
t
Lay down an entire group as a master sequence, and then add edits, switch camera
angles, and trim within the sequence or cut in new clips.
t
Edit one clip at a time without laying down a master sequence first, effectively building
a sequence as you would with single-camera material.
The advantage of selective camera cutting with grouped clips is that all the clips are
synchronized, which simplifies the selection of camera angles. Selective camera cutting
generally requires the use of a detailed line script or detailed notes that enable you to select
clips and assemble the sequence one clip at a time.
To perform selective camera cutting:
1. Load the group or multigroup clip into the Source monitor.
2. Using timecode notes and the numeric keypad, type the timecode for the first take to
begin the sequence, and press Enter to cue the clip in the Source monitor to the take.
3. Mark IN and OUT points for the entire scene.
4. Select a camera angle for the first clip, and then splice the entire scene into a sequence.
5. Use the arrow keys, the Add Edit button, or both to select edit points and switch to
different angles throughout the master scene in the sequence.
6. To replace a portion of the take with a part from another take, use the timecode notes
again to cue the take, set marks, and perform a replace edit.
7. When you are finished with a scene, repeat the procedure for each additional scene in
the sequence.
542
Chapter 18
Using Settings
The Settings list is displayed when you click the Settings tab of the Project window. If you
select a setting in the Settings list and make changes, the new parameters remain the default
settings until you change them again. To view or modify the parameters, double-click the
setting.
For information on using the Settings window, see “Using the Settings List” on page 545.
For information on each of the settings, see the following topics:
•
24p Settings
•
Audio Settings
•
Audio Project Settings
•
Bin Settings
•
Capture Settings
•
Communication (Serial) Ports Tool Settings
•
Controller Settings
•
Correction Settings
•
Deck Configuration Settings
•
Deck Preferences Settings
•
Effect Editor Settings
•
Export Settings
•
Full Screen Playback Settings
•
General Settings
•
Grid Settings
•
Import Settings
•
Interface Settings
•
Interplay Folder Settings
•
Interplay Server Settings
Chapter 18 Using Settings
544
•
Interplay User Settings
•
Keyboard Settings
•
Marquee Title Settings
•
Media Creation Settings
•
Media Services Settings
•
Mouse Settings
•
NRCS Settings
•
PortServer Settings
•
Remote Play and Capture Settings
•
Render Settings
•
Safe Colors Settings
•
Script Settings
•
Sound Card Configuration Settings
•
Timeline Settings
•
Trim Settings
•
Video Display Settings
•
Video Input Tool Settings
•
Video Output Tool Settings
•
Workspace Settings
Using the Settings List
Using the Settings List
From the Settings list in the Project window, you can view, select, open, and alter various
User, Project, and Site settings.
To view the Settings list:
t
Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
Settings tab
Settings
type
Settings Fast
menu
Settings list
Understanding Settings
Three types of settings appear in the Settings list in the Project window, as indicated in the
third column of information: User, Project, and Site.
n
For information about the location of the settings files, see “Using the Avid Projects and
Avid Users Folders” in the Help.
•
User settings are specific to a particular editor. User settings reflect individual
preferences for adjusting the user interface in your Avid editing application. Individual
User settings are stored in each user folder.
•
Project settings are directly related to individual projects. When you change a Project
setting, it affects all editors working on the project. Specific Project settings are stored in
each project folder. Project folders are stored in the following locations, which depend
on whether your project is private or shared:
545
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Default Locations of Avid Projects Folders
Private Projects
Shared Projects
C:\Documents and Settings\Windows login
name\My Documents\Avid Projects
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Shared
Documents\Shared Avid Projects
•
n
Site settings establish default parameters for all new users and projects on a particular
system. They can apply to particular configurations of equipment installed at the site
(for example, specification and node settings for an external switcher). They can also
include other User or Project settings that you copy into the Site Settings window. Site
settings are stored in a separate Settings folder. See “Using Site Settings” on page 556.
For information about navigating in the Settings dialog boxes, see “Navigating in Dialog
Boxes and Menus” in the Help.
The following table briefly describes each item in the Settings list and where you can find
additional information on a particular item.
Settings List
546
Setting Name
Description
For More Information
24p
Sets parameters for film-to-tape
transfer and pulldown.
See “24p Settings” on page 559.
Audio
Sets the default audio pan; contains
audio scrub options.
See “Audio Settings” on page 560, and
“Adjusting Clip Gain and Pan Values” and
Adjusting Digital Scrub Parameters in the
Help.
Audio Project
Defines the audio settings for the
See “Audio Project Settings” on page 561.
project and defines the audio input and
output methods.
Bin
Sets the auto-save interval, doubleclick preferences for bins, edit clips
from bins parameters, and enables
SuperBins.
See “Bin Settings” on page 568.
Bin View
Selects and formats the information
displayed in bins.
See “Displaying Custom Bin Views” on
page 184.
Capture
Defines how the Avid system
captures and batch captures in
specific situations.
See “Capture Settings” on page 569.
Using the Settings List
Settings List (Continued)
Setting Name
Description
For More Information
Communication
(Serial) Ports
Sets a port for Remote Play and
Capture.
See “Remote Play, Capture, and PunchIn” on page 145.
Controller
Settings
Sets the default controller, port
selection, and custom controller
buttons.
See “Controller Settings” on page 576.
Correction
Sets the parameters for the Color
Correction tool.
See “Correction Settings” on page 577
and the Avid Color Correction User’s
Guide.
Deck
Configuration
Configures channels and decks into
the system.
See “Deck Configuration Settings” on
page 579.
Deck Preferences Sets preferences that affect all decks
configured into the system.
See “Deck Preferences Settings” on
page 581.
Dynamic Relink
Sets parameters that determine to
See “Dynamic Relink Settings” in the
which media files your clips should be Help.
linked when you are working in a
MultiRez environment.
Effect Editor
Changes effect parameters by
adjusting the appearance and
operation of effects.
See “Effect Editor Settings” on page 582.
Export
Sets parameters for file export.
See “Export Settings” on page 584.
General
Defines default values such as the
default starting timecode and
temporary file location for your
project.
See “General Settings” on page 616.
Grid
Defines the grid to use when you
create effects.
See “Grid Settings” on page 617 and
“Setting the Effect Grid Options” in the
Help.
Import
Sets parameters for file import.
See “Import Settings” on page 619.
Interface
Defines the appearance and function
of certain interface elements.
See “Interface Settings” on page 627 and
“Customizing the Appearance of the Avid
User Interface” on page 44.
Interplay Folder
Allows you to specify a project
directory on the asset manager to use
for checking in media objects.
See “Interplay Folder Settings” on
page 629 and the Avid Interplay
Administration Guide.
547
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Settings List (Continued)
Setting Name
Description
For More Information
Interplay Server
Allows you to specify the Avid
Interplay Server location on the
network.
See “Interplay Folder Settings” on
page 629 and the Avid Interplay
Administration Guide.
Interplay User
Allows you to set the preference for
accessing Avid asset manager.
See “Interplay User Settings” on page 630
and the Avid Interplay Administration
Guide.
Keyboard
Used to map commands from the
Command palette to the keyboard.
See “Keyboard Settings” on page 631 and
“Using the Keyboard” in the Help.
Marquee Title
Allows you to select the Title tool for See “Marquee Title Settings” on page 632
creating titles and provides options for and the Avid Marquee Title Tool User’s
promoting titles.
Guide.
Media Creation
Sets parameters for video resolution
See “Media Creation Settings” on
and selects the drives for capturing,
page 633.
creating titles, importing, performing
audio and video mixdown, and motion
effects.
Media Services
Configures your Avid editing
application to work with the Avid
Interplay Media Services Broker.
Mouse
Allows you to set the speed of
See “Mouse Settings” on page 637 and
scrolling with the mouse wheel within Mouse Scroll Wheel Support” in the
the editing application.
Help.
NRCS
Defines the name of the Newsroom
See “NRCS Settings” on page 638.
Computer System server and the
default user name. Also sets Message
of the Day and Mail options for the
NRCS tool.
PortServer
Sets up the LANshare client so its
workspaces are recognized.
Remote Play and Lets you use your editing application
Capture
like a videotape recorder.
Render
548
See “Media Services Settings” on
page 636 and the Avid Interplay Media
Services Setup and User’s Guide.
See “PortServer Settings” on page 641.
See “Remote Play and Capture Settings”
on page 642 and “Remote Play, Capture,
and Punch-In” on page 145.
Controls the size of imported graphics See “Render Settings” on page 643 and
and rendered effects to ensure that the “Creating and Using Render Settings” in
graphic or effect will be playable.
the Help.
Using the Settings List
Settings List (Continued)
Setting Name
Description
For More Information
Safe Colors
Sets the safe color parameters for the
Color Correction tool.
See “Safe Colors” in the Help.
Script
Sets the default display options for
scripts imported using script
integration.
See “Script Settings” on page 648.
Timecode
Window
Displays various timecodes in an
adjustable window. Appears in the
Settings list to facilitate copying
settings.
See “Displaying Timecode in the
Timecode Window” on page 289.
Timeline
Contains general Timeline
preferences.
See “Timeline Settings” on page 650.
Trim
Customizes the Trim mode
environment.
See “Trim Settings” on page 651.
Video Display
Allows digital camera video input;
See “Video Display Settings” on
enables support of cameras with video page 652.
input; sets the mode and source for
desktop video; enables Client monitor;
sets effects preview options.
Video Input
Opens the Video Input tool.
See “Video Input Tool Settings” on
page 654 and “Preparing for Video Input”
in the Help.
Video Output
Opens the Video Output tool.
See “Video Output Tool Settings” on
page 655 and “Selecting a Video Output
Signal” in the Help.
Workspace
Allows you to associate settings and
windows with a workspace.
See “Workspace Settings” on page 659
and “Linking User Settings and
Workspaces” on page 50.
549
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Defining Settings
You can use the Settings list to establish a hierarchy of settings that address the specific
needs of each production phase.
For example, you can establish:
n
•
User settings for the assistant editor: Facilitate logging, capturing, and organizing
projects
•
User settings for the editor: Include editing interface preferences
•
Project settings: Reflect the specific needs of the project
•
Bin View settings: Display useful columns of information for each of the bins
described in “Managing Folders and Bins” on page 38
Never use a user settings file that was opened in the MediaLog™ application.
By establishing these settings once, and selecting the appropriate setting or bin view in
context, you can save time and effort that would be spent searching for information or
adjusting bin headings on-the-fly. You can also save these settings along with your template
for use on similar projects, as described in “Managing Folders and Bins” on page 38.
For information on some of the most commonly-used system settings, see the following
topics in the Help: “Bin Settings,” “General Settings,” and “Interface Settings.”
To view the settings:
t
Double-click each setting in the Settings list in the Project window.
Displaying Project Settings
You can display the Settings list in the Project window in different groups, depending on
what you need to view.
To change the Settings list display in the Project window:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click the Fast Menu button, and select a settings display group from the Settings menu.
The selected settings group has a check mark in the Settings menu, and the Settings list
displays only the settings in that group.
550
Using the Settings List
The following table describes the different Settings display groups.
Settings Display Groups
Option
Description
Active Settings
Displays currently active settings
All Settings
Displays all settings available
Base Settings
Displays Project, User, and Site settings only; no views are displayed
Bin Views
Displays all the Bin View settings you created
Export Settings
Displays all the Export settings
Import Settings
Displays all the Import settings
Timeline Views
Displays all the Timeline View settings you created
Title Styles
Displays all the templates you created for the Title tool
Video Tools Settings
Displays the Video Input Tool and Video Output Tool settings only
Workspaces
Displays all the Workspace settings you created
Workspace Linked
Displays only the linked workspaces
Site Settings
Displays all Site settings in the Site_Settings file
Working with Settings
You can view and modify most of your current settings by double-clicking them in the
Settings list of the Project window and by selecting new options. You can duplicate, rename,
copy, and move settings among files or systems.
Selecting Another User
Because User settings are not project or site specific, you can display another set of User
settings in the Project window.
To select another user:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click the User Selection menu, and select another name.
The previous user’s settings are saved, and the new user’s settings are loaded into your Avid
editing application and the Project window.
551
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Modifying Settings
You can alter the default options for various settings to reflect the specific needs of a project
or to customize your Avid editing application based on personal preferences.
You cannot modify the following types of settings:
•
Settings that require the presence of standalone peripherals
•
Settings that are only modifiable from within the tools in which they are used, such as
Timeline views
•
Film and 24p settings when you are working in nonfilm projects
To modify available settings:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Double-click the name of a setting.
A dialog box or window opens.
3. Type new values or select new options for the setting.
4. Click OK, Save, Apply, or Cancel, or click the Close button.
The system saves changes in the appropriate User, Project, or Site settings file.
Working with Multiple Settings
You can have multiple versions of settings in your Settings list in the Project window that
apply to several users at various stages of production.
For example, you can have:
552
•
Two Bin settings — one that automatically saves more often when you are editing
intensively, and one that automatically saves less often when you are doing
organizational work in the bins
•
Multiple Capture settings for capturing various types of source material
•
Multiple Keyboard settings to use for various activities such as capturing, offline
editing, or online effects editing
•
Multiple Deck Preferences settings for various types of capturing or for output
Using the Settings List
Duplicating Settings
To create a new version of a setting:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click the setting you want to copy. Ctrl+click any additional settings you want to copy.
3. Select Edit > Duplicate.
A copy of each selected setting appears in the Settings list.
n
If you are duplicating settings with custom setting names, a period followed by a version
number appears at the end of the custom setting name of the duplicated settings.
4. Name your settings to indicate their functions. See “Naming Settings” on page 553.
Naming Settings
You can give settings custom names to differentiate among copies or to indicate a specific
use.
To enter a custom setting name:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click the Custom setting name column located to the right of the setting name.
3. Type a name, and press Enter.
The new name appears in the list and is saved in the settings file.
Selecting Among Multiple Settings
With multiple settings, only one setting at a time is active. Settings that are currently active
have a check mark to the left of the setting name.
To change the active setting:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click in the space to the left of the setting that you want to select as the active setting.
553
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Deleting Settings
You can delete settings from the Settings list in the Project window at any time. For example,
you might choose to delete one or more versions of a particular setting, or you might want to
delete all but a few settings for transfer into another Settings window.
c
You cannot undo a deletion. You can, however, restore the default settings or copy
settings from other files, as described in “Restoring Default Settings” on page 554 and
“Copying Settings Between Settings Files” on page 555.
To delete a setting:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click a setting to select it. Ctrl+click each additional setting you want to delete.
3. Do one of the following:
t
Press the Delete key.
t
Select Edit > Delete.
The selected settings are removed immediately.
Restoring Default Settings
To restore settings to their default values:
1. Click the Settings tab in the Project window.
The Settings list appears.
2. Click a setting to select it. Ctrl+click each additional setting you want to select.
3. Right-click the selected setting (or one of the multiple selected settings), and select
Restore to Default.
A message box opens, asking whether you want to save the settings.
4. Click Copy & Restore to copy the current settings before restoring the default settings,
or click Restore to discard the current settings.
The system restores the default values for the selected settings.
554
Using the Settings List
Copying Settings Between Settings Files
You can copy selected settings:
•
Between existing settings files.
•
Into a new settings file for use in other projects.
•
To change one type of setting to another type.
•
Into the Settings folder to establish standard system settings for all new projects and
users. See “Using Site Settings” on page 556.
You can also transfer settings files to another Avid system.
To copy settings between setting files:
1. With the Settings list in the Project window active, open the destination settings file in
one of the following ways:
t
Create and open a new settings file by selecting File > New Settings File.
An untitled settings file window opens.
t
Open an existing settings file by selecting File > Open Settings File, locate and
select a settings file (which has the file name extension .avs), in the Avid Projects or
Avid Users folder, and then click Open.
The settings file window opens.
2. Click the setting you want to copy in the Settings list in the Project window. Ctrl+click
any additional settings that you want to copy.
3. Drag the selected setting to the destination settings window.
The copied settings are saved when you close or save the file or project.
You can also drag settings from the settings window into the Settings list in the Project
window.
To copy a setting from a settings file into the Settings list with the setting active:
1. Drag the setting into the Settings list.
A message box opens.
2. Do one of the following
t
Click Add to add the new settings to the project without affecting the project’s current
settings.
t
Click Replace to replace the current version of each setting with the new settings.
Additional versions of each setting are not affected.
555
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Using Site Settings
When your Avid editing application opens a new project, it first searches the Site_Settings
file and loads site settings and any settings placed here. The system then proceeds to load
any Project and User settings not included in the Site_Settings file.
The Site_Settings file is located in the following folder:
•
drive:\Program Files\Avid\Avid editing application\Settings
Adding settings to the site settings files is useful if you need to establish global settings for
all new users and projects, such as switcher settings, a specific start timecode for all
sequences, or various customized features of the interface.
To load settings into the Site_Settings file:
1. Open a project with the settings you want to establish as Site settings. If a project does
not already exist with the settings you want, create a project and make adjustments to
the default settings as needed.
2. Do one of the following to open the Site_Settings window:
t
In the Project window, click the Fast Menu button and select Site Settings.
t
Select File > Open Setting File, navigate to the Settings folder, and double-click
Site_Settings file.
The Site_Settings window opens.
3. Click a Project or User setting in the Settings list in the Project window, or Ctrl+click
multiple settings.
4. Drag the selected setting to the Site Settings window.
Copies appear in the Site Settings window.
5. Close the Site Settings window.
All new users and projects opened from the Select Project dialog box use these settings as
the default settings.
556
Using the Settings List
Manipulating Settings by Importing User Profiles or
Copying Files Manually
Experienced users are accustomed to going to the desktop and moving settings and project
files around manually, but there is an easier and more reliable way of doing this. The User
Profile menu, in the Settings tab of the Project window, has two items: Create User Profile,
and Import User or User Profile. If you have another user’s settings on your system or on a
storage medium that you would like to use, select User Profile Menu > Import User or User
Profile. This option allows you to navigate to the user folder, select it, and establish it as
another user profile, accessible from the same menu. It brings all the requisite files and puts
them in the right place. For more information about using and creating User Profiles, see
“Working with User Profiles” on page 35.
If you choose, instead, to copy the folder, make sure you copy the entire folder, not just the
individual settings files. Place the copied folder in your user folder.
A standard file structure with multiple users:
Avid Users
EMaxwell
EMaxwell Settings.avs
EMaxwell.ave
MCState
User2
User2 Settings.avs
User2.ave
MCState
557
Chapter 18 Using Settings
If you use the User Profile option to import User1 and User2 (turning them into User
Profiles), you see something like this:
Avid Users
OS login name
EMaxwell
EMaxwell Settings.avs
EMaxwell.ave
MCState
UserProfile1
UserProfile1 Settings.avs
UserProfile1.ave
MCState
UserProfile2
UserProfile2 Settings.avs
UserProfile2.ave
MCState
OS login name
AnotherOS_User
AnotherOS_User Settings.avs
AnotherOS_User.ave
MCState
UserProfile1
UserProfile1 Settings.avs
UserProfile1.ave
MCState
Another user
settings folder
copied in
JoeB
JoeB Settings.avs
JoeB.ave
MCState
For more information about selecting projects, see “Opening and Closing a Project” in the
Help.
558
24p Settings
24p Settings
24p settings apply to some progressive format projects. The following table describes the
options available in the 24p Settings dialog box.
n
In the Settings list in the Project window, double-click Film and 24P Settings to open the 24P
Settings dialog box.
24P Setting Dialog Box Options
Option
Description
Video Pulldown Cadence
(NTSC only)
Specify the type of film-to-tape transfer. The choices are:
Video Rate, no pulldown. For 24-fps footage transferred MOS (without
sound) to 30 fps by speeding up the film and using audio brought into the
Avid system separately at 100% of the actual speed.
Standard 2:3:2:3 pulldown. For 24-fps footage transferred to 30 fps using
Standard Pulldown with the audio synchronized to the picture.
Advanced 2:3:2:3 pulldown. For 24-fps footage transferred to 30 fps using
Advanced Pulldown with the audio synchronized to the picture.
Set Pulldown Phase of Timecode Set a default pulldown phase for a 23.976p NTSC project. For more
(NTSC only)
information, see “Setting the Pulldown Phase” on page 100.
559
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Audio Settings
The following table describes options available in Audio Settings.
Audio Settings
Option
Description
Source Scrub
Select the number of outgoing and incoming frames you hear as you scrub the source.
Timeline Scrub
Select the number of outgoing and incoming frames you hear as you scrub in the
timeline.
Default Pan
Select the way you want sound to pan between speakers.
•
Alternating L/R
Allows you to send the odd tracks to the left channel and send the even tracks to the
right channel.
•
All Tracks Centered Centers the pan of all tracks between the two speakers for monitoring and output.
Play Buffer Size in
Allows you to change the size of the host audio play buffer during playback and
Samples (Software-only digital cut. Use this option if you experience performance problems with playback to
Models)
the host audio device. Avid recommends that this setting be left in its default position.
n
Changing this parameter might cause audio or video underruns, dropped
frames, or increased noise in the audio output.
For more information, see “Adjusting Buffer Size (Software-only Models)” in the
Help.
To return the setting to the Avid recommended default setting, click the rs
(recommended sample) button.
Tool Buffer Size in
Allows you to change the size of the host audio play buffer during audio loop play and
Samples (Software-only audio tools play (such as automation gain record). Reducing the tools play buffer size
Models)
decreases the overall latency between the time you adjust an audio parameter in your
Avid editing application and the time that you hear those changes through the speaker.
n
Changing this parameter might cause audio or video underruns, dropped
frames, or increased noise in the audio output. Since performance varies from
machine to machine, you should find a setting that works best. For best results
when adjusting this setting, turn off or disconnect all DV devices.
For more information, see “Adjusting Buffer Size (Software-only Models)” in the
Help.
To return the setting to the Avid recommended default setting, click the rs
(recommended sample) button.
560
Audio Project Settings
Audio Project Settings
The following topics describe options available in Audio Project Settings.
You can save multiple Audio Project settings and select one as the active setting. If you edit
an inactive setting, your Avid editing application does not display items that are not saved.
For example, Mix Mode is not displayed in an inactive setting because it can’t be saved in
the Project settings.
n
The Direct Out mode is saved in the Audio settings, not the Audio Project settings. You set it
in the Output tab of the Audio Project window but the system saves the value in the active
Audio settings.
Audio Projects Settings: Main Tab
The following table describes options available in the Audio Projects Settings: Main tab.
Audio Project Settings: Main Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Sample Rate
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
Allows you to select audio rate settings for the entire system for playing
and recording.
The broadcast standard for most high-end video postproduction houses
is 48 kHz. Select the rate based on the requirements of your facility.
For information on changing the sample rate for individual sequences
and audio clips, see “Changing the Sample Rate for Sequences and
Audio Clips” in the Help.
Audio File Format WAVE (OMF)
AIFF-C (OMF)
PCM (MXF)
Select the file format for the audio:
•
WAVE (OMF) is compatible with Windows applications.
•
AIFF-C (OMF) is compatible with many third-party applications,
including Pro Tools.
•
PCM (MXF) enables easy exchange of material between servers,
tape streamers, and digital archives.
Select the WAVE or AIFF-C for all audio media when you need to
transfer audio media files directly to a Pro Tools system for audio
sweetening.
n
561
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Audio Project Settings: Main Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Sample Bit Depth
16 Bit
24 Bit
Select this option to set the sample size used when you work with audio
files:
DV Audio Pattern Unlocked Audio
Locked Audio
•
16 Bit is for CD-quality audio.
•
24 Bit is for work with higher resolution audio.
This option is only available for you to select from when your Avid
editing application is in a software-only configuration.
When an Avid DNA device is attached, this option is grayed out. The
option is automatically selected for you depending on the deck template
you have chosen. Unlocked audio is selected for all device templates,
with the exception of DVCPro device templates, which select Locked
Audio.
DV Audio Pattern works with all devices. However, because some
devices check the DV Audio Pattern setting before transferring or
recording, you should select the DV Audio Pattern setting expected by
your device.
Convert Sample
Rates When
Playing
Always
Never
•
Unlocked Audio allows some imprecision in the audio sample rate,
with a variation of up to +/– 25 audio samples per frame.
•
Locked Audio keeps the audio clock locked precisely to the video
clock, so exactly the same number of audio samples and video
frames are recorded or transmitted in each cycle of the phase
relationship.
Allows you to choose whether or not to perform the conversion rate:
•
Never plays the segments not set at the sample rate as silence.
•
Always makes the system attempt to perform a sample rate
conversion on-the-fly. Although the resulting audio quality might
not be useful for a finished project, it can be useful during an editing
session since it prevents audio from playing back with silence.
For information on changing the sample rate for individual sequences
and audio clips, see “Changing the Sample Rate for Sequences and
Audio Clips” in the Help.
562
Audio Project Settings
Audio Project Settings: Main Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Show Mismatched Yes
Sample Rates as
No
Different Color
Allows you to identify a specific sample rate by color if you have a
sequence with several different sample rates.
Optical
ADAT
Connection —
S/PDIF
available when you
are using
Avid Adrenaline
hardware
Allows you to select an output for use with an optical connection.
Audio Project Settings: Input Tab
n
The options that appear in this tab depend on your audio configuration and the audio
hardware installed on your system. Your options might differ from those listed here.
The following table describes options available in the Audio Projects Settings: Input tab.
Audio Project Settings: Input Tab
Option
Input Gain slider —
available with softwareonly configurations
Input Source
Suboption
Description
A slider that controls your computer’s volume settings.
If you select the +20 dB check box, gain is additionally
boosted.
Input options depend Allows you to select the type of audio input.
on the audio
If you select IEEE 1394 as your input device, the
hardware installed in
input source is automatically set to Host-1394. For
or connected to your
more information, see “Connecting and Selecting a
system.
DV Device” in the Help.
n
Passthrough Mix Tool —
available when you are
using Avid DNA hardware
Opens the Passthrough Mix tool, which allows you to adjust
the mix of tracks for monitoring audio input.
Input Gain menu—
available when you are
using Avid Mojo or
Avid Mojo SDI hardware
Allows you to calibrate the volume of global audio input.
Select 0dB for most situations, or +6 dB in case of low gain
inputs.
563
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Audio Project Settings: Output Tab
n
The options that appear in this tab depend on your audio configuration and the audio
hardware installed on your system. Your options might differ from those listed here.
The following table describes options available in the Audio Projects Settings: Output tab.
Audio Project Settings: Output Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Output Gain
Allows you to calibrate the volume of global audio
output.
Monitor Volume —
available with softwareonly configurations
Allows you to adjust the volume of the desktop speakers.
Use the Mute button to mute audio output to speakers or
headphones.
Mix Mode Selection
Menu button
Stereo
Modifies the way that the system interprets audio values
Mono
during playback:
Direct Out— available
• Stereo mixes the currently monitored audio tracks
when you are using
into a stereo pair. When you are using Avid
Avid Adrenaline or
Adrenaline or Avid Mojo SDI hardware, you can
Avid Mojo SDI hardware
customize the mix using the Stereo Mix Tracks
option.
•
Mono pans all the currently monitored tracks to
center. This mode also ignores pan effects.
•
Direct Out maps tracks directly to up to eight
channels of output. By default, Direct Out maps all
audio tracks in numerical sequence to existing output
channels. You can remap a track to any channel by
clicking the Channel Assignment menu and selecting
another channel.
n
Stereo Mix Tracks—
available when you are
using Avid Adrenaline or
Avid Mojo SDI hardware
564
Mix To 1 & 2
Mix To 3 & 4
Mix To 5 & 6
Mix To 7 & 8
Pan settings are ignored during a Direct Out
operation.
Allows you to customize the mix of tracks with Stereo
selected in the Mix Mode Selection Menu button.
Your Avid editing application sends a stereo mix to the
two channels you select. Material panned to the left will
be sent to the odd channel, and material panned to the
right will be sent to the even channel. The number of
channels available depends on the audio output you select
or on the options you select in the SD SDI tab of the
Output tab.
Audio Project Settings
Audio Project Settings: Output Tab (Continued)
Option
All or Timeline Track
Maps
Suboption
Description
All
Timeline
Available when you select Direct Out with the Mix Mode
Selection Menu button.
Allows you to map the track and output channels:
Which Set of Track
Maps
Grp 1
Grp 2
Grp 3
Reset
•
All allows you to choose between all available tracks.
•
Timeline allows you to assign output channels to the
tracks monitored in the Timeline.
Available when you select Direct Out with the Mix Mode
Selection Menu button.
Allows you to select which set of output tracks to map to
audio channels. Groups of tracks display in multiples of
8, up to the maximum of 24 available audio tracks.
Available when you select Direct Out with the Mix Mode
Selection Menu button.
Reassigns the audio tracks of the sequence to the default
channels that are currently available.
Output type option tab:
On/Off
SD SDI — available when
you are using
4 channels 20 bits
Avid Adrenaline or
4 channels 24 bits
Avid Mojo SDI hardware
8 channels 20 bits
8 channels 24 bits
Turn this option on to embed the audio with the video in
SDI output.
Output type option tab:
On/Off
HD SDI — available
when you are using
4 channels 24 bits
Avid Adrenaline hardware
8 channels 24 bits
with an HD project
Turn this option on to embed the audio with the video in
HD SDI output.
Select an option based on the number of channels you
want and the sample rate you want on the outgoing SDI
signal.
Select an option based on the number of channels you
want on the outgoing SDI signal.
565
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Audio Project Settings: Hardware Tab
The following table describes settings available in the Audio Projects Settings: Hardware
tab.The settings in this tab (aside from HW Calibration) are for informational purposes only
and list defaults set by the system, depending on your audio hardware and configuration.
Audio Project Settings: Hardware Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Card
The type of audio card installed.
Peripheral
The type of peripheral audio device (audio interface)
attached to the system.
Sync Mode
Sync is used for audio input and output to ensure the
audio sample clock is always in sync with the video
clock. This prevents long-term drift between audio and
video.
When you are working with video and digital audio
simultaneously, set your digital audio equipment to the
same video reference signal as your video equipment.
n
HW Calibration —
available when you are
using Avid Adrenaline
hardware
566
-14dBFS
-18dBFS
-20dBFS
Changing the audio input selection automatically
selects the correct audio clock source for audio
sync.
Allows you to match the software audio calibration to
your Avid Adrenaline hardware. The default value for the
software and hardware is -20dBFS. If you don’t change
your hardware settings, keep this value at -20dBFS. For
information on changing the hardware setting, see
“Calibrating Audio Input Channels” on page 118 and
“Calibrating Audio Output Channels” on page 119.
Audio Project Settings
Audio Project Settings: Effects Tab
The following table describes options available in the Audio Projects Settings: Effects tab.
Audio Project Settings: Effects Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Bypass panel
Clip Gain
RT EQ
Auto Gain
Allows you to have your Avid editing application ignore
the volume settings established with the audio tools when
playing back or recording a sequence:
•
Clip Gain bypasses the clip gain mode of the Audio
Mixer tool.
•
RT EQ bypasses all unrendered EQ effects set in the
Audio EQ tool.
•
Auto Gain bypasses all Automation Gain and Pan
effects set in the Automation Gain and Pan mode of
the Audio Mixer tool.
These buttons function the same as the Bypass buttons in
the audio tools.
Render Sample Rate
Conversion Quality
High and Slow
Balanced
Low and Fast
Allows you to set the conversion quality of all
non-real-time sample rate conversions.
Real-Time Audio
Dissolves
Disabled
Enabled
Allows you to play audio dissolves (also called
crossfades) as real-time effects. Select Disabled if you
experience an audio performance delay in your Avid
editing application.
Dissolve Midpoint
Attenuation
Const Power –3dB
Linear –6dB
Sets the method used for audio dissolves:
•
Const Power –3dB uses constant power to maintain a
consistent sound level through the midpoint of the
dissolve.
•
Linear –6dB uses a linear gradient to maintain a
consistent amplitude through the midpoint of the
dissolve.
567
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Bin Settings
The following table describes options available in Bin Settings.
Bin Settings
Option
Description
Auto-Save interval n minutes
Specifies the length of time between attempts to auto-save project files. The
default is 15 minutes.
To avoid interrupting an edit, the Avid system waits until the system is inactive
before auto-saving. Use the option “Force Auto-Save at” to specify an interval
at which the system interrupts an edit to make the auto-save.
Inactivity period n seconds
Specifies the length of time the Avid system waits when the system is inactive
before automatically saving the project files. The default is 0 seconds.
Force Auto-Save at n minutes
Specifies the maximum length of time between auto-saves. When the system
reaches this time, it auto-saves the project files even if it must interrupt an edit
to do so. The default is 30 minutes.
Maximum files in a project’s
attic
Specifies the total number of files stored in the Avid Attic folder. When a bin is
saved, the Avid system copies the current version of the bin to a special folder
called the Avid Attic. The default is 30 files.
Keep more files if there are many editors working on the system. This ensures
that all the bins are backed up.
Max versions of a file in the
attic
Specifies the total number of single-bin copies stored in the Avid Attic folder.
This setting prevents filling the Avid Attic with too many copies of one bin, at
the risk of losing the others. The default is five copies.
Double-click loads object in
Determines what happens when you double-click an object in the bin.
New Pop-up
Monitor
Creates a new Source pop-up monitor and automatically loads the clip when
you double-click an object in the bin.
Source or Record
Monitor
•
When you have the Source/Record monitor stretched into two monitors,
loads the clip into the Source monitor or the sequence into the Record
monitor.
•
When you are using the single Source/Record monitor, loads the clip or
sequence into the existing Source pop-up monitor.
Enable edit from bin (Splice,
Overwrite)
Allows you to edit clips directly from a bin by selecting a clip and clicking the
Splice-in or the Overwrite button.
Enable
SuperBin
Enables the SuperBin and its functions. See “Conserving Screen Real Estate
with the SuperBin” in the Help.
568
Capture Settings
Capture Settings
Capture settings include essential options for capturing, batch capturing, auto capturing,
capturing to multiple media files, DV scene extraction, and setting key commands.
The following topics describe options available in Capture Settings.
•
Capture Settings: DV Options Tab
Capture Settings: General Tab
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: General tab.
Capture Settings: General Tab
Option
Description
Stop deck after capture
Select this option if you want to stop the deck when the capture operation is
complete.
Pause deck after capture
Select this option if you want to pause the deck when the capture operation is
complete.
Preroll Method
Select one of four methods from the menu. For more information, see
“Selecting the Preroll Method” on page 106.
Force unique clip names
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to automatically
assign a clip name based on the bin’s name and to make sure this name, or
another name you select, is not already used by any other object in the bin.
Activate bin window after
capture
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to change the
focus from the Capture Tool window to a bin window after capturing or
logging is complete. This allows you to immediately start working in the bin.
n
This option is also used to activate the window after logging.
Space bar stops capture
Select this option if you want to use the space bar to create clip names during
the capturing process. When you press the space bar during a capture
operation, your Avid editing application stops capturing, creates a clip from
the capture material, and places the clip in the active bin.
Capture across timecode breaks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application captures sections
of discontinuous timecode on a tape as separate clips.
Deselect this option to make your Avid editing application stop capturing and
report an error when it encounters a timecode break.
Stop capture if a bad frame is
detected
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application stops capturing if
a corrupt frame is detected. This setting is enabled by default.
569
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Capture Settings: General Tab (Continued)
Option
Description
Latency for no deck mode n
frames
Select this option to compensate for problems that could occur when
capturing with external timecode, as described in “Capturing in Satellite
Mode or No Device Control” on page 137.
If you notice that your captured media consistently starts on the wrong frame
(usually one or two frames off), use this option to ensure that capturing starts
on the correct frame. The option is set to zero by default.
This option is not available in software-only configurations.
Capture a single video frame
only
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to capture a
single frame of video from your clip. When you click the Record button, the
Avid editing application captures the currently displayed frame.
Ask before discarding a canceled Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to query whether
clip
to discard the canceled clip, keep it, or try again.
Ask for name when a new tape is Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to query you for a
seen
name when it detects a new tape.
Pause deck while logging
570
When this option is selected, the deck pauses after you set an OUT point
while you log clips; this allows you time to type the name of the clip. See
“Logging Directly into a Bin” on page 90. Deselect this option to allow the
camera or deck to continue playing after you set an OUT point.
Capture Settings
Capture Settings: Batch Tab
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: Batch tab.
Capture Settings: Batch Tab
Option
Description
Optimize for disk space
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application captures
only the exact amount of material in the master clips plus any
additional handles. The tape pauses and prerolls independently for
each master clip that is batch captured.
Optimize for batch speed
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application speeds up
batch capturing by allowing the deck to continue to roll forward
between adjoining clips. To qualify for this operation, the two
adjoining clips must meet the following criteria:
•
There must be 5 seconds or less between the OUT point of the
first clip and the IN point of the second clip.
•
The two clips must have the same video resolution and the same
audio rate.
n
Switch to emptiest drive if current drive
is full
If you select this option, your Avid editing application might
occasionally capture more than is required.
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application switches
to the target media storage drive with the most available space when
the current target drive becomes full during batch capturing. YOur
application switches before starting to capture the clip, based on the
number of minutes in the clip. For complete instructions, see “Batch
Capturing Clips” in the Help.
If you do not select this option, capturing stops when a drive becomes
full.
Rewind tape when finished
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application
automatically rewinds tapes after batch capturing is finished.
Eject tape when finished
When this option is selected, the tape ejects as soon as the last shot
from that tape has been used. This adds to efficiency since you can do
other tasks while the tape is being used and yet still be alerted at the
moment the tape is no longer needed.
Log errors to the console and continue
capturing
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to
continue capturing if an error occurs during the capture process.
Capture the tracks logged for each clip
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to capture
the tracks logged for each clip.
571
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Capture Settings: Batch Tab (Continued)
Option
Description
Use the audio sample rate logged for
each clip
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to use the
audio sample rate logged for each clip.
Use the audio sample bit depth logged for Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to use the
each clip
audio sample bit depth logged for each clip.
Use the video compression logged for
each clip
Select this option if you want your Avid editing application to use the
video compression logged for each clip.
Capture Settings: Edit Tab
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: Edit tab.
Capture Settings: Edit Tab
Option
Description
Enable edit to timeline (splice, overwrite) Select this option to display the Splice-in Edit and Overwrite Edit
buttons in the Capture tool.
Handles
Indicate the amount of footage you want to capture before and after
the IN and OUT points of the clips (when capturing to the Timeline
only).
Enable voice-over
Select this option if you want to display the Voice-Over button in the
Capture tool.
Preroll
Postroll
Indicate the amount of preroll and postroll you want to capture before
and after the voice-over.
572
Capture Settings
Capture Settings: OMF Media Files Tab
n
If you select OMF in the Media Type tab of the Media Creation dialog box, this tab in the
Capture Settings dialog box is labeled OMF Media Files. If you select MXF, the Capture
Settings tab is labeled MXF Media Files.
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: OMF Media Files
tab.
Capture Settings: OMF Media Files Tab
Option
Description
Capture to a single file, 2 GB limit
When this option is selected, capturing stops when the media captured has
taken up 2 gigabytes (GB) of storage space on the media drive.
Capture to multiple files
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application writes
captured video or audio to multiple files across multiple drive partitions.
Select this option for clips that might exceed the 2-GB file-size limit.
Maximum (default) capture time n
minutes
Before a capture begins, your Avid editing application preallocates
(reserves) space on the target drive or drives. Your application uses this
setting to determine how much space to preallocate. The default capture
time is 30 minutes.
This setting applies only to capture-on-the-fly and capture from an IN
point without an OUT point. Capture from an IN point to an OUT point
overrides this setting. Change this setting only if you intend to capture onthe-fly for longer than 30 minutes. In this case, your Avid editing
application captures for only the specified number of minutes, so be
careful not to underestimate.
Switch to emptiest drive
when n minutes left
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application switches to
another storage drive when the specified amount of time remains.
573
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Capture Settings: MXF Media Files Tab
n
If you select MXF in the Media Type tab of the Media Creation dialog box, this tab in the
Capture Settings dialog box is labeled MXF Media Files. If you select OMF, the Capture
Settings tab is labeled OMF Media Files.
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: MXF Media Files
tab.
Capture Setting: MXF Media Files Tab
Option
Description
Maximum (default)
capture time n minutes
Before a capture begins, your Avid editing application preallocates (reserves) space
on the target drive or drives. Your application uses this setting to determine how
much space to preallocate. The default capture time is 30 minutes.
If Frame Chase capture is enabled (the “During capture, clip is updated in Interplay
option is selected), this option defines the expected duration in minutes for a Frame
Chase clip that you create during on-the-fly or open-ended capture (that is, when no
IN and OUT marks are set in the Capture tool).
This setting applies only to capture-on-the-fly and capture from an IN point without
an OUT point. Capture from an IN point to an OUT point overrides this setting.
Change this setting only if you intend to capture on-the-fly for longer than 30
minutes. In this case, your Avid editing application captures for only the specified
number of minutes, so be careful not to underestimate.
During capture, clip is
updated in Interplay
Update Interval
When this option is selected, Frame Chase capture is enabled. An initial check-in
takes place 10 seconds after a capture begins. Subsequent Interplay updates occur at
intervals defined by the Update Interval option. For more information, see “Enabling
Frame Chase Capture” in the Help.
Select an update interval from the menu to determine how frequently updates to
Interplay occur during a Frame Chase capture.
In most circumstances it is preferable to keep the update interval low (1 minute or 2
minutes). This ensures that information added during capture (for example,
comments or locators) is available as quickly as possible.
Switch to emptiest drive
when n minutes left
574
When this option is selected, the system switches to another storage drive when the
specified amount of time remains.
Capture Settings
Capture Settings: DV Options Tab
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: DV Options tab.
Capture Settings: DV Options Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
DV Scene Extraction
When this option is selected, you can automatically generate
subclips and locators based on time-of-day (TOD) information
contained in the DV video format. See “DV and HDV Scene
Extraction” on page 154.
Add Locators
Creates locator marks where the TOD information breaks occur
while capturing.
Create Subclips
Creates subclips where the TOD information breaks occur while
capturing.
Both
Creates locators and subclips where the TOD information breaks
occur while capturing.
Use software DV25
codec
Select this codec when you are in an NTSC 23.976p project
capturing DV25 from analog or SDI. This allows you to capture
standard or advanced pulldown. If you are in an NTSC 23.976
project and you do not select this DV software codec, you can
capture only advanced pulldown.
Capture Settings: Keys Tab
The following table describes options available in the Capture Settings: Keys tab.
Capture Settings: Keys Tab
Option
Description
Function Key Commands (while
capturing/logging)
Allows you to change the commands mapped to the function keys on
your keyboard. These mappings apply to Capture mode only.
Timed Subclip
Allows you to specify a preset duration for subclips created while
capturing.
575
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Communication (Serial) Ports Tool Settings
The Communication (Serial) Ports tool allows you to view the current configuration of the
serial interface at any time during editing. You can also use it to reconfigure the ports
without closing your Avid editing application or shutting down the computer.
The following table describes options available in the Communication (Serial) Ports Tool
settings dialog box.
Communication (Serial) Ports Tool Settings
Option
Description
Remote Play and Capture
Choose a port for an edit controller that uses the Sony serial control
protocol. For more information, see “Remote Play, Capture, and PunchIn” on page 145.
Controller Settings
The following table describes options available in the Controller Settings.
Controller Settings
Option
Description
Controller
Click the Controller menu, and select one of the following:
•
No Controller
•
Digidesign 002
•
Digidesign Command|8
Port
Click the Port menu, and select the port used to connect your controller.
Edit Settings
If you have selected a port and controller, click Edit Setting to map the controller
functions.
Gain Controller Port
Select a port for a fader or a mixer to record audio gain information. The options on
this menu differ depending on the ports you have configured on your Avid editing
application.
576
Correction Settings
Correction Settings
The following topics describe options available in the Color Correction settings.
For more information about options in the Correction Settings, see “Customizing Color
Correction Mode Settings” in the Help.
Correction Settings: Features Tab
The following table describes options available in the Correction Settings: Features tab.
Correction Settings: Features Tab
Option
Suboption
Saved Color Labels
Description
Select an item from the menu to control how custom colors are
named in bins. For information on saving custom colors, see
“Assigning Colors to Bin Objects” on page 186.
None
When selected, your Avid editing application does not supply a
name.
RGB
When selected, your Avid editing application uses the 8-bit
values for the red, green, and blue components as the name.
Name
When selected, your Avid editing application uses the name
from the standard HTML color scheme that most closely
matches the color you are saving.
Name and RGB
When selected, your Avid editing application uses both the
Name and the RGB information as the name. This is the default
option.
Eyedropper 3 x 3
Averaging
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application
calculates the color value to pick by averaging the values of a
3 x 3 sample of pixels centered on the eyedropper’s position.
This is often useful for picking up a color accurately by sight
because it compensates for shifts in color value from one pixel
to another. When this option is deselected, your Avid editing
application selects the color value of the exact pixel at the
eyedropper’s position.
Show Eyedropper Info
When this option is selected, the numerical RGB values appear
on the color swatches in the Color Match controls.
Eyedropper Picks from
Anywhere in Application
When this option is selected, you can pick colors from anywhere
in the application, not only from video images in the
Source/Record monitor, using the Color Match eyedroppers.
577
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Correction Settings: AutoCorrect Tab
The following table describes options available in the Correction Settings: AutoCorrect tab.
Correction Settings: AutoCorrect Tab
Option
Suboption
When applying Color
correction from the
Effect Palette, perform
the following operations:
Description
Select an option from menus to define the first, second, and
third automatic color correction that Avid Color Correction
makes when you apply the Color Correction effect from the
Effect Palette.
Nothing
Makes no adjustment. For example, if you only want to make
two automatic corrections when you drag the Color
Correction effect from the Effect Palette, set the Third
Correction menu in the AutoCorrect tab to Nothing.
HSL Auto Balance
Makes adjustments to the three ChromaWheels to balance the
colors in the image. The equivalent of clicking the Auto
Balance button in the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of the HSL
tab.
HSL Auto Black
Adjusts the Setup slider in the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of
the HSL tab to make the darkest areas of the image as dark as
possible. The equivalent of clicking the Auto Black button in
the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of the HSL tab.
HSL Auto Contrast
Adjusts the Gain and Setup sliders in the Hue Offsets
subdividing tab of the HSL tab to maximize the tonal range in
the image. The equivalent of clicking the Auto Contrast button
in the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of the HSL tab.
HSL Auto White
Adjusts the Gain slider in the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of
the HSL tab to make the brightest areas of the image as bright
as possible. The equivalent of clicking the Auto White button
in the Hue Offsets subdividing tab of the HSL tab.
Curves Auto Balance Makes adjustments to the Red, Green, and Blue curves to
balance the colors in the image. The equivalent of clicking the
Auto Balance button in the Curves tab.
Curves Auto Contrast Makes an adjustment to the Master curve to maximize the
tonal range in the image. The equivalent of clicking the Auto
Contrast button in the Curves tab.
578
Deck Configuration Settings
Deck Configuration Settings
The following table describes options available in Deck Configuration Settings.
For information on the Deck Settings options, see “Deck Settings” on page 579.
Deck Configuration Settings
Option
Description
Configuration name
Type a name for the configuration.
Add channel
Click to add a new channel box. Opens the Channel dialog box.
Add deck
Click to add a deck or DV device. Opens the Deck Settings dialog box.
Delete
Click to delete a deck or DV device.
Auto-configure
With a deck or DV device already connected to your Avid editing
application, you can click Auto-configure to bypass the Deck Settings
dialog box and automatically configure a deck or DV device with the
default settings.
n
Not all DV devices respond to the Auto-configure command. Due to
this limitation, Auto-configure selects only the generic devices.
Verify configuration against actual Select if you want your Avid editing application to check the deck
decks
configuration against the devices physically connected to the system.
Deck Settings
To access the Deck Settings dialog box, do one of the following:
t
Click the Add Deck button in the Deck Configuration dialog box.
t
In the deck controller section of the Capture tool, click the Deck Selection menu, and
select Adjust Deck.
t
Double-click the deck name in the Deck Settings dialog box.
Deck Settings Options
Option
Suboption
Description
Name
Type your custom name for the tape deck. The default name matches the deck
type.
Description
Enter notes about the deck.
579
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Deck Settings Options (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Notes
Displays configuration information, supplied by Avid, about the deck or DV
device you have selected. Not all decks or devices include this information.
You can supply your own information in the Description field, and then save
the configuration.
Device
Click the Manufacturer menu, and select your device manufacturer. Click the
Model menu, and select your device model.
If your device does not appear in the list, click the Manufacturer menu, and
select Generic, and click the Model menu, and select the type of device.
While you are capturing, if you continually see a message box that reads “Fail
to find preroll,” click the Model menu, and select GenericDVBasicDeviceNTSC or GenericDVBasicDevice-PAL
Address
Show
For VLXi use only, see your VLXi documentation. If you are using direct
serial port deck control, this option is unavailable.
All Devices
Displays all devices by manufacturer and model in the Device menu.
Decks
Displays only decks by manufacturer and model in the Device menu.
Transcoders
Displays only transcoders by manufacturer and model in the Device menu.
Preroll
Specifies how many seconds the tape rolls before capturing or digital cut
starts. The default is based on the type of videotape recorder (VTR).
Fast Cue
Speeds up long searches if your decks can read timecode in fast forward or
rewind mode.
Switch to ff/rew When this option is selected, your Avid editing application switches to fast
(seconds): n
forward or rewind if the target timecode is beyond the specified number of
seconds from your current location on the tape.
By default, the deck switches to fast forward or rewind to reach a target
timecode that is more than 60 seconds away.
If your deck shuttles very quickly, you can increase this number so that the
system uses fast cue only for long searches.
Switch to Search When this option is selected, your Avid editing application switches out of fast
(seconds): n
forward or rewind when it is within the specified number of seconds of the
target timecode. By default, your Avid editing application switches to search
mode when it is 60 seconds from the target timecode.
580
Deck Preferences Settings
Deck Preferences Settings
The following table describes options available in Deck Preferences Settings.
Deck Preferences Settings
Option
Description
When the deck contains
no tape or drop frame
cannot be detected set
timecode to
Select the timecode format (Drop Frame or Non-drop Frame) for logging clips when
no tape is in the deck or when drop frame or non-drop frame cannot be detected.
When a tape is in the deck, your Avid editing application automatically uses the
existing timecode format on the tape.
Allow assemble edit &
When this option is selected, you can use the assemble-edit and crash-record
crash record for digital cut features in the Digital Cut tool, along with the assemble-editing and manual
recording capabilities of your record deck. Select this option to record frameaccurate digital cuts quickly and without striping entire tapes in advance while using
the assemble edit feature. Select this option also if you want to operate the deck
manually. For more information about digital cuts and assemble editing, see
“Generating Output: Basics” in the Help. For information about crash recording, see
“Crash Recording” in the Help.
Stop key pauses deck
This option defines the function of the Stop key (space bar) on the keyboard. Select
this option to map the space bar to the Pause button on the deck. Deselect this option
to map the space bar to the Stop button.
If the videotape heads are down in “Stop key pauses deck” mode, pressing the space
bar brings up the heads and pauses the deck.
The Stop button in the Capture tool always stops the decks.
Shuttle holds speed
When this option is selected, the Shuttle button continues shuttling at a constant
speed instead of stopping when you release it.
Stop any paused decks
when quitting
When this option is selected, any paused decks are stopped when you quit your Avid
editing application. Selecting this option saves wear on the deck heads.
Poll deck during digital
cut
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application checks the deck for the
current timecode and displays it in the timecode window of the deck controller. If
you see degraded image quality on your digital cut (particularly visible as noise
during black), deselect this option and record the digital cut again. With the option
deselected, the Record button does not flash and the timecode display in the deck
controller is not updated for the duration of the digital cut.
581
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Deck Preferences Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
DV Capture Offset &
Digital Cut Offset
(software-only systems)
Capture Offset (frames) (software-only systems) — Type the number of frames by
which you want to offset while you capture. For more information, see
“Understanding DV Capture Offset” on page 134.
Digital Cut Offset
(systems with Avid DNA
hardware attached)
Override Recommended Digital Cut Offset — Select this option to set a digital cut
delay. For more information, see “Understanding DV Digital Cut Delay” on
page 518.
Digital Cut Offset (frames) — Type the number of frames by which you want to
delay the digital cut.
Effect Editor Settings
The following table describes options available in Effect Editor Settings. The Effect Editor
settings and the commands in the Effect Editor shortcut menu are similar but not identical.
Effect Editor Settings
Option
Description
Indent Rows
When selected, parameter rows are indented from the parameter group row, and any
parameter subgroups are indented again. When deselected, the left edges of parameter
rows line up with the parameter group row.
Large Text
When selected, text in the Effect Editor appears in 12-point size. When deselected,
text in the Effect Editor appears in the default size, 10 points.
Thumbwheels
When deselected, variable controls in the Effect Editor appear as the default sliders.
When selected, variable controls appear as thumbwheels. For information on using
thumbwheels, see “Changing a Parameter with a Slider” in the Help.
Real Time Update
When selected, your Avid editing application updates the rendered effect image in real
time. Because the update can be slow for complex effects, you have the option to
deselect updating in real time.
Set Position To
Keyframe
With Set Position To Keyframe selected, when you click a keyframe indicator, your
Avid editing application moves the position indicator to the keyframe. With Set
Position To Keyframe deselected, when you click a keyframe indicator, the position
indicator does not move. Deselecting Set Position To Keyframe allows you to align a
keyframe to the position indicator. See “Aligning and Slipping Advanced Keyframes”
in the Help.
582
Effect Editor Settings
Effect Editor Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
Update Position
While Playing
When selected, the position indicator in the Effect Editor moves while you play the
effect. Because using Update Position While Playing can cause video underrun
problems in complex real-time effects, the option is deselected by default.
Show Add Keyframe
Mode Menu
When selected, the Add Keyframe Mode menu (or the Delete Keyframe Mode menu)
appears when you use the Add Keyframe button to add (or delete) keyframes. See
“Keyframe Mode Menu Commands” in the Help.
With Show Add Keyframe Mode Menu deselected, using the Add Keyframe button
performs the default command from the following list (Add Keyframe button
commands), without displaying the Add Keyframe Mode menu or the Delete
Keyframe Mode menu.
Add Keyframe button
commands
•
Add Keyframe To
Active Parameter
•
Add Keyframes To
Active Group
•
Add Keyframes To
Open Groups
•
Add Keyframes To
Enabled Groups
•
Add Keyframes To
Open Graphs
•
Add Keyframes To
All Parameters
Select one as the default command for the Add Keyframe button.
•
When you deselect Show Add Keyframe Mode Menu, clicking the Add Keyframe
button once performs the default command.
•
When you select Show Add Keyframe Mode Menu, clicking the Add Keyframe
button twice performs the default command. (The first click displays the Add
Keyframe Mode menu, at which point you can select another command.)
n
The selection you make for the Add Keyframe mode is mirrored in the Delete
Keyframe Mode menu, and vice versa. That is, when you change one, you
change both.
For a description of each command, see “Using the Add Keyframe Mode Menu and
the Delete Keyframe Mode Menu” in the Help.
Automatic Start and End With Automatic Start and End Keyframes selected, when you promote an effect to
Keyframes
advanced keyframes, all keyframe tracks initially appear with a start keyframe and an
end keyframe. With Automatic Start and End Keyframes deselected, newly promoted
effects initially appear with no keyframes.
This option is available only in the Effect Editor settings dialog box.
583
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings
The following topics describe options available in Export Settings.
Export Settings Dialog Box Options
The following table describes options available in the Export Settings Dialog Box Options.
Export Settings Dialog Box Options
Option
Description
OMFI 1.0
OMFI 2.0
Select one of these options to export a standard OMFI composition for transfer to a third-party
workstation that supports OMFI. You can choose to export composition only, or embed the
video and audio, or both. See “Exporting Through OMF Interchange” on page 468.
AAF
Select this option to create an Advanced Authoring Format (AAF) file.You can choose to
export composition only, or embed the video and audio, or both. See “Exporting OMFI and
AAF Files” on page 468.
AFE
Select this option when exporting as AFE. This is compatible when exporting to systems such
as Avid DS. See “Exporting Projects and Bins Using AFE Files” on page 473.
QuickTime
Reference
Select this option to create a QuickTime reference movie. A QuickTime reference movie
contains pointers (links) to movie files. This is similar to exporting as composition only. See
“Exporting As a QuickTime Reference Movie” on page 479.
HDV
Select this option to create a transport stream. See “Exporting an HDV Transport Stream” on
page 740.
DV Stream
Select this option to create a standard DV stream. The DV Stream format is often used for
distribution on a CD-ROM or over the Web. Use this option when exporting video that will be
combined or processed with other DV-formatted media. Requires a video track. See
“Exporting Video in DV Stream Format” on page 474.
QuickTime
Movie
Select this option to create a self-contained QuickTime movie. See “Exporting QuickTime
Movies” on page 477.
n
AVI
If you installed additional QuickTime Export formats, they appear in the menu with
tildes (~) before their names. This indicates they have not been qualified and are not
supported by Avid.
Select this option to export an AVI file through the Avid Codec for AVI or other compression
tool. For more information, see “Export Settings: AVI” on page 599.
Windows Media Select this option to export your sequence as native Windows Media. You can export your
media using one of the Avid-supplied templates or using a custom audio and video template.
See “Exporting as Windows Media” on page 489.
584
Export Settings
Export Settings Dialog Box Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Audio
Select this option to export audio tracks in the WAVE format, or AIFF-C audio format. See
“Exporting Tracks As Audio Files” on page 496 and “Export Settings: Audio” on page 607.
Graphic
Select this option to export a single frame, a series of frames, or a file type that supports
multiple frames as a graphic file. Select a file type from the menu. See “Exporting As a
Graphic File” on page 498. For information about supported file types, see “File Format
Specifications” on page 661.
P2
Select this option to write your sequence to a P2 card or cards. See “Exporting Your Clip or
Sequence to a P2 Card” on page 228 and “P2 Export Settings” on page 613.
Avid Log
Exchange
Select this option to export the selected bin as a shot log file that complies with Avid Log
Exchange (ALE) specifications. For information about Avid Log Exchange, see “Converting
Log Files with Avid Log Exchange” on page 76.
n
Tab Delimited
ALE and tab-delimited files include information for master clips and subclips only.
Information for other objects, such as group clips, sequences, and precomputes, is not
included.
Select this option to export the selected bin as a shot log file in the form of a tab-delimited
ASCII text file.
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: QuickTime Reference
Options.
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options
Option
Description
Use Marks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application uses current IN and OUT
points in the selected clip or sequence to determine starting and ending frames for the
export. To export the entire clip or sequence, deselect this option or mark the entire
clip or sequence.
Use Enabled Tracks
When this option is selected (default), your Avid editing application uses tracks that
are enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this
option.
Fast Draft Defaults
Select this option for a faster export. This option automatically selects Flatten Video
Tracks and Fill Spaces with Black. It automatically deselects Render All Video
Effects and Premix Audio Tracks.
585
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Digital Mastering
Defaults
Select this option to render all video effects and to premix audio tracks before
exporting the file. This option automatically selects Flatten Video Tracks, Fill Spaces
with Black, Render All Video Effects, and Premix Audio Tracks.
Flatten Video Tracks
When this option is selected, the composition is exported as one video track. When
this option is deselected, one QuickTime video track is generated for each video track
in the composition, and you cannot select Fill Spaces with Black. Because most
third-party applications do not understand multiple QuickTime video tracks, it is a
good idea to select this option. This option is automatically selected if you selected
the Fast Draft Defaults and the Digital Mastering Defaults options.
Fill Spaces with Black
When this option is selected, blank spaces in video tracks are filled with black in the
QuickTime reference movie. Because QuickTime reference movies do not recognize
blank spaces, it is a good idea to select this option. When this option is deselected, a
QuickTime reference movie might interpret spaces in the video track as gray or as the
background of the player. This option is automatically selected if you selected the
Fast Draft Defaults and Digital Mastering Defaults options.
Render All Video Effects When this option is selected, all unrendered video effects, including matte keys and
titles, are rendered before export. When this option is deselected, any unrendered
effects are ignored. This option is automatically selected if you selected the Digital
Mastering Defaults option.
Display Aspect Ratio
This menu lets you select an image size for the video you want to export: Native, 4:3,
or 16:9. This allows you to control the display format without modifying the source
file.
This feature creates metadata — additional data that is stored with the QuickTime
movie. Some applications, such as the QuickTime Player, can interpret this metadata
and scale the image at display time.
Display Aspect Ratio is useful for QuickTime reference movies because you do not
modify the source files of referenced movies. For example, if your source movies are
stored at the standard 720 x 486 for NTSC (720 x 576 for PAL), you can create two
different QuickTime reference movies that use the same referenced source files —
one that uses 4:3 and another that uses 16:9.
The menu selections depend on how you open the Export Settings dialog box and
whether you have done a prior export.
Mixdown Audio Tracks
When this option is selected, the audio tracks in the composition are mixed to stereo
files created at the same location as the movie. When this option is deselected, the
Quick Time Reference movie references the original audio media. This option is
selected automatically if you select the Digital Mastering Defaults option.
If you select the Mixdown Audio Track option, you can also select an audio format, a
sample rate, and a sample bit depth.
586
Export Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Audio Format
Select the format that is supported by the application into which you will be
importing the QuickTime reference movie.
WAVE is compatible with Windows applications.
AIFF-C is compatible with many third-party applications, including Pro Tools.
Select the AIFF-C format for all audio media when you need to transfer audio media
files directly to a Pro Tools or an AudioVision® system for audio sweetening.
Sample Rate
Select one of the following:
Project Rate
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
You can use this option if your sequence has a mix of sample rates and you need to
create a single sample rate. (You set the project rate in the Audio Project Settings
dialog box. For more information, see “Adjusting Audio Project Settings” in the
Help.) You can also use this option to change the sample rate if the application to
which you are exporting does not support the current sample rate.
Sample Bit Depth
Select one of the following:
16 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 16-bit
audio sample depth (currently the industry-standard bit rate for audio).
24 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 24-bit
audio sample depth for work with higher resolution audio.
Use Network Media
References
When this option is selected, the exported movie uses the machine and drive share
name of the media drive in the QuickTime reference movie instead of a drive letter.
Select this option when the media files referenced by the movie are accessed remotely
over the network. If the media files are stored on the same drive as the QuickTime
reference movie, you do not need to select this option. When this option is deselected,
you cannot select Add Shares for Media Drives.
Add Shares for Media
Drives
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application creates a new drive share
for referenced media files stored on unshared network drives. The drive share is
hidden; that is, other users do not see the shared drive when browsing your computer.
You do not need to select this option when media is stored on the same drive as the
QuickTime reference movie.
587
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Reference Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Use Avid DV Codec
Deselect this option when you are working in a cooperative environment where one
or more non-Avid systems also have access to the media. This option is selected by
default. Select this option if the non-Avid systems have the Avid DV Codec.
Color Levels
Select this option to set the color to RGB or 601/709.
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: QuickTime Movie
Export Options.
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options
Option
Suboption
Description
Use Marks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application uses
current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or sequence to
determine starting and ending frames for the export. To export the
entire clip or sequence, deselect this option.
Use Enabled Tracks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application exports
only the currently enabled tracks for a selected sequence or clip. To
export all tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Same as Source
When you select this option, your Avid editing application copies the
media files directly with no resolution change. This method is fast and
creates output that uses the same quality as your source files.
Selecting Same as Source is the best method to use if you plan to
process the video on another system, using a third-party application
like After Effects® or media cleaner®.
Use Avid DV
Codec
Deselect this option when you are working in a cooperative
environment where one or more non-Avid systems also have access to
the media. This option is selected by default.
n
588
If you export DV media from a 23.976 project using Same as
Source, you must use the Avid DV Codec in order for the
QuickTime movies to retain all of the progressive information.
Not using the Avid DV Codec results in the movies being
treated as interlaced sources when re-imported.
Export Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Custom
When you select this option, your Avid editing application
decompresses the files, processes them, and compresses the files at
the requested resolution. This method is slower and often loses
quality. You should only use the Custom option if you have to directly
export a clip or sequence in a particular file format.
Format Options
Appears when you select Custom. Click the Format Options button to
open the Movie Settings dialog box. For more information, see
“Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Settings” on page 591.
Video and Audio
Select this option if you want to export both the audio and video.
Video Only
Select this option if you want to export only the video. For example,
use this option if you want to add effects in a third-party application
or to use only the video in a multimedia project.
Audio Only
Select this option to export only the audio. For example, use this
option if you want to use or enhance audio in a third-party application
or you want to use the audio in a multimedia project.
Video Format
Width x Height
Appears when you select Custom. Select this option to set the width
of the clip.
•
Size to Fit: This option sizes to fit the specified width and height.
You can type in values or select from the predefined values in the
Fast menu.
n
•
The values in the Fast menu suggest a typical use for each size.
For example, 320 x 240 (Internet video, large).
Crop/Pad: This option instructs your Avid editing application not
to scale or resize the frames. If necessary, it adds black lines to the
top and bottom of the frame to achieve the correct size.
589
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Export Options (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Color Levels
Select this option to set the color to RGB or 601/709.
File Field Order
Appears when you select Custom. These options allow you to select
the field that is the upper field during export. For 23.976p, or 25p
projects, these options do not appear; all fields are automatically
exported as progressive (still) frames.
•
Odd (Upper Field First): Select this option if you are in a PAL
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the upper
field, that is, Field 1's lines become the odd-numbered lines in the
frame (counted starting from 1). Field 2's lines become the evennumbered lines.
•
Even (Lower Field First): Select this option if you are in an
NTSC project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the
lower field, that is, Field 1's lines become the even-numbered
lines in the frame. Field 2's lines become the odd-numbered lines.
•
Single Field: Select this option if you want the output file to
consist of only Field 1. In this case, the single field of 243 lines
for NTSC (288 lines for PAL) is resized to fit the frame as
specified in the width and height selection.
Create Preview
Select this option if you want to create a preview of the QuickTime
movie.
Display Aspect
Ratio
The display aspect ratio allows you to apply a scaling to the video:
Native, 4:3, or 16:9. The display aspect ratio lets you control the
display format without modifying the source file.
This feature creates metadata — additional data that is stored with the
QuickTime movie. Some applications, such as the QuickTime Player,
can interpret this metadata and scale the image at display time.
Display aspect ratio is useful for the Same as Source option because
that option also preserves the original format. When you select Same
as Source, the selections in the Display Aspect Ratio area are based
on the resolution of the media you are exporting and the project type
(NTSC or PAL).
When you select Custom, your Avid editing application calculates the
Display Aspect Ratio selections on the values you enter for Width x
Height in the Video Format tab.
590
Export Settings
Export Settings: QuickTime Movie Settings
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: QuickTime Movie
Settings.
QuickTime Movie Settings
Option
Suboption
Description
Video
Settings
Standard Video
See “Export Settings: QuickTime Compression Settings” on
Compression Settings page 592.
Filter
Choose Video Filter
Allows you to apply a single effect filter during an export.
Size
Export Size Settings
Select Use current size or Use custom size. QuickTime allows you
to set a size, but Avid recommends you set the size in the Width and
Height text boxes of the Export Settings dialog box. Both settings
have the same effect, and the QuickTime size setting overrides the
Avid size setting.
Settings
Compressor
Allows you to select a sound compression setting for your export,
along with other options.
Prepare for
Internet
Streaming
Fast Start
Allows a movie to begin playing over the Internet without
downloading the entire movie first. This method of playing movies
over the Internet is referred to as progressive download or HTTP
streaming. It does not require a streaming video server.
Fast Start Compressed Header
A better choice for progressive downloading. This option works the
same as Fast Start (see previous entry), but compresses the header
information. The header is the portion of the file that allows the
movie to start playing before the entire movie is downloaded.
Compressing the header allows it to download faster. This is
important for large movies (movies that are longer than several
minutes).
Sound
591
Chapter 18 Using Settings
QuickTime Movie Settings (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Hinted Streaming
Select this option if you are putting the exported file on a streaming
video server. The file does not stream without a hint track for each
track in the movie. The hint tracks allow the streaming video server
to split the file into packets for the streaming.
A file with hinted streaming also plays as a progressive download.
However, it will probably play more slowly than a Fast Start movie
because it contains additional information and is therefore larger.
For additional options, click Track Hinter Settings. The RTP (Real
Time Protocol) Track Settings dialog box opens. For more
information, see your QuickTime documentation.
Export Settings: QuickTime Compression Settings
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box gives you access to a wide range of
QuickTime video codecs. The set of codecs available from the Compression Type list might
vary depending on your computer’s configuration and your operating system. Other options
that appear in the dialog box vary depending on the codec you select from the Compression
Type list. If you have an Internet connection, you can get help on using the options in this
dialog box from the QuickTime web site by pressing the ? button in the bottom left corner of
the dialog box.
The list of codecs includes Avid codecs, which create encapsulated media files for export of
high-resolution files that are readable within QuickTime applications. The Avid codec you
use to export the file must be loaded on the system running the QuickTime application for
the application to read the exported file. See “Installing or Copying the Avid Codecs for
QuickTime on Other Systems” on page 487.
592
Export Settings
The following table describes the Avid codecs available in the Standard Video Compression
Settings dialog.
Export Settings: Avid QuickTime Codecs
Codec
Description
Avid 1:1x
For high quality, 8-bit or 10-bit, lossless compression (in which no picture information is
lost); available for use with MXF media files. This format cannot be used by Meridien
systems. It can be used by both Avid DS and Avid DNA-based systems. It uses 4:2:2
sampling.
Avid DNxHD™
Codec
For DNxHD encoding with 8-bit and 10-bit resolutions; available for use with MXF media
files. This format cannot be used by Meridien-based systems. It can be used by both
Avid DS and Avid DNA-based systems.
Avid DV
For compression compatible with Avid Xpress DV and Avid NewsCutter products or with
Avid Meridien products with the DV/MPEG option.
Avid DV100
Codec
For DVCPRO HD encoding. This format cannot be used by Meridien systems. It can be
used by both Avid DS and Avid DNA-based systems. It uses 4:2:2 sampling.
Avid Meridien
Compressed
For compression compatible with Avid Meridien products.
Avid Meridien
Uncompressed
For 1:1 resolution used in Avid Meridien products.
Avid MPEG2 50
mbit
For MPEG-2 IMX 50,40,30 encoding; an interframe compression used in Sony IMX VTRs
and cameras. It uses 4:2:2 sampling.
Avid Packed
Codec
For high quality, 10-bit, lossless compression (in which no picture information is lost);
available for use with MXF media files. This format cannot be used by Meridien-based
systems. It can be used by both Avid DS and Avid DNA-based systems. It uses 4:2:2
sampling.
593
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: HDV
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: HDV.
Export Settings: HDV
Option
Description
Use Marks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application uses current IN and OUT
points in the selected clip or sequence to determine starting and ending frames for the
export. To output the entire clip or sequence, deselect this option.
Use Enabled Tracks
When this option is selected (default), your Avid editing application uses tracks that
are enabled in the Timeline. To output the entire clip or sequence, deselect this option.
Video Quality
Select one of the following qualities. The quality level inversely trades off with the
time required to complete the export: Draft is fastest, while Best takes the longest
time to complete. If you have a slower system, you might want to see if the Better or
Draft quality is good enough for your needs.
•
Draft
•
Better
•
Best
Export Settings: DV Stream
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: DV Stream.
Export Settings: DV Stream
Option
Description
Use Marks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application uses current
IN and OUT points in the selected clip or sequence to determine starting
and ending frames for the export. To export the entire clip or sequence,
deselect this option.
Use Enabled Tracks
When this option is selected (default), your Avid editing application
uses tracks that are enabled in the Timeline. To export the entire clip or
sequence, deselect this option.
Format Options
Click this button to select a video format and an audio format for export.
Video and Audio
Select this option if you want to export both the audio and the video.
Video Only
Select this option if you want to export only the video.
594
Export Settings
Export Settings: DV Stream (Continued)
Option
Description
Audio Only
Select this option if you want to export only the audio. For example, use
this option if you want to use or enhance audio in a third-party
application or use the audio in a multimedia project.
Video Format
Color Levels
Select this option to set color to RGB or 601/709.
File Field Order These options allow you to select the field that is the upper field during
export. For 23.976p or 25p projects, these options do not appear; all
fields are automatically exported as progressive (still) frames.
•
Odd (Upper Field First): Select this option if you are in a PAL
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the upper
field, that is, Field 1's lines become the odd-numbered lines in the
frame (counted starting from 1). Field 2's lines become the evennumbered lines.
•
Even (Lower Field First): Select this option if you are in an NTSC
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the lower
field, that is, Field 1's lines become the even-numbered lines in the
frame. Field 2's lines become the odd-numbered lines.
•
Single Field: Select this option if you want the output file to consist
of only Field 1. In this case, the single field of 243 lines for NTSC
(288 lines for PAL) is resized to fit the frame as specified in the
width and height selection.
Export Settings: OMFI, AAF, and AFE
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: OMFI, AAF, and AFE.
Export Settings Options (AAF, OMFI, and AAF)
Option
Suboption
Description
Export As:
AAF
Select this option if the application to which you are exporting
supports AAF.
OMF 1.0
Select this option if the application to which you are exporting does
not support OMFI Version 2.0.
OMF 2.0
Select this option if the application to which you are exporting
supports OMFI Version 2.0. If you are not sure, select OMF 1.0.
595
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings Options (AAF, OMFI, and AAF) (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
AFE
Select this option if the application to which you are exporting
supports AFE.
n
There are no options available to you when you select AFE.
Your Avid editing application uses the default settings.
Use Marks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application uses
current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or sequence to
determine starting and ending frames for the export. To export the
entire clip or sequence, deselect this option.
Use Enabled Tracks
When you select this option, your Avid editing application exports
only the currently enabled tracks for a selected sequence or clip. To
export all tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Include All Video
Tracks in Sequence
Select this option to include all video tracks from the sequence in
the AAF or the OMFI file. The Video Details tab appears.
Include All Audio
Tracks in Sequence
Select this option to include all audio tracks from the sequence in
the AAF or the OMFI file. The Audio Details tab appears.
The following options appear in both the Video Details tab and the Audio Details tab:
Export Method:
Select an export method. Other options in the dialog box change
depending on which method you choose.
Link to (Don’t
Export) Media
Select this option when you want to export an AAF or an OMFI
composition with links to the media in its current location. Media is
not embedded in the file and is not exported.
Copy All Media
Select this option when you want to copy media to another drive or
folder and export an AAF or an OMFI composition.
Consolidate Media Select this option when you want to export an AAF or an OMFI
composition with links to media that you have consolidated. For
more information about consolidating media, see “Consolidating
Media” in the Help.
Handle Length: nn Enter the number of frames you want to use as handles for
Frames
consolidated clips. Handles refer to material outside the IN and
OUT points and are used for dissolves and trims with the new,
shorter master clips. The default is 60.
596
Export Settings
Export Settings Options (AAF, OMFI, and AAF) (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
The following options appear in the Video Details tab only, depending on the export method:
Export Method:
Video Mixdown
Creates a new video mixdown track for the sequence. For more
information about video mixdown, see Performing a Video
Mixdown” in the Help.
Mixdown with
Video Edits
Compatible with Avid Digidesign Pro Tools v7.2 or later.
Mixdown without
Video Edits
Compatible with all Avid Digidesign Pro Tools versions.
Render Video Effects
Transcode Video to:
Select this option to render video effects during export.
Resolution menu
Select a resolution to which you want to transcode the video to
during export.
The following options appear in the Media Destinations area for Video and Audio, depending on the
export methods:
Media Drive
Specify a media drive as the destination for newly created or copied
media.
Use Media
Creation Settings
Select Use Media Creation Settings to use the drive you selected in
the Media Creation dialog box. If you deselect Use Media Creation
Settings, you can select a different destination drive.
Specify an arbitrary folder as the destination for newly created or
copied media.
Folder
Use Same Folder
as AAF File
Embedded in
AAF/OMF
If you deselect Use Same Folder as AAF File, a path name appears.
Click Select Folder to navigate to a different folder.
Media files are embedded in the exported an AAF or OMFI file
specified in the Export dialog box.
The following options appear in the Audio Details tab only, depending on the export method:
Include Rendered
Audio Effects
Select this option to include rendered audio effects during export.
Render All Audio
Effects
Select this option to render all audio effects during export.
Add Audio Mixdown Mono, Stereo
Track(s)
Select this option to add an audio mixdown track, and then select
the type of track you want. For more information about audio
mixing, see “Using Live Mix Mode” in the Help.
597
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings Options (AAF, OMFI, and AAF) (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Convert Audio
Sample Rate to:
Project rate,
Select this option if your sequence has a mix of sample rates and
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, you need to create a single sample rate. (You set the project rate in
or 48 kHz
the Audio Project Settings window. For more information see
“Audio Project Settings” on page 561.) You can also use this option
to change the sample rate if the application to which you are
exporting does not support the current sample rate.
Convert Audio
Project rate, 16 bit, Select this option if your sequence has a mix of sample bit depths
Sample Bit Depth to: 24 bit
and you need to create a single sample bit depth. (You set the
project bit depth in the Audio Project Settings window. For more
information see “Audio Project Settings” on page 561.) You can
also use this option to change the sample bit depth if the application
to which you are exporting does not support the current sample bit
depth.
Convert Audio File
Format to:
598
If your sequence has a mix of audio file formats, and you want to
embed media, you must choose a single audio file format. (You set
the project format in the Audio Project Settings window. For more
information see “Audio Project Settings” on page 561.) Audio files
are converted to this format during export. This choice is optional if
you want to consolidate and link media.
Project rate
Select Project to use the rate that matches the project format.
WAVE
Select WAVE (.WAV file name extension) to link to or embed audio
tracks in the WAVE format. Nearly all Windows applications that
support sound use WAVE files. QuickTime also supports the WAVE
format.
AIFF-C
Select AIFF-C to link to or embed audio tracks in the industrystandard AIFF-C format. Note that your Avid system does not
compress audio media.
PCM
PCM is the only audio file format available for AAF export.
Export Settings
Export Settings: AVI
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: AVI.
Export Settings: AVI
Option
Suboption
Description
Use Marks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application uses current IN
and OUT points in the selected clip or sequence to determine starting and
ending frames for the export. To export the entire clip or sequence, deselect
this option.
Use Enabled
Tracks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports only the
currently enabled tracks for a selected sequence or clip. To export all tracks
in the sequence, deselect this option.
Video and Audio
Select this option if you want to export both the audio and the video.
Video Only
Select this option if you want to export only the video.
Audio Only
Select this option if you want to export only the audio. For example, use
this option if you want to use or enhance audio in a third-party application
or use the audio in a multimedia project.
Video Format Codec Options
When you click this button, the Video Compression dialog box opens. For
more information, see “Export Settings: AVI Video Compression” on
page 601.
Width x Height
This option allows you to set the width and height of the clip. Click the Fast
Menu button, and select from a list of standard dimensions.
•
Size to Fit: This option sizes to fit the specified width and height.
•
Crop/Pad: Crop/Pad never scales or resizes frames. If necessary, the
system adds black lines to the top and bottom to achieve the correct
size.
Color Levels
This option allows you to set color to RGB or 601/709.
FPS
This option sets the frame-per-second (fps) rate for AVI export.
599
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: AVI (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
File Field Order
These options allow you to choose the field that will be the upper field
during export. For 23.976p or 25p projects, these options do not appear; all
fields are automatically exported as progressive (still) frames.
Audio Format Mono
•
Odd (Upper Field First): Select this option if you are in a PAL
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the upper field,
that is, Field 1's lines become the odd-numbered lines in the frame
(counted starting from 1). Field 2's lines become the even-numbered
lines.
•
Even (Lower Field First): Select this option if you are in an NTSC
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the lower field,
that is, Field 1's lines become the even-numbered lines in the frame.
Field 2's lines become the odd-numbered lines.
•
Single Field: Select this option if you want the output file to consist of
only Field 1. In this case, the single field of 243 lines for NTSC (288
lines for PAL) is resized to fit the frame as specified in the width and
height selection.
Exports audio to a single channel.
Stereo
Exports audio to two channels.
Sample Rate
Select this option to select the sample rate.
Project Rate: The native rate of the chosen audio media (32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz).
22.050 kHz: Half the sample rate of 44.1-kHz media.
11.025 kHz: One quarter the sample rate of 44.1-kHz media.
Sample Bit Depth
Select this option to select the sample bit depth.
8 bit: When this option is selected, the system exports an 8-bit audio
sample depth for use in third-party systems that do not support 16-bit. This
option is also used to minimize the data throughput requirements (for
example, to improve playback in multimedia projects).
16 bit: When this option is selected, the system exports a 16-bit audio
sample depth (currently the industry-standard bit rate for audio).
600
Export Settings
Export Settings: AVI Video Compression
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: AVI Video Compression.
Export Settings: AVI Video Compression
Option
Suboption
Description
Compressor
Cinepak Codec
by Radius
For export at low resolution where high quality is not an issue, such as
presentations or educational uses, or for small-screen-size playback
from CD-ROM or hard drive. This codec uses a compression algorithm
optimized for CD-ROM playback.
Click Configure to open the Cinepak for Windows 32 configuration
dialog box. You can then choose to compress to color or to black and
white.
Microsoft Video 1
Use this option when you create files that will play with Video for
Windows.
Click Configure to open the Configure dialog box. You can then adjust
the quality of the compressed file using the Temporal Quality Rate
slider.
Full Frames
(Uncompressed)
For high-quality export in which no picture information is lost. This
option does not compress the file and can result in very large files. To
export an uncompressed file at 1:1, use the Avid Codec for AVI.
Compression
Quality slider
Use this option to adjust compression quality for certain codecs. This
slider does not adjust quality for the Avid AVI codec.
Key Frame
Every n frames
Use this option to have your Avid editing application use keyframes as
a reference for subsequent frames. Enter a numeric value to specify the
frequency of the keyframes. This option is not available for the Avid
Codec for AVI or for uncompressed files.
Data Rate
n KB/sec
Use this option to set a specific data rate for the compressed file, in
kilobytes per second. This option is not available for the Avid Codec
for AVI or for uncompressed files.
601
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: Windows Media Export Options
The following topics describe the Windows Media Export options:
•
Windows Media Legacy Template
•
Existing Windows Media Custom Profile
•
Windows Media Options Video Settings
•
Custom Profile Audio Settings
Windows Media Legacy Template
The following table describes options available in Windows Media Legacy Template.
Windows Media Legacy Template
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Version
This refers to the available versions (v8, v7, or v4) Windows Media templates.
Templates
Allows you to choose one of the Avid supplied Windows Media templates. See
“Exporting Using an Avid Supplied Template” on page 489.
Existing Windows Media Custom Profile
The following table describes options available in Existing Windows Media Custom Profile.
Existing Windows Media Custom Profile
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Set
Allows you to browse to find an existing .prx file on your system. See “Exporting Using
an Existing Windows Media Profile” on page 491.
602
Export Settings
Windows Media Options Video Settings
The following table describes options available in Windows Media Options Video Settings.
Windows Media Options Video Settings
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Width
This option sets the width of the clips for export.
Height
This options sets the height of the clips for export.
FPS
This option sets the frame-per-second (fps) rate for the export.
Video Type
Choose Progressive or Interlaced. Progressive media is composed of single frames, each
of which is vertically scanned as one pass.
Interlaced media is composed of two fields, each of which contains one-half the scan
lines of the frame. Interlaced frames are standard for NTSC and PAL video media.
Pixel Aspect Ratio
Select this option to apply a scaling to the video. The pixel aspect ratio allows you to
control the display format without modifying the source file.
Uncompressed
Select this option for high-quality export in which no picture information is lost. This
option does not compress the file and can result in very large files.
Codec
Choose from the list of video codecs.
603
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Windows Media Options Video Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
(This option is not
Windows Media MPEG-4 Video V3 — Creates high-quality video for streaming,
available when you
download and play. Enables playback of interlaced content on televisions.
select Uncompressed.)
ISO MPEG-4 Video V1 — The MPEG-4 standard was defined by the Moving Picture
Experts Group (MPEG), the working group within the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 was designed to deliver DVD (MPEG-2) quality video
at lower data rates and smaller file sizes.
Windows Media Video V7 — Enables Windows Media Player 7 to view encoded video
content without first having to download the latest codecs. This is the best choice when
the encoding computer cannot support the performance requirements of the newer
Windows Media Video codecs.
Windows Media Screen V7 — Specially optimized for use for screen captures and
some animations
Windows Media Video 9 Screen — For content that needs to be captured from the
computer screen. This codec is ideal for delivering demos or demonstrating computer
use for training. Windows Media Video 9 Screen delivers better handling of bitmap
images and screen motion, even on relatively slow CPUs.
Windows Media Video 9 — Offers improved quality over Windows Media Video 8,
with the highest gains seen at the higher bit rates; provides improved interlaced support.
Windows Media Video V8 — Supports a wide variety of network bandwidths.
Deinterlaces interlaced content before encoding.
Windows Media Video 9 Advanced Profile — Use this profile to deliver either
progressive or interlaced content at data rates as low as one-third that of the MPEG-2
codec—with the same quality as MPEG-2.
Passes
Select either 1 Pass or 2 Pass. With 1 Pass encoding, the content passes through the
encoder once, and compression is applied as the content is encountered. With 2 Pass
(This option is not
encoding, the content is analyzed during the first pass, and then encoded in the second
available when you
pass based on the data gathered in the first pass. 2 Pass encoding can result in better
select Uncompressed.)
quality but it takes longer because the encoder goes through the content twice.
VBR
Variable Bit Rate. Allows you to set the quality of the video profile setting.
(This option is not
available when you
select Uncompressed.)
Quality
Choose Constrained or Unconstrained. Choose constrained when playing either locally
or on a device that has a constrained reading speed, such as a CD or DVD player.
Bit Rate
The bit rate represents the size of the data stream in megabits per second.
604
Export Settings
Windows Media Options Video Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
Buffer Size
Type the number of seconds that you want content to be stored before encoding begins.
A larger buffer results in better quality content, but requires more memory. When you
encode content, the encoding process is delayed by the amount of time specified in the
buffer; the content is also delayed by the same amount of time when streaming to a
player.
Quality
The setting can range from 0 to 100, with 100 being the highest quality.
Keyframe
Amount of keyframes used as part of the encoding sequence. The value is the number of
keyframes used for every second of video. A lower number results in higher quality, but
larger files.
Language
Select from the list of available languages.
Custom Profile Audio Settings
The following table describes options available in Custom Profile Audio Settings.
Custom Profile Audio Settings
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Uncompressed
Select this option for high-quality export in which no picture information is lost. This
option does not compress the file and can result in very large files.
605
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Custom Profile Audio Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
Codec (This option is Select one of the following codecs:
not available when
Windows Media Audio 9.1 — Provides improvement in compression over the Windows
you select
Media 8 Audio codec. Supports VBR audio encoding.
Uncompressed.)
ACELP.net — In some instances, the Sipro Labs ACELP codec appears in the list of
codecs. For example, if you import a profile that was created by using Windows Media
Encoder version 7.1. If this occurs, Avid recommends that you use the Windows Media
Audio 9 Voice codec instead.
Windows Media Audio 9 Voice — Provides superior quality for audio content with a
voice emphasis. Provides for mixed-mode encoding of voice and music. Intended for
playback at bit rates at 20 Kbps or lower.
Windows Media Audio 9.1 Professional — This supports a full surround-sound
experience and dynamic range control. Intended for data rates of 128 to 768 Kbps.
Windows Media Audio 9.1 Lossless — Provides lossless encoding of audio content.
Supports multichannel audio encoding and dynamic range control.
Passes
Select either 1 Pass or 2 Pass. With 1 Pass encoding, the content passes through the
encoder once, and compression is applied as the content is encountered. With 2 Pass
(This option is not
encoding, the content is analyzed during the first pass, and then encoded in the second
available when you
pass based on the data gathered in the first pass. 2 Pass encoding can result in better
select Uncompressed.)
quality but it takes longer because the encoder goes through the content twice.
VBR
(This option is not
available when you
select Uncompressed.)
Variable Bit Rate. When you select this option, the formats available are VBR formats. If
you deselect this option, the formats available are CBR formats.
Format
You can encode audio and video content at either a constant bit rate (CBR) or a variable
bit rate (VBR). Use CBR if you plan to stream the content. Use VBR when you plan to
(These options change
distribute the content for downloading and playing either locally or on a device that has a
when you select
constrained reading speed such as a CD or DVD player. Choose from one of the format
VBR.)
options.
Buffer Size
Type the number of seconds that you want content to be stored before encoding begins.
A larger buffer results in better quality content, but requires more memory. When you
encode content, the encoding process is delayed by the amount of time specified in the
buffer; the content is also delayed by the same amount of time when streaming to a
player.
Language
Select from the list of languages.
606
Export Settings
Export Settings: Audio
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: Audio.
Export Settings: Audio
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks
When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Mono
Stereo
Select this option to export audio tracks in either mono or stereo.
Sample Rate
Select one of the following:
•
Project Rate
•
32 kHz
•
44.1 kHz
•
48 kHz
You can use this option if your sequence has a mix of sample rates and you need to
create a single sample rate. (You set the project rate in the Audio Project Settings dialog
box. For more information, see “Adjusting Audio Project Settings” in the Help.) You can
also use this option to change the sample rate if the application to which you are
exporting does not support the current sample rate.
Sample Bit Depth
Audio Format
Select one of the following:
•
16 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 16-bit
audio sample depth (currently the industry-standard bit rate for audio).
•
24 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 24-bit
audio sample depth for work with higher resolution audio.
WAVE: Select this option to export audio tracks in the WAVE format (.wav file name
extension). Nearly all Windows applications that support sound use WAVE files.
QuickTime also supports the WAVE format.
AIFF-C: Select this option to export audio tracks in the industry-standard AIFF-C
format, which is compatible with many third-party sound editing and multimedia
applications.
607
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: Graphic
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: Graphic.
Export Settings: Graphic
Option
Suboption
Description
Use Marks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application uses current IN
and OUT points in the selected clip or sequence to determine starting and
ending frames for the export. To export the entire clip or sequence,
deselect this option.
Use Enabled Tracks
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports only
the currently enabled tracks for a selected sequence or clip. To export all
tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Graphic Format
Width x Height
Format
Options
This option allows you to select a graphic format for export. The Format
Options button allows you to set export parameters.
This option allows you to set the width and height of the clip. Click the
Fast Menu button, and select from a list of standard dimensions.
•
Size to Fit: This option sizes to fit the specified width and height.
•
Crop/Pad: Crop/Pad never scales or resizes frames. If necessary, the
system adds black lines to the top and bottom to achieve the correct
size.
Color Levels
This option allows you to set color to RGB or 601/709.
Sequential Files
This option produces a series of still images, numbered sequentially. The
fps rate of the source file determines the number of still image files that
are produced.
Select Locators only to produce images only for those frames that contain
locators.
608
Export Settings
Export Settings: Graphic (Continued)
Option
Suboption
File Field Order
Description
This option allows you to choose the field that will be the upper field
during export. For 23.976p or 25p projects, these options do not appear;
all fields are automatically exported as progressive (still) frames.
•
Odd (Upper Field First): Select this option if you are in a PAL
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the upper field,
that is, Field 1's lines become the odd-numbered lines in the frame
(counted starting from 1). Field 2's lines become the even-numbered
lines.
•
Even (Lower Field First): Select this option if you are in an NTSC
project. In forming the export frame, Field 1 becomes the lower field,
that is, Field 1's lines become the even-numbered lines in the frame.
Field 2's lines become the odd-numbered lines.
•
Single Field: Select this option if you want the output file to consist of
only Field 1. In this case, the single field of 243 lines for NTSC (288
lines for PAL) is resized to fit the frame as specified in the width and
height selection.
Export Settings: Graphic Format
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: Graphic Format.
Export Settings: Graphic Format
Option
Suboption
Alias™
BMP
This option creates files that are compatible with Alias™/Wavefront™
systems.
Windows
This option creates files that are compatible with systems running the
Microsoft Windows operating system.
OS/2
This option creates files that are compatible with systems running the
IBM® OS/2® operating system.
Chyron®
Cineon™
Description
Developed by Chyron Corporation for use with video frame buffers
of Chyron® character generator titles.
Blackpoint
This option allows you to adjust a film exposure value that
corresponds to filming a 2% black card. Values can be between 0 and
1022. The default value of 0 is adequate for most uses.
609
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: Graphic Format (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Whitepoint
This option allows you to adjust a film exposure value that
corresponds to filming a 90% white card. Values can be between 1
and 1023.
If the files came from and will be transferred back to a Cineon™
system, use a white point of 1023. The default value of 685 is
appropriate if the final destination is not a Cineon system — for
example, a video display.
Gamma
This option specifies an adjustment to correct for any gamma
inconsistencies in the output display. Values can be between 0.01 and
100.0.
Use a value of 1.0 (the default) for images displayed on a PC monitor.
Use a value of 0.45 for ITU-R 601 (CCIR 601) video.
ERIMovie
Pack 24 bits
This option controls whether the image data is packed into 24-bit
color depth (compressed) or is saved as 32-bit (raw) color depth.
Framestore
The Framestore format is a 16-bit video image format used on the
Amiga® in conjunction with Newtek's Video Toaster™ hardware.
HIIP supports both compressed and uncompressed Framestore
formats.
IFF
Developed by Electronic Arts. IFF (Interchange File Format), or
more specifically IFF-ILBM (InterLeaved BitMap), is the standard
file format by which applications on the Amiga platform transfer
image files.
JPEG
Quality
This option controls the output file size and quality. Higher values
produce better images but larger file sizes. Conversely, lower values
reduce the image quality but result in smaller file sizes.
Baseline
This option is selected by default. To see if this option is required, see
the documentation that came with your JPEG-supported applications.
Progressive
This option allows you to save progressive JPEG files, which divide
the file into a series of scans of the image that increase in quality.
Each scan progressively improves the recognizability of the image.
Progressive JPEG files can be recognized only by applications with
progressive JPEG support, such as some Web browsers.
OMF
NTSC/PAL
Frame Rate
610
These options appear when you select a compression ratio that allows
you to select either NTSC or PAL. When you select an option, the
system displays the required image size and the default frame rate.
Export Settings
Export Settings: Graphic Format (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Compression
This option controls the compression ratio and, therefore, the size of
the file. You can choose from all the compression ratio options used
by your Avid editing application when recapturing. For more
information on Avid compression ratios, see “Resolutions and
Storage Requirements” on page 681.
PCX™
Photoshop
Developed by Zsoft Corporation for use with their PC PaintBrush™
paint software.
Color Depth
The 8 bits option saves 8-bit files. The 16 bits option saves 16-bit
files. The Automatic option saves the image in the same depth as the
original loaded image.
Compression
This option controls the size of the file on disk. Disabling
compression creates larger files on disk
Create
MacBinary
header
This option creates a file with a MacBinary header.
PICS (Macintosh
only)
PICT
Pixar®
PNG
MacBinary is a file format for representing all the information in a
Macintosh file in one binary file. It is a compact file format, useful for
storing a Macintosh file on a non-Macintosh system for later retrieval.
Use a file expander utility to decode a MacBinary file once it is back
on a Macintosh system.
This option allows you to save the file in the Pixar® format.
Color Depth
The 8 bits option saves 8-bit files. The 16 bits option saves 16-bit
files. The Automatic option saves the image in the same depth as the
original loaded image.
Interlaced
This option allows you to save the file for progressive display, similar
to progressive JPEG files. As the file is transmitted, the
recognizability of the image improves.
Interlaced PNG files can be recognized only by applications with
interlaced PNG support, such as some Web browsers.
QRT
Developed on the Amiga® personal computer to run on several
operating systems. Used by many ray tracing programs, such as DKB
Ray Trace and the QRT ray tracer.
Rendition
Developed by Numerical Design, Ltd.
611
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: Graphic Format (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
SGI®
Color Depth
The 8 bits option saves 8-bit files. The 16 bits option saves 16-bit
files. The Automatic option saves the image in the same depth as the
original loaded image.
Softimage
Developed by Softimage®, Inc. for use in Softimage software.
SunRaster™
Developed by Sun® Microsystems, Inc. and supported mainly in Sun
applications.
TARGA®
TIFF
Wavefront™
Color Depth
This option controls how images are saved. The 5-bit option saves
data in Targa 16 format. The 8-bit option saves data in Targa 24/32
format.
Compression
This setting controls the size of the file on disk. Disabling
compression creates larger files on disk.
Color Depth
The 8 bits option saves 8-bit files. The 16 bits option saves 16-bit
files. The Automatic option saves the image in the same depth as the
original loaded image.
Compression
This setting controls the size of the file on disk. With None, image
data is not compressed and can produce large file sizes. RLE (run
length encoded) produces relatively small and fairly portable files.
JPEG produces files that can vary in size, depending on the quality
you have set using the JPEG quality slider. The higher the quality
setting, the larger the file size.
JPEG Quality
This option adjusts the image quality of the JPEG file on a sliding
scale from 0 to 100. The higher the number you set, the higher the
image quality of the JPEG file.
Format Type
This option specifies one of two output file formats supported by
Wavefront (either RLA or RLB).
Color Depth
The 8 bits option saves 8-bit files. The 16 bits option saves 16-bit
files. The Automatic option saves the image in the same depth as the
original loaded image.
Gamma
This option specifies an adjustment to correct for gamma differences
between Macintosh and Windows PC output display. This option is
intended for cross-platform applications that require adjustment.
n
612
To see if you need to adjust this value, check the documentation
that came with your Wavefront application. Usually, you can
use the default setting.
Export Settings
Export Settings: Graphic Format (Continued)
Option
Suboption
XWindows
Description
Developed by the MIT X Consortium, and is supported by many X
Window System™ applications on workstations and some personal
computers.
YUV
Format
This option controls the video format of saved images. If set to
NTSC, NTSC video format (720 x 486) is used. If set to PAL, PAL
video format (720 x 576) is used. Images are either padded with black
or cropped.
Smooth YUV
This option enhances the fidelity of images saved in YUV color space
(if originating in RGB color space).
P2 Export Settings
The following table describes options available in the P2 Export Settings dialog box.
P2 Export Settings
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
P2 Device
Select the connected P2 device to which you want to export.
Video Format
Select a video format. You can upconvert or downconvert.
Sample Bit Depth
Panasonic supports 16-bit audio at this time.
613
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Export Settings: XDCAM
The following table describes options available in Export Settings: XDCAM.
Export Settings: XDCAM
Option
Description
Use Marks
When Use Marks is selected, the current IN and OUT points in the selected clip or
sequence determine starting and ending frames for the export.
Use Enabled Tracks When Use Enabled Tracks is selected, your Avid editing application uses tracks that are
enabled in the Timeline. To export all the tracks in the sequence, deselect this option.
Target XDCAM
Disk
Select the connected XDCAM disk to which you want to export.
Video Format
Select a video format. You can upconvert or downconvert.
Sample Bit Depth
Select one of the following:
614
•
16 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 16-bit
audio sample depth (currently the industry-standard bit rate for audio).
•
24 bit: When this option is selected, your Avid editing application exports a 24-bit
audio sample depth for work with higher resolution audio.
Full Screen Playback Settings
Full Screen Playback Settings
The following table describes options available in Full Screen Playback Settings.
Full Screen Playback Settings
Option
Description
Scaling
Select the desired scaling.
Full Screen
•
Project uses the actual project type and monitor aspect ratio to determine the
scaling
•
4x3 (Standard) If you are editing an HD project that contains a lot of SD material
that is being stretched to fit the 16x9 aspect ratio, you might want to select this
scaling option, letting you restore its original aspect ratio.
•
16x9 (Widescreen) If you are in a 4x3 SD project, working with actual widescreen material (such as 16x9 material captured by a DV Camcorder), you can
select this option to display the material as 16x9 wide-screen.
•
Raw Pixel allows you to see the frame in the full screen window, pixel for pixel,
with no scaling. If the image is larger, it is scaled to fit the screen. This is only
useful when viewing SD in which pixels are non-square. Raw Pixel Aspect ratio is
slightly wider than 4x3.
By default, Full Screen is enabled.
Disable this option to view the video on the full screen window with as little scaling
as possible. Your Avid editing application will try to display the image at its native
height, and then match the width of the height using the Aspect Ratio selection from
above.
Turning off Full Screen and working in Draft quality (green/yellow) mode or Best
Performance (yellow/yellow) mode can also improve performance with some older
video cards which do not have the highest pixel shader processing power.
Display Both Fields
Select this option when your Avid editing application is connected to an interlaced
display.
If a progressive display (for example, an LCD monitor) is connected to the graphic
card's video output and you select this option, toothcombing will appear in an
interlaced image.
Current Monitor Position You can choose the monitor where you want to see the full screen playback. Drag the
entire Full Screen Playback Settings dialog box to the desired monitor, and then click
Select Monitor.
615
Chapter 18 Using Settings
For information on using Full Screen Play, see “Playing Video to a Full-Screen Monitor” in
the Help.
General Settings
The following table describes options available in General Settings.
General Settings
Option
Description
Project Format
This option displays the format currently selected for the project (NTSC or PAL).
You cannot change it.
Temporary File Directory
When you use the Drag and Drop Export or an export that creates an intermediate
movie file, your Avid editing application must store the intermediate file, which
can be as large as the final export. By default, the Temporary File Directory is
located in the same directory as your Avid editing application.
To improve efficiency or to avoid DISK_FULL errors when exporting, you can
type in a different directory for these temporary files. The ideal setting for this
field is to type in a directory on the drive to which you are exporting, or simply one
with plenty of free space.
Default Starting TC
This option specifies the timecode value you want your Avid editing application to
use as the default starting timecode for each new sequence.
Effect Apertures
The Effect Apertures option allows you to control the number of horizontal lines
of an image that are used to create an effect.
DV25: Select this option when you are using DV media exclusively. For more
information, see “Effect Aperture” in the Help.
ITU 601 (default): Select this option when you are using uncompressed media or
mixed resolutions.
NTSC Has Setup
This option allows systems using NTSC-EIAJ to use the correct color mapping.
NTSC-EIAJ users should not select this option. All other users should select this
option.
Generate LTC On Playback This option allows you to output LTC timecode through the Adrenaline
hardware.For more information, see “Using LTC Timecode for Output” in the
Help.
616
Grid Settings
Grid Settings
The following topics describe the options available in the Grid Settings dialog box.
Grid Settings: Coordinates Tab
The following table describes options available in Grid Settings: Coordinates tab.
Grid Settings Options (Coordinates Tab)
Option
Suboption
Description
Scale Mode
Normal
This setting allows you to work with a grid that indicates
boundaries for a format other than the one in which you
are working. This is useful when you are creating graphics
(like titles) that must remain safe in other formats. Select
the appropriate option for the current and target formats
you need. When you do not specifically need a grid that
represents another format, use the Normal option, which is
the default.
4:3 Inside 16:9 Monitor
4:3 Outside 16:9 Monitor
1.66 Inside 4:3
1.77 Inside 4:3
1.85 Inside 4:3
Increments
Fields
Sets the number of tick marks along the grid axes as well
as the number of visible grid points. The default value is
12.
Sub Fields
Sets the number of divisions between visible grid points
for the snap-to-grid feature. Setting Sub Fields to 1 snaps
objects to visible points only. A value of 2 provides 1/2field jumps. A value of 4 (the default value) provides 1/4field jumps, and so on. Setting Sub Fields to 0 turns off the
snap-to-grid feature.
Source Scan Size
For film projects, where an optical house scans film for the
addition of visual effects.
Hor. Size
The default values are 720 x 486 pixels.
Vert. Size
617
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Grid Settings Options (Coordinates Tab) (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Hor. Offset
Moves the grid on the image. These values are intended
mainly for film projects.
Source Grid
Adjustments
Vert. Offset
Inset
Shrinks the grid proportionally.
Grid Settings: Display Tab
The following table describes options available in Grid Settings: Display tab.
Grid Settings Options (Display Tab)
Option
Suboption
Description
Type
Square
Selects a different grid for each standard film type. For video projects,
use the Square grid type. The grid for the Academy option includes a
safety margin on the left that is used for adding the optical sound track.
Standard Film
Academy
Super 35
Anamorphic
Color
Sets a color for the grid axes and the grid points.
Show Safe Title
Displays the safe title area. Create video titles within this area to ensure
that they are viewable on a regular television screen.
Show Safe Action
Displays the safe action area for video display. This box is self-adjusting
for PAL and NTSC projects.
Show 14x9 Zone
Show 1.66 Aspect
Show 1.85 Aspect
Show 1.77 Aspect
Select one or more of these options to display the grid you want.
Show Axes
Displays the grid axes.
Show Tick Marks
Shows tick marks along the axes. Use the Fields parameter to set the
number of tick marks.
618
Import Settings
Grid Settings Options (Display Tab) (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Show Thirds
Divides the screen into three sections. This is especially useful if you are
creating titles for the lower third of the screen.
Show Points
Shows the grid points. Use the Fields parameter to set the number of
grid points.
Show Position Info
Displays the position coordinates of any point in the Effect Preview, or
Record monitor. Your Avid editing application uses compass
coordinates and X, Y coordinates. For compass coordinates, the point
(0, 0) is the center of the axes. For X, Y coordinates, the point (0, 0) is
the top left corner of the monitor. X values increase to the right, and
Y values increase as you move down. For more information, see
“Displaying Position Coordinates” in the Help.
Import Settings
The following topics describe options available in Import Settings:.
•
Import Settings: Image Tab
•
Import Settings: OMFI Tab
•
Import Settings: Shot Log Tab
•
Import Settings: Audio Tab
•
Import Settings: XDCAM Tab
619
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Import Settings: Image Tab
The following table describes options available in the Import Settings: Image tab.
Import Settings: Image Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Aspect Ratio,
Pixel Aspect
601/709, nonsquare
Select this option to import images with the dimensions used by your
Avid editing application: 720 x 480 (NTSC) or 720 x 576 (PAL). Also
use this option for 720 x 540 images, or for other images that fit the 4:3
aspect ratio. You can use this option to maintain field data when you
import two-field media that follows exact NTSC or PAL dimensions.
n
HD projects use the ITU-R 709 color space instead of ITU-R 601.
Your Avid editing application converts the existing pixel dimensions, if
necessary, so that the image fills the screen.
If the aspect ratio of the original frames does not match the
4:3 aspect ratio used by your Avid editing application, the imported
frames might appear distorted.
For best full-screen resolution of files created in a square-pixel
environment, use 648 x 486 (NTSC), 648 x 480 (NTSC DV) or
768 x 576 (PAL). To create a single resolution for both NTSC and PAL,
use 720 x 540.
Maintain, nonsquare
n
This option is selected by default.
Select this option for an image that was created in a non-square-pixel
environment, but does not match exact NTSC or PAL dimensions.
Maintain, non-square preserves up to 486 (NTSC), 480 (NTSC DV), or
576 (PAL) lines, and either removes additional lines or pads with video
black if there are fewer lines.
Maintain, non-square never scales or resizes.
620
Import Settings
Import Settings: Image Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Maintain, square
Select this option for an image that was created in a square-pixel
environment, such as a graphics application. Use this option primarily
for icons, logos, and other graphics that cannot be resized and are not
intended to fill the entire screen.
Your Avid editing application fills the rest of the screen with video
black. If the image has an alpha channel, this black is keyed out in the
alpha channel.
Do not use this option if you are importing:
Maintain and
Resize, square
•
Images in the 720 x 480 (NTSC DV), 720 x 486 (NTSC) or
720 x 576 (PAL) non-square-pixel dimensions
•
A full-screen square-pixel image that has already been stretched to
non-square-pixel dimensions
Select this option for an image that was created in square-pixel terms.
Your Avid editing application fits the longest dimension to the screen
size and fills in the missing pixels in the shorter dimension with video
black, creating a border. If the image has an alpha channel, this black is
keyed out in the alpha channel.
For example, a 540 x 300 image would have its longer dimension
resized to 720, and the shorter dimension resized in proportion (to 400).
The remaining “short side” pixels are replaced with black.
For best full-screen resolution of files created in a square-pixel
environment, use 648 x 480 (NTSC) or 768 x 576 (PAL). To create a
single resolution for both NTSC and PAL, use
720 x 540.
Do not use this option if you are importing:
•
Images in the 720 x 480 (NTSC DV), 720 x 486 (NTSC) or
720 x 576 (PAL) non-square-pixel dimensions
•
A full-screen square-pixel image that has already been stretched to
non-square-pixel dimensions
621
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Import Settings: Image Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
File Field
Order
Description
This section allows you to select the field ordering (sometimes referred
to as field dominance) of the media you are importing. For 23.976p or
25p projects, these options do not appear; all fields are automatically
exported as progressive (still) frames.
When the field ordering (or spatial field position) of the imported media
matches the field ordering of the project format, no special processing is
required. For more information, see “Field Ordering in Graphic Imports
and Exports” on page 678.
This setting does not apply to OMFI imports when the import resolution
matches the OMFI file.
Non-interlaced
This option allows you to import still images to all formats without
concern for the temporal ordering of the fields.
n
This is the default value.
Odd (Upper Field Select this option for the odd field to occur temporally first during
First)
import. The first line in the image belongs to the odd field.
Color Levels
Alpha
622
Even (Lower
Field First)
Select this option for the even field to occur temporally first during
import. The first line in the image belongs to the even field.
RGB
Select this option if the imported graphics file uses RGB graphics levels.
Most computer-generated graphics use RGB graphics levels. The RGB
color values are remapped to ITU-R 601 (formerly CCIR 601) or
ITU-R 709 video color values appropriate for the Avid system.
RGB, dithered
Select this option if the imported graphics file uses complex color
effects, such as a gradation, and you are importing at a high resolution
(2:1). Do not use this option to reimport an image that has already been
imported with dithering.
601/709
Select this option if the imported graphics file uses video levels based
on the ITU-R 601 (formerly CCIR 601) or ITU-R 709 (HD) standard.
These graphics include Avid color bars or images that include
superblack (zero black) for keying purposes.
Use Existing
Select this option to import the image, using the existing alpha channel
information.
Invert Existing
Select this option to reverse the black and white elements of the alpha
channel if they differ from the matte key requirements of your Avid
editing application: a white background, a black foreground, and a gray
transparency blend between the two.
Import Settings
Import Settings: Image Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Ignore
Select this option to import an image that contains alpha channel
transparency information as one opaque graphic. The imported graphic
appears as a single master clip in the bin.
n
Single Frame
Import
Duration n
seconds
If an image contains an embedded alpha channel but your Avid
editing application does not support alpha channel import for the
file type, select this option to import the image successfully. For
information on alpha channel support, see “Import Specifications
for Supported Graphics File Formats” on page 664.
Select this option to specify the duration of the single frame created
from the import. The default is 10 seconds. This option does not apply
to importing sequential image files because each file represents one
frame of the clip; therefore, the total number of files determines the total
duration.
Importing an image with alpha channel creates a matte key effect as a
single frame, with no associated media file.
Importing as a single frame takes less time and requires less storage
than importing as a media file. However, a single frame has limited
real-time playback capabilities, particularly at high resolutions. This
occurs because your Avid editing application loads the frame into
memory and handles it in real time, rather than playing it back from a
disk.
Autodetect
Sequential Files
Select this option if you are importing sequential files and you want
your Avid editing application to recognize that a sequence of connected
files is present and to automatically import the whole sequence.
When this option is deselected, your Avid editing application does not
automatically import a whole sequence of files that have sequential
extensions. You can then select any single file for import.
You can import sequential files for any of the supported still-image
formats. For information on preparing a sequence of image files, see
“Animation Files” on page 670.
623
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Import Settings: OMFI Tab
The following table describes options available in the Import Settings: OMFI tab.
Import Setting: OMFI Tab
Option
Description
Resolution
Use the source file’s resolution.
Select this option to maintain the source file’s resolution. Your Avid editing
application disregards the resolution setting in the Select Files to Import
dialog box as well as the resolution set in the Import tab of the Media
Creation dialog box.
Use the current import resolution.
Select this option to use the current import resolution setting. Your Avid
editing application disregards the source file resolution.
Ask me to set the resolution for
each file that is different from the
current import resolution setting.
Select this option to have your Avid editing application display a query
about resolution selection for each imported file when the resolution of the
source file is different from the current import resolution setting.
Import Settings: Shot Log Tab
The following table describes options available in the Import Settings: Shot Log tab.
Import Setting: Shot Log Tab
Option
Description
Events
Maintain events as logged. Select this option to maintain all events as originally logged.
Combine events based on
scene and automatically
create subclips.
Select this option to combine all the events for a scene into a single master clip and
then link the master clip to subclips that represent the original events for that scene.
To use this option, you must have scene numbers logged in a scene column in the
bin.
Combine events based on
camera roll and
automatically create
subclips.
Select this option to combine all the events from a camera roll into a single master
clip and then link the master clip to subclips that represent the original events for
that camera roll. To use this option, you must have camera roll numbers logged in a
camera roll column in the bin for a film project.
624
Import Settings
Import Setting: Shot Log Tab (Continued)
Option
Description
Merge events with known
sources and automatically
create subclips.
Select this option to create subclips for events that are merged or relinked to their
source clips upon import. Use this option if you have already entered master clips
in a bin for each camera roll or master scene, and have subsequently logged all the
events related to those clips for import.
n
Merge events with known
master clips.
You must select the clips that you want to merge before selecting this option.
Select this option to merge information in the shot log onto selected master clips
based on the matching tape name. Use this option if you have already logged (or
captured) master clips in a bin for each take.
n
You must select the clips that you want to merge before selecting this option.
Import Settings: Audio Tab
The following table describes options available in the Import Settings: Audio tab.
Import Settings: Audio Tab
Option
Suboption
Sample Rate:
Convert source
Select this option to convert incoming media to the sample rate of the
sample rate to
current project (deselected by default).
project sample rate
Deselect this option to import audio media at the source sample rate. If
on import
your Avid editing application does not support the source sample rate,
your application autoconverts it to the current project sample rate.
Convert source
sample rates with
audio pull-up or
pull-down to
project sample rate
on import
Description
Select this option to convert incoming media marked with pull-up or
pull-down sample rates to the sample rate of the current project
(deselected by default).
Deselect this option to import audio media at the source sample pull-up
or pull-down rate, but with the file marked at a rate your Avid editing
application supports.
Sample Bit Depth: Convert source
Select this option to covert the incoming media to the bit depth of the
sample bit depth to current project (deselected by default).
project sample bit
Deselect this option to import audio media at the source sample bit
depth on import.
depth. If your Avid editing application does not support the source
sample bit depth, your application autoconverts it to the current project
sample bit depth.
625
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Import Settings: XDCAM Tab
The following table describes options available in the Import Settings: XDCAM tab.
Import Settings: XDCAM Tab
Option
Description
Force import of both Proxy &
High-resolution
Select this option to import both proxy and high-resolution versions of the
selected file or files. If this option is not selected, only the selected files (proxy
or high-resolution) are imported. Proxy files are imported first.
Only import clips with Good
Shot Flag
Select this option to restrict XDCAM imports to only those clips described with
the OK or KP (keep) flag. You can flag clips with these and other descriptive
values in the Sony proxy browser software.
Batch import High-resolution
Video
Select this option if you want to use the Batch Import function to import highresolution media from the XDCAM device and automatically conform it with
the low-resolution proxy media.
•
Handle Length: nn Frames Type the number of frames you want to use as handles for batch imported clips.
Handles refer to material outside the IN and OUT points and are used for
dissolves and trims with the new, shorter master clips. The default is 30.
Automatically import Proxies
when disk is inserted
Select this option if you want to import all proxy media stored on the XDCAM
disc when the disc is inserted in the XDCAM device. Deselect this option if you
want to import only selected media files.
Import Essence Marks as
Locators
Select this option to import XDCAM Essence Marks as locators that can be
displayed in the Source/Record monitor or in the Locators Window.
Convert Proxy Audio to
Project Rate during Import
Select this option if you want to convert the sample rate for proxy media
(8 kHz) to the project rate when you import the media. The option is selected by
default.
Import Audio Channels
Select this option to set the maximum number of audio channels to import: 2, 4,
6, or 8. For example, if a file has 8 channels of audio, you can select 8 to import
all 8 channels or you can select 2 and only the first 2 channels of audio will be
imported.
626
Interface Settings
Interface Settings
The following topics describe options available in Interface Settings.
Interface Settings: General Tab
The following table describes options available in the Interface Settings: General tab.
Interface Settings: General Tab
Option
Description
Show Labels in Tool Palette
When you select this option, your Avid editing application displays text
labels with the icons on the Tool palette. This is the default option.
Show ToolTips
When you select this option, your Avid editing application displays
labels for buttons and icons when you position the mouse pointer over
them. This is the default option.
You can also turn ToolTips on and off from the Help menu.
Delay n seconds before showing
If you select Show ToolTips, you can delay the label display by entering
a value in this text box. A delay allows you to move the mouse pointer
across the interface without displaying the labels on items between the
starting point and the destination of the mouse pointer.
Windows Standard Alt Key Behavior
This option switches between standard Windows Alt key behavior and
Avid system Alt key behavior. When you select this option, pressing and
holding the Alt key together with another key works as a keyboard
shortcut for certain Windows actions (for example, opening menus).
When you deselect this option, pressing and releasing the Alt key and
then pressing another key works as the Windows keyboard shortcut,
while pressing and holding the Alt key together with another key works
as a keyboard shortcut for certain Avid functions. This is the default
option.
For more information on Windows shortcuts, see the Windows
documentation.
For more information on Avid shortcuts, select Help > Shortcuts.
627
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Interface Settings: General Tab (Continued)
Option
Description
Automatic Num Lock Activation
When you select this option, your Avid editing application automatically
sets the numeric keypad in numeric mode the next time you start the
application. If you deselect this option, the Num Lock key on the
keyboard controls the mode of the numeric keypad.
With either selection, you can use the Num Lock key to change the
mode of the numeric keypad.
Automatically Launch Last Project at
Startup
Opens your last project when the application starts.
Interface Settings: Appearance Tab
The following table describes options available in the Interface Settings: Appearance tab.
Interface Settings: Appearance Tab
Option
Suboption
Description
Color
Background
Controls the color of the given interface component. See
“Changing Interface Component Colors” on page 44.
Button
Button Contents
Button Highlight
Button Spotlight
Text
Timeline Background
Timeline V Tracks
Timeline A Tracks
Timeline TC Tracks
Project Background
Bin Default
Background
Shading Style
Convex
Dim Radial
Convex Radial
Bright Radial
628
Controls the shading of buttons and toolbars. See
“Changing Button and Toolbar Styles” on page 45.
Interplay Folder Settings
Interface Settings: Appearance Tab (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Shading Depth
5% – 50%, in 5%
increments
Controls the three-dimensional “rounding” of buttons and
toolbars. See “Changing Button and Toolbar Styles” on
page 45.
Monitor Button Separation Maximum
Moderate
Controls the spacing of the Monitor buttons. See
“Changing Button and Toolbar Styles” on page 45.
None
Timeline Button
Separation
Maximum
Moderate
Controls the spacing of the Timeline buttons. See
“Changing Button and Toolbar Styles” on page 45.
None
Button Style
Oval
Octagonal
Controls the shape of the buttons. See “Changing Button
and Toolbar Styles” on page 45.
Rounded
Square
Swoosh
Antique
Interplay Folder Settings
You need to configure your Avid editing application before you can interact with the asset
manager. The Interplay Folder dialog box allows you to set the location on the asset manager
used for checking in Avid assets. For more information, see the Avid Interplay
Administration Guide.
629
Chapter 18 Using Settings
The following table describes options available in Interplay Folder Settings.
Interplay Folder Settings
Option
Description
Interplay Root Folder
Lists the default directory for your workgroup project, where the asset
manager checks in media assets.
Set
Allows you to navigate to a directory on the Interplay Server and set a new
default Interplay Root Folder.
Append project to directory path
Automatically adds the name of your project to the directory path specified
in the Interplay Root Folder text box.
Interplay Server Settings
You need to configure your Avid editing application before you can interact with the asset
manager. For more information, see the Avid Interplay Administration Guide.
The following table describes options available in Interplay Server Settings.
Interplay Server Settings
Option
Description
Interplay Server name
Allows you to enter the computer name of your Interplay Server.
Interplay User Settings
You need to configure your Avid editing application before you can interact with the asset
manager. The Interplay User dialog box defines user and login preferences for using the
asset manager. For more information, see the Avid Interplay Administration Guide.
630
Keyboard Settings
The following table describes options available in Interplay User Settings.
Interplay User Settings
Option
Description
User Name
Allows you to enter a user name. This name must be a known workgroup user.
Automatic Login at Project
Selection
Logs you in to the asset manager automatically every time you open a project.
Login/Logout
Connects to or disconnects from asset manager.
Keyboard Settings
The following illustration displays the default keyboard settings.
Step buttons
Workspace buttons
Delete key
Play
button
Home key
End key
Stop/Play button
Play buttons
Arrow keys
To view the name of a button in the Keyboard settings window, rest the pointer on the button.
To get help for the button, right-click and select What’s This?
For information on mapping buttons, see “Mapping User-Selectable Buttons” on page 67.
When you open the Keyboard palette from the Settings list and select Map Foreign
Keyboard, you can map user-selectable buttons to the keyboard. If the Windows operating
system is set to French or German regional settings, and you click the center of the Enter key
631
Chapter 18 Using Settings
in the Keyboard palette, a message box opens that says foreign keyboard mapping mode has
been turned off. To return to foreign keyboard mapping mode, Select Standard, and then
select Map Foreign Keyboard again.
Marquee Title Settings
The following table describes options available in the Marquee Title Settings. For more
information on Marquee, see the Avid Marquee Title Tool User’s Guide or the Marquee
Help.
Marquee Title Settings
Option
Suboption Description
Create New Title using
Marquee
Your Avid editing application always opens Marquee when you select
Clip > New Title or Tools > Title Tool.
Title Tool
Your Avid editing application always opens the Title Tool when you
select Clip > New Title or Tools > Title Tool.
Ask me
Your Avid editing application displays the New Title dialog box when
you select Clip > New Title or Tools > Title Tool. You can then select
either Marquee or the Title Tool. This is the default setting.
Yes
Your Avid editing application always promotes a Title Tool title to a
Marquee title when you open the title for editing from a bin or from
within a sequence. For more information, see “Promoting Title Tool
Titles to Marquee” in the Marquee Help.
No
Your Avid editing application never promotes a Title Tool title to a
Marquee title when you open the title for editing from a bin or from
within a sequence.
Ask me
Your Avid editing application displays the Edit Title dialog box when
you open a title for editing from a bin or from within a sequence. You
can then choose whether to promote the title to Marquee. This is the
default setting.
Promote Title Tool titles
to Marquee
Backup Title on Promote
632
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application creates a
backup Title Tool version of any title that it promotes to Marquee. The
backup copy is a fast-saved (unrendered) title. Your Avid editing
application adds [TT] to the name of the backup copy to differentiate it
from the newly created Marquee version.
Media Creation Settings
Media Creation Settings
The following topics describe adjusting the Media Creation settings.
For more information about options in the Media Creation Settings dialog box, see
“Selecting Video Resolutions and Media Drives” in the Help.
Media Creation Settings: Drive Filtering & Indexing Tab
The following table describes options available in the Media Creation Settings: Drive
Filtering & Indexing tab.
Media Creation Settings: Drive Filtering & Indexing Tab
Option
Description
Filter Network Drives Based on
Resolution
Removes as a storage choice network drives that cannot support the selected
resolution or cannot play back the selected resolution.
Filter Out System Drive
Removes as a storage choice the drive on which the operating system resides.
Filter Out Launch Drive
Removes as a storage choice the drive on which your Avid editing application
resides.
Auto-index local drives as they
come online (using filtering
rules)
Enables automatic indexing of local drives by the Media Indexer, a
background service that keeps track of the media files in storage locations that
you identify. Auto-indexing uses filtering selections on the left side of the tab,
so that if you have selected “Filter Out System Drive,” any media on that drive
will not be indexed. For more information about configuring the Media
Indexer, see the Avid Interplay Software Installation Guide.
Manual Storage Scan
Enables immediate indexing of local drives by the Media Indexer. If the Autoindex option is turned off, you can click this button to index local drives and
folders. You can then use the Interplay Service Configuration tool to remove
specific drives or folders, if desired.
On indexing failure
Determines how indexing failure messages are reported. For information on
using the Console, see “Using the Console Window” on page 70.
633
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Media Creation Settings: Capture, Titles, Import, and
Mixdown & Transcode Tabs
The following table describes the options in the Capture tab, Titles tab, Import tab, and
Mixdown & Transcode tab, and Media Type tab of the Media Creation dialog box.
Media Creation Settings: Capture, Titles, Import, and Mixdown & Transcode Tabs
Option
Description
Video Resolution
Select a resolution.
Apply to All
This sets your chosen resolution for all the Media Creation dialog box tabs. It also
sets it for any place in the application where you select a resolution.
Video/Audio Drive
Select a drive or drives. In the Titles tab, only a Video Drive option is available.
Apply to All
This sets your chosen video and audio drives for all the Media Creation dialog box
tabs. It also sets them for any place in the application where you select drives.
Media Creation Settings: Motion Effects Tab
The following table describes the options in the Motion Effects tab of the Media Creation
dialog box.
Media Creation Settings: Motion Effects Tab
Option
Description
Video Drive
Select a drive or drives
Apply to All
This sets your chosen video drives for all the Media Creation dialog box tabs. It also
sets them for any place in the application where you select drives.
634
Media Creation Settings
Media Creation Settings: Render Tab
The following table describes options available in the Media Creation Settings: Render tab.
Media Creation Settings: Render Tab
Option
Suboption
Video Resolution
Description
Select a resolution for the rendered effects.
n
The application always renders an effect at the highest
resolution used in the effect source clips.
Apply to All
This sets your chosen resolution for all the Media Creation dialog
box tabs. It also sets it for any place in the application where you
select a resolution.
Video/Audio Drive
Select a drive or drives.
Apply to All
This sets your chosen video and audio drives for all the Media
Creation dialog box tabs. It also sets them for any place in the
application where you select drives.
Same as Source
Select this option if you want the application to render the effect
using the resolution of the clip or clips used to create the effect. If
an effect is created from clips that use different resolutions, the
application uses the highest quality resolution.
Effects Processing
8-bit
16-bit
Automatic
Select this option when rendering time is more important than
image quality. Also use this option if you are mainly working with
effects that don’t support 16-bit precision.
Select this option for the best overall image quality. Use this
option if you use 10-bit resolutions, use many levels of nested
effects, or want the best color fidelity for rendered effects.
Select this option if you want the media source to determine the
effects resolution. This is the default.
635
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Media Creation Settings: Media Type Tab
The following table describes the options in the Media Type tab of the Media Creation
dialog box.
Media Creation Settings: Media Type Tab
Option
Description
Video File Format
Select a file format: Open Media Format (OMF) or Material Exchange Format
(MXF). This setting applies to all video format menus (in the Capture tool, the
Consolidate/Transcode dialog box, and other places in your Avid editing application).
For more information, see “File Format Specifications” on page 661.
n
File Format
(Media Type tab only)
If your project uses an HD resolution, you cannot select OMF as a file format.
MXF is selected by default.
Select a file format: Open Media Format (OMF) or Material Exchange Format
(MXF). This setting applies to all video format menus (in the Capture tool, the
Consolidate/Transcode dialog box, and other places in your Avid editing application).
For more information, see “File Format Specifications” on page 661.
n
If your project uses an HD resolution, you cannot select OMF as a file format.
MXF is selected by default.
Media Services Settings
The Media Services Settings dialog box allows you to connect to a Media Services Broker.
The services provided by Avid Interplay Media Services Broker are used in an Avid
Interplay environment where dedicated computers automate time-consuming operations. For
more information, see the Avid Interplay Media Services Setup and User’s Guide.
636
Mouse Settings
The following table describes options available in Media Services Settings.
Media Services Settings
Option
Description
Media Services Broker is
available
Select to make sure you are connected to the Media Services Broker. You can
deselect this option to disconnect without losing your setting information.
Media Services Broker
Type the Broker name as it appears in the Media Services Broker application
window. For example:
http:\\myBrokerPC:8080
You may need to check with your Media Services Broker administrator for this
information.
Username
Type your Media Services Broker username.
Password
Type your Media Services Broker account password.
Shared Storage
Type the directory where you intend to save the QuickTime reference movie
created by the service. You can click the Browse button to locate the directory.
Email address
(Option) If you select “Notify me of job completion by email.” Type your e-mail
address.
n
You can also check the Avid Interplay Media Services Broker Jobs window
to see the status of your job.
Mouse Settings
The following table describes options available in Mouse Settings.
Mouse Settings
Option
Suboption
Description
Scroll Wheel Behavior
Vertical Scroll Speed
menu
Selects the speed of scrolling with the mouse wheel within
your Avid editing application — Normal, Moderate, or Fast.
For more information, see “Mouse Scroll Wheel Support” in
the Help.
Mouse Button
Assignments
Assigns functions to three additional mouse buttons.
637
Chapter 18 Using Settings
NRCS Settings
The following topics describe adjusting the NRCS settings:
•
NRCS Settings: NRCS Tab (iNEWS and ENPS)
•
NRCS Settings: iNEWS Tab (iNEWS only)
•
NRCS Settings: ENPS Tab (ENPS only)
•
NRCS Settings: Post to Web Tab (iNEWS and ENPS)
For more information about options in the NRCS Settings dialog box, see “Configuring the
NRCS Tool” in the Help.
NRCS Settings: NRCS Tab
The following table describes the options in the NRCS tab.
NRCS Options (NRCS Tab)
Option
Suboption
Description
Server
—
Type the name of the server
Server menu
iNEWS
Selects the type of NRCS server you want to connect. The second tab
in the NRCS settings changes to match the selection.
ENPS
Default User Name
(iNEWS only)
—
Type a default iNEWS user name.
Logout when NRCS Tool —
is closed
Select this option if you want to terminate the connection to the server
every time you close the NRCS tool.
Automatic update from
server
(iNEWS only)
Select this option if you want the information in the NRCS tool to be
updated periodically. You can set the time interval used for updates by
entering a time in the Update interval text box. (The default is 1
minute.)
638
NRCS Settings
NRCS Settings: iNEWS Tab
The following table describes the options in the iNEWS tab.
NRCS Options (iNEWS Tab)
Option
Suboption
Show Message-of-the-Day
Description
Select this option if you want to view the Message-of-theDay (MOTD). If selected, choose to see the message at on
every connection or the just the first connection of the day.
Every Connection
If the MOTD is selected, select this option if you want to
view the message on every connection to the iNEWS
server.
First Connection
If the MOTD is selected, select this option if you want to
view the message on the first connection to the iNEWS
server.
Message-of-the-Day
Directory
If the MOTD is located in a directory on the serve different
from the default (SYSTEM.MESSAGE), type the name of
the appropriate directory in the Message-of-the-Day
Directory text box
Mail Directory
Type the name of the folder in the Mail Directory text box
where you want your mail saved.
Story Fields
Duration
Name
TapeID
Default Value
When you use the Build Sequence button a to create a
sequence from a story, the new sequence uses the specified
Duration, Name, and TapeID from the iNEWS story fields
setting.
Type in the default time in the Default Value text box you
want for new sequences.
If the heading in the Story Form is empty or is zero, you
can set a default value for the duration of the new
sequence.
639
Chapter 18 Using Settings
NRCS Settings: ENPS Tab
The following table describes the options in the ENPS tab.
NRCS Options (ENPS Tab)
Option
Suboption
MOS Identification
Description
Select how your Media Object Server (MOS)
identification is determined.
MOS ID (this system)
•
Use Computer Name
•
Other
Select this option if you want your Avid
editing system to be identified in the ENPS
by the computer name.
Select Other, and type a specific MOS ID in
the Other text box if you want your Avid
editing system to be identified in the ENPS
by a specific name.
NCS ID (server)
Type the Network Computer System
identification (NCS ID) of the server you are
using in the NCS ID text box.
Show running order start
date/time
Select this option if you want running order
names to be listed, including the Editorial
Start date and time.
Show story page number
Select this option if you want story names to
be listed, including the page number.
Sequence Creation
Default Duration
Select the default duration for sequences
created with the Build Sequence button by
entering a new value in the Default Duration
text box
MOS Objects
Show MOS ID
Select this option if you want the MOS
identification to display below MOS object
cues in the Production panel.
List Format
640
PortServer Settings
NRCS Settings: Post to Web Tab
The following table describes the options in the Post to Web tab.
NRCS Settings (Post to Web Options)
Option
Description
Include Closed Caption (green) text
Converts all text marked as Closed Caption to plain text.
Add paragraph tags (<p>) at the start of Converts line breaks into paragraph breaks, so each line is displayed
new lines
as a separate paragraph on the Web page.
n
Convert story to lowercase
Web formatting ignores line breaks that are the result of the text
wrapping within the Story text box. It converts only those line
breaks created when the user enters a new line.
Provides the following options:
•
Always: Converts all stories to lowercase characters, even if the
source script contains both uppercase and lowercase text.
•
Only if story is all UPPERCASE: Converts only those stories
with no lowercase characters.
PortServer Settings
The following table describes options available in PortServer Settings.
PortServer Settings
Option
Description
Auto-connect to LANshare at Launch LANshare workspaces are recognized when you start your Avid editing
application.
Connect/Disconnect
Starts or terminates the connection.
641
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Remote Play and Capture Settings
Remote Play and Capture allows you to use your Avid editing application like a videotape
recorder (VTR) or edit controller, giving you access to some of the features of an external
editing suite through your Avid editing application interface.
The following table describes options available in Remote Play and Capture Settings.
Remote Play and Capture Settings
Option
Description
Mode
Use Remote Capture when you want to perform a quick capture. This mode is also
known as crash record. It allows your Avid editing application to capture the
media being sent to it immediately without setting up parameters like IN and OUT
points. Remote Capture supports record and stop with the controller.
Use Remote Play when you want to control sequences via an edit controller.
Remote Play supports play, cue, and stop.
Use Remote Punch-In when you want to perform a quick audio punch-in. Remote
Punch-In allows your Avid editing application to record the audio being sent to it
immediately without setting up all parameters, such as OUT points. Remote
Punch-In supports play, cue, record, and stop with an external controller.
Device Code
Select the device code that identifies the VTR the system will emulate. The edit
controller adjusts to this choice. The default value is a Sony PVW-2800, which
performs all the common play and capture functions.
You do not need to change the device code value unless your edit controller does
not recognize the VTR or you want to emulate a specific VTR.
Runup (frames)
This option is only available with Remote Play. Specify the time (measured in
frames) it takes the deck to start playing from a cued position. The default value is
1 frame.
When the runup times of two video devices are similar, it is easier for the edit
controller to synchronize the devices during preroll. If your Avid VTR does not
sync up as often as you want, try adjusting this value so the two devices attain full
speed at nearly the same time.
642
Render Settings
Remote Play and Capture Settings (Continued)
Option
Description
Inhibit preloading when
cueing by single frame.
This option is only available with Remote Play and Remote Punch-In. Avid
recommends that you do not inhibit preloading under normal circumstances.
Preloading occurs by default in your Avid editing application. It improves
playback performance by preparing the digital media for playback each time you
cue a new frame.
Selecting this option causes your Avid editing application to match the behavior of
a tape deck when you step through footage frame by frame. Avid recommends this
option only for projects that require quick cueing of one frame after another; for
example, when you are using your Avid editing application to present a sequence
of still images as in a slide presentation.
Render Settings
The following table describes options available in Render Settings.
Render Settings
Option
Suboption
Render Completion
Sound
Description
Sets a sound for your Avid editing application to activate
once the rendering process is complete. This is useful
when you are rendering multiple effects.
None
Disables the rendering completion sound. This is the
default.
System Beep
Sets the rendering completion sound to match the sound
set for your operating system.
Render Sound
Sets the rendering completion sound to a customized
sound.
Motion Effects Render
Using
Determines the processing method when existing motion
effects are rendered or rerendered.
Original Preference
Causes effects to be rendered as whatever type they were
when originally created.
643
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Render Settings (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Duplicated Field
Displays a single field in the effect. For two-field media,
this reduces the information stored by half because it drops
one field of the image, resulting in a lower quality image.
For single-field media, this is usually the best choice
because of its speed (the other options do not improve
effect quality for single-field media).
With JFIF resolutions, selecting this option causes the
effect to render in the shortest amount of time. With DV
and MPEG resolutions, the effect renders approximately as
quickly as it would if you selected Both Fields as the
rendering option.
You can use this option to remove unwanted field motion
in interlaced material brought into a progressive project.
Both Fields
Displays both fields in the effect. For example, the first two
frames of a half-speed (50%) slow-motion effect repeat the
original Frame 1 (both fields) twice. This option is good
for shots without inter-field motion, NTSC or PAL film-totape transfers, and still shots. With footage that includes
inter-field motion, this method might result in minor
shifting or bumping of the image because it disturbs the
original order of fields: a Field 1 will appear both before
and after the corresponding Field 2.
The effect renders relatively quickly. For best results, you
should use evenly divisible frame rates with this option.
Interpolated Field
Creates a second field for the effect by combining scan line
pairs from the first field in the original media. This option
calculates the motion effect at the field level rather than the
frame level. Because your Avid editing application
considers all fields and does not disturb the original order
of fields, the smoothest effect results.
Effects created using this option take the longest amount of
time to render.
644
Render Settings
Render Settings (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
VTR-Style
Creates a second field for the effect by shifting selected
video fields of the original media by a full scan line. This
technique is similar to that used by high-quality
professional video decks when playing footage at less than
normal speed. This option also creates the motion effect at
the field level rather than the frame level; however, because
pixels are not filtered, the final image is sharper than that
created by the Interpolated Field option. The image might
display some slight jitter at certain speeds.
The time needed to render effects created with this option
is longer than the time for effects created using either
Duplicated Field or Both Fields but similar to the time
needed for Interpolated Field.
Timewarps Render
Using
Original Preference
Duplicated Field
Both Fields
Interpolated Field
Select an option to determine the processing method when
Timewarp effects are rendered or rerendered.
These rendering options are the same as those for Motion
Effects Render Using. See the preceding descriptions.
VTR-Style
Blended Interpolated
Your Avid editing application blends, or averages, pixels
from the original frames or fields to create intermediate
frames or fields. For example, at 25% speed, your Avid
editing application creates three blended images between
outgoing Image A and incoming Image B. The first
blended image weights the pixels from Image A at 75%
and Image B at 25%. The second blended image weights
the pixels from Image A at 50% and Image B at 50%. The
third blended image weights the pixels from Image A at
25% and Image B at 75%. Objects in motion from Image A
to Image B appear to fade out of Image A and fade in to
Image B. Timewarp effects created using Blended
Interpolated or Blended VTR render less quickly than
Interpolated Field or VTR-Style.
645
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Render Settings (Continued)
Option
Suboption
Description
Blended VTR
Your Avid editing application first creates a second field
for the effect by shifting selected video fields of the
original media by a full scan line. Then it blends, or
averages, pixels from the original frames or fields to create
intermediate frames or fields. For example, at 25% speed,
your Avid editing application creates three blended images
between outgoing Image A and incoming Image B. The
first blended image weights the pixels from Image A at
75% and Image B at 25%. The second blended image
weights the pixels from Image A at 50% and Image B at
50%. The third blended image weights the pixels from
Image A at 25% and Image B at 75%. Objects in motion
from Image A to Image B appear to fade out of Image A
and fade in to Image B. Timewarp effects created using
Blended Interpolated or Blended VTR render less quickly
than Interpolated Field or VTR-Style.
Effects Quality Render
Using
646
Sets a global override for effects that have HQ (Highest
Quality) software implementations. You select the HQ
implementation or the standard implementation for
individual effects by clicking the HQ button in the Effect
Editor.
Quality Set in Each
Effect
Causes effects to render at the quality determined by the
HQ setting in the individual effects. This is the default.
Standard Quality
Causes all effects to render with the standard
implementation.
Highest Quality
Effects render with the HQ implementation, if one exists
for a given effect. If an HQ implementation does not exist
for a given effect, the effect renders with the standard
implementation.
Safe Colors Settings
Safe Colors Settings
The following table describes options available in Safe Colors Settings.
Safe Colors Settings
Option
Description
Composite
Sets safe color values for the composite video signal.
Luminance
Sets safe color values based on brightness.
RGB Gamut
Sets safe color values based on color range.
Units buttons
Define the units of measurement for the three types of safe color values.
The Composite Units menu allows you to select either IRE or mVolts (millivolts).
The Luminance and RGB Gamut menus allow you to select from the following
options:
8 Bit — Measures the adjustment on a scale from 0 to 255.
n
The RGB value for a color in the Color Correction tool will not be identical to
the RGB value for the same color in a graphics application such as Adobe
Photoshop. For example, the 8-bit RGB values for reference black and
reference white are 16 and 235 respectively.
% — Measures the adjustment on a percentage scale from 0 to 100.
IRE — Measures the adjustment in IRE units.
mVolts — Measures the adjustment in millivolts.
Actions buttons
Define how your Avid editing application implements the safe color settings. The top
menu controls both the Composite and the Luminance limit types; the bottom menu
controls the RGB Gamut limit type. Each Actions menu allows you to select from the
following options:
Ignore — The system does not limit based on these settings. This is the default
setting.
Warn — The system provides warnings when these limits are exceeded. For more
information on safe color warnings, see ”Understanding Safe Color Warnings” in the
Help.
647
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Script Settings
The following table describes options available in Script Settings.
Script Settings
Option
Description
Font
This option selects the font for imported scripts.
Size
This option selects the font size. The default is 12 points.
Left Margin (pixels)
This option specifies the left margin size. The default is 40 pixels.
Take Coloring
This option specifies the color that your Avid editing application will apply to
takes.
Show Frames
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application shows frames in take
slates.
Show All Takes
When this option is selected, your Avid editing application shows all takes in each
slate. If you deselect this option, your Avid editing application displays only one
take per slate.
Interpolate Position
When this option is selected, you can click in a take line within a script, and the
image in the Source pop-up monitor updates to the approximate position in the take
where you have clicked. If you deselect this option, the Source pop-up monitor does
not respond when you click in a take line.
Hold Slates Onscreen
Set this option to keep the slates on the screen when you scroll through a script in
the Script window. Each slate remains on the screen as long as the take lines to
which it is linked remain on the screen.
648
Sound Card Configuration Settings
Sound Card Configuration Settings
The following table describes the options available in the Sound Card Configuration Settings
dialog box. This settings option is only available in software-only configurations.
Sound Card Configuration Settings
Options
Suboption
Record/Input list
Playback/Output list
Description
Lists the input sources available with the audio
hardware installed on your system.
Audio output sources
<No Match>
Maps input sources to the output sources available
with the audio hardware installed on your system.
The options available on your system determine
which sources are listed as sub-options.
n
Override Source menu
Audio output sources
Select the <No Match> option if you do not
want an input source mapped to an output
source.
Allows you to override settings made by your Avid
editing application and to accept the default settings
of the Windows Master Volume control. The options
available on your system determine which sources
are listed as sub-options.
Use Windows Mixer
Select this option to deselect all options in the dialog
box and allow the Windows mixer to map input
sources to output sources.
Audio device name
Lists the sound card installed on your system.
649
Chapter 18 Using Settings
Timeline Settings
The following topics describe options available in Timeline Settings.
Timeline Settings: Display Tab
The following table describes options available in Timeline Set